Safety Rules and Regulations Military Activities PDF

UD 2-1E
The Norwegian Armed Forces

Safety Rules and Regulation for
Land based military activities
Valid thru 2010/11

Rev 04
UD 2-1 Armed Forces Safety Rules and Regulations.
ABOUT UD 2-1
Metadata
SHORT TITLE: UD 2-1 Chap-0

SECURITY GRADE: UNCLASSIFIED
VALIDITY: 2010-01-01
LEGAL AUTHORITY: LETTER FROM THE CHIEF of DEFENCE - DELE-
GATION OF AUTHORITY.
RESPONSIBLE PROFE- INSPECTOR GENERAL OF THE ARMY
SIONAL AUTHORITY:
VALID FOR: ROYAL NORWEGIAN ARMED FORCES
PREVIOUS VERSION: 2010/2011 3.TXDUWHU 2010
BACKGROUND
UD 2-1 revision 2010 - 2011 is produced i accordance with the armed forces
standard for electronical publications - FS 7610-1900. Both the electonic version and
the paper edition is produced from a single information source, based on the
eXstencible Markup Language standard, XML
The web edition
The web edition of UD 2-1 can be found on the Armed forces database for "Rules,
Regulations and directives" (FOBID).
This database will hold at all times the current edition of the publication as well as
previous editions
The paper edition
The paper edition can ordered from FLO Base sterdalen, Grafisk (LMS), Rena
Military camp. The adresse is listed in the next section.
The CD edition can ordered, at the cost of the ordering unit, from:
FLO Base sterdalen, Grafisk (LMS), Rena leir
PB 24
2451 RENA
Contributers in production
Photos on cover: Defence Media Centre (FMS) edited by M&K DOK AS
Production: LWC and M&K DOK AS.
Illustration and photos: FMS/M&K DOK AS
Printing and binding of the paper edition: AIT Otta
Rev-04 1
1 av 1
Vr dato Vr referanse
2007-10-08 2007/024301-006/FORSVARET/430
Tidligere dato Tidligere referanse
Til Kopi til

Etterretningstjenesten
Forsvarets Logistikkorganisasjon
Fellesoperativt hovedkvarter
Forsvarsstaben
FST/ FS
FST/ HST
FST/ HVST
FST/ LST
FST/ PS
FST/ SST
Delegasjon av myndighet - Ny UD 2-1, Forsvarets sikkerhetsreglement

for landmilitr virksomhet
1 Bakgrunn
For minimere risikoen for skader og tap av liv har Forsvaret rammer som regulerer trening,
velser og operasjoner. Et nytt overordnet rammeverk Forsvarets sikkerhetsregler (safety)
er under utarbeidelse og nvrende UD 2-1 Sikkerhetsbestemmelser for Hren vil bli satt ut av
kraft nr nytt regelverk for landmilitr virksomhet i Forsvaret gjres gjeldende.
2 Delegasjon
Generalinspektren for Hren (GIH) delegeres myndighet til utarbeidelse og utgivelse av ny
UD 2-1 Forsvarets sikkerhetsreglement for landmilitr virksomhet med gyldighet fra den dato
GIH bestemmer.
3 Fring
Sikkerhetsreglementet skal harmoniseres med sivilt regelverk der dette er aktuelt.
Sverre Diesen
General
Forsvarssjef
Postmottak Glacisgata 1 forsvaret@mil.no

2617 LILLEHAMMER 0150 OSLO Militr telefon/telefaks (FDN) Internett Vedlegg
www.mil.no
2 Rev-04
Chapters
ToC
Table of Content
From pt Chap-0
Chapter 0: INTRODUCTION AND DEFINITIONS 0
From pt Chap-1
Chapter 1: COMMON SAFETY RULES AND REGULATIONS 1
Chapter 2: AMMUNITION AND DUDS, MINES AND Chap-2

DEMOLITIONS 2
Chap-3
Chapter 3: FIRING ALL WEAPONS 3
Chap-4
Chapter 4: PARACHUTE JUMPING 4
Chap-5
Chapter 5: DRIVING AND TRANSPORT DUTY 5
Chap-6
Chapter 6 EXERCISES AND OTHER DUTY 6
Chap-7
Chapter 7: MILITARY WORKING DOGS/ RIOT CONTROL 7
Chapter 8: ACTIVITIES IN COASTAL ENVIRONMENTS, Chap-8

RIVERS AND LAKES 8
App
APPENDICES
Prof Resp
PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
Rev-04 1
2 Rev-04
TABLE OF CONTENT
KAP 0. INTRODUCTION AND DEFINITIONS
PURPOSE ToC
Preface by the Chief of Staff of the Norwegian Armys (COS 0.1.1
NoA)............................................................................................................
Application................................................................................................. 0.1.2
Deviation.................................................................................................... 0.1.3
Responsibility for the regulations............................................................ 0.1.4
Responsibility for revision of regulations, announcements and publi- 0.1.5
cation..........................................................................................................
Introduction of new activities and types of materiel/equipment........... 0.1.6
Modification/configuration change of materiel...................................... 0.1.7
Certification............................................................................................... 0.1.8
Materiel safety........................................................................................... 0.1.9
DEFINITIONS
Afterburner................................................................................................
All Terrain Vehicles, Summer, ATV/S....................................................
All Terrain Vehicles, Winter, ATV/W....................................................
Ammunition...............................................................................................
Authority....................................................................................................
Avalanche risk area...................................................................................
Barrel safe fuse..........................................................................................
Blank ammunition.....................................................................................
Commanding Officer (C.O.).....................................................................
Unit weapons..............................................................................................
Duds............................................................................................................
Detonation..................................................................................................
Detonator....................................................................................................
Directive.....................................................................................................
Exercise ammunition.................................................................................
Explosives...................................................................................................
Explosion....................................................................................................
Explosive ordnance disposal.....................................................................
Fail..............................................................................................................
Firing position............................................................................................
Firing range...............................................................................................
Firing sector...............................................................................................
Fully restricted ammunition.....................................................................
Gel...............................................................................................................
High Explosives.........................................................................................
Improvised Explosive Devices (terror bombs)........................................
Infantery weapon.......................................................................................
Intermediary charge.................................................................................
Legal authority..........................................................................................
Mines..........................................................................................................
Misfire........................................................................................................
Non-Explosive but dangerous substance..............................................
Professional authority...............................................................................
Publisher....................................................................................................
Pyrotechnical ammunition.......................................................................
Restricted ammunition.............................................................................
Safety stop..................................................................................................
Self ignition................................................................................................
Shooting......................................................................................................
Rev-04 3
Short range shell........................................................................................

Simunition..................................................................................................
Target area.................................................................................................
UTM Indication ammunition...................................................................
KAP 1. COMMON SAFETY RULES AND REGULATIONS

INTRODUCTION
Land based military activities - Risk....................................................... 1.1.1
Risk assessment......................................................................................... 1.1.2
Risk management...................................................................................... 1.1.3
The responsibilities and duties of personnel .......................................... 1.1.4
Activity management................................................................................ 1.1.5
Reporting.................................................................................................... 1.1.6
KAP 2. AMMUNITION AND DUDS, MINES AND DEMOLITIONS

USING, HANDLING AND CHECKING AMMUNITION
In general................................................................................................... 2.1.1
The responsibilities of the Discipline Authority..................................... 2.1.2
The responsibilities of the User unit".................................................... 2.1.3
The exercising units responsibilities....................................................... 2.1.4
Returning ammunition............................................................................. 2.1.5
Returning empties..................................................................................... 2.1.6
Irregularities when using/handling ammunition.................................... 2.1.7
Action when duds occur............................................................................ 2.1.8
Action when misfires occur during shooting exercises.......................... 2.1.9
Reporting after shooting/ demolition/ throwing hand grenades........... 2.1.10
Reports of irregularities when using ammunition/explosives............... 2.1.11
Smoking and the use of open fire............................................................. 2.1.12
Ammunition - Test and trials .................................................................. 2.1.13
Rules and regulations for Range Officer................................................. 2.1.14
DUDS, MOVEMENT WITHIN FIRING RANGES AND EXPLOSIVE OR-
DONANCE DISPOSAL(EOD)
Duds............................................................................................................ 2.2.1
Firing ranges and training grounds......................................................... 2.2.2
Explosive Ordonance Disposal(EOD)...................................................... 2.2.3
EOD in firing ranges and training grounds............................................ 2.2.4
EOD outside of firing ranges and training grounds............................... 2.2.5
Clearance of improvised explosives IED (terrorist bombs)............... 2.2.6
MINES AND MINE TRAPS
In general................................................................................................... 2.3.1
Laying mines.............................................................................................. 2.3.2
Clearing of mines....................................................................................... 2.3.3
Clearing of mine traps.............................................................................. 2.3.4
DEMOLITION, EXPLOSIVES AND DETONATION DEVICES, ETC.
In general................................................................................................... 2.4.1
Personnel for command and control....................................................... 2.4.2
Checking explosives and detonation devices........................................... 2.4.3
Separate regulations for the use and handling of the materiel............. 2.4.4
Blasting....................................................................................................... 2.4.5
Danger area................................................................................................ 2.4.6
Hearing protection.................................................................................... 2.4.7
4 Rev-04
TOLERANCE EXERCISES WITH EXPLOSIVE CHARGES

In general................................................................................................... 2.5.1
Personnel that must not attend tolerance exercises............................... 2.5.2
FIRE SIMULATION AND DEVICES FOR FIRE SIMULATION ToC
In general................................................................................................... 2.6.1
Blank cartridge for weapons up to and including 12.7mm/.50........... 2.6.3
Percussion charge (simulator for hand grenades) ................................. 2.6.4
Smoke......................................................................................................... 2.6.5
Dud/misfire/short round........................................................................... 2.6.6
Explosives................................................................................................... 2.6.7
KAP 3. FIRING ALL WEAPONS

FIRING
Personal protective equipment (PPE)..................................................... 3.1.1
Division of responsibilities, firing ranges and training areas................ 3.1.2
Direct firing weapons................................................................................ 3.1.3
Guided weapon systems............................................................................ 3.1.4
High trajectory weapons........................................................................... 3.1.5
Procedure for firing 7.62 and 5.56 calibre weapons at built- 3.1.6
in/covered stands.......................................................................................
HANDLING OF WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION INDIVIDUAL RE-
SPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
In Common................................................................................................ 3.2.1
Safety regulations during instruction...................................................... 3.2.2
Use of live ammunition............................................................................. 3.2.3
Exceptions made for educational purposes mixing live and blank 3.2.4
ammunition................................................................................................
Using blank ammunition.......................................................................... 3.2.5
INDIVIDUAL FIRING AND UNIT FIRING
General....................................................................................................... 3.3.1
Leadership.................................................................................................. 3.3.2
Basic requirements.................................................................................... 3.3.3
Firing above and to the side..................................................................... 3.3.4
Vapors and fumes precautions against carbon monoxide poisoning 3.3.5
.....................................................................................................................
FIRING INFANTRY WEAPONS OF CALIBER 12.7.MM OR SMALLER
General....................................................................................................... 3.4.1
Special regulations for firing Multipurpose (MP) ammunition............ 3.4.2
Danger area................................................................................................ 3.4.3
Regulations for use of blank ammunition in weapons up to and in- 3.4.4
cluding 12.7 mm.........................................................................................
Firing above and to the side..................................................................... 3.4.5
ILLUMINATION ROCKETS, AMMUNITION FOR VERY PISTOLS,
WARNING FLARES AND SMOKE
Illumination rockets.................................................................................. 3.5.1
Ammunition for Very pistols.................................................................... 3.5.2
Impact area for illumination ammunition.............................................. 3.5.3
Warning flares........................................................................................... 3.5.4
Smoke......................................................................................................... 3.5.5
Malfunction/duds/ammunition failure.................................................... 3.5.6
Rev-04 5
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF SIMUNITION TRAINING

AMMUNITION
General....................................................................................................... 3.6.1
The skills of the personnel........................................................................ 3.6.2
Danger area................................................................................................ 3.6.3
Exceptions.................................................................................................. 3.6.4
Demonstration........................................................................................... 3.6.5
Personnel for management and control.................................................. 3.6.6
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR 40MM RIFLE-MOUNTED GRENADE
LAUNCHER
General....................................................................................................... 3.7.1
Ammunition check.................................................................................... 3.7.3
Firing above and past/to the side of personnel ...................................... 3.7.4
Measures should the weapon malfunction.............................................. 3.7.5
Danger area................................................................................................ 3.7.6
Safety regulations AG-HK 416:............................................................... 3.7.7
HAND GRENADES
General....................................................................................................... 3.8.1
Advanced throwing exercises using fragmentation and stun grenade- 3.8.4
s...................................................................................................................
Throwing incendiary grenades, smoke grenades, ................................. 3.8.5
Danger area................................................................................................ 3.8.6
Duds............................................................................................................ 3.8.8
Flashbang................................................................................................... 3.8.9
DM-78 Exercise grenade........................................................................... 3.8.10
CLAYMORE MINES
Claymore mines, light M-19, heavy M-100 and heavy FFV 013........... 3.9.1
Firing stand for demonstration fire of Claymores M-19 and 3.9.2
M-100..........................................................................................................
MORTARS
In general................................................................................................... 3.10.1
Personnel for managment and control.................................................... 3.10.2
Other personnel......................................................................................... 3.10.3
Danger area................................................................................................ 3.10.5
Firing over personnel using a mortar...................................................... 3.10.6
Firing duds with a range under 100m..................................................... 3.10.7
Measures to be taken should the weapon malfunction.......................... 3.10.9
Laser range finder..................................................................................... 3.10.10
ANTI-TANK WEAPONS
M72 LIGHT ANTI-TANK WEAPON (LAW)....................................... 3.11.1
84MM RECOILLESS GUN..................................................................... 3.11.2
149MM TOW MISSILE SYSTEM......................................................... 3.11.3
ERYX ANTI-TANK MISSILE................................................................ 3.11.4
JAVELIN ANTI-TANK WEAPON MEDIUM RANGE ANTI- 3.11.5
TANK SYSTEM........................................................................................
6 Rev-04
ARMOUR ANTI-TANK GUIDED WEAPON SYSTEM NM 142

In general................................................................................................... 3.12.1
Firing with 7.62 x 51mm medium machine gun..................................... 3.12.2
Use of smoke bomb dischargers, Very pistol and illumination 3.12.3
rockets, plus throwing of smoke canisters.............................................. ToC
General regulations for live firing of guided missiles from NM 3.12.4
142...............................................................................................................
Live firing with several RPJs................................................................... 3.12.5
Personnel to lead and control................................................................... 3.12.6
Other personnel......................................................................................... 3.12.7
Ammunition check and ammunition handling ...................................... 3.12.8
Safety measures should the weapon malfunction................................... 3.12.9
Risk of fire erupting in the target area ................................................... 3.12.10
Blank cartridge for TOW......................................................................... 3.12.11
GENERAL JOINT PROVISIONS FOR FIRING WITH/FROM VEHICLES
General....................................................................................................... 3.13.1
Personnel for command and control....................................................... 3.13.2
Personnel not taking part in the training................................................ 3.13.3
Ammunition inspection............................................................................. 3.13.6
Communications........................................................................................ 3.13.7
Warnings/marking vehicles...................................................................... 3.13.8
Instructional firing from stands with several vehicles........................... 3.13.9
Indirect firing............................................................................................. 3.13.10
Firing whilst in motion.............................................................................. 3.13.11
Shooting in and from a vehicle................................................................. 3.13.12
Firing above and to the side of personnel............................................... 3.13.13
Hazardous zones for tank- and machine guns........................................ 3.13.14
Firing with a Remote Weapon Station (RWS)....................................... 3.13.15
Use of smoke launchers, Very pistols and illumination rockets, plus 3.13.16
throwing of smoke canisters.....................................................................
FIRING ARMOURED FIGHTING VEHICLE WEAPONS (WITH TANKS)
In general................................................................................................... 3.14.1
Firing over and to the side of personnel.................................................. 3.14.3
Fire during movement.............................................................................. 3.14.4
Fire during movement.............................................................................. 3.14.5
Fire marker HOFFMANN....................................................................... 3.14.6
Firing with 14,5 mm inner tube in tank gun (applies only to Leopard 3.14.7
1A5 NO with a 105mm gun).....................................................................
14.5mm ammunition Duds ...................................................................... 3.14.8
Risk of fire erupting in the target area ................................................... 3.14.9
FIRING WITH WEAPONS MOUNTED ON ARMOURED INFANTRY
FIGHTING VEHICLE CV9030N/F1
In general................................................................................................... 3.15.1
Warning/marking of vehicles................................................................... 3.15.2
Personell for ledelse og kontroll............................................................... 3.15.3
Automatic gun MK 30 Bushmaster II.................................................. 3.15.5
Firing with handheld weapons from combat hatch, section leaders 3.15.6
hatch and firing slits .................................................................................
Danger area................................................................................................ 3.15.7
Rev-04 7
Firing against air targets with automatic gun........................................ 3.15.9

Firing with blanks with automatic gun .................................................. 3.15.10
FIRING WEAPONS FROM/MOUNTED ON WHEELED VEHICLES
(DIFFERENT VERSIONS)
In general................................................................................................... 3.16.1
Warning/marking of vehicles................................................................... 3.16.2
Communication......................................................................................... 3.16.3
Personnel not participating in the exercise............................................. 3.16.5
Firing during movement........................................................................... 3.16.9
Firing during tactical movement............................................................. 3.16.10
Vehicles with mounted 12.7mm Open bolt with artillery carriage 3.16.11
NM152 .......................................................................................................
Vehicle with mounted MG-3 with artillery carriage.............................. 3.16.12
Firing small arms from vehicles............................................................... 3.16.13
Instructional firing/firing from range with several vehicles................. 3.16.14
Use of smoke dischargers, Very pistols and illumination rockets, 3.16.15
plus throwing of smoke canisters.............................................................
Firing from a SISU/PASI vehicle............................................................. 3.16.17
ARTILLERY, FIRING TOWARDS GROUND TARGETS
In general................................................................................................... 3.17.1
Choosing fire range for artillery.............................................................. 3.17.2
Medical service.......................................................................................... 3.17.4
Safety control using safety template........................................................ 3.17.5
Danger area ............................................................................................... 3.17.6
Manual use of safety template for safety check when firing:................ 3.17.7
Using the fire control system for safety control when firing ................ 3.17.8
Direct laying............................................................................................... 3.17.9
Procedures at malfunction........................................................................ 3.17.11
Construction of safety template for field artillery.................................. 3.17.12
Construction of templates......................................................................... 3.17.13
Firing over target by field artillery, calibre 105mm and larger........... 3.17.14
Burning of propellant charge................................................................... 3.17.15
Risk of fire in the target area................................................................... 3.17.17
FIRING HELLFIRE MISSILES
ARTILLERY FIRE TOWARDS AIR TARGETS
In general................................................................................................... 3.19.1
Danger area ............................................................................................... 3.19.3
GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM ROBOT 70
In general................................................................................................... 3.20.1
Check and handling of ammunition ....................................................... 3.20.3
Precautions in case of malfunction.......................................................... 3.20.4
Destruction of duds .................................................................................. 3.20.5
8 Rev-04
Danger area in front of the weapon......................................................... 3.20.6

Danger area behind the weapon.............................................................. 3.20.7
ARTILLERY, TESTING AND TRIAL FIRING ToC
In general................................................................................................... 3.21.1
Test and trial firing with artillery from area outside firing areas 3.21.3
additional regulations...............................................................................
PRECAUTIONS, MALFUNCTION
General....................................................................................................... 3.22.1
FIRING AT LAND BASED TARGETS WITH SHIP ARTILLERY
General....................................................................................................... 3.23.1
KAP 4. PARACHUTE JUMPING

PARACHUTING
In general................................................................................................... 4.1.1
Personnel.................................................................................................... 4.1.2
Materiel...................................................................................................... 4.1.3
Aircraft/ speed........................................................................................... 4.1.4
Jump field................................................................................................... 4.1.5
Automatic release jumping....................................................................... 4.1.6
Free fall jumping....................................................................................... 4.1.7
Special regulations for parachute jumping in water.............................. 4.1.8
Tandem jumps........................................................................................... 4.1.9
Test jumping.............................................................................................. 4.1.10
KAP 5. DRIVING AND TRANSPORT DUTY

COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS
In general................................................................................................... 5.1.1
Transporting personnel............................................................................ 5.1.2
Transporting materiel on vehicles........................................................... 5.1.3
Towing personnel on skis.......................................................................... 5.1.4
Driving military vehicles in reverse - ground guide............................... 5.1.5
Military vehicle recovery.......................................................................... 5.1.6
Driving with personnel in the gunners place in vehicles...................... 5.1.7
TRACKED VEHICLE P6 - 300M
In general................................................................................................... 5.2.1
Crossing frozen rivers and lakes.............................................................. 5.2.2
Wading....................................................................................................... 5.2.3
Towing tracked vehicles............................................................................ 5.2.4
COMMAND POST CONTAINER 2X1 AND 3X1
In general................................................................................................... 5.3.1
FUEL TANKFLAK 10,500 LITRES
In general................................................................................................... 5.4.1
The drivers duty to check before transport........................................... 5.4.2
Drivers duty to check before unloading................................................. 5.4.3
Check before use........................................................................................ 5.4.4
Safety distances for setting up a fuel tanking store................................ 5.4.5
Rev-04 9
TRACTOR
In general................................................................................................... 5.5.1
Personnel transport................................................................................... 5.5.2
Special regulations..................................................................................... 5.5.4
TRACKED VEHICLE 206
In general................................................................................................... 5.6.1
Crossing frozen lakes or rivers................................................................ 5.6.2
Crossing open rivers and lakes................................................................ 5.6.3
Tracked vehicle, used as command post /communication base............ 5.6.4
LIGHT ALL-TERRAIN VEHICLES, SUMMER
In general................................................................................................... 5.7.1
Transit across frozen water...................................................................... 5.7.2
SNOWMOBILE
In general................................................................................................... 5.8.1
MOTORCYCLES
General....................................................................................................... 5.9.1
CROSS COUNTRY VEHICLE MB 240/290 (VARIOUS VERSIONS WITH
MOUNTED GUN, ETC.)
General....................................................................................................... 5.10.1
IVECO LMV............................................................................................. 5.10.2
JOINT PROVISIONS FOR TRACKED ARMOURED VEHICLES, AS
WELL AS SISU/PASI AND FUCHS
General....................................................................................................... 5.11.1
Movement on roads and across terrain................................................... 5.11.2
Reversing.................................................................................................... 5.11.3
Co-training/ duty between armourde vehicle and footsoldiers............. 5.11.4
Driving with periscopes/closed hatches................................................... 5.11.5
Transit across waterways/wading............................................................ 5.11.6
Driving across frozen rivers and lakes.................................................... 5.11.7
Swimming................................................................................................... 5.11.8
Recovery..................................................................................................... 5.11.9
LEOPARD TANK 1A5NO, LEOPARD TANK 2A4NO, ARMOURED
RECOVERY VEHICLE (BERGEPANZER) NM217, ARMOURED COM-
BAT ENGINEER VEHICLE NM189 AND ARMOURED BRIDGE-LAY-
ING VEHICLE NM190
General....................................................................................................... 5.12.1
Boarding and alighting............................................................................. 5.12.2
Wading and driving over soft ground..................................................... 5.12.4
The duties of personnel being transported............................................. 5.12.5
TRACKED ARMOURED VEHICLE CV9030N/F1
General....................................................................................................... 5.13.1
M113 SERIES VEHICLES
General....................................................................................................... 5.14.1
Swimming................................................................................................... 5.14.4
10 Rev-04
SISU/PASI AND FUCHS

General....................................................................................................... 5.15.1
The duties of personnel being transported............................................. 5.15.3
Reversing.................................................................................................... 5.15.4 ToC
Transit across waterways, wading........................................................... 5.15.5
Swimming................................................................................................... 5.15.6
LOADING AND TRANSPORTATION OF WHEELED AND TRACKED
VEHICLES ONTO RAILWAY TRUCKS/DRIVING WITHIN RAILWAY
ZONES
General....................................................................................................... 5.16.1
Loading and unloading from railway trucks.......................................... 5.16.2
LOADING AND UNLOADING OF WHEELED AND TRACKED VEHIC-
LES ONTO SHIPS/DRIVING WITHIN PORT AREAS
General....................................................................................................... 5.17.1
Loading and unloading from ships.......................................................... 5.17.2
LOADING/UNLOADING OF TRACKED AND WHEELED VEHICLES
FROM AN ARTICULATED TRAILER (HEAVY GOODS VEHICLE)
General....................................................................................................... 5.18.1
STATIONARY USE OF VEHICLES/PRECAUTIONS AGAINST CARBON
MONOXIDE POISONING
General....................................................................................................... 5.19.1
INSPECTION AND WORK UNDER, IN FRONT OF OR TO THE REAR
OF MOTOR VEHICLES
General....................................................................................................... 5.20.1
ROADBLOCKS SENTRY DUTY AND MARKINGS
General....................................................................................................... 5.21.1
AIR TRANSPORT
General....................................................................................................... 5.22.1
Responsibility............................................................................................. 5.22.2
Movement at airports................................................................................ 5.22.3
Loading and unloading............................................................................. 5.22.4
During flights............................................................................................. 5.22.5
HELICOPTER TRANSPORT
General....................................................................................................... 5.23.1
Danger zone............................................................................................... 5.23.2
Responsibility............................................................................................. 5.23.3
Smoking/open fire..................................................................................... 5.23.4
Ear protection............................................................................................ 5.23.5
Landing zone.............................................................................................. 5.23.6
Transportation of personnel..................................................................... 5.23.7
Transportation of materiel....................................................................... 5.23.8
Overview of signs and signals................................................................... 5.23.9
Procedures within loading and unloading zones.................................... 5.23.10
Planning of NVG operations.................................................................... 5.23.11
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR OPERATIONAL DRIVING IN CONNEC-
TION WITH ESCORT SERVICES AND MILITARY BODYGUARD SER-
VICES
General....................................................................................................... 5.24.1
Rev-04 11
Technical driving exercises....................................................................... 5.24.2

Tactical driving exercises ......................................................................... 5.24.3
KAP 6. EXERCISES AND OTHER DUTY

CONDUCT OF PERSONNEL ON THE GROUND WHEN TRACKED AR-
MOURED VEHICLES PARTICIPATE IN EXERCISES
In general................................................................................................... 6.1.1
PERSONAL SAFETY IN THE USE OF MATERIEL THAT CONTAINS
OR MAY CONTAIN RADIOACTIVE MATTER, OR WHICH EMITS RA-
DIATION DURING USE
General....................................................................................................... 6.2.1
Radiological sources.................................................................................. 6.2.2
X-radiation from non-medical radiation sources................................... 6.2.3
Radio frequency radiation from radar and aerials in the frequency 6.2.4
range 10 KHz 300 GHz..........................................................................
Laser radiation.......................................................................................... 6.2.5
FIBRE......................................................................................................... 6.2.6
RB 70 GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM
General....................................................................................................... 6.3.1
Laser filters................................................................................................ 6.3.2
Hazardous areas without laser filters...................................................... 6.3.3
USE OF SIMULATORS FROM SAAB TRAINING SYSTEMS
General....................................................................................................... 6.4.1
User requirements..................................................................................... 6.4.2
Specific provisions..................................................................................... 6.4.3
CBRN TRAINING, EXERCISES AND OPERATIONS
Chemicals................................................................................................... 6.5.1
Radiological................................................................................................ 6.5.2
Toxic industrial materials......................................................................... 6.5.3
Live Agent Training.................................................................................. 6.5.4
Routines and procedures for the transportation of sample materials 6.5.5
for analysis and verification.....................................................................
DISINFECTION OF DRINKING WATER IN THE FIELD
General....................................................................................................... 6.6.1
CLOSE COMBAT
General....................................................................................................... 6.7.1
Weapon combat......................................................................................... 6.7.2
Unarmed combat....................................................................................... 6.7.3
Close combat shooting.............................................................................. 6.7.4
Exercise leaders (instructors) duties..................................................... 6.7.5
URBAN WARFARE TRAINING (SIBO)
General....................................................................................................... 6.8.1
MOUNTAIN CLIMBING AND PASSAGE ACROSS DIFFICULT TER-
RAIN
General....................................................................................................... 6.9.1
The exercise leaders duties...................................................................... 6.9.2
Implementation.......................................................................................... 6.9.3
Zip lining across ravines........................................................................... 6.9.4
Zip lining across waterways..................................................................... 6.9.5
Rope descent.............................................................................................. 6.9.6
12 Rev-04
SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN SETTING DOWN FROM A HELICOP-

TER VIA RAPPEL, FAST ROPE, SPIE PICKUP AND HELOCAST
General responsibility............................................................................... 6.10.1
Rappelling.................................................................................................. 6.10.2
Fast rope..................................................................................................... 6.10.3 ToC
Spie pickup................................................................................................. 6.10.4
Helocast...................................................................................................... 6.10.5
CLIMATE-RELATED INJURIES
General....................................................................................................... 6.11.1
Special conditions in high temperatures................................................. 6.11.2
Special conditions in low temperatures................................................... 6.11.3
Special conditions in UV radiation (sunlight)......................................... 6.11.4
SPORTS FACILITIES AND SPORTS EVENTS
Assault courses and steeplechases............................................................ 6.12.1
Transit across waterways......................................................................... 6.12.2
Transit by rope or temporary bridge arrangements............................. 6.12.3
Use of weapons........................................................................................... 6.12.4
Physical activity in hot weather............................................................... 6.12.5
Competitive events in cold weather......................................................... 6.12.6
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR INFUSION COURSES IN THE NORWE-
GIAN ARMED FORCES
General....................................................................................................... 6.13.1
Precautionary measures........................................................................... 6.13.2
Infusion course procedures for testing of HIV and Hepatitis............... 6.13.3
Practical exercises..................................................................................... 6.13.4
WINTER SERVICE
Divisional competence requirements within winter service for land- 6.14.1
based operations in the Norwegian Armed Forces................................
Preparation and implementation of exercises in terrain in which the- 6.14.2
re is a risk of avalanches occurring.........................................................
Safety regulations for snow holes/pits..................................................... 6.14.3
Actions in special circumstances in avalanche risk terrain................... 6.14.4
PROVISIONS FOR HANDLING FIRE, HEATING IN A TENT, LIGH-
TING COOKING APPARATUS AND LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Heating in a tent........................................................................................ 6.15.1
Lighting cooking apparatus and lights.................................................... 6.15.2
Carbon monoxide poisoning..................................................................... 6.15.3
Shrubland burning and grass and heathland burning in Norwegian 6.15.4
Armed Forces areas..................................................................................
Use of fire during exercises in forests and fields.................................... 6.15.5
USE OF MACHINERY AND TOOLS
In general................................................................................................... 6.16.1
Mechanical Bridge Layer, Leguan.......................................................... 6.16.2
SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN BUILDING A FIELD COMMUNICA-
TION LINE
In general................................................................................................... 6.17.1
RADIO AND RADIO LINE DUTY
In general................................................................................................... 6.18.1
Handling of accumulators........................................................................ 6.18.2
Fastening equipment inside vehicles........................................................ 6.18.3
Rev-04 13
Earthing of radio/radio line equipment.................................................. 6.18.4

Antennae.................................................................................................... 6.18.5
Microwave equipment............................................................................... 6.18.6
Safety regulations when building field communication lines................ 6.18.7
Where to place communications installations, radio/ radio lines 6.18.8
when in the proximity of high-voltage power lines................................
Transport and handling of flammable liquids........................................ 6.18.10
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR TRAINING CONDUCT AFTER CAPTU-
RE (CAC)
In general................................................................................................... 6.19.1
MEDICAL SERVICE
In general................................................................................................... 6.20.1
Required competence................................................................................ 6.20.2
Plan for first aid, treatment and evacuation........................................... 6.20.3
Carbonmonoxide poisoning ..................................................................... 6.20.4
HEARING, NOISE INJURIES AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIP-
MENT
Noise injuries ............................................................................................ 6.21.1
Hearing protection in the Armed Forces................................................ 6.21.2
SEARCH AND RESCUE OPERATIONS IN CONNECTION WITH ACCI-
DENTS AND INCIDENTS IN THE DEFENCE FORCES
Minor accidents......................................................................................... 6.22.1
RESCUE SERVICE
In general................................................................................................... 6.23.1
Responsibility/leadership.......................................................................... 6.23.2
Leadership.................................................................................................. 6.23.3
Armed Forces support............................................................................. 6.23.4
Organization.............................................................................................. 6.23.5
Reporting and investigation of accidents and incidents in the Armed 6.23.6
Forces..........................................................................................................
KAP 7. MILITARY WORKING DOGS/ RIOT CONTROL

USE OF MILITARY WORKING DOGS
In general................................................................................................... 7.1.1
Personnel.................................................................................................... 7.1.2
Materiel and equipment............................................................................ 7.1.3
Transport................................................................................................... 7.1.5
Kennelling ................................................................................................. 7.1.6
Training and exercises.............................................................................. 7.1.7
Injuries....................................................................................................... 7.1.8
In general: Using military working dogs in situations characterized 7.1.9
by constraint or where force is being used..............................................
Situations of acting in self-defence: the Criminal Codes 48.............. 7.1.10
The principle of necessity: the Criminal Codes 47............................ 7.1.11
Military police............................................................................................ 7.1.12
Responsibility when using military working dogs.................................. 7.1.13
Using military working dogs when means of force are applied............ 7.1.14
Using working dogs for apprehending individuals................................ 7.1.15
Marking military working dogs while training and during 7.1.16
exercises......................................................................................................
14 Rev-04
Using dogs to search for explosives.......................................................... 7.1.17

Searching for live land mines................................................................... 7.1.18
Searching for bomblets and bomblet packaging, plus EOD 7.1.19
(duds)..........................................................................................................
ToC
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR RIOT CONTROL
In general................................................................................................... 7.2.1
Officer conducting the exercise and safety controllers.......................... 7.2.2
The token force.......................................................................................... 7.2.3
Medical readiness...................................................................................... 7.2.4
Required equipment.................................................................................. 7.2.5
Using batons/sticks.................................................................................... 7.2.6
Vehicle use.................................................................................................. 7.2.7
Using dogs.................................................................................................. 7.2.8
Using open flames...................................................................................... 7.2.9
Use of pepper spray................................................................................... 7.2.10
Using deluge guns...................................................................................... 7.2.11
Using CS..................................................................................................... 7.2.12
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF LESS LETHAL WEAPONS
General....................................................................................................... 7.3.1
Definitions.................................................................................................. 7.3.2
Pepper spray.............................................................................................. 7.3.3
Batons......................................................................................................... 7.3.4
KAP 8. ACTIVITIES IN COASTAL ENVIRONMENTS, RIVERS

AND LAKES
IN GENERAL
Introduction .............................................................................................. 8.1.1
Professional authority............................................................................... 8.1.2
Leadership and responsibilities................................................................ 8.1.3
Certification............................................................................................... 8.1.4
Duty on and near lakes and rivers........................................................... 8.1.5
Climate....................................................................................................... 8.1.6
Definitions.................................................................................................. 8.1.7
Personal flotation devices/ Rescue Equipment....................................... 8.1.8
Suggested reading...................................................................................... 8.1.9
SPECIAL RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR ACTIVITIES
Wading across rivers................................................................................. 8.2.1
Swimming across rivers............................................................................ 8.2.2
Swimming................................................................................................... 8.2.3
Command and control.............................................................................. 8.2.4
Special regulations for swimming in pools.............................................. 8.2.5
Ferry, including possible use of pontoons............................................... 8.2.6
Vessels......................................................................................................... 8.2.7
The Navys directive for diving, surface swimming and use of pres- 8.2.8
sure chamber.............................................................................................
Bridging...................................................................................................... 8.2.9
The quality of the ice................................................................................. 8.2.11
Marching order and documentation of military traffic on ice- 8.2.12
covered waters ..........................................................................................
Tolerance exercise for breaking through ice.......................................... 8.2.13
Rev-04 15
SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR USE OF CIVILIAN VESSELS

Definition.................................................................................................... 8.3.1
Transport on cutters/smacks.................................................................... 8.3.2
Supplementary regulations for LCP, cutters and smacks..................... 8.3.3
16 Rev-04
APPENDICES
CONSTRUCTION OF SAFETY TEMPLATES FOR DI- Appendix 1
RECT FIRING WEAPONS..................................................
CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPLATES FOR SECTOR Appendix 2
CHARGES.............................................................................. ToC
ENGELSK UTGAVE AV BL 750........................................ Appendix 6B
REGULATIONS FOR SECURING AIR TRAFFIC DU- Appendix 7
RING FIRING AND MORTAR EXERCISES, TEST FI-
RING, ETC. ...........................................................................
RADARSET GIRAFFE MK IV........................................... Appendix 8A
ARTILLERY HUNTING RADAR (ARTHUR)................. Appendix 8B
RADAR SET AN/PPS-15...................................................... Appendix 8C
METEOROLOGICAL SET NO/MMQ-10......................... Appendix 8D
LOW ALTITUDE SURVEILLANCE RADAR (LASR) Appendix 8E
AN/TPQ 36A...........................................................................
TOR ELECTRONIC COUNTER-MEASURE SYSTEM, Appendix 8F
PROHIBITED AREA AND DANGER AREA...................
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT................................................. Appendix 8G
RC-IED JAMMER................................................................ Appendix 8H
THICKNESS OF COVER.................................................... Appendix 9
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF FLAM- Appendix 11A
MABLE LIQUIDS AND DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES
..................................................................................................
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE Appendix 11B
OF RADIOACTIVE SOURCES..........................................
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE Appendix 11C
OF CS AND SIMULANTS, CHEMICAL AGENTS..........
RESCUE SERVICE DURING ACCIDENTS AND INCI- Appendix 12A
DENTS IN THE NORWEGIAN ARMED FORCES.........
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATING OF ACCIDENT- Appendix 12 B
S AND INCIDENTS IN THE NORWEGIAN ARMED
FORCES.................................................................................
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF LASERS.......... Appendix 13
DIRECTIVE FOR EXERCISES ETC. AT POWER Appendix 14
SUPPLY INSTALLATIONS................................................
INPUT DATA FOR HOW TO DRAW UP SAFETY Appendix 15
TEMPLATES.........................................................................
INPUT DATA FOR DRAWING UP SAFETY TEMPLA- Appendix 16
TES..........................................................................................
INPUT VALUES FOR CONSTRUCTING SAFETY Appendix 17
TEMPLATES.........................................................................
TEMPLATES.........................................................................
Rev-04 17
INPUT DATAFOR DRAWING UP SAFETY TEMPLA- Appendix 19

TES..........................................................................................
TEMPLATES.........................................................................
TEMPLATES.........................................................................
TESTING OF NON-QUALIFIED WEAPON SYSTEMS Appendix 22
AND AMMUNITION............................................................
FORM FOR EVALUATING/ASSESSING RISK.............. Appendix 24
LIST OF CERTIFIED EDUCATION AND TRAINING Appendix 25
IN THE ARMY......................................................................
APPLICATION FOR WAIVER FROM UD2-1................. Appendix 26
18 Rev-04
0 INTRODUCTION AND DEFINITIONS

0.1 PURPOSE
0.1.1 Preface by the Chief of Staff of the Norwegian Armys (COS NoA)
0.1.1.1 I lay down UD 2-1, the Norwegian Defence Forces safety regulations for military
activity on land 1, for use in the Armed Forces.
Chap-0
UD 2-1 regulates a minimum of safety regulations. Anyone who is responsible for
carrying out activities must through personal risk assessments take the necessary
safety measures, based on the skills of the personnel and local conditions. Should the
risk assessment indicate unacceptable risk, the activity is not to be carried out as
originally planned. Other ways of carrying out the activity or solving the mission
must be considered.
Risk is part of the nature of operations and military activities. In order to train in a
realistic manner, it is important to strike a good balance between safety and risk. UD
2-1 is to contribute to striking the right balance in order to make training as
beneficial as possible.
UD 2-1 is a set of regulations that also apply during operations abroad. We must
ensure that the difference between training at home and operations abroad becomes
as little as possible. This applies to use of materiel, training, procedures and
observing the safety regulations.
Safety is the Chiefs responsibility, but we are all dependent on each and every one
of us taking responsibility for individual safety as well as the safety of others. We are
to reduce the risk of accidents and serious incidents for our personnel and the Armed
Forces surroundings by:
- good attitudes solve the mission and take care of the personnel
- making sure that education and training are adapted to the level of competence
and skills the personnel possess
- having routines and procedures that give room for the fact that human error
and technical failure may occur
- reporting accidents, near-accidents and deviations
Figure: 0.1
Chief of Staff of the Norwegian Army
1 With land based military activities is meant, education, training, exercises or

operations on land, in coastal areas, lakes and rivers. More specific delimitation is set
by the specific rule or regulation for each activity
Rev-04 19
0.1.2 Application
0.1.2.1 These regulations apply to land military activity in Norway, when no other superior
regulations, civilian or military; or regulations provided by the Chief JOHQ for units
under his/her command say otherwise.
UD 2-1 applies to units under the command of JOHQ solving missions during
operations in Norway and abroad. See also 0.1.3.
These regulations apply above regulations that might be found in weapon
regulations, instructions, etc.
0.1.3 Deviation
0.1.3.1 In general.
These regulations can only be deviated from when emergencies or other special
conditions make it necessary. Special conditions might be in connection with the
carrying out of operations and training of special techniques for solving missions
during operations. In all cases, an assessment is to be made, including risk
assessment, weather conditions, time aspect, situation in the area, safety for
personnel, etc.
0.1.3.2 Deviations - operations both in Norway and abroad.
Unless other regulations have been provided by the Chief JOHQ, the following
regulations apply to Norwegian units under JOHQ command:
1. UD 2-1 applies, but must give way for special operational demands. Special
operational demands occur when a certain way of acting is required in order to
solve the mission in accordance with provided orders/instructions and within
the mandate, or when deviation poses less risk than observing the regulations
would.
Should the situation call for it, the commander of an operational unit abroad2
is to give written approval in advance, stating when UD 2-1 might be deviated
from.
0.1.3.3 Deviations exercises, training and education in Norway and abroad.
These regulations may be deviated from in connection with exercises, training and
education in Norway or abroad. For units who need to deviate from the regulations,
the following procedure is to be used:
- The need to deviate from the regulations is to be presented to the one who is
professionally responsible, see the appendix on professional responsibility,
through the chain of command.
- The professional authority is to provide approval of the activity in writing,
based on necessity, documented skills and approved plan for how the activity
is to be conducted.
After having received approval from the professional authority, the commander may
allow deviations from the regulations and put it in writing, to be communicated
through the chain of command.
The following people
2 *)CO of or institutions
indipendent unit is are to receive
defined as COcopies of the
of a unit document
dipatched allowing
from NJHQ to
deviations from the rules to be made:
and under the command of the CO of a multinational force such as QRF/RCN
- The Armys
or CO Safety Inspector
of PRT/RCN)
20 Rev-04
- The Safety Inspector or the one holding a similar position within the relevant
branch
- The respective professional authorities.
0.1.3.4 Levels for approving deviations to be made:
The lowest levels for allowing deviations from the regulations in writing, are for the
defence branches and joint institutions the following:
- JOHQ: Chief JOHQ for units under JOHQs command, in Norway and Chap-0
abroad.
- Army: Chief of the Army Staff
- Navy: level 3 chiefs, Chief Coastguard, Chief Coast Squadron and Chief of
the Navys educational institutions
- Air Force: Chief of the Air Force Staff
- Home Guard: Chief of the HG Staff
- Joint institutions: (e.g. VPV, the NDLO, FHS, the Medical Corps: Chief of the
respective institutions.
0.1.4 Responsibility for the regulations
0.1.4.1 The Chief of the Army Staff holds the responsibility of interpreting and providing
information about the regulations, as well as the overall responsibility for general
guidance and training. All commanders are responsible for making sure that their
own personnel as well as personnel that have been attached to their unit, know and
observe the safety regulations.
0.1.5 Responsibility for revision of regulations, announcements and
publication
0.1.5.1 Responsibility for developing new regulations and making revisions of old
regulations
In accordance with the delegationary document issued by the Chief of Defence,
dated 8 October 2007, the Chief of the Army Staff has been given the authority to
publish the regulations.
The Chief of the Army Staff has given the authority to develop and update UD 2-1 to
the Armys Safety Inspector and to the professional authorities within their areas of
responsibility. See the division of professional responsibilities.
The individual professional authority has on behalf of the Chief of the Army Staff
the responsibility for implementing necessary regulations within their respective
areas of responsibility.
The Armys Safety Inspector is on behalf of the Chief of the Army Staff responsible
editor and publisher of these regulations. The work is being supported by the HVS
staff.
0.1.5.2 Publication
UD 2-1, the Norwegian Defence Forces safety regulations for land military activity,
is published on the Norwegian Defences internal web. The document can be found
in the FOBID database under the regulations portal, as well as under Army/Safety
Rev-04 21
web with UD 2-1.

The published electronic edition is the official and at all times updated version
in force of this document.
The document usually gets quarterly updates.
Exceptions to this are when special and absolutely necessary requirements for
making changes in addition to the quarterly revision of the document occur.
0.1.5.3 Revision and corrections
When the document is being revised and corrected, the publisher is to ascertain that
the question has been looked into as thoroughly as possible, hence consider whether
consequence clarification, hearings or consultation with legal or other professional
authorities should be held prior to finalising authorization of the document.
A main revision of the regulations is normally carried out biannually. The Armys
Safety Inspector/Chief of Norwegian Army Land Warfare Centre is responsible for
carrying out new revisions.
During revisions and corrections, changes and new regulations are to be
implemented in the regulations. All changes and new regulations will be updated in
the electronic edition as corrections and appendices. If the changes will have major
consequences for safety, they may also be issued in a safety report.
The edition on the safety web must always be checked for changes before an
exercise or activity is begun.
Procedure for corrections is under division of professional responsibilities.
All changes since the last main revision in these regulations are marked with a grey
backgroud color
All changes made since the latest printed version are in this document marked by
being written on a red-coloured background. Note: This only applies to the web
edition in the FOBID database on the Norwegian Defences internal web pages.
0.1.5.4 Abolishment of the regulations in this document
A number of regulations or individual regulations are to be abolished when this
seems adequate or when the respective regulations are no longer required.
Regulations can only be abolished by the one holding the professional authority
within the relevant field. See 0.1.5
0.1.6 Introduction of new activities and types of materiel/equipment
0.1.6.1 The Defence Forces are constantly developing, which means for instance that new
techniques are being developed and new equipment/materiel tested. For
units/personnel in the Norwegian Defence Forces who start using materiel or
techniques, either for ordinary use or as part of testing procedures/equipment, the
following must have been worked out and documented:
- Basic description of concept/technique/use (including training programme)
and training in these is to have been provided.
- Safety regulations for the activity in question and briefing in these must have
been provided.
- Risk assessment of the activity.
22 Rev-04
0.1.7 Modification/configuration change of materiel

0.1.7.1 Defence Forces materiel must not be used beyond the limitations set in laws,
directives or military regulations.
Materiel is to be administered in accordance with CHOD Norways Directive for
administration and management of of materiel in the military forces.
Modification/configuration change of materiel is not to be made without
authorization. All suggestions for modifications and/or other changes of the Chap-0
configuration on materiel must be presented to the professional authority at the
NDLO.
For materiel that has been modified or changed, the professional authority (in
accordance with division of professional responsibilities in UD 2-1, yellow pages)
will decide whether 0.1.6 will come into play as a consequence of the
modification/change.
Adaptation of materiel and equipment can be made as long as this does not come
under the definition modification/configuration change. .
0.1.8 Certification
0.1.8.1 Certification is a process leading to a technical authorization and documentation of
absolute and unalterable minimum skills as a basis for further practical training and
education under guidance within a defined organizational framework. Certifications
ensure documentation and a minimum level of competence within areas of great risk.
Through certification level of skill and qualifications are documented in the form of
a certificate, stating its duration and area of application.
A list of current certification arrangements for land military activities can be found
in appendix 25. The list is kept up-to-date in accordance with the list of professional
responsibilities.
0.1.9 Materiel safety
0.1.9.1 Safety approved materiel
Materiel for use in the Norwegian Defence Forces is to be approved for safety by the
Chief of the NDLO, or the one acting under his/her authority. Materiel which is to be
used in the Defence Forces is to be planned, constructed and made in a way which
ensures that personnel using the materiel in the intended way will get optimal
function and be protected from serious health injuries. The decision to deviate from
using materiel which has been authorized can only be made by the Chief of Defence,
or the one acting under his/her authority.
In emergency situations, it might be necessary to deviate from the safety
authorization of the materiel. Such deviations are to be reported later to the
professional authority.
0.1.9.2 References to superior regulations for materiel safety:
- The MODs guidelines for administration of materiel in the Defence sector.
- Directive for administration of materiel in the Norwegian Defence Forces.
- Regulations for administration of materiel in the Defence Forces.
- Regulations for authorization of materiel and materiel systems for use in the
Rev-04 23
Norwegian Defence.
- Directive for practicing health, environment and safety during operative
activities etc. in the Norwegian Defence.
0.2 DEFINITIONS
Afterburner
An afterburner is a delayed combustion of igniters or charges during firing. It is not
possible to determine the length of the delay, but in most cases it is between a few
fractions of a second up to several minutes. Since there is no way of telling whether
it is an afterburner or a misfire, a misfire must be considered as an afterburner, and
the precautions and time intervals for the respective weapon type must be followed.
All Terrain Vehicles, Summer, ATV/S
ATV/S (4- and 6 wheel terrain bikes) are systems containing both vehicle and hanger
where the systems are configured for the Armed Forces special use.
All Terrain Vehicles, Winter, ATV/W
ATV/W (Snowmobile) are systems containing both vehicle and sled, where the
systems are configured for the Armed Forces special use.
Ammunition
A common denominator which comprises all kinds of weaponry that can be sent in a
ballistic or guided path, such as projectiles, shells, torpedoes, bombs, guided
weapons with the necessary charges, igniters, fuses, detonators and charges,
chemical charges or charges made of other substances. In a wide sense, the term is
not limited to weaponry as mentioned above, but includes in addition all explosives
and pyrotechnical devices that can be used to illuminate, salute, blow out, speed
increase, speed reduction separation, ejection of personnel, operation of materiel or
stopping mechanisms, demolition, deception, exercises, training, guarding, hunting
or sport.
Authority
The competence a person, unit or equivalent has to bind itself to or decide over
others (make decisions).
Avalanche risk area
Terrain where avalanches may occur. All snow-covered areas of a mountainside or
slope, where the difference in height exceeds 5 metres, where the sloping is steeper
than 30oand where there is no dense forest.
Barrel safe fuse
Barrel safe fuses are fuses constructed in such manner that the projectile cannot
explode in the barrel or at the muzzle and thereby causing injury to personnel.
Blank ammunition
Blank ammunition is all types of ammunition meant to mark or simulate gunfire.
Blank ammunition normally has no projectile that leaves the barrel.
24 Rev-04
Commanding Officer (C.O.)

Commanding Officers can be found at several levels of the organization, depending
on the position. In daily terms the commanding officer is normally meant Battalion
Commander (Army/Air Force) or Squadron Commander (Navy). However in some
cases in UD 2-1 the term Commanding Officer is used on lower levels such as
Company Commander/Squadron Commander/Battery Commander (Army), Captain
(Navy) or Battery Commander/Squadron Commander (Air Force).
Unit weapons Chap-0
With unit weapons are meant MG3, 12.7mm heavy machine gun, M72, 84 mm
recoilless rifle, 40mm GUR and ERYX, TOW, 81mm Mortar
Duds
Duds are ammunition which after having been fired, thrown, dropped or tried to be
ignited in other fashions, did not function normally in use. In addition, the following
are to be considered as duds:
- Ammunition that has been damaged in fire or tossed around due to explosions
Damaged ammunition that can represent a risk
- Ammunition that has been found.
Detonation
A detonation begins with a shockwave, a condensing shock, caused by an initiating
device, for instance a blasting cap. This shockwave moves through the explosive
compound at a speed which is higher than the speed of sound, and is followed by the
chemical transformation. The speed of the detonation varies from about 1500 9000
m/s.
Detonator
A component in an explosive train which can be made to detonate either by an
electrical or mechanical impulse, by a flame or glowing fragments from a
deflagrating substance. Its purpose is to initiate a stable detonation in the following
link in the train
Directive
Those rules which decide the rights and duties of personnel, or rules that dictate how
sub units are to perform their tasks.
Exercise ammunition
Exercise ammunition is ammunition with no explosive, pyrotechnical or other
dangerous substances, and is meant for use in loading exercises, drills etc.
Explosives
A substance or mix of substances whose purpose is to initiate an explosive or
pyrotechnical effect. The term does not apply to an explosive atmosphere of gas,
vapor or dust.
Explosion
The mechanical and heat effect from the chemical reaction within an explosive
substance during a detonation or deflagration in a closed confinement.
Rev-04 25
Explosive ordnance disposal

By Explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) is meant all duties connected to the search,
tagging, reporting, removing or destroying of duds or other ammunition that must be
removed from a shooting range or areas outside a shooting range.
Removing/destruction of improvised explosive devices(IED) is considered as EOD.
Destroying discarded/out-dated ammunition is not considered EOD
Fail
A fail is a total failure to function during firing. A fail may be caused by a faulty
triggering device or a faulty ignition charge or main charge. A fail is in itself not
dangerous. However, if it occurs during shooting and the weapon is very
hot(especially automatic weapons), special precautions apply dependent on the type
of weapon. Since a fail is not immediately distinguishable from an afterburner, it
must be treated as an afterburner until it has been determined whether it is a fail or
not.
Firing position
The position from where you fire.
Firing range
A limited area where you can have one or more firing positions
Firing sector
The firing sector (right, left limitation) gives the greatest (smallest) sideways
horizontal traversing and is either given as a direction in the terrain, as a compass
direction or as an aiming point and with a horizontal traversing from this.
Fully restricted ammunition
Ammunition which is prohibited to issue and use.
Gel
Gel means a fire hazardous material which has a half solid coningenncy, usually a
liquid which has been added a thickening agent
High Explosives
An explosive substance which in normal use gives the characteristic effects of a
detonation.
Improvised Explosive Devices (terror bombs)
Improvised Explosive Devices (IED). By improvised explosives (terror bombs) is
meant, charges made and placed or planned placed, made to kill, disfigure, harass or
disturb persons or groups of personnel, or to destroy and/or occupy private or public
property. They contain explosives or an explosive, gaseous, pyrotechnical and/or
igniting materials. They can consist of or contain military materiel, but are very often
made from non-military materials.
Infantery weapon
Weapons with a calibre of .50/12.7mm or smaller
Intermediary charge
The intermediary charge is a high explosive part of the explosive train between the
26 Rev-04
detonator and the main explosive charge. Its purpose is to enhance the shockwave
from the detonator in a manner that ensures a reliable initiation of the main charge
Legal authority
The bases which give the competence to reach a legally binding norm. (for instance
law, instruction, the armed forces command authority, right of association and
instruction, right of ownership, practice, superior directive, agreements etc.)
Mines Chap-0
A mine is an explosive device constructed to be placed under the ground, on the
ground or above the ground and which is triggered by the presence, proximity or
contact with a person, vehicle, aircraft, vessel or a landing craft.
Misfire
A misfire is an explosive device which in the course of trying to set it off, does not
fire/detonate
Non-Explosive but dangerous substance
Substances which when used in combination with certain ammunition types can
cause special effects, for example white phosphorus.
Professional authority
Professional authority involves:
- the authority to decide and control professional issues within a specific area of
expertise.
- the authority to adopt rules and regulations
- the authority to coordinate functions and activities across the chain of
command.
- consulting, coordinating and executive activity
Publisher
The person, unit or equivalent who is delegated the responsibility to publish a
directive.
Pyrotechnical ammunition
Ammunition which in addition to containing combustible substances also contains
chemical ingredients that cause fire, light, smoke or sound. Pyrotechnical
ammunition can under certain conditions, be explosive.
Restricted ammunition
Ammunition with restrictions in use.
Safety stop
Safety stoppers are used to hinder a weapon to be directed too high, too low or
outside the allowed sector limitations. Safety stops can be made from logs, sandbags,
peat (turf), firing stand etc. placed in a manner so that the weapon can not be directed
in the wrong direction. This must be checked by using the aims.
Self ignition
Self ignition of shells and grenades in a loaded weapon means that one or more
Rev-04 27
explosive components ignite due to high temperature in the chamber. In such cases it
is very likely that the booster charge and the igniter are set off prior to the explosives
in the fuse or the shell. If this is the case, the firing will be in a normal fashion for the
weapon. However, it should be considered most important to avoid loading hot
weapons, unless firing can be done immediately after loading. Under no
circumstances is the round to be left in the chamber longer than the prescribed time
for each weapon type.
Shooting
With shooting is also meant the use of blanks, throwing of hand grenades,
demolition and other similar exercises.
Short range shell
A shell in which everything but the shell bottom is made from plastic. The shell
casing and the projectile is cast as one piece with a breakage point that makes sure
that the projectile breaks loose from the casing and is fired in a ballistic path. At
short ranges the projectile has about the same ballistic properties as a live round.
Even though the light weight of the projectile results in a much shorter range, and the
safety zone is considerably shorter, the short range shell is still considered a live
round. Short range shell with tracer is the same ammunition with an aluminium
tracer cap embedded in the projectile
Simunition
Training system for hand weapons, such as MP-5 and pistols. The system can be
used both for single side or two sided exercises, and will when hit, give a colour
marking of the hit point. The system can be attached to service weapons or
permanently mounted weapons to be used in simunition exercises. Ammunition for
MP-5 and pistols is the army 9mm casing with an undercalibred, easily deformable,
hollow light weight plastic projectile which contains a soap based colour. It is to be
considered fresh produce, since the colour after some time will dry up. Dried up
ammunition is not suitable for two sided exercises. At short range the projectiles
trajectory is almost equal to the trajectory of a live round. It is absolutely necessary
to use protective equipment when using Simunition. Without protection a hit from
the ammunition may cause serious injury. The ammunition must not be confused
with Simunition COT, which is a live short range round.
Target area
The target area is a part of a training field where fire can be directed from a specific
firing position, with predefined types of weapons. The limitations of the target area
are to be defined in the shooting range instructions for each specific shooting range,
and will, to the extent that it is practically possible, be visibly marked in the terrain.
The target area is to be chosen so that the risk for duds is as low as possible. In the
target area, targets are established based on the needs and possibilities for the user.
Based on the target area, the dangerous area is defined by using the safety
template(s) for the weapon(s) allowed at the specific range.
UTM Indication ammunition
Training system for handguns, such as the MP-5 and pistols. The system can be used
for both one-sided or two sided exercises, and will when used give a color marking
28 Rev-04
for the hit point. The weapon system can be attached to the service weapon or placed
permanently on weapons dedicated for UTM. Ammunition for the MP-5 and pistols
is the army 9mm casing with an under calibre, easily deformable, hollow light
weight plastic projectile which contains a lipstick based water soluble colour. At
short ranges the projectiles trajectory is almost equal to the trajectory of a live
round. It is absolutely necessary to use protective equipment when using UTM.
Without protection a hit from the ammunition may cause serious injury. The
ammunition must not be mixed up with UTM short rang Chap-0
Rev-04 29
1 COMMON SAFETY RULES AND

REGULATIONS
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Land based military activities - Risk
Figure: 1.1
84 mm "Carl Gustav" Recoilless gun
1.1.1.1 Introduction
Land-based military activity involves great risk. In order to realistically educate and
train soldiers and divisions, we must be aware of risk. A prerequisite to achieving
this is to establish a culture of risk-based approaches to activities. This requires the
ability to assess risk in advance of, and during, the implementation of activities,
while also demonstrating the ability to handle risk at a subsequent stage of such
activities. The party responsible for the implementation of activities shall be capable
of establishing a picture of the relevant risk, i.e. a risk picture.
The purpose of risk assessment is to reduce risk to an acceptable level that is in
direct proportion to the benefit achieved from resolving a task.
Risk assessment shall be carried out before, during and after all
activities/operations. The assessment shall be conducted at both superior and
subordinate levels within an appropriate structure, thereby ensuring that the
parties carrying out the activities/operations also implement a risk assessment.
1.1.2 Risk assessment
1.1.2.1 Definitions
Safety is defined as an absence of conditions that lead to undesirable events,
deviations or near-accidents/accidents.
30 Rev-04
Risk is defined as the possibility that undesirable events may occur. Or: probability x
consequence.
Risk assessment is defined as the process that identifies, assesses and manages
different risks.
1.1.2.2 Risk assessment 5-step process schematic
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5

Identify Evaluate Develope Initiate Supervise
dangers The dangers actions og actions and
and make evaluate
decition actions Chap-1
Figure: 1.2
Risk process
1.1.2.3 5-step process contents

1. Identify hazards:
a. Analyse the task.
b. Preliminary risk assessment: list all possible hazards associated with
the different phases of the operation.
c. List possible reasons why the hazards arise.
2. Assess the hazards:

a. Determine the consequences of the various hazards:
1. Slight in general, absence of consequence.
2. Low/minor slight consequence.
3. Moderate may result in minor injury, minor sickness, minor
damage to materiel.
4. Severe may result in serious injury, sickness, damage to
materiel, etc. Severe injury is defined as: any injury, physical
or mental, which leads to a permanent or long term inability to
work. Refer to the routines for notification of cases of severe
injury described at www.arbeidstilsynet.no.
5. Critical/very serious may result in death or serious injury, loss
of vital materiel.
b. Determine the probability of the various hazards occurring:

1. Very improbable very unlikely or unlikely to occur.
2. Low probability incident will seldom occur.
3. Moderate probability reason to expect that the hazard will
occur at some point in time.
4. High Probability likely to happen/occur.
Rev-04 31
5. Very high probability will occur immidiately or in the course of

a short period of time.
c. Preliminary resolutions regarding different hazards based on

consequences and probability.
3. Develop measures that determine the remaining risks and make decition to;
a. Develope measures against all risks:
1. Prioritize measures against dangers with a high risk.
2. Determine the remaining risk.
3. Make preliminary decition.
4. Implement corrective actions.

a. Apply corrective actions.
b. communicate the measures to every level of the organisation;
5. Monitor and evaluate the measures;

a. Ensure that the measures are carried out and complied with at all levels.
b. Be aware that changes may take place and that adjustments may need to
be made.
c. Implement corrective actions, if required.
Appendix 24 is used in the practical implementation of the risk assessment.

1.1.3 Risk management
1.1.3.1 UD2-1 provides recommendations, frameworks and limitations in respect of how
risk shall be managed. Risk management is based upon:
- Professional authority, in which a research community has assessed the risk of
a given activity in order to establish a standard for the management of the
relevant activity.
- Experiential learning in which recommendations, frameworks and limitations
manifest after, for example, risk areas resulting from events, mishaps or
accidents have been revealed.
- Risk assessment in accordance with steps 1-5.
The Norwegian Armed Forces shall, to the best of its ability, strive to detect risk
before activities are undertaken, thus ensuring the safest possible implementation of
such activities.
The individual responsible for carrying out activities shall use the stipulated
framework for risk management and must adapt it to the risk picture that has
emerged via the risk assessment. This may involve additional measures to those
described in UD 2-1. Risk management does NOT imply a reduction in specified
safety measures.
32 Rev-04
1.1.4 The responsibilities and duties of personnel
Chap-1
Figure: 1.3
Issuing orders
1.1.4.1 General
In order to reduce risk when carrying out activities, all participating personnel,
officers, recruits and privates shall:
- be aware of the responsibility they have towards their superiors, others and
themselves
- possess thorough knowledge of the materiel they will handle and be aware of
the risks that may result from improper use
- exercise care during all service that involves the handling of materiel, the
implementation of techniques and compliance with safety regulations
- report any breach of prevailing safety regulations
Before any activity commences, each individual participant (including spectators and
observers) shall be familiar with the safety regulations with which the individual has
a duty to comply. During training and in specific briefings, all personnel shall
receive instruction in the required sections of the safety regulations.
Officers shall be familiar with their specific duties. Furthermore, officers shall be
familiar with the responsibilities and duties of the individual, as well as the
provisions for the individual types of materiel.
1.1.4.2 The responsibilities and duties of the individual
Individual, in this instance, is defined as: Any military personnel, including officers,
recruits or privates, or civilians who, directly or indirectly, participate in the activity
(also applies to spectators and observers).
No personnel are permitted to handle materiel, weapons, ammunition or explosives
on their own:
- before the individual possesses adequate knowledge and proficiency in the
Rev-04 33
safe handling of materiel, as well as an awareness of the safety regulations

that apply to the use of the relevant materiel and technique
- if the individual is under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs
Anyone who feels unqualified shall notify his/her immediate superior.
The individual shall demonstrate caution in the use of materiel, ammunition and
explosives, in order to prevent accidents occurring. The individual has a duty to
intervene in the case of any improper use of materiel, ammunition and explosives
that contravenes prevailing safety regulations.
1.1.4.3 The responsibilities and duties of the individual officer
Officers in charge of education and training shall possess a thorough knowledge of
the handling and use of the materiel and techniques in which they are providing
instruction, as well as the relevant (central and local) safety regulations, cf. approval
system for officers and recruits. An officer shall notify his/her immediate superior in
the event that he/she feels unqualified to plan, lead or implement activities. In this
respect, a particular responsibility is incumbent on the individual officer.
Prior to the commencement of activities, the party in charge of education/training
(e.g. company commander or similar) shall ensure that the individual possesses a
satisfactory level of knowledge in the use and handling of materiel/techniques, as
well as being familiar with the relevant safety regulations.
Before undertaking any weapons instruction (for example, knowledge of weapons,
sighting practice, trigger, commissioning and de-commissioning, close combat, etc.),
the relevant officer (instructor) shall ascertain, through inspection, that all weapons
and equipment are unloaded.
Officers assigned as exercise leaders, firing commanders, blasting commanders,
safety commanders, safety officers, safety controllers, etc., have a duty to familiarise
themselves with provisions relevant to the particular officer.
All officers shall be familiar with risk assessment methodology. All officers shall be
capable of carrying out the risk assessment process and of implementing this for
every type of activity for which they are responsible.
1.1.4.4 The responsibilities and duties of the commander
Every commanding officer responsible for the planning and implementation of
activities, or who assigns an activity for implementation, shall ensure that:
- assigned officers possess the appropriate skills and are qualified for the task.
- new assigned personnel is given the appropriate training to be abel to fully
function in his/her position
- personnel are capable of applying the prevailing safety regulations for the
materiel and techniques being used
- suitable training areas/facilities/courses are at their disposal
- safety instructions for the assigned training area (shooting range, firing zone,
facility, etc.) are made available
- correct ammunition, materiel and other resources are at their disposal
- officers are given sufficient time to prepare
34 Rev-04
- among officers who have been assigned to participate in activities, there is a

minimum number with a blasting certificate who possess proficiency in the
detonation of unexploded shells, when such situations arise. Divisions without
personnel who possess a blasting certificate and the necessary proficiency,
will be assigned such support
- a medical service plan has been prepared and made known and designated
medical materiel and equipment is used
1.1.5 Activity management
Chap-1
Figure: 1.4
Patrol out on mission
1.1.5.1 General
Activities shall only take place under the direction of an exercise leader. Exercise
leader, in this instance, is defined as any qualified officer, regardless of rank. The
immediate superior commanding officer shall ensure that the officer functioning as
exercise leader has attained the required level of competence and is qualified to
direct the specified activity.
Depending on the scope of the activity, the exercise leader may assign (or have
assigned) the following assistants who may be given limited responsibilities:
- Range officer
- Safety officer in charge (Safety officer)
During combined activities, it is normal to have a Safety officer in charge,
responsible for the whole activity. He will then have the necessary number of
safety officers, safety controllers and safety guard posts under his command
- Safety officer
- Safety controller
- Safety guard post
Rev-04 35
- Target officer with the necessary target personnel

The officer conducting the exercise and all safety personnel will carry a red
arm-band
The officer conducting the exercise may in the case of activities with less scope, take
over the duties of the Safety officer, safety commander, safety officer, safety
controller and target commander, insofar as this does not obstruct the activity or pose
a risk to safety. In instances where an exercise leader possesses a blasting certificate,
he/she may also take charge of the detonation of unexploded shells and bombs.
1.1.5.2 The Officer conducting the exercise
The Officer conducting the exercise is responsible for planning and directing the
implementation of activities in such a way that the activities do not contravene the
prescribed safety regulations and instructions. The exercise leader has special duties
that must be complied with, including:
- ensuring that the required supplementary provisions to the prevailing safety
instructions are carried out, based on the relevant risk picture
- studying the provisions that apply to the exercise leader, stipulated for specific
activities in other parts of this regulation
- notifying participating personnel (also including spectators and observers) and
assistants of the relevant safety regulations and instructions that apply to the
activity
- ensuring that all personnel are equipped with ear protection in accordance
with provisions
- where relevant, determining the firing position, field of fire, hazardous zone,
ammunition dump, resting zone (e.g. for non-participating personnel), OP, etc.
- setting up roadblocks, issuing warnings and implementing safety measures as
specified in the safety instructions
- ensuring that first aid equipment is to hand as well as the means of transport
for the transportation of the injured, and medical personnel, in accordance
with the provisions of the relevant activity, as well as local instructions.
- be in possession of fire-fighting equipment as specified in the safety
instructions for the relevant shooting range and training ground/training
facility. To the extent to which it is feasible, the risk of fire shall be reduced as
follows:
- by making an appropriate choice of training ground/field of fire
- appropriate choice, use and handling of ammunition and materiel
If a fire should occur in an area defined as an unexploded shell area, all
personnel shall leave the vicinity immediately. Under no circumstances is it
permitted to carry out fire fighting with personnel in such an area. In the event
of fire, an unexploded shell area shall be cordoned off and the fire permitted
to burn itself out within this area.
- cease all firing, abort any activity, when this is necessary for reasons of safety
36 Rev-04
- where relevant, ensure that explosives and priming devices are in place for the
blasting of unexploded shells and bombs and, at any given time, be aware of
the location of officers who possess blasting certificates
- where relevant, ensure that unexploded shells and bombs are detonated
immediately, or as soon as activity has ceased
- if special conditions should make the detonation of shell(s) and bombs
unfeasible on the same day that activity is in progress, a report shall be
submitted as soon as possible to the administrative commander, the area
marked and a sentry duty considered
- where relevant, ensure that a report detailing use of ammunition/explosives is Chap-1
submitted after firing/blasting (Form 750), refer to appendix 6AE
The Officer conducting the exercise shall be present throughout the exercise in such
a manner that he/she is able to carry out the assigned duties described above. If the
exercise leader is assigned to other tasks not included in the exercise, a new exercise
leader must be appointed.
1.1.5.3 Shooting Range officer/ demolition officer
Shooting range officer and demolition officer are appointed among qualified
officers, qualified NCOs and enlisted men. Enlisted men may be authorized as
"shooting range officer" by the CO. This requires a minimum 2 years relevant duty
as an enlisted soldier, and that the preson has the necessary personal and professional
competence
Recruited personnel in charge of firing/blasting shall also comply with the provisions
of item 1.1.4.3: The responsibilities and duties of the individual officer.
The shooting range officer/ demolition officer is the leader of a special part of the
exercise.
He is given his responsibility, his duties and his area of work by the officer
conducting the exercise. The duties of the shooting range officer appear in chapter 3:
Firing and specific provisions for the respective weapons. The demolition experts
duties appear in item 2.4.2.3 .
1.1.5.4 Safety officer in charge and safety officer
Safety officers are ordered among qualified officers (or among qualified NCOs). It is
normal to order one safety officer for each ongoing activity. If two activities are
executed in close proximity of each other, there may be, if there is a good overview
of both activities, ordered a joint safety officer for both activities.
If the same activity is so widely dispersed, that one safety officer cannot lead the
safety duty at all activity sites, an additional safety officer(s) is be posted. If more
than one safety officer is appointed, a safety officer in charge is to be ordered as
head of all safety officers involved.
The safety officer in charge has the responsibility for the safety at all sites of activity.
The safety officer in charge has the responsibility for the activity at the site he is
ordered to. He has at his disposal the necessary safety controllers and safety guard
posts.
The safety officer in charge answers to the officer conducting the exercise and is
Rev-04 37
responsible for the following:

- that the safety officers and safety controllers know their duties
- all activity is stopped or reduced when necessary for reasons of safety
- that all firing is within the set firing sector and set limitation in range
- that the ammunition is controlled in the prescribed manner
- that no personnel is within the danger area
In addition the safety officer in charge and the safety officer are bound to follow the
rules and regulations in chapter 3 for each specific weapon.
The safety officer in charge is the superior officer in matters concerning safety
issues.
The safety officer in charge shall be located where he/she can most easily direct the
activity. The safety officer in charge shall, if possible, locate him/herself in the
vicinity of the officer conducting the exercise or be in direct communication with the
exercise leader. Communication shall normally be established between the safety
commander, safety officer and safety controller. The safety officer in charge may,
when appropriate, take over the duties of the safety controller.
1.1.5.5 Safety controller
The required number of safety controllers is assigned from among qualified officers,
sergeants, corporals and privates. Officers participating in the activity may not
simultaneously render service as a safety controller, with the exceptions that appear
later in the individual section. Safety controllers shall not be assigned additional
tasks.
The safety controller has a responsibility towards the safety commander (safety
officer) for ensuring that safety regulations are complied with. The designated duties
of the safety commander (safety officer) also apply to the safety controller, similarly
to the special duties of the safety controller for the individual activity/materiel type,
described later in this regulation. The safety controller shall not leave the weapon or
the zone to which he/she has been assigned as long as the activity is in progress.
1.1.5.6 Safety guard post
Safety guard post , in accordance with the specific provisions of the exercise
leader/safety commander, will be assigned a limited task, such as:
- preventing anyone from entering the danger zone
- reporting when an aircraft or vessel enters the danger zone
- reporting any fire
- drawing attention to signals (signs)
1.1.5.7 Target officer
The target officer has a responsibility towards the officer conducting the exercise for
ensuring that targets are correctly positioned and that the target personnel's safety has
been safeguarded. The target officer shall locate him/herself where he/she can best
direct and control the service and shall, if possible, maintain communication with the
officer conducting the exercise and safety officer. The target officer has the
38 Rev-04
following special duties:

- prepare and maintain order with targets and fire marking(s)
- instruct target personnel
- notify the officer conducting the exercise when the target arrangement is
ready and target personnel are safely under cover
- notify (give a signal) when the activity must cease for reasons of safety
- take note of, or be informed about, unexploded shells, as well as notifying
superiors
- when necessary, cordon off the zone if an unexploded shell has been located
Chap-1
1.1.6 Reporting
1.1.6.1 All personnel shall be ordered to:
- report any undesirable events, deviations or near-accidents using the
mandatory reporting systems
- report any circumstances that may result in changes and improvements to the
prevailing central and local safety regulations
Rev-04 39
2 AMMUNITION AND DUDS, MINES

AND DEMOLITIONS
2.1 USING, HANDLING AND CHECKING
AMMUNITION
Figure: 2.1
Explosion
2.1.1 In general
2.1.1.1 For reasons of safety, restrictions may be imposed on the use of ammunition. Such
restrictions are made known through Ammunisjonsrestriksjoner for Forsvaret
(Restrictions on the use of ammunition in the Norwegian Defence Forces), or by
other means of communication. Before a type of ammunition is put to use, it is to be
checked whether any restrictions have been imposed on its use. This paragraph does
not address regulations for storage, transport, check, maintenance and destruction of
cast-off or discarded ammunition. (Detailed instructions regarding these matters can
be found in the "Retningslinjer for ammunisjonstjenesten i Forsvaret" (Guidelines
for the ammunition service for the armed forces).) Regulations excepted are clearly
stated. Before firing commences the ammunition is to be checked and prepped
according to the regulations for the particular ammunition- and weapon type. See
further paragraphs in these regulations, weapon manuals and technical manuals. It is
forbidden to:
40 Rev-04
- use any other type of ammunition than the one that the regulations list for the
type of weapon that is to be fired
- use ammunition for other purposes or in ways that are not listed in the
prevailing technical manuals
- practice live ammunition loading except during firing practice
- load the weapon (put in the magazine/link ) before being ordered to, or before
permission has been granted. While loading (putting in the magazine/link),
weapons are to be pointed in a safe direction
- separating ammunition, fuses or other ammunition components is prohibited,
unless the Norwegian Defence Logistic Organisation, General Material
Munition (FLO FELLESKAP AMM AMMSIKKERHET) has authorized it.
During EOD duty, while training or in live missions,
ammunition/fuses/components may be separated, under the condition that
Chap-2
authorized procedures, publications and tools are being used. All procedures
are to be in writing and authorized by the NDLO, General Material Munition
(FLO FELLESKAP AMM AMMSIKKERHET) before separating
ammunition, fuses or other ammunition components commences. Empty
ammunition components that can be used in training or for educational
purposes are to be marked and accounted for according to the authorization
for the mission. The personnel leading the EOD duty, as well as EOD
personnel in live missions, who may have to perform such enterprises, are to
have a demolition certificate in accordance with STANAG 2389.
- Testing ammunition without authorization from the NDLO, General Material
Munition (FLO FELLESKAP AMM AMMSIKKERHET) is prohibited.
2.1.2 The responsibilities of the Discipline Authority
2.1.2.1 The NDLO, General Material Munition (FLO FELLESKAP AMM
AMMSIKKERHET) are responsible for carrying out routine ammunition checks.
The professional authority is responsible for presenting regulations concerning
handling and checking ammunition, maintenance, storage, transport, and they decide
which regulations are to be observed when it comes to reporting after ammunition
has been used. The professional authority is to ascertain that information about
restricted ammunition is distributed. When it comes to ammunition safety
information, this is normally communicated through the Restrictions on the use of
ammunition in the Norwegian Defence Forces. When distributing restricted
ammunition the ammunition store is to alert the receiving unit that the ammunition is
restricted, and provide the unit with a copy of the said restriction.
2.1.3 The responsibilities of the User unit"
2.1.3.1 When ammunition is distributed the receiving unit is responsible for checking that
the ammunition is of the correct type. When receiving restricted ammunition, it must
be checked that a copy of the particular restriction is enclosed. The receiving unit is
to ascertain that restrictions that might be imposed at a later time are duly registered
and the ammunition marked. The receiving unit is responsible for making sure that
the ammunition is stored according to the regulations. When the ammunition is
Rev-04 41
distributed further, the exercising unit is to be made aware of possible restrictions

and receive a copy of these.
2.1.4 The exercising units responsibilities
2.1.4.1 The commander of the exercising unit is to pick qualified personnel for fetching
ammunition. At the ammunition store, the personnel must ensure that they know all
possible restrictions on the use of the ammunition, and report such restrictions to the
unit commander. Before firing, the ammunition is to be checked and prepared
according to the regulations, see other relevant UD 2-1 paragraphs, weapons
regulations and technical information, particularly sections concerning safety devices
and detonating devices (fuses).
2.1.4.2 Ammunition that has been taken out of its original packaging is to be put back in the
original packaging when not used. During exercises, ammunition is to be placed
where it cannot be subjected to strains that may cause accidents. Ammunition is to
be handled carefully, and must be protected against humidity and high temperatures.
2.1.5 Returning ammunition
Figure: 2.2
Desarming
2.1.5.1 Ammunition left after finished exercises, is to be returned to the delivering

ammunition depot. Prior to returning ammunition an inspection is to be carried out,
where the following conditions are to be checked :
- That the ammunition is undamaged and without missing parts
- That all transport safety devices and other protection measures are in place.
42 Rev-04
- That the ammunition that is being returned is in its original packaging , and
that the LOT numbers on the ammunition and on the packaging match.
- That the contents of packages that are not full, have been packed so that they
cannot get damaged in transport or handling
2.1.6 Returning empties
2.1.6.1 Packaging which one is obligated to return (such as pallets, boxes, cartridges, etc.) is
to be undamaged, clean and dry. Empty casings are to be returned clean and dry. It is
allowed to use empty ammunition boxes as packaging when returning empty casings
and other empties that are to be returned. The boxes are to be marked with a label
(form 755-1(2)) which shows which unit has checked the empties for live
ammunition and explosives. The person signing the form attached to the box is
responsible for ensuring that there are no explosives in that box. Also, the superior
officer is to sign the attached form, confirming that the check has been performed. A
Chap-2
duplicate of the form is to be placed inside the box. The forms and transfer papers
are to be signed with Free form explosives. The receiving unit is to check the
empties prior to storing. Empties must not be stored with live ammunition and
explosives. Compare with "Retningslinjer for ammunisjonstjenesten i Forsvaret"
(Guidelines for the ammunition service for the armed forces) item 3.2.1.19
2.1.7 Irregularities when using/handling ammunition
2.1.7.1 During firing practice with live and/or blank ammunition, if any of the listed points
should occur:
- 2 misfires or
- 2 consecutive duds from one weapon during the same firing practice, or
- 2 consecutive ammunition failures, or if
- the average number of duds exceeds 10% of the total number of
shots/launches/blasts
the exercise is to be stopped.
2.1.8 Action when duds occur
2.1.8.1 If the officer in charge of firing believes that the cause for duds might be:
- unfavourable impact angle
- Unfavourable impact area
- Too small target or bad target material
The cause should be sought eliminated by trying:
- A new firing stand and /or new firing direction (impact area)
- Larger and /or more solid target material
If the irregularities still occur during firing, the shooting must stop according to the
guidelines mentioned in pt 2.1.7.1 and the incident is to be reported (see pt 2.1.11.1).
2.1.8.2 If the officer conducting the exercise is of the opinion that the ammunition from a
specific LOT causes misfires, the shooting shall not continue unless there is
ammunition from a different LOT available for use. The same goes for demolition
Rev-04 43
exercises etc. if short round or other irregularities occur. The incident is to be

reported as specified in pt 2.1.11.1
2.1.8.3 During firing with higher densities of artillery and/or with mortars the Officer in
charge of firing, is to assess whether or not the shooting should be stopped,
depending on the number of observed duds.
2.1.9 Action when misfires occur during shooting exercises
2.1.9.1 If a misfire is caused by a fault in the weapon itself , the officer conducting the
exercise exchanges the weapon and the shooting can continue. If the weapon
continues to misfire , shooting is to be stopped according to the guidelines given in
pt 2.1.7.1 and the incident is to be reported according to pt 2.1.11.1.
2.1.10 Reporting after shooting/ demolition/ throwing hand grenades
2.1.10.1 In general
After firing ammunition of any calibre, after blasting, throwing hand grenades, etc.,
any exercising unit must fill in form 750 Firing and environmental report when
using ammunition/explosives (see Appendix 6). For missiles, special regulations
apply when it comes to reporting each individual according to system. The report is
to be as accurate as possible when it comes to:
- Ammunition type, catalogue number, lot number, total number of
shells/grenades fired/thrown, and number of duds, misfires or other
irregularities.
- Weather conditions, temperature and the condition of the impact area
whether possible duds were blasted or not.
If one or several duds have not been blasted, 6 or 8-digit map references are to be
provided, to indicate where each dud is located. If any irregularities should occur,
these are to be reported according to 2.1.11.1 After firing practice is over, the
information is to be registered in the FISBasis web portal, digital form 750
(DBL_750). When the firing range or training area has been booked on
Remedy/KOS and the timeframe for firing has been exceeded, an e-mail will
automatically be sent to the officer in charge of firing/officer conducting the exercise
with a link to DBL_750, so that the used ammunition can be registered. This link has
to be used, in order to register the ID of the booking and prevent further reminders. If
the firing range or training area has not been booked through Remedy/KOS, the
following link is to be used: http://guru.ffi.mil.no/dbl750/
An example of an already filled out copy of form 750 can be found in Appendix 6b,
which is to be used by foreign units when training on Norwegian firing ranges.
2.1.11 Reports of irregularities when using ammunition/explosives
2.1.11.1 If irregularities should occur or be discovered while using ammunition and
explosives (regardless of calibre, see 2.1.7.1, 2.1.8.1, 2.1.10.1) these are to be
reported as soon as possible. The report is to be written on form 750 (additional
missile report) and registered on the FISBasis web portal (DBL_750), see 2.1.10.1.
It is important that the form is filled in accurately and correctly.
Should accidents or irregularities involving ammunition or explosives occur, which
cause injury to personnel and/or materiel, this is to be reported preliminarily to the
44 Rev-04
NDLO, General Material Munition/"FLO FELLESKAP AMM AMMSIKKERHET"

as soon as possible, on phone number +47 61 19 12 30/ +47 62 51 57 20, mobile
phone +47 992 15 740/41.
Reports may still be sent to the NDLO, General Material Munition (FLO
FELLESKAP AMM AMMSIKKERHET), use fax number +47 61 19 03 83/+47 62
51 57 25, or E-mail: FLO FELLESKAP AMM SKYTERAPPORTER, but only in
addition to the electronic registration in DNL_750.
2.1.12 Smoking and the use of open fire
2.1.12.1 Smoking and the use of open fire are forbidden within a 30 m radius of ammunition.
Exempted from this rule is blank ammunition and small amounts of ammunition for
hand weapons used during field exercises. Practicality and common sense must be
applied .
2.1.13 Ammunition - Test and trials
2.1.13.1 Tests and trials carried out by the professional authority at the Norwegian Defence Chap-2
Logistic Organisation are given dispensation from UD 2-1 regulations. A detailed
testing programme is to be established, in which the element of risk is to be reduced
to an absolute minimum. For safety regulations when testing authorized ammunition
and weapon systems, see Appendix 22.
2.1.14 Rules and regulations for Range Officer
2.1.14.1 Before firing
Check technical category/ restrictions and visually inspect the ammunition (NATO
catalogue number/Lot) that is to be used.
Transport ammunition according to classification and compatibility according to the
regulations in force.
Observe the regulations for how to handle and how to open the packaging.
Follow the required instructions for conducting firing (weapon, ammunition, firing
range/training area).
Bring the printed version of BL750 - Firing and environmental report when using
ammunition/explosives
2.1.14.2 After firing
Ammunition that has not been used is to be put back in its original packaging and
marked correctly, before it is returned to the ammunition store.
Returning packaging and empties.
Packaging that is to be returned must be empty of explosives.
Packaging is to be checked and clearly marked Empty of explosives, date, and
who performed the check/signature.
Register firing results in manual BL750.
Note: The correct Niin/Lot/technical category has to be used.
- The result is to be filed on the Environmental Database (MBD) web portal, a
link will be e-mailed on FisBasis if the firing range/training area was booked
through Remedy/KOS.
- If the firing range/training area was not booked through Remedy/KOS, use
Rev-04 45
this link: http://guru.ffi.mil.no/dbl750/
2.2 DUDS, MOVEMENT WITHIN FIRING

RANGES AND EXPLOSIVE ORDONANCE
DISPOSAL(EOD)
Figure: 2.3
Duds
2.2.1 Duds
2.2.1.1 After being fired/thrown, shells may fail to explode due to a malfunctioning
percussion primer. The reason why shells fail to explode, as well as the hazard level
of an dud, are difficult to determine. Duds can be extremely sensitive and the
slightest movement can cause them to detonate with full impact. Duds that have lain
in place for years are equally dangerous. Therefore, the general rule is:
DO NOT TOUCH THEM
MARK THE LOCATION WHERE THE UNEXPLODED
SHELL WAS FOUND
NOTIFY A HIGHER AUTHORITY OF THE FIND
2.2.1.2 Handling/moving duds
A dud is usually destroyed in situ by personnel possessing a blasting certificate and
expertise in EOD. Personnel moving through a zone in which duds are located, or are
presumed to be located, should exercise caution.
Use of an open flame or starting a bonfire in an dud zone is forbidden.
2.2.1.3 The Handbook for EOD in the Norwegian Armed Forces EOD in firing ranges
(HEOD-SF) specifies which type of unexploded shell may be moved (low risk
element). If, in exceptional circumstances, an unexploded shell of a higher risk
46 Rev-04
element has to be touched or moved, precise knowledge of the ammunitions

construction and effect is necessary in order to assess the hazard level of the shell.
This type of assessment and any subsequent moving of an unexploded shell may be
undertaken by personnel possessing a Class III B or III F blasting certificate, or
personnel given the authority to undertake such an operation.
2.2.1.4 Registration and reporting
Personnel should be assigned to grenade observation and/or counting the number of
detonations in order to identify any duds and ascertain their location. When foreign
divisions are carrying out training exercises on Norwegian firing ranges, a
Norwegian liaison officer should ensure that the above is observed and that a report
is completed and submitted to the firing range administration after cessation of the
training exercises.
In addition, refer to items 2.1.10.1 and 2.1.11.1.
2.2.1.5 Marking Chap-2
Duds located on an army firing range that is in use should be identified with marker
sticks. These should be available on all firing ranges. The sticks should be around
1.5 m long with red or orange painted tips. The length of the painted area should be
20-30 cm. The marker stick should be placed at the location of each individual
unexploded shell or suspicious find.
In all organised searches for duds, marking should be carried out as described in the
Handbook for EOD in the Norwegian Armed Forces EOD in firing ranges
(HEOD-SF).
2.2.1.6 Sentry duty
If deemed necessary, an army sentry duty should be established or the area cordoned
off to prevent people or domestic animals from being killed or injured as a result of
duds. Sentry duty in civilian areas is the responsibility of the civil police authority.
2.2.2 Firing ranges and training grounds
2.2.2.1 Definitions
In the context of EOD, firing ranges and training grounds refers to all firing ranges,
detonation zones and training grounds within, or outside of military areas that are
used by, or have been used by, the Norwegian Armed Forces.
Dud zone refers to a restricted zone in which firing, throwing and detonation
exercises with ammunition and explosives are being carried out, or have been carried
out, which may result/have resulted in duds being present.
2.2.2.2 Movement within firing ranges and training grounds
A distinction is made between:
- military personnel
- civilians
a. Military personnel
Military personnel may move within firing ranges and training grounds in
accordance with the guidelines of the firing range administration. The desired
route should be submitted to the firing range administration for approval.
Personnel should be notified of the risk of duds and of any special measures
Rev-04 47
that should be adopted.

b. Civilians
Civilian personnel may move within firing ranges and training grounds at
their own risk. This is regulated/announced in multi-purpose plans and by
general and special markings, as well as through use of the media.
2.2.2.3 Movement within an unexploded shell zone
A distinction is made between:
- military personnel
- firing range administration personnel
- civilians
a. Military personnel
Any types of manoeuvres and exercises in an unexploded shell zone is
forbidden. Small units are permitted to move across an unexploded shell zone
in order to reach the location where an assignment is to be carried out. This
should be regarded as an administrative movement. Also, the desired route
should be submitted to the firing range administration for approval. Personnel
should be notified of the risk of duds and of any special measures that need to
be adopted.
b. Firing range administration personnel
All work in unexploded shell zones connected with the preparation and
maintenance of target materiel and the installation, should be planned and
directed by personnel possessing a minimum Class I blasting certificate, with
expertise in duds. Standing operational procedures (SOP) or general
operational procedures (GOP) for working in an unexploded shell zone should
be prepared.
c. Civilians
Civilian personnel may move within an unexploded shell zone at their own
risk. This is regulated/announced in multi-purpose plans, as well as by general
and special markings.
2.2.2.4 Firing ranges and unexploded shell zones markings and warnings
The Norwegian Defence Estates Agency is responsible for markings and warnings of
unexploded shell zones in accordance with The handbook for firing ranges and
training grounds.
2.2.2.5 Derestricted unexploded shell zones
These are former zones that have been cleared of duds and derestricted by the
Norwegian Defence Estates Agency. The Norwegian Defence Estates Agency is
responsible for managing unexploded shell zones that will no longer be used for
firing practice.
Manoeuvres and exercises will usually be permitted.
2.2.3 Explosive Ordonance Disposal(EOD)
2.2.3.1 This section contains the provisions for EOD in the Norwegian Armed Forces. The
48 Rev-04
provisions are henceforth divided into three main groups:

- EOD in firing ranges and training grounds
- EOD outside of firing ranges and training grounds
- clearance of improvised explosives (terrorist bombs)
2.2.3.2 Explosives ordonance disposal categories (EOD categories)
EOD assignments are divided into categories according to the order of priority in
which they are to be carried out.
Category classification is dependent upon the potential risk or threat that an incident
represents.
- Category A.
This category covers incidents that represent a serious and immediate risk or
threat towards personnel or vital installations/buildings.
Category A incidents take precedence over all other incidents and clearance Chap-2
operations should be implemented immediately, without consideration of the
risk to clearance personnel.
- Category B
This category covers incidents that represent an indirect risk or threat towards
personnel or vital installations/buildings. Analysis of the assignment should be
undertaken, together with any necessary safe waiting time, in order to reduce
the risk to EOD personnel.
- Category C
This category covers incidents that represent little risk or threat towards
personnel or vital installations/buildings. Analysis and planning of the
assignment should be undertaken. A safe waiting time should be included and
such assignments should be carried out in a way that exposes EOD personnel
to the least possible risk.
- Category D
This category covers incidents that represent no immediate risk or threat
towards personnel or vital installations/buildings. These clearance operations
are planned and carried out at an agreed time. Assignments should be carried
out in way that exposes EOD personnel to little or no risk. Safe waiting time is
included, as described in category C.
2.2.4 EOD in firing ranges and training grounds
2.2.4.1 EOD is planned and implemented in accordance with the Handbook for EOD in the
Norwegian Armed Forces EOD in firing ranges (REF-SF), and Handbook for
EOD EOD in firing ranges (HEOD-SF).
2.2.4.2 Classification
EOD assignments in firing ranges and detonation zones usually fall within category
D, cf. item 2.2.5.2
Rev-04 49
2.2.5 EOD outside of firing ranges and training grounds
Figure: 2.4
Dismantling explosives
2.2.5.1 General
The Norwegian Armed Forces has been assigned the responsibility of rendering
harmless ammunition and explosives of military origin that are found in civilian
areas. Ammunition and explosives that have not been the property of the Norwegian
Armed Forces and ammunition and explosives owned by private individuals, civil
agencies, institutions and companies are, in principle, not the concern of the
Norwegian Armed Forces. Clearance of these types of ammunition and explosives is
usually carried out by the Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Planning
(DSB). It is normally assumed that the civil police authority will be notified of any
ammunition and explosive finds in civilian areas. The civil police authority may,
where necessary, request assistance from the military authority in rendering harmless
such finds. In respect of clearance of ammunition and explosives, attention is drawn
to the separate directive issued by the Norwegian Armed Forces Operational
Headquarters (FOH).
EOD outside of firing ranges and training grounds may fall within any category, cf.
item 2.2.3.2.
2.2.5.3 Responsibility and authority
Responsibility has been assigned to the FOH for rendering harmless ammunition and
explosives found in civilian areas. The FOH should assess the scope of the assistance
required and designate an EOD officer from the Norwegian Armed Forces to provide
assistance to the civil police authority. Norwegian Armed Forces divisions receiving
a request for assistance from the civilian police should route such a request to the
FOH. Requests received from parties other than the police should be routed to the
police authority for the area in which the find occurred. The designated commander
of the EOD group should carry out the assignment in collaboration with the relevant
50 Rev-04
police authority, in accordance with prevailing procedures for rendering harmless an

explosive device. The relevant police authority is responsible for the operation,
including the evacuation of civilian areas, sentry duty, medical service and fire
standby. The FOH telephone numbers are: 0565 6300 / 75 53 63 00.
2.2.5.4 Implementation
The clearance assignments category is crucial to how the assignment should be
carried out. Such assignments should be undertaken by an EOD group (ERG). The
ERG should comprise a minimum of 2 persons. The groups commander should
possess a Class III B or III F blasting certificate. The explosive device should be
rendered harmless in accordance with prescribed EOD procedures. The ERG
commander should submit his/her assignment plan to the police officer at the
location.
The plan should include:
- acceptable alternative solutions with risk assessment and probable extent of Chap-2
damage
- recommended alternatives, possibly in order of priority
After authorisation has been obtained from the responsible police officer, the ERG
commander should then render harmless the explosive device in accordance with the
approved plan. If there is any disagreement between the ERG commander and the
local police authority regarding the execution of the assignment, or the commander
determines that he/she is not able to carry out the assignment, he/she should
immediately notify the FOH to this effect and request clarification of the issue, or
support in the assignment.
2.2.5.5 Communications
The EOD group should be in possession of communications equipment in order to
maintain contact with both the responsible police officer at the location and the FOH,
as well as maintaining necessary communication within the group itself.
2.2.5.6 Reporting
After the assignment has been concluded, the ERG commander should forward a
written report to the FOH and the relevant police district. A transcript of the report
should be forwarded to FAES. The report should be classified as CONFIDENTIAL.
2.2.6 Clearance of improvised explosives IED (terrorist bombs)
2.2.6.1 General
The Norwegian Armed Forces has been assigned the responsibility of rendering
harmless improvised explosives IED (terrorist bombs) within civilian and military
areas. The relevant police headquarters requests assistance in rendering harmless the
IED from the FOH, refer to item 2.2.5.3.
IED clearance assignments may fall within any category, cf. item 2.2.3.2..
2.2.6.3 Responsibility and authority
The FOH is responsible for the clearance of IEDs. Where necessary, the FOH has the
authority to assign an authorised EOD officer to assist the civil police authority.
Norwegian Armed Forces divisions receiving a request for assistance from a
Rev-04 51
civilian police authority should immediately route such a request to the FOH. The
commander of the EOD group should carry out the assignment in collaboration with
the relevant police headquarters, in accordance with the prevailing procedures for
rendering harmless an explosive device. The relevant police headquarters is
responsible for carrying out the operation, including evacuation, sentry duty, medical
service and fire standby.
The clearance assignments category is crucial to how the assignment should be
carried out. The clearance assignment should be undertaken by an EOD group. This
should comprise a minimum of 2 authorised IEDD operators. The destruction of a
terrorist bomb should be carried out in accordance with prescribed working methods
and neutralisation techniques. The ERG commander should submit his/her terrorist
bomb neutralisation plan to the responsible police officer at the location.
The plan should include:
- acceptable alternatives with risk assessment and probable extent of damage
- recommended alternative, or alternatives, in order of priority
After obtaining approval of the acceptable alternative from the responsible police
officer at the scene, the ERG commander then commences to render harmless the
IED. If there is any conflict with the local police headquarters regarding the
execution of the assignment, or that the ERG commander determines that he/she is
not able to carry out the assignment, he/she should immediately notify the FOH to
this effect and request support and clarification of the issue.
2.2.6.5 Communications
The ERG should be in possession of communications equipment in order to maintain
contact with the relevant police headquarters, the responsible police offer at the
scene, and the FOH, as well as maintaining necessary communication within the
group itself.
2.2.6.6 Personal safety equipment
All personnel taking part in the assignment should be in possession of personal
equipment in accordance with Norwegian Armed Forces IEDD specifications.
2.2.6.7 Reporting
Reporting After the assignment has been concluded, the ERG commander should
forward a written report to the FOH and the relevant police district. A transcript of
the report should be forwarded to FAES. The report should be classified as
CONFIDENTIAL.
52 Rev-04
2.3 MINES AND MINE TRAPS
Chap-2
Figure: 2.5
Collecting mines
2.3.1 In general
2.3.1.1 By "live mines" is meant:
- Specially made mines with a certain amount of explosive charge and an
igniter, usually a specific igniter.
- Grenades and airdropped bombs (rockets) with explosives and igniting
devices.
- Improvised mines built by using pre-made charges or other explosive
materials and an igniter
2.3.1.2 In peacetime, live mines can only be used for instructional purposes and for
demonstrations. Arming the mine during instructions is not allowed.. During
demonstrations it is only allowed to fire one mine at the time. During the rest of the
training only dummies and exercise mines are to be used. For exercise mines only
the exercise charge is to be used and only as described. Igniters without blasting caps
may be used during exercises
2.3.1.3 If the packaging does not describe otherwise, all mines and igniters are to be
transported separately so that there is no risk for sparkover.
2.3.1.4 A mine with explosives but with no igniter is from a safety perspective to be
Rev-04 53
considered as an explosive charge without an igniting device.

2.3.1.5 For blast demonstrations , the following applies:
- the mine must not be set off by an igniter but by using a blasting cap set off by
a non electrical or electrical device. If this is not considered to be an adequate
initiating charge, an additional charge is to be used.
- mines placed in the terrain are to be marked
- personnel not participating in the preparations for the demonstration, must be
placed under safe cover at least 10 m from the mines or at safe distance
- such a demonstration is considered to be a regular blasting with the purpose of
showing the effect of a single mine. The same safety measures as for regular
blastings are to be followed, with the exception of the danger area. This is
illustrated further in the following pts
2.3.2 Laying mines
2.3.2.1 In peacetime the following mines can be placed:
- dummy mines
- exercise mines
2.3.2.2 The mine fields must be:
- registered
- reported
- guarded
All the above according to the regulations. Fields containing exercise charges and
live igniters must be guarded until the field has been cleared.
2.3.3 Clearing of mines
Figure: 2.6
Marking a mine
54 Rev-04
2.3.3.1 During EOD of live mines in peacetime the mines are to be blasted on site after
being located, if this is possible. The blasting element must be prepared in advance
and only one man is to place the charge on the mine. The mines are to be demolished
one at the time. During this part of the task, the safety regulations concerning
blasting are to be followed. Even so, cf. this chapter pt 2.2.1.1 and following pts.
2.3.3.2 If a mine, due to the damage of the blast, cannot be set off on site, it has to be
disarmed and removed. The mine is to be transported to a safe place to be
demolished. This must be done according to the existing rules and regulations.
Disarming is to be ordered by the EODG O.C. When disarming is carried out the
weapon descriptions/manuals are to be followed. Carrying out the disarming of
mines requires qualified personnel.
2.3.3.3 Clearing mines with exercise charges and/or live igniters must be carried out with
extra care to avoid injuries. Information regarding the composition of the mine field
must be collected before any EOD is carried out
Chap-2
2.3.3.4 Light portable mine clearing system
Danger area:
o
15 15 o
800 m
Dangerous
Area
Direction of fire
100 m Firing point
200 m
Figure: 2.7
Danger area
Action when misfire:

- The rocket engine does not start: Wait for 30 min. Contact the officer
conducting the exercise.
Rev-04 55
NOTE
The officer conducting the exercise destroys the rocket and the igniter at a suitable
place.
- Detonating fuse with charges does not go off after launching. Wait for 30 min.
Contact officer conducting the exercise.
2.3.3.5 Heavy portable mine clearing system
Danger area:
o o
15 15
1500 m
Dangerous
area
Direction of fire
200 m Firing point
400 m
Figure: 2.8
Danger area
Action when misfire:

- The rocket engine does not start: Wait for 30 min. Contact the officer
NOTE
The officer conducting the exercise destroys the rocket and the igniter at a suitable
place.
- Detonating fuse with charges does not go off after launching. Wait for 30 min.
Contact officer conducting the exercise.
56 Rev-04
2.3.3.6 Mine-clearing Line Charge (MICLIC)

In general
FLO/S has earlier acquired the Mine-clearing Line Charge (MICLIC) to be mounted
on the tracked vehicle BV 206. This system is now in use in the Engineer Battalion.
Personnel
For explosive line charge M58
Personnel within AREA F must stay inside an armoured vehicle (M113, LEO
1, etc.) or similar, and wear hearing protection: ear plugs and earmuffs.
Bystanders without hearing protection must not stay within the DANGER
AREA or the NOISE ZONE. Bystanders with earplugs and earmuffs are to
stay at least 1,000 metres away from and behind the EOD field training area.
For explosive line charge M68 Chap-2
Personnel within AREA F, vehicle crews excepted, must stay inside an
armoured vehicle (M113, LEO 1, etc.) or similar, and wear hearing protection:
earplugs and earmuffs.
Bystanders are not to dwell within the DANGER AREA or the NOISE
ZONE when the charge is fired.
Danger area for firing an explosive line charge, detailed sketch of splinter zone
for M58 and danger area for M68 explosive line charge
Rev-04 57
Line of fire
X-2538M
Noise zone o o Fragment zone
30 30
The rocket ramp
point to the top
of the page
M
00
16
Area F
o
Launch angle 47 + o2_
Figure: 2.9
Danger area M58
58 Rev-04
Line of fire
o o
Rocket launch ramp 30 30
points to the top
of page
Fragment-
zone
412M
Area F
30 m
Chap-2
183M
778M
Figure: 2.10
Detailed sketch of splinter zone when firing explosive line charge M58
Rev-04 59
Line of fire
X-2538M
Noise zone o o
30 30
366M radius
Rocket launcg ramp
points to the top
of page
Area F 30m radius

o o
Launch angle 47 + 2_
Figure: 2.11
Danger area M68
Handling rocket engine misfires

DANGER!
Wait for at least 30 minutes after the last attempt of firing the rocket before you go
near the launching pad.
1. Check visually that the rack has the correct elevation /45-470).
2. Check the connection between the control box and the firing apparatus and
between the control box and the launching pad.
3. Check that the switch on the control box is in the position ROCKET and try
the firing apparatus once more, while you make sure that the handle/bar is
pushed all the way down repeatedly.
4. If the rocket functions, continue as normal and fire the explosive line charge.
5. If the electric network seems to be okay, the problem may rest in the firing
60 Rev-04
apparatus.
6. Disconnect the firing apparatus, and move the switch on the control box to
TEST/SAFE.
7. Activate the firing apparatus until the green light comes on.
a. If the green light does not come on, switch to another firing apparatus
and try firing the rocket again.
b. If the green light comes on, connect the test apparatus M51 to the
circuit. Turn the switch to ROCKET and work the test apparatus.
8. If there is no light in the diode on the test apparatus, turn the switch to
TEST/SAFE and disconnect the test apparatus. Wait for 30 minutes.
Remove the rocket switch on the panel of the charge container. Install the
short circuit plug instead. Connect the test apparatus. Turn the switch to
ROCKET. Work the test apparatus. Chap-2
9. If there is no light in the diode on the test apparatus, there is a problem with
the electric circuit. Continue from point 11.
10. If light comes on in the diode on the test apparatus, the problem is located in
the firing apparatus or in the rocket engine. If the firing apparatus functions,
continue from point 12.
11. Disconnect the test apparatus. Put on the safety cap on the rocket switch, on
the power panel. Lower the rack, and remove the safety pin from the safety
cover near the end of the rocket. Disconnect the switch to the explosive line
charge and put the safety cap back on.
NOTE! Measure the power panel on the charge container with a
multimeter.
12. Disconnect the test apparatus. Put on the safety cap on the rocket switch, on
the power panel. Lower the rack, remove the safety pin from the safety cover
near the end of the rocket. Remove the rocket from the guiding rail. Mark the
rocket DUD and put it back in its original packaging. Mark the box DUD.
13. The rocket is to be destroyed by qualified personnel.
Rev-04 61
Procedures if an explosive line charge misfires

Disconnect the firing apparatus.
DANGER!
Wait for at least 30 minutes after the last attempt of firing the explosive charge
before leaving safe cover/the vehicle.
- Check that the electric switch from the charge has been properly fastened to
the power panel on the charge container. Return to safe cover/the vehicle. Try
to initiate the explosive line charge again.
- If the electric line charge still does not detonate, reduce the stretch in the
anchorage line by moving the vehicle slightly backwards. If the explosive line
charge still cannot be initiated, it is to be classified as a dud.
DANGER!
Going near an explosive line charge that has been laid out requires
extreme caution, since the igniter in most cases will be armed and
sensitive to static electricity.
- In peace: If the explosive line charge does not detonate. Wait for 30 minutes
before you contact qualified personnel. The explosive line charge may be
detonated, by placing an ignition in the first C4 charge on the line. Do not
touch the ignition of the explosive line charge, but if possible, see if the
ignition is armed (red mark appears in the window).
- At war: If the explosive line charge does not detonate. Try to detonate the line
charge from the vehicle itself or from an armoured vehicle nearby. If this is
unsuccessful, disconnect the explosive line charge from the charge container
and evacuate the vehicle. Move to a safe distance. Once there, the explosive
line charge may be attempted detonated by use of artillery.
- Sometimes, parts of the explosive line charge do not detonate, and this is
usually because of breaches in the detonating fuses where the different
sections of the explosive line charge are connected. These parts may be tried
detonated by qualified personnel, by use of an ignition, which is to be placed
in one of the C4 charges.
- Should the anchorage line snap while firing/launching, the electric wire will
be torn apart. It is then impossible to detonate the explosive line charge from
the vehicle. Qualified personnel may try to detonate the explosive line charge
by placing an ignition in one of the first C4 charges.
2.3.4 Clearing of mine traps
2.3.4.1 A mine trap is a charge, which is triggered by a seemingly not dangerous influence
from the outside.
2.3.4.2 While laying down mine traps for mine clearing practice, no live charges or mines
are to be used. The same goes for igniters with detonators (blasting cap) permanently
mounted. Igniters with percussion cap may be used. Other live simulator devices or
exercise charges are not permitted to use.
2.3.4.3 When laying down mine traps, the last thing to be removed is the safety pin. This is
62 Rev-04
to be done by using a string. The igniter must at that time be firmly placed in the
dummy charge. To safely handle the specific igniters that can be used in connection
with mine traps, see the weapon description and manuals.
2.3.4.4 Before the exercise starts, the officer conducting the exercise ( the instructor) is to
make sure that all materiel is checked
2.4 DEMOLITION, EXPLOSIVES AND
DETONATION DEVICES, ETC.
Chap-2
Figure: 2.12
Blast training course
2.4.1 In general
2.4.1.1 Live detonation devices must only be placed in the charge just prior to blast.
2.4.1.2 Detonation devices that have not gone off, or detonation devices and charges that
have not detonated completely, are to be regarded as misfires and destroyed in
accordance with the regulations.
2.4.1.3 The largest allowed charge for firing fields and exercise sites is determined in the
safety instructions.
2.4.1.4 No personnel can be allowed to enter closed rooms, tunnels, etc, until a minimum of
15 min after the charge has been detonated or until airing has taken place,
2.4.1.5 At a blasting site it might, if the extent of the field makes it possible, be carried out
blasting on more than one firing stand. The field should give the possibility for
observation between the firing stands. If the terrain provides absolute safety against
fragments, rocks, etc. blasting can be carried out irrespective of each other.
2.4.1.6 The officer conducting the exercise (officer/NCO) and/or demolition leader, must
have a demolition certificate, as military proof that the person is authorized to lead
demolition exercises/ demonstrations/ demolition of structures.
Rev-04 63
2.4.2 Personnel for command and control

2.4.2.1 With blasting exercises the following functions are to be covered:
- Officer conducting the exercise
- Demolition leader
- Safety officer
- Safety controller
- Safety guard posts
For general areas of responsibilities and duties cf. pt 1.1.5With exercises at the firing
stand the officer conducting the exercise can take on the duties of the demolition
leader, safety officer and safety controllers. During exercises on squad level a
sergeant may be the officer conducting the exercise. If demolition is carried out on
several firing stands, a demolition leader must be ordered for each firing stand. The
demolition leader can take on the duties of the safety controller, and the officer
conducting the exercise can take on the duties of the safety officer. During extensive
exercises, the officer conducting the exercise is responsible for having an adequate
number of safety controllers and a safety chief and safety officer(s) must be ordered.
During demolition exercises safety guard posts must always be ordered. The number
of these is decided by the officer conducting the exercise depending on the extent of
the exercise size and the size of the field. In established blasting fields, the safety
instructions for the specific field are to be followed.
2.4.2.2 The officer conducting the exercise must in addition to his normal duties described
in pt 1.1.5.2 make sure:
- that the civilian authorities and the local police authorities are contacted to
clarify the special safety precautions that are demanded, if demolition work is
to be carried out close to populated areas, public communication lines, etc.
- that only the strictly necessary number of personnel preparing the demolition
and the placement of charges are present
- that all other personnel is under cover or outside the risk area
- that explosives, charges and other demolition equipment are kept apart and
under guard.
- that regulations of treatment, storage and transport of explosives and charges
are followed (Manual in ammunition service TfF 78 series)
If blasting is carried out on several firing stands that partly overlap each others
danger area, the officer conducting the exercise are to give orders of detonation. Cf.
also: regulations for the safety of air traffic, appendix 7 pt 6.
2.4.2.3 The demolition leader must see to:
- that all safety regulations are followed
- that himself or a subordinate officer checks that the explosives, blasting
machines and mudcapping are in accordance with the instruction manual
- that the largest allowed charge weight is not exceeded
64 Rev-04
- that the key to the electric blasting machine or other blasting machines are
kept unavailable to intruders
- that the explosives and blasting machines are protected from detonasjoner
during the ongoing exercises
- that he allows personnel to take of their helmets, should these make the
blasting preparations difficult
- that the officer conducting the exercise is notified when everything is ready
for blasting
- that all personnel in the risk area are under cover for splinters and protected
against detonation waves, before blasting orders are given
- that the blasting personnel alert the surroundings by shouting Fire in the
hole three (3) times, and when all personnel who are not directly involved
with the blasting are under cover, shout firing, and then light the fuse or Chap-2
connect the blasting machine and detonate the charge
- that there is a time delay between each blast so that these easily can be
observed and counted. The number of blasts is to be registered
- that he or someone else can observe the course of detonation
- that he can examine all of the blasted objects, or allow someone else to
examine these
- that when the order Come on is given, he gives permission to leave cover.
Demolition area(s) must be checked before the order is given
- that misfire are detonated as soon as the waiting period is over
- that the safety officer checks that demolition equipment, explosives and
blasting machines are not abandoned after the exercise
2.4.2.4 The safety officer is ordered only on extensive demolition exercises. His duties are
listed in 1.1.5.4.
2.4.2.5 The Safety controller must , in addition to his normal duties described in pt. 1.1.5.5,
also: :
- Check personal equipment (helmet, hearing protection, field dressing)
- see that explosives, blasting machines and mudcapping are checked
- keep the key to the blasting machine and hand it over only when it is ready to
detonate or the order for detonating has been given by the exercise leader
- check that the safety guard post that is assigned, repeats the signal/shouts
Fire in the hole before the detonation
- count the number of detonations
- examine all of the demolition objects that have been detonated, asingend by
the demolition leader
- check that no one leaves cover before the safety guard post has repeated
Come on
Rev-04 65
- make sure that no mobile phones are brought to the demolition site
2.4.2.6 The safety guard post must in addition to his normal duties described in pt. 1.1.5.6
repeat the call Fire in the hole, firing and Come on.
2.4.2.7 All other personnel. The only personnel allowed on the firing stand where
demolition is being prepared, are those who are necessary for estimating and placing
the individual charges, for placing detonation circuits, for placing blasting machines
and personnel for management and control. The exception is during training and
demolition demonstrations. This permission is to be given by the company
commander or a high- ranking officer. The placing of blasting caps in charges or in
contact with detonation circuits is not to take place until observers and bystanders
are in the area that has been marked for this purpose in advance.
2.4.3 Checking explosives and detonation devices
2.4.3.1 Before training commences, explosives and detonation devices must be checked in
accordance with the existing regulations. See TFF class 7.
2.4.4 Separate regulations for the use and handling of the materiel
2.4.4.1 Explosives are to be handled in accordance with the existing weapon regulations.
2.4.4.2 Gauge-, detonation- and initiation devices are to be used and handled in accordance
with the existing weapon regulations. In addition the following points must be
observed:
a. Detonation fuse. The smallest allowed length with the use of a fuse in
connection with a blasting cap is 25 cm. When using a fuse to initiate
explosives, the shortest length allowed is 100 cm with an addition of 1 cm for
every second it takes to seek cover. The fuse is lit with matches or a fuse
igniter. When lighting several charges simultaneously , the fuses are to be cut
in different lengths, this is to make it possible to count each detonation. About
15 cm difference in length is considered suitable.
b. Detonating fuses. Detonating fuses are explosives, and must be handled in
accordance with the existing weapon regulations.
c. Coupling of fuses and blasting caps. Blasting caps are attached to the
detonation fuses with a crimping plier or other suitable pliers.
d. Fuse igniting. For the lighting of fuses a number of different lighters can be
used (impact, rip and friction igniters etc)
e. shock tube. ( e.g. . Nonel). shock tube only is not considered as an
explosive, unless a blasting cap is attached.
f. Electrical detonation. When using electrical detonating the following points
apply :
- Electrical detonation must not be used during thunder storms or during
weather where electrical discharge is possible.
- the electrical detonation device must be connected to the circuit before
Fire in the hole is called out.
- Demolition close to radar must not take place unless the radar is turned
off electrical detonation must not be used closer to high-voltage lines
66 Rev-04
and cables than what is listed in the following table.

- It is prohibited to have mobile phones turned on where electrical
blasting caps are in use.
- When using NPED technique (lights without primary explosives) the
blasting cap contains a small steel casing. Due to this a safety distance
of 50 m is set, when setting off just an uncovered fuse. This applies to
our new electric igniter GR U (1a).
1. Group 1 igniters
Distributing nets wor- Overhead cable, dis- Earth cable distance in m

king plan(kV) tance in m
0.4- 6 20 2
Chap-2
0.4- 6 50 3
13 - 24 70 6
25 - 52 100 10
>52 200 16
2. Group 2 and group 3 igniters
Distributing nets wor- Overhead cable, dis- Earth cable distance in m

king plan(kV) tance in m
< 24 5 2
25-72,5 6 3
72,6-123 10 10
124-245 12 10
> 245 16 16
The distances are calculated horizontally except for loading work under
ground, where the distances should be seen as the total distance
- Electric detonation close to transmitters that radiate electromagnetic
energy must not take place closer than what is defined in the table
below:
3. 4. Group 1 igniters1
Radiated effect in Distance in met- Radiated effect in Distance in met-

watts res kilowatts res
5 4 1 40
1 By using slow igniters in gr. 2 and 3, the distances may be reduced to half of
the given values. Information about the radio transmitters effect and frequence
can be obained by contacting the producer of the radio.
Rev-04 67
10 10 5 75
50 15 10 95
100 20 50 150
200 25 100 200
300 30 200 250
500 35 300 300
500 350
750 400
1000 500
2000 650
- The safety distances do not apply for radar equipment
- With serial coupling of fuses, the redundant wiring must not be cut,
(this will change the resistance and sensitivity in the blasting caps). Too
long Igniter cables must be folded carefully.
2.4.4.3 Detonating system, radio controlled (TASS Tactical Activating- and Safety
System). Before using original codes must be coded in the receiver(s). This is to
avoid that codes from other units can be remnant in the receiver(s).
2.4.5 Blasting
Figure: 2.13
Blast
2.4.5.1 Every blast is to be carried out in accordance with the existing weapon regulations.
In addition the following regulations must always be followed:
- before the blasting caps are entered into the explosives blasting cap wells are
to be made
68 Rev-04
- when loading drilling holes only a loading stick made of wood must be used.
If the explosives get stuck, they must not be slammed into position, but
blasted in their stuck position
- after burning, drilling in the hole is prohibited. Explosives that have not
detonated may still lie in the hole
- before the hole is reloaded, it must cool for at least 30 min
- mudcapping must not contain any rocks.
When misfires occur, the fixed waiting period applies (cf. the next pt). When using
electric firing, the blasting machine is to be disconnected and controlled if the circuit
is closed. If one does not find a fault in the circuit, the firing can be tried again with
another blasting machine. Do not detonate the charge after this, one must then
assume that the blasting caps are defect(ed). Defect blasting caps must not be
removed from the explosive(s), but an extra blasting cap is to be added, after which Chap-2
the whole charge is to be set off.
2.4.5.2 When a primed charge has not gone off (misfire), or when there is doubt whether it
has gone off, no one must leave cover until the following time has passed:
- with powder fuse charge: 30 min
- with electrical igniter and shock tube (such as NONEL): 10 min.
2.4.5.3 The blast hole charges that misfire must not be drilled or picked out. Any
mudcapping is to be removed carefully to 15 cm from the old charges never closer
(loading height appears in the drill plan). New blast hole charges with blasting caps
are to be placed over the old charges, and the hole is to be blasted again. One can
also drill a new blast hole at least 1 m from the old hole no further down than to
loading height. The distance must increase in mountainous terrain where there are
cracks and openings. The new blast hole is to be parallel to the old one. When the
new charge is blasted, there will be debris of explosives from the loaded hole that
misfired. These explosives must be destroyed as soon as possible. Liquid explosives
and explosives based on ammonium nitrate and fuel oil (such as Anolit), can be
neutralized with water.
2.4.5.4 With blast hole demolition it may occur that explosives that have not gone off will
lie among the exploded masses. Before emptying or loading up exploded masses it
must be visually controlled that there are no unexploded explosives in the mass.
Such explosives are to be removed by hand and destroyed, preferably by burning.
During the clearing work, if unexploded loose explosives are found, the work must
immediately be stopped and the explosives removed as mentioned above.
2.4.6 Danger area
2.4.6.1 The danger area is defined as a circle where the charge is at the center of the circle.
With blasting, the following effects will occur :
- fragmentation
- shock wave
- ground vibrations
Rev-04 69
The extent of the danger area is determined by the size of the explosive charges,
materials used in the blasting area, mudcapping, ground conditions, and the
surrounding terrain. A guideline for the decision on the extent of the danger area is
based on the following tables:
2.4.6.2 Danger area due to fragments
Blasting object Size of Charge The danger areas radius

in open terrain and blas-
ting site without cover
Wood, stone free Up to 0,1 kg 50 m
Dirt and 0,1- 0,5 kg 50 -150 m
sand and ice Over 0,5 kg At least 200 m
Stones and stony dirt Up to 0,5 kg 400 m
Over 0,5 kg At least 500 m
Iron, wood and Iron toget- up to 0,5 kg 500 m
her
0,5 - 5,0 kg 800 m
Over 5,0 kg 1000 m
The danger area can be reduced if objects are covered in a satisfactory manner with
blasting mats, connected logs and similar. When duds are to be demolished, cf. the
section on fragmentation distance for the different types of grenades. Fire simulation
, see this chapter pt. 2.6.7.1.
2.4.6.3 The danger areas due to the shock wave effect on windowpanes.
Size of Charge Danger areas radius in open terrain and at demo-

lition site without cover
Up to 0,1 kg 75 m
0,1 - 0,5 kg 75 - 150 m
0,5 - 2,0 kg 150 - 225 m
3,0 kg 230 m
4,0 kg 275 m
5,0 - 10,0 kg 300 - 400 m
10,0 - 15,0 kg 400 - 450 m
15,0 - 20,0 kg 450 - 500 m
20,0 - 25,0 kg 500 - 550 m
Above - 25,0 kg at least 700 m
In narrow gorges and such, detonation waves have a stronger impact than in open
70 Rev-04
terrain. The danger area then becomes larger than mentioned above.
2.4.6.4 Danger areas because of ground vibrations. This must be evaluated in each case, so
that buildings, bridges, pipe lines, etc. are not damaged. When blasting in drilling
holes close to buildings or other objects of value that can be damaged by vibrations,
the blasting hole must not be too deep or overloaded. The following data must be
observed :
Allowed distance to object Charge hole depth Charge

1 m (min avstand) 0,6 m 0,2 kg
1,0 - 1,5 m 0,8 m 0,3 kg
1,5 - 2,5 m 1,2 m 0,4 kg
2,5 - 5,0 m 2,0 m 0,7 kg
2.4.6.5 Danger area for blasting cap. Blasting caps contain explosives and are to be handled Chap-2
accordingly. When setting off a single blasting cap in open blasting site the danger
areas radius is 20 m.
See also item 2.4.4.2 e and f.
2.4.7 Hearing protection
2.4.7.1 All personnel within a radius of 1,000 m from the blast must normally use both
earplugs and ear muffs cf. also item 6.21
2.5 TOLERANCE EXERCISES WITH EXPLOSIVE
CHARGES
2.5.1 In general
2.5.1.1 In tolerance exercises the following must be observed:
- all personnel must wear helmets, hearing protection and first aid pack
- during the detonation the head must be positioned in a manner that prevents
the detonating wave from ripping the helmet off
- exercises are to be led by an officer (if possible company commander or
equivalent)
- exercises must increase charges gradually (progression norm 1-3-5 kg)
- personnel must be in safe cover for splinters, falling rocks and such. No one is
to be closer than 5 m when concentrated charges up to 5 kg are being
detonated. With a charge of 5 kg one is exposed to a shock wave of about 1
bar = 1 atmosphere = 194 dB, which is the limit of what a person can tolerate
without getting internal shock wave injuries (cf. the next pt)
- when detonating concentrated charges of 5 kg or more, increase the safety
distance to 10 m
- for charges of 5 kg or more only one exposure per 24 hour period is allowed
- concentrated charges larger than 15 kg must not be used in tolerance
exercises. The charges are to be set so that rocks will not be ripped up and
Rev-04 71
thrown.
- when detonating lengthy charges weighing more than 15 kg (obstacle
demolition), personnel must be placed in the charges length direction and at
least 5 m from the charges closest part, because of the shock wave effect.
- firing explosives during combat tolerance exercises, see pt 3.4.5.4.
- charges are not to be packed in metal, wood, cardboard or the like, and must
not contain such materials
2.5.2 Personnel that must not attend tolerance exercises
2.5.2.1 The following personnel should not attend tolerance exercises:
- personnel with a hearing measuring number of 2 (cf. item 6.21)
- personnel that during earlier tolerance exercises or upon hearing a bang from a
large caliber weapon shows signs/symptoms of hearing damage (lowered
hearing, ear aches, ringing in the ear, beyond a short time period)
- personnel that after the last detonation of an explosive charge showed
symptoms/signs of hearing damage (lowered hearing, ear aches, ringing in the
ear, beyond a short time period). In the case of such symptoms the person
must immediately be taken out of noise duty and immediately have his/her
hearing examined by a doctor.
- Personnel that show symptoms of internal shock (lowered attention, heavy
breathing, heart palpitation, headaches and stomach pains) after an explosive
charge has been detonated must immediately be examined by a doctor.
2.6 FIRE SIMULATION AND DEVICES FOR FIRE
SIMULATION
2.6.1 In general
2.6.1.1 Fire simulation must only take place with appoved devices:
- blank ammunition
- percussion charge (simulate hand grenade charge)
- smoke
- explosive/detonation device
Safety regulations for the different types of devices for simulation of firing appear
under the individual weapons/calibers, and in the following points.
2.6.1.2 The use of blank ammunition
Refer to item 3.2.5
2.6.2.1 Noise from the use of devices for fire simulation /blanks can cause the risk of
hearing damage. When using these kinds of devices all personnel within a radius of
25 m from the weapon/charges must wear hearing protection, at least ear plugs. A
small number of shots, for instance with accidental engagement, can be accepted
without wearing hearing protection. Should suspicion of hearing damage occur
72 Rev-04
(lowered hearing, ear aches, ringing in the ear, beyond a short time period), the
person is to be examined by a doctor immediately. Cf. item 6.21.
2.6.3 Blank cartridge for weapons up to and including 12.7mm/.50
2.6.3.1 Refer to item 3.4.4
2.6.4 Percussion charge (simulator for hand grenades)
2.6.4.1 Percussion charge (simulator for hand grenades) must not be thrown closer to
personnel than 20 m.
Using percussion charges (simulator for hand grenades) in closed rooms where
personnel are located is prohibited.
The protection cap must only be taken off the scratch surface immediately before its
use. When not in use, the cover for the match head must always be left on the
percussion charge (simulator for hand grenades). If there is suspicion of a misfire, do
not put the cover back on until after the waiting period. Cf .pt 2.6.6.
Chap-2
2.6.5 Smoke
2.6.5.1 Regulations for the use of smoke are found in pt 3.5.5.1.
2.6.6 Dud/misfire/short round
2.6.6.1 Devices for fire simulation that do not function in their normal fashion when fired,
are to be handled in accordance with the following regulations:
- Blank ammunition for pistols, rifle, machinegun. See the individual
weapon/caliber
- Misfire/short round for PERCUSSION CHARGE (SIMULATOR FOR
HAND GRENADES) and SMOKE CANISTERS must stay in their firing
contraption/ lie in their position on the ground for minimum 30 min before
they are touched. After the specified waiting time the devices for fire
simulation are to be handled by the user and destroyed by personnel with a
minimum class I blasting license. If necessary they are to be marked where
they lie, so that they can be found for later destruction.
2.6.7 Explosives
2.6.7.1 For fire simulation with explosives, the following regulations apply:
- each charge is to be at maximum 0.1 kg if the distance to personnel is less
than 50 m. For longer distances, the table in this chapter is to be used
charges are to be detonated electrically or with shock tube.
- Normally, charges are to be detonated in a detonating pit (cf. pt 2.6.7.2) if the
distance from personnel is less than 50 m)
- There must only be one charge in each pit
- If detonation cannot be fired from a place with overview over all charges, the
officer conducting the exercise or safety controller with such an overview site
must have telephone or radio contact with the officers/NCOs detonating the
charges (when using electric firing, see pt ) 2.4.4.2)
- Personnel in a standing position must not be able to get closer to the charges
(edge of the pit) than 7 m, and personnel in a crawling position or in slit pits,
Rev-04 73
not closer than 2 m when the charge detonates

- All personnel must wear a helmet, ear muffs and ear plugs cf. item 6.21.
2.6.7.2 Blasting pits as mentioned in pt 2.6.7.1 are made by digging out a crater at least 1 m
in diameter and at least 0.6 m deep. The sides of the crater must slant towards the
middle. The dirt mound that the crater is dug in must not contain rocks larger than 1
cm in diameter. If this is the case, the crater must be dug larger and lined with
fine-grained sand at least 10 cm thickness all-around so that the shape is as
mentioned above. The pit can be filled with water. If so the charge is to hang on a
line (string) so that it does not touch the bottom or the sides of the pit (cf. pt 2.6.7.3).
The water must be free from any floating objects such as sticks, tin cans, ice and so
forth. In the winter the pit can be dug in snow. The snow must not contain ice or
frozen ice lumps. The charges must not be covered with other than water or snow.
To keep personnel from getting close to the charges, the pits are to be surrounded by
a barbed wire fence or other forms for obstacles. There must be a distance of at least
10 m between each pit. The fence is set up in a distance of 2 m from the edge of the
pit. Detonation cables or shock tubes are to be buried or laid so that personnel cannot
come in contact with these.
2.6.7.3 Fire simulation with explosives can also take place with out the charge being placed
in detonation pit. If the distance to personnel is less than 50 m, the charge is to be at
maximum 0.1 kg and hung in a rope/string at least 25 cm from the ground or from
the object that can cause fragments (stones, wood, metal, ice and so forth). The
charges must not be packed in metal, wood, cardboard and such, and must not
contain such materials (the exception is blasting caps with a wire). Blasting caps are
to be covered by explosives. Personnel must be obstructed from getting closer to the
charge than 20 m. The charges must be placed in a manner to avoid their being hit by
fragments. There must be a distance of at least 5 m between each charge. Detonation
cables are to be treated as mentioned in pt 2.6.7.2. At distances over 50 m, the
regulations for blasting are to be followed, cf. pt 2.4.5.1 and the following pts..
2.6.7.4 Fire simulation with explosives is permitted during combat tolerance exercises (cf.
item 3.4.5.4). Fire simulation is to be carried out in accordance with the regulations
in pt 2.6.7.1 2.6.7.3. As far as for combat tolerance exercises the simulation charge
must not be larger than 0.1kg. There must be a distance of at least 10 m between
demolition pits. Detonations must not occur while shooting or immediately after
shooting over the charges or in their proximity. Only one charge must be detonated
at a time. Detonation must only occur when personnel can be seen clearly from the
firing stand and weapon. Before the exercise starts, check that the demolition pits are
made as described in pt 2.6.7.2, and that there are no objects that can injure
personnel (stones, twigs etc).
74 Rev-04
3 FIRING ALL WEAPONS

3.1 FIRING
Chap-3
Figure: 3.1
Attacking Leopard Tank
3.1.1 Personal protective equipment (PPE)

3.1.1.1 In general
Double hearing protection (earplugs and ear muffs) must be worn during all live
firing. See 6.21.
Protective goggles should be worn while firing all infantry weapons.
3.1.1.2 Use of helmet
Helmet is to be worn by personnel who stay within the danger area, participate in
tolerance exercises, mine exercises, explosives and any kind of live shells. Chinstrap
is to be fastened. Excepted from wearing helmets are:
- Personnel in safe cover.
- Personnel who stay in the markers pit/target pit.
- Personnel who load ammunition on fighting vehicles.
- Personnel who handle artillery ammunition, and during live firing of field
artillery.
3.1.2 Division of responsibilities, firing ranges and training areas
3.1.2.1 The Chief of the Army Staff is responsible for determining which national norms
should form the basis for developing safety templates. Safety templates are
developed according to the methodology presented in these regulations.
3.1.2.2 The Norwegian Defence Estate Agency is to authorize firing ranges, training areas
for firing/ mortars, and demolition fields that are to be used by units in the Military
Organisation. The Norwegian Defence Estate Agency is to update and administer the
Rev-04 75
regulations for technical construction of ranges and installations. The NDEA is to

ascertain that ranges, training areas and safety instructions are in accordance with the
Safety Regulations in force. During live firing exercises outside military areas
permission must always be obtained from landowners and the local police authority.
Using random fields for training is to be avoided or reduced to a minimum.
3.1.2.3 Head of a Management Unit is to give suggestions for and approve security
instructions and approve the use of firing ranges, bombing and demolition fields
before any such activity takes place. Are there several Management Unit heads in the
same area the one who is the most frequent user is responsible. He/she is also
responsible for:
- Coordinating the fire when several units are firing at the same time at the
range/fields
- Report place and time for fire
- Report to the civilian population when and where firing is taking place in
accordance with current procedures
- Changes of ranges/fields are to be approved by the Head of Management Unit
and FB
3.1.2.4 The NDEA is responsible for administering firing ranges, firing/mortar fields and
demolition fields, and is to ascertain:
- That production of safety templates according to the provided data or input are
available locally, so that standard templates are available to the local user.
- That safety regulations for the firing range/field etc., with users requests
incorporated, have been established and approved by the NDEA and Head of
Management Unit. Regulations are to include:
- Division into particular ranges (for rifles, machine guns, heavy machine
guns, mortars, hand grenade throwing, etc.)
- Limitation of fire directions and limitation of distance for the individual
weapons
- Required obstruction and guard posts.
- Regulation for how firing is to be announced, and who is responsible
for this.
- Regulations concerning blindage, target arrangements and other
materiel.
- User instructions, particular instructions such as requirements of
materiel/equipment, special activities, required level of skill.
- That target butts, blindage, cover, signal arrangements, phones, etc. are
maintained in accordance with the safety regulations and instructions in force.
- That the facilities are locally checked annually, biannually on the central level
and by an external controller every 5 years.
76 Rev-04
3.1.3 Direct firing weapons

3.1.3.1 Constructing safety templates
Construction of safety templates for direct firing weapons is to be carried out
according to ratified NATO STANAG no. 2240 and 2401. These can be found on the
Norwegian Armed Forces intranet FOBID NATO documents.
When drawing up safety templates and constructing facilities, the starting point must
be worst-case scenarios rather than differing between varieties of scenarios/ways of
firing. This means that where safety is concerned, the facility can be used for the
kind(s) of firing described in the instructions for the particular facility.
When drawing up safety templates, TWO different forms of firing are to serve as
starting points. (See below).
Details for construction of safety templates see Appendix 1. Data/input for drawing
up safety templates for individual weapons are provided in appendices 15 to 21.
3.1.3.2 Basic firing
Definition: firing where the shooters and the targets positions have been
determined before firing commences. The following method must be used:
As a starting point for establishing safety template and background height, angles Chap-3
from the weapons line of sight towards the centre of the target are to be calculated.
Figures for spray in height are provided in appendices 15-21 and in the illustration
below.
Target
background
hill
Min. background
Target
hight 3,5m
a up
Aiming line
a down
Firing stand
Terrain profil Bullit sand pit
Figure: 3.2
Drawing up safety template and background height
3.1.3.3 Firing in the field

Definition: firing where the shooters and the targets positions are optional within
the ranges/the exercise fields limitations. The following method must be used:
Starting point for establishing safety template and background height is the same as
for basic firing, with the same values. In addition, the following factors apply:
If it is possible to fire in several different directions from the firing stand towards a
target or target area, the safety templates in total must be construed as the sum of all
possible single templates.
Rev-04 77
The illustration below shows the general situation where both the firing stand and the
target is within one area. The illustration shows only 4 of the possible safety
templates that make up the total. In principle, all possible combinations of positions
for shooter/ordnance and target are to be taken in to consideration. All these
templates will form a rim curve which will serve as the total template, shown in the
illustration.
Targ
et ar
ea
Firing stand
Figure: 3.3
Drawing up safety templates in the field
In practice, it will suffice to limit the combinations so that they apply to different
points along the edge/rim of the firing stand area and the edge/rim of the target area.
Points in such constructions may have a distance between them of 100 metres. The
illustration below shows how such points can be picked and the suitable firing
directions. For practical purposes, the templates are not shown here.
78 Rev-04
Target
Chap-3
Firing stand
Figure: 3.4
Drawing up safety templates for firing in the field, example
3.1.4 Guided weapon systems

3.1.4.1 In general
When construing safety templates, the 2 forms of firing listed in the paragraph above
must be used as a starting point. Other factors and details for construing safety
templates are presented under each weapon.
3.1.5 High trajectory weapons
3.1.5.1 In general
The actual basis for making safety templates is indicated under each weapon. The
method for calculating safety templates in accordance with the ratified NATO
Stanag 2240 and 2401 will be introduced as soon as the technical materiel for fire
control has been upgraded and the basis has been established.
3.1.6 Procedure for firing 7.62 and 5.56 calibre weapons at built-in/covered
stands
3.1.6.1 During firing exercises, participating divisions should observe the following:
- Firing commanders and gunners should be made aware of the importance of
Rev-04 79
avoiding unnecessary exposure to dense gun smoke Reduce the frequency of

firing. Firing should take place in accordance with approved firing lines in UD
5-10, UD 6-86-2, and approved training programmes
- If all stands have not been used, increase the distance between gunners
- Before firing commences, the responsible firing commander should open all
doors/firing hatches on the course or ensure that there is optimum ventilation
- The firing commander should ensure that 10 minute breaks are taken every
hour and that such breaks are taken outside of the stands
- In the case of any health complaints, the sick bay or occupational health
service should be contacted
3.2 HANDLING OF WEAPONS AND
AMMUNITION INDIVIDUAL
RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
Figure: 3.5
Weapons control during inspection
3.2.1 In Common
3.2.1.1 General
- Loading of weapons should take place at stands or at the location where the
firing activity is to commence
- Detailed provisions for individual weapons/ammunition types are specified
under the provisions for the individual weapon
- An individual has a duty to intervene in the event of any use of weapons or
ammunition that contravenes prevailing safety regulations
- An individual should never touch unexploded shells/bombs or objects that
he/she is not familiar with. In the event of the discovery of unexploded
80 Rev-04
shells/bombs or unknown objects, the location should be marked and an

immediate superior should be notified at once
3.2.1.2 Weapon regulations
1. Weapons should always be handled as if they are loaded.
2. Never point or aim at anyone you are not prepared to enter into combat with.
3. Only prime the weapon once it has been pointed towards the target.
4. Keep your finger away from the trigger until the sights are on the target and
you intend to fire.
5. Familiarise yourself with the target what is around, in front of and behind it.
Exceptions to regulation no. 2 may be made:
- on the command of an officer
- in connection with preparations for firing exercises, close combat, etc.
- during instruction and exercises in dispersed order with and without blank
ammunition
Chap-3
Weapons/magazines/equipment should be inspected and examined by the officer in
charge of the exercise, or similar.
It is forbidden to:
- use any type of ammunition other than that which has been prescribed
- use ammunition for other purposes or in any way that is not specified in
prevailing technical regulations
- undertake loading exercises with live ammunition, except in connection with
firing
- load a weapon and/or insert a magazine/band before receiving the command
to do so or before permission has been granted
- attach non-approved devices to a weapon in order to reinforce the weapon
against recoil
- detach ammunition, fuses or other ammunition components without the
express permission of the Norwegian Armed Forces Logistics Competence
Centre/Ammunition (FLO FELLESKAP AMM AMMSIKKERHET)
Exceptions to this are during EOD service, including training and live
manoeuvres. It is a prerequisite that approved procedures, authorised
publications and approved tools are used. Personnel in charge of EOD training
and personnel on live EOD manoeuvres who are obliged to undertake such
actions should be in possession of a Class III blasting certificate.
3.2.2 Safety regulations during instruction
3.2.2.1 Using live ammunition during instruction in materiel description/materiel knowledge
is allowed. The instructor in charge must during such instruction carefully ascertain
that no one gets to touch or handle ammunition without guidance. He/she must
particularly emphasize that touching the safety mechanisms is strictly prohibited.
Rev-04 81
When live ammunition is used for educational purposes, the instructor must check:
- That the ammunition is of the correct type, that it is clean and undamaged.
- That the ammunition safety devices are in accordance with the regulations.
- That handling of ammunition takes place in a safe manner and under total
control.
- That all ammunition is collected when the lesson is over.
In other respects observe the regulations for the relevant ammunition type.
3.2.3 Use of live ammunition
3.2.3.1 Short range ammunition is to be treated as live ammunition and must under no
circumstance be used as or mixed with blank ammunition.
See regulations for the respective weapon and precautions/measures concerning
malfunction.
All firing must immediately stop:
- When humans or animals are discovered within or moving into the danger
area.
- When other conditions that are perceived as dangerous arise.
Anyone who sees or hears the things described above is bound by duty to alert
others, and possibly repeat the warning.
When firing needs to be stopped for such causes, all weapons must immediately be
secured and put down. Machine guns and heavy machine guns are to be emptied.
Whoever is in command decides whether all weapons should be emptied. In other
respects observe the regulations for the relevant weapon type.
3.2.3.2 Before firing commences each man or woman is to check:
- That the ammunition he/she has received is of the correct type (live,
armour-piercing, tracer, etc.)
- That the ammunition is clean and undamaged
- That wrong type of ammunition or damaged ammunition is returned
- That the weapon has the correct barrel
- That the correct recoil amplifier and bolt have been mounted
- hat a blank firing device has not been mounted
- That the barrel has been swabbed, that it is clean and undamaged, and that the
flash eliminator is securely fastened
- That the weapon has been correctly adjusted (MG)
- That the muzzle cap has been removed.
3.2.3.3 While firing, each man/woman is responsible for:
- Never pointing the muzzle in an unsafe direction
- Ascertaining that muzzle, barrel, chamber, and magazine are kept free from
external objects (sand, dirt, snow, ice, water, remnants of projectiles and
cartridges/casings, etc.)
82 Rev-04
- Making sure when firing that the muzzle does not come closer to the next
persons ear than what is allowed for this particular type of weapon
- Ascertaining that the weapon is kept in the firing position, should it
malfunction, and that it is not opened until after the set interval for the weapon
type in question (afterburner).
3.2.3.4 After firing, each person must (without being ordered to):
- Make sure that the weapon is empty.
- Return all the left ammunition, and ascertain that ammunition that has not
been used does not get mixed with empties/casings.
- Tear up used ammunition packaging. It is an individual responsibility only to
throw or discard packaging that has been checked.
- Check and ascertain that he/she is not in possession of ammunition
unknowingly, in his/her clothing or other equipment
- Not leave the firing range or exercise field with live ammunition without
having received special permit.
Chap-3
3.2.4 Exceptions made for educational purposes mixing live and blank
ammunition
3.2.4.1 During firing exercises with live and short-range ammunition on the firing range, the
instructor may mix in (load with) blank or drill ammunition. This to identify faulty
triggers/outlets etc. The instructor in charge of the activity is to ascertain:
Before firing:
- That the ammunition is of the correct type, approved for use, that it is
clean and undamaged
- That devices for blank, short-range and live ammunition have not been
not mixed up
- That blank, short-range and live ammunition is kept separate and not
transported together, unless the blank and the live ammunition is
packed in different packaging.
After firing:
- That unused ammunition is collected
- That weapon, magazine, ammunition cases, combat gear and uniform
are checked.
3.2.5 Using blank ammunition

3.2.5.1 Everyone must show caution when using blank ammunition, so that accidents can be
avoided. Opening and/or sharing means for fire simulation is prohibited. Individuals
are to be held responsible for breaching the safety regulations. All officers/NCOs are
to check that the regulations are being observed.
Before training using blank ammunition, each participant is to check, without having
been ordered to:
- That there is no live ammunition in weapon, clothing, or in other equipment.
Rev-04 83
- That no live ammunition has been received along with the blank ammunition
(checking cartridge belts, magazines, charger/cartridge clips, etc.)
- That blank firing devices (recoil amplifier, light bolt, blank firing casing) have
been mounted and securely fastened
- That the barrel has been swabbed, that it is clean and undamaged.
While training using blank ammunition each participant is responsible for:
- Not firing the weapon when somebody is within the danger area for the
relevant weapon type
- Not touching or in any other way affecting other participants weapons
- Ascertaining that the muzzle, barrel, chamber, and magazine (cartridge band)
are kept free of external objects (sand, dirt, snow, etc.)
- Observing the regulations for the relevant weapon/ammunition type in detail.
After training the same regulations as those provided for live ammunition when it
comes to handing in spare ammunition, checking weapons and equipment, etc.
apply.
3.3 INDIVIDUAL FIRING AND UNIT FIRING
Figure: 3.6
The new armed forces assault rifle, HK416
3.3.1 General
3.3.1.1 All firing is to be conducted within the regulations provided in the manual for the
relevant range/field. Each range and facility has safety templates that have been
construed based on the activity allowed in the instructions. When training new
techniques, firing methods, etc. is considered necessary the instructions must be
changed and authorized in terms of safety, before firing commences. The Norwegian
Defence Estate Agency is responsible for checking that such changes are in
84 Rev-04
accordance with the regulations in force.

3.3.2 Leadership
3.3.2.1 All firing is to be conducted under the leadership of a professional officer conducting
the exercise, according to the regulations presented in *Leading activities.
Firing training in patrol hand-to-hand fighting is to be led by an instructor who has
passed the courses authorized by the professional authority. The instructor must in
addition receive approval from the local unit commander.
Firing training Fire and manoeuvre is to be led by a professional officer conducting
the exercise, usually platoon commander or his 2IC, depending on qualifications.
The officer conducting the exercise must therefore have been appointed by the local
unit commander.
3.3.3 Basic requirements
3.3.3.1 All firing is to be conducted according to skill, with progression listed in tables and
regulations. Before firing using fire and manoueuvre (soldier/unit providing covering
fire while another soldier/unit is moving) participants must master the following
basic skills:
- Safe weapon handling (checking the direction of the barrel and the Chap-3
surroundings, also when executing firing techniques)
- Index finger (is to rest alongside the trigger mechanism when the weapon is
not in firing position)
- Securing the weapon (between each round of fire and during movement)
- Drill and situation awareness (movement pattern, where are other
soldiers/units relative to own position)
3.3.3.2 Fire and manoeuvre
All firing that implies that one element is providing covering fire from one position
while another element is moving, is referred to as fire and manoeuvre. During all
fire and manoeuvre the following basic rule applies:
The 45 degree rule: meaning that the distance between the soldier/unit who is
moving forwards or backwards, and the soldier/unit who is providing covering fire
(firing) is no longer than the gap between them. The angle is measured from the
weapons muzzle in the firing direction. Should there be a risk of impacts between
the soldiers/units, the distance must be reduced or the gap increased so that
satisfactory safety is achieved.
Rev-04 85
Direction of fire
45
45 45
O
Marksman
Muzzle
The foremost body part
Marksman Marksman
Figure: 3.7
The 45 degree rule
This type of firing will be conducted by soldiers/units of different levels of

proficiency, depending on at what level they are at in their progression and training
standard. For that reason, the activity cannot be regulated in detail for everyone. The
officer conducting the exercise therefore has a special responsibility for adapting
level of ambition to skill, and adjust the plan for safety according to the following
criteria:
- Participants master basic requirements/skills.
- The activity has been adjusted to the participants progression.
- The activity is carried out as simulation or with blank ammunition as part of
the progression. The unit commander (coy/sqn or similar) is to decide which
units are considered to be at a level of proficiency enabling them to train with
live ammunition directly.
- The participants, weather and light conditions on the day of training are to be
assessed.
- That the soldier/unit providing covering fire is not moving, but in a good
86 Rev-04
firing position while firing (a few particular firing tables in UD 6-86 allow
movement, and are exempt from this rule).
- That the soldier/unit providing covering fire is in control of what is closest to
the line of fire.
- That the number of safety controllers is adequate in order to control the
activity (soldiers/units moving), and in order to intervene should dangerous
situations arise. A norm for the number of safety controllers is listed for the
relevant weapon type. In addition, each platoon is to be accompanied by a
safety controller.
- That fire sector limitations are known and understood by each participant.
This is especially important when firing in the dark.
- During firing in adverse terrain, firing while moving (from the hip or
shoulder) and when charging positions, the pair(s) performing the breach must
be on level with each other. Weapons are to be pointed in the firing direction
at all times.
3.3.3.3 Requirements of safety controllers when training patrol (hand-to-hand fighting) Chap-3
close quarter combat
Soldiers who are being trained in patrol close quarter combat can be used as safety
controllers during individual firing. This presupposes that they understand what they
are to check and that they know how to act or react towards a shooter should the
safety regulations be breached. In addition, they must know how to alert the officer
in charge should irregularities occur.
During unit firing for patrols/sections/squads the safety controllers are to be
grenadiers or officers/NCOs who have participated in similar exercises/tables and
have detailed knowledge of them.
3.3.3.4 Firing in darkness and in poor light conditions
Firing in darkness and in poor light conditions places greater demands on risk
management.
The exercise should be carried out in accordance with the criteria specified in the
section on firing and movement in this chapter. Additionally, the following
provisions apply:
General:
- The exercise should be practised in daylight
- The officer in charge of the exercise determines whether all weapons should
be unloaded during movement
- The exercise is not normally undertaken with a division larger than a
company, or similar
- Safety stoppers should be used for the divisions weapons when deemed
necessary
- Sighting tools should be used on support weapons being fired in darkness (cf.
weapons regulations)
Rev-04 87
Requirements for personnel engaged in exercises:

- The division should be well trained in combat technique in daylight and
darkness
- The division and personnel should master the correct use of optical sighting
tools, eyeglasses and illuminators
- Participating personnel should be aware of the precise limits of the advance,
the lines of advance, signals (markings) and the limitations of the firing range
- The exercise should be approved by the division commander
Requirements for safety controllers:
- As a ground rule, one safety controller should be attached to each unit (e.g.
rifle group/partner team) carrying out a movement
- Safety controllers should be able to observe at least as well a personnel
carrying out the actual exercise (e.g. night vision)
- All safety controllers should possess a whistle in order to stop the exercise if
necessary
- All safety controllers should possess a torch
- Safety controllers should wear reflective vests
Markings:
- It should be possible to distinguish the safety controller from personnel
engaged in an exercise
- Personnel engaged in an exercise and safety controllers should be marked
with at least two light sources on their bodies, e.g. lightsticks on their helmets
and backs
- All personnel should be marked in such a way as to be visible to all
participants, e.g. lightsticks and IR flashers
- All hand held weapons should be marked with lightsticks on the handguard, or
similar location. This is in order to mark rifle barrel orientation during
movement
3.3.3.5 Fire support from trained sharp-shooters/snipers
Weapons School templates classify snipers in different levels based on their skills.
These levels, or categories, are:
- Level 1: Section/ squad sniper
- Level 2: 12.7 anti-materiel rifle sniper
- Level 3:Sniper/ spotter in a pair of snipers
- Level 4: Leader of the sniper section/squad
- Level 5: Sharp-shooter instructor
Based on level of training/ skill, snipers may be used to provide covering fire, or
precise fire support for advancing or static personnel. Snipers must only fire where
the area defined by the line of sight is free of terrain obstacles or unidentified
88 Rev-04
objects. Exceptions can be made if the target is located directly behind the obstacle.
(E.g. behind a window pane or behind the wall/door of a vehicle, building or
fortification.)
3.3.4 Firing above and to the side
3.3.4.1 General
This is a particular form of firing which requires careful planning. It also requires a
number of practical safety measures, particularly when firing non-stabilized
weapons.
Firing above and to the side is allowed, in accordance with the following regulations,
for units who possess a satisfactory degree of skill when it comes to handling
weapons and unit performance.
Before training firing above and to the side:
- Aiming device, barrel and firing position are to be adjusted and checked.
- Fully automatic weapons and weapons of caliber > 20 mm are to be
calibrated. The caliber must not exceed the largest allowed caliber for the
relevant weapon.
Chap-3
The boundaries of the danger area to the side and in depth must be made known to
safety officers/NCOs and participating personnel so that the boundaries can be found
without difficulty. The officer conducting the exercise is to ascertain that the
boundaries are clearly marked when this is deemed necessary.
Firing above and to the side is prohibited:
- From moving vehicles. For tank gun, see 3.14.3.2
- Towards moving targets.
- Using a pistol, revolver, sub-machine gun, anti-tank rocket launcher, rifle
grenades or hand grenades.
- Using under-calibrated ammunition.
- Using the 84 mm recoilless gun.
- Using anti-tank weapon ERYX.
Regulations for firing above and to the side are listed for the respective weapons.
3.3.4.2 Safety angles for qualified marksmen when firing to the side of personnel
Safety assumptions:
- Personnel who are to discharge weapons, as well as spotters, are qualified in
accordance with the Norwegian Armys Standards for Marksmen, levels 1-5.
- Firing is only permitted if the maximum wind speed at the stand, 90 degrees
to the direction of fire, is less than 10m/s.
- Friendly personnel who are to be fired at in their flanks must be neither in line
with nor further away from the marksman than the actual target that the
marksmen is firing at.
- When using 5.56 mm ammunition, the maximum distance to the target is 400
metres.
Rev-04 89
- When using 7.62 mm ammunition, the maximum distance to the target is 800
metres, depending on classification level.
- When using a 7.62 mm calibre marksmans rifle, the maximum distance to the
target is 1,000 metres.
- omplete shield clearance should be maintained between the barrel and the
target, i.e. free flight of the bullet throughout the whole trajectory. However,
the target may be partially shielded behind hard or soft materials, although it
may be a maximum of 1 metre from any obstacle (e.g. glass, car door, wooden
wall).
- It is only permitted to use full metal jacket, steel-free ammunition in every
calibre of weapon because of the risk of a ricochet or splinter occurring.
- If practical, test firing should be undertaken prior to commencing exercises
that involve firing to the side of personnel.
This forms the basis of all safety angles at a distance of less than 800 metres.
Safety is further enhanced by ensuring that the maximum permissible distance
to the target is regulated by the marksmans classification level.
Safety angles in lines/metres:
Le- Weapon Distance to target in metres

vel type 50 100 250 350 450 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 950-
100 - - - - - - - - - - - 1000
250 350 450 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900
1 HK416N 40` 40` 40` 40`
with mag- 4m 10m 14m 18m
nifying
lense
(>3x)
1 HK417 40` 40` 40` 40`
med 4m 10m 14m 18m
2 12,7MR 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40`
10m 14m 18m 22m 24m 26m 28m 30m 32m
2 HK417 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40`
4m 10m 14m 18m 22m 24m
3/4/5 HK417 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40`
4m 10m 14m 18m 22m 24m 26m 28m 30m 32m
3/4/5 >7.62 mm 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40` 40`
calibre 4m 10m 14m 18m 22m 24m 26m 28m 30m 32m 34m 36m 40m
90 Rev-04
3.3.5 Vapors and fumes precautions against carbon monoxide poisoning
Figure: 3.8 Chap-3

Gunsmoke i connection with firing
3.3.5.1 When firing live, drill and blank ammunition from covered and built-in positions,
IFVs, etc. the fumes may cause carbon monoxide poisoning. During training it is
important to observe the following factors:
- If there is a ventilator (hatch) this is to be in function (open)
- A total airing-out is to be conducted as soon as possible
- The position and/or the vehicle must under no circumstance be locked or shut
from inside
Normal filter cartridges for protective masks do not protect against carbon monoxide
poisoning. For indoor firing ranges specific regulations apply, according to
environmental legislation, these are to be included in the regulations for the
particular range.
Rev-04 91
3.4 FIRING INFANTRY WEAPONS OF CALIBER

12.7.MM OR SMALLER
Figure: 3.9
Firing with .50 calibre machinegun mounted og "wingfoot"
3.4.1 General
3.4.1.1 Details concerning the drawing up of safety templates are described in Appendix 1,
Constructing templates for direct-firing weapons and values for the different
weapon types templates can be found in Appendices 15 and 16, Entrance values for
construing safety templates. A copy of a calculated template for use in the planning
process is to be made available by the Norwegian Defence Estate Agency locally.
3.4.1.2 Weapon manuals and education/training directives provide regulations for use of
weapons and ammunition. The firing range manual provides special regulations
adapted to the conditions on site. The officer in charge is to ascertain that the
provided regulations are being observed.
3.4.1.3 When firing weapons of calibers less than or equal to 12.7 mm, firing is prohibited
when the next persons ear is closer to the muzzle than 1 metre. If the distance is
increased in depth, the gap is to be increased accordingly.
3.4.1.4 Impact areas for projectiles that are closer than 20 metres from the shooter are to be
checked, so that it is ascertained that spurt and throwback will not bother or injure
personnel.
3.4.1.5 If automatic weapons become so hot that there is a danger of self-ignition, the
weapon is to be emptied within 10 seconds. Should this be impossible, one has to
wait at least 5 minutes before emptying the weapon.
3.4.1.6 Short-range ammunition is to be treated as live ammunition and must under no
circumstance be used as or get mixed with blank ammunition.
92 Rev-04
3.4.2 Special regulations for firing Multipurpose (MP) ammunition

3.4.2.1 When firing 12.7 mm Multipurpose (MP, MP-T) and APS ammunition, special
regulations apply for firing towards ground targets and air targets. The projectile is to
be considered a dud, should it not be disposed when firing. The impact area for firing
towards ground targets is to be a dud field, preferably with a hard surface in order to
increase the chance of disposal. Shortest allowed firing distance (A min) for live
ammunition (MP, MP-T and APS) towards authorized ground targets is 100 metres.
Firing towards air targets is to be conducted in authorized training fields where the
impact area is in water.
3.4.3 Danger area
3.4.3.1 The danger area is presented in the safety templates for the relevant weapon. Table
of entrance values for construction of safety templates for the individual
weapon/caliber is included in Appendices 15 and 16. Method for construction of
safety templates is presented in Appendix 1.
The Norwegian Defence Estate Agency is responsible for making sure that tools for
production of safety templates according to the provided entrance values are
available locally, so that standard templates are available to the local users. Chap-3
3.4.3.2 Dangerous distance for impacts beyond the impact area (l).
Ammu- Risk sce- Risk sce- Risk sce- Risk scenario IV

nition nario I nario II nario III
(meter) (meter) (meter) (meter) Rebound distance
to the side (c)
(meter)
7.62mm 240-0,7 A 180-0,5 A 120-0,3 A Merknad 5
short range, max max max (b)
plastic, all
models
12.7mm 320-0,7 A 240-0,5 A 160-0,3 A 200 100
short range, max max max
plastic
Cal 22( 5,6 1100-0,7 900-0,5 A 600-0,3 A 500 100
mm long rif- A max max max
le)
7.62mm gun, 2600-0,7 2000-0,5 1400-0,3 700 200
medium A max A max A max
machine-
gun, heavy
machine-gun
9 mm mp- 1400-0,7 1100-0,5 700-0,3 A 600 150
og pistol A max A max max
ammunition
Rev-04 93
How to use the table: example

Firing a 7.62 med mer rifle with a maximum range of 400 metres at risk scenario
IIl=2000m 0.5 x A max = 2000m 0.5 x 400m
Calculation of (l) for weapons not mentioned in the table)
For weapons not mentioned in the table the following is used in the
calculation of l :
Risk scenario I: l = 0,8 D max - 0,7 A max
Risk scenario II: l = 0,6 D max - 0,5 A max
Risk scenario III: l = 0,4 D max - 0,3 A max
Note
a. The values for medium dense forest (risk scenario IV) apply when the targets
are placed in the forest or on the edge of the forest. When the firing stand is
placed in front of the edge of the forest, Q is to be at least 1,000 mils (56
degrees) measured from the edge of the forest. The value for l only applies
when the forest (medium dense) has a depth behind the target equal to at least
l at risk scenario IV in the table above.
b. For 7.62 mm short-range ammunition, l= 0 from where impacts in the
background (trees) are 100% certain. Otherwise, calculate as for risk scenario
III.
3.4.4 Regulations for use of blank ammunition in weapons up to and
including 12.7 mm
3.4.4.1 General
Pointing the weapon towards living targets at distances shorter than 20 metres is
prohibited when firing blank ammunition made of plastic with a caliber smaller than
12.7 mm.
a. Safety distance for MP5/AG3/MG3 can be reduced to 5 metres if an approved
recoil amplifier is mounted and protective goggles are being worn.
b. If situation demands it, the safety distance for:
- MP5 with mounted recoil amplifier be reduced to 0.5 metres.
- AG3 with mounted recoil amplifier be reduced to 2 metres.
3.4.4.2 Handling of malfunction/duds/misfires

Blank ammunition for pistols, rifles and machine-guns that is not disposed when
fired is to be handled according to the following regulations:
- The ammunition is to be kept by the individual and given to the closest
superior. The unit is to ascertain that the ammunition is returned to the
ammunition store.
3.4.5 Firing above and to the side
3.4.5.1 When firing above and to the side using weapons of a caliber equal to or smaller than
12.7mm towards close targets, ammunition with the same lot number is to be used.
94 Rev-04
3.4.5.2 Above-firing using machine-guns, automatic rifles and rifles can take place under the
condition that:
- The line of sight is at least 70 mils (but no less than 6 metres) higher than the
unit being fired above. The angle (distance) is to be measured from the
ground. If there are trees on the ground, the line of sight must be at least 70
mils (but no less than 4 metres) higher than the lowest treetop or feature in the
terrain.
- Only short bursts are being fired when using machine-guns, 3-4 shots. Firing
long series is prohibited.
- Only single cartridges are fired from automatic rifles.
- The distance to the point being fired above using machine-guns, automatic
rifles and rifles does not exceed 300 metres.
- Safety stoppers are used so that the line of sight is not lowered unknowingly.
- The sight is good.
- The limits of the danger area are made known to the shooter. Particularly the
nearest limit (lowest line) allowed fired towards must have been made clearly Chap-3
known.
- The shooter at all times knows where the unit he is firing above is, and the
distance to this point.
- Registration firing has been conducted beforehand.
3.4.5.3 Firing above using machine-gun (7.62mm and 12.7mm) may be conducted:
- When the line of sight to the point being fired above and the target being fired
at is equal to or larger than the angle in the table below. The angle is measured
from the ground or from the highest treetop/ terrain feature.
- When the distance to the point being fired above does not exceed 1,000 metres
for 12.7mm and 600 metres for 7.62mm with live(cold) ammunition, or if the
distance to the point being fired over does not exceed 500 metres with tracer
ammunition. Even so, for long distances the trajectory should be checked
using tracers before firing commences. Firing above using machine-gun
12.7mm, M2 or HPS is only allowed from tripod M3 or Vingfot. Firing above
is only allowed using cold ammunition (not MP, MP-T or APS). For guns
mounted on armoured fighting vehicles, see own regulations.
- When the pods on the tripod are being weighed down using sandbags.
- When safety stoppers are being used to prevent the line of sight (trajectory)
from being lowered involuntarily below the allowed point, for instance if the
tripod slips or the laying gear loosens. This regulation applies regardless of
whether there is a particular safety stopper mounted on the weapon.
- As long as the weapon is not fired when abnormally hot.
- When the firing rate does not exceed about 70 rounds per minute. Barrels that
have fired 750 rounds or more, with a higher firing rate, are to bee cooled or
changed before firing continues.
Rev-04 95
- When firing series of more than 7-8 shots are prohibited.

- When the limits of the danger area are made known to the shooter.
Particularly the closest limit (lowest line) allowed firing towards must have
been made clearly known, and the distance to this must be known (measured).
Before firing commences this limit is to be checked by means of registration
firing.
- The officer conducting the exercise or other personnel in charge must at all
times know where the unit being fired above is located.
Distance to point being Angle for 7.62mm and 12.7mm

fired above
100 90 mils
200 45 mils
300 39 mils
400 34 mils
500 37 mils
600 37 mils
700 39 mils
800 41 mils
900 47 mils
1000 52 mils
3.4.5.4 Firing above units using machine-guns at distances shorter than 100 metres. The
purpose of battle seasoning is to let the personnel get familiar with the sound and
feel of enemy fire. The following regulations apply to battle seasoning exercises
when firing from ranges shorter than 100 metres. Fire simulation may be allowed.
The regulations in the previous points are to be observed unless other regulations are
provided below. Participating personnel are to be well trained. Particularly the
gunners on the HMG and MMG need to be highly professional. Before battle
seasoning using live ammunition commences, the training must have been conducted
at least once without ammunition. Battle seasoning is allowed using all types of
machine-guns caliber 7.62mm. The barrels that are to be used must be measured
using burnout gauge (NATO no. 5210-12-137-4345) before firing, and the highest
allowed burnout is indicator 10. The barrel is to be measured again every 750
rounds. If the muzzle on the barrel is visibly oval, or has other visible damage, the
barrel must not be used.
Materiel readiness check of the weapons is to be carried out before firing
commences. The weapons must also be checked while firing. It is especially
important to ascertain that all clamp screws are screwed on tightly, that the pivot
lock is locked and flash eliminator firmly mounted. Up to 4 weapons can be fired
simultaneously. Tripod is to be weighed down by sandbags or in other ways be
96 Rev-04
securely anchored to the surface it is standing on. Safety stoppers above and to the
side are to be used. Safety stoppers must be construed in a manner that blocks the
possibility of involuntarily lowering the line of sight or moved to the side. Safety
stoppers are to be checked before and while firing. Before battle seasoning
commences, weapons and ammunition are to be test fired. Targets are to be put up at
a distance of about 75 metres from the weapons. At least 250 rounds are to be fired
from each weapon.
Test firing is meant to determine the fragmentation/dispersal in height. Lowest hit in
the fragmentation/dispersal pattern is to be used for determining the correct height
for firing above a unit. During test firing it must also be checked whether
irregularities such as tumbling or faulty discharge occur. If such occur, the weapon
and ammunition must not be used. Test firing is to be conducted immediately before
battle seasoning commences.
The following types of ammunition are allowed used:
- For MG-3 used as medium machine-gun:
- Live cartridge NM 60
- Tracer cartridge NM 62.
Chap-3
- For other types of machine-guns:
- Ball
- Armourpiercing
- Tracer.
The same lot number is to be used for test firing and training. When personnel are
crawling or stomach crawling, the height of fire above must be at least 3 metres. The
height is measured form the highest feature (obstacle on the ground) that personnel
will have to crawl over, to the lowest hit in the dispersion pattern. Should there be
items protruding higher up, the height is to be measured from these.
When personnel are moving in an upright position, the height of fire above them is
increased to 5 metres. When several machine-guns are being fired simultaneously,
they must each be assigned a fire sector. The fire sectors must not overlap in the area
where personnel are being fired above.
3.4.5.5 Firing to the side of personnel is allowed using rifles, automatic rifles, light/medium
machine-guns and heavy machine-guns.
3.4.5.6 The regulations for firing above personnel also apply to firing to the side of
personnel with the following additions:
- The target(s) fired at must lie beyond the unit that is being fired past/to the
side of.
- The only requirement demanded of line of sight (line of fire) weapon target
is that all rounds fired with certainty hit beyond the unit that is being fired
past/to the side of (bearing).
- The angle (distance) between the unit(s) being fired past/to the side of and
closest fire sector boundary is to be at least 100 mils (still no less than 6
metres).
Rev-04 97
- The possibility of moving the weapon sideways is to be limited by safety

stoppers. Additionally the regulations for safety stoppers during firing above
personnel apply, in order to prevent the line of sight from being lowered
involuntarily so that there is a danger of impacts between the weapon and the
unit that is being fired past.
- The gunner must know where the unit he/she is firing past is located and the
distance to them.
3.4.5.7 Safety personnel are to ascertain that:
- The requirements for firing above and past/to the side of personnel have been
met.
- The rest and the safety stoppers are securely mounted and in accordance with
the safety angle.
- The gunner knows the limits of the smallest allowed elevation (side angle) and
at all times knows where the unit he/she is firing above/past/to the side of is
located.
- The gunner uses the correct aiming device.
- The personnel being fired above/past/to the side of know the boundaries of the
danger area.
3.4.5.8 Hearing protection. All personnel within a radius of 100 metres from the
weapon/weapons are to wear both earplugs and earmuffs. See 6.21 in this chapter.
3.5 ILLUMINATION ROCKETS, AMMUNITION
FOR VERY PISTOLS, WARNING FLARES
AND SMOKE
3.5.1 Illumination rockets
3.5.1.1 Illumination rocket NM 152, L5A4 and HELIOS
Check before firing that the launch pipe/discharger is without dents, and that the
rocket has a free line of path. When firing a small heat blast will occur. For that
reason the launch pipe is to be held on the left (right) side of the body when firing.
If there is a malfunction or for some other reason the rocket is not fired, this is to be
handled according to 3.5.6. When moving such rockets one must keep in mind that
delayed firing/discharge may take place. The rocket must therefore have a free path
at all times.
Hearing protection.. Earplugs are to be worn by the shooter as well as by personnel
in the near vicinity. See 6.21 in this chapter. Also see 3.5.3.1 and 3.5.6 on
malfunction.
3.5.1.2 Firing illumination rockets from armoured vehicles:
- Preparing and firing hand held illumination rockets is to be done with the flare
above and to the side of the edge of the hatch.
98 Rev-04
3.5.2 Ammunition for Very pistols

3.5.2.1 Ammunition for Very pistols is also allowed used in other approved firing devices
for signal light. Very pistols and firing devices must to be directed towards personnel
or living beings, or be mounted in a way that poses risk to personnel.
Hearing protection.. Earplugs must be worn by the shooter as well as by personnel in
the near vicinity. See 6.21 in this chapter.
3.5.2.2 Should the weapon malfunction, it is to be fired again at least twice. If the round
does still not discharge, act according to 3.5.6.
Also see 3.5.3
3.5.2.3 Firing Very pistols from armoured vehicles:
- The Very pistol must not be charged inside or be kept while charged inside the
vehicle. Very pistols must be charged immediately before use and with the
muzzle outside the vehicle.
3.5.3 Impact area for illumination ammunition
3.5.3.1 The impact area must be chosen so as there are no buildings, flammable materials or
items (in the terrain) within a distance of 250 metres. The light source tube can in Chap-3
certain cases burn abnormally long. The Very pistol and firing devices are to be
aimed sufficiently high, so that the light source tube has burned out before it hits the
ground. The chute is to be collected if possible.
Figure: 3.10
Recommended firing position for Very pistol
3.5.4 Warning flares

3.5.4.1 In order to prevent outbreak of fire and injury to personnel:
- The warning flare must only be used outdoors.
Rev-04 99
- The warning flare must be placed above an average persons height, and in a
way that will not pose risk of injury to personnel. If possible, the fulminate on
warning flare NM 4 is to be fired straight up.
- The person mounting the flare must ascertain that the base holder is securely
fastened so that it cannot be pulled out of position by the tripwire.
- Flammable materials around the flare must be removed to a distance of 0.5
metres.
- Posted warning flares are to be registered on a simple sketch of the area, with
map reference and grid reference.
- Posted warning flares are to be collected by the unit who put the flares out
when leaving the area. If the flares have not been detonated, this is to be
handled in accordance with 3.5.6.
3.5.5 Smoke
3.5.5.1 Personnel who are to release or throw smoke must have been trained in using and
handling the relevant type. Particularly, knowledge and understanding of the
launching sector, range and effect of the smoke must have been acquired, to be able
to assess safety in relation to own manoeuvre and the personnel being exposed to
smoke.
For handling of smoke ammunition, see the current regulations for smoke
ammunition and for the weapons that may have been delivered with the ammunition.
The smoke that is spread, particularly HC smoke, is poisonous. This is caused by
particles of smoke entering the air cells of the lungs (the alveola) when being
inhaled, damaging and possibly destroying these. It is hard to determine a lower limit
for exposure time or for the concentration of smoke where one with certainty may
say that the smoke will cause no injury.
3.5.5.2 Smoke must not be used in confined or partially confined rooms such as pipe lines,
except during special exercises training use of authorized firefighting equipment.
Outdoors smoke is to be used to an extent where the purpose is achieved without
causing injury to personnel. Normally, the intention will be to block vision or
produce cover, and the concentration must not be higher than what is necessary in
order to train according to the intention.
AN SCBA (SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING
APPARATUS) MUST BE WORN WHEN PASSING
THROUGH OR STAYING IN SMOKE
When training it is important not to light several smoke canisters that are lined up
with a following wind simultaneously. Smoke must not be laid so that thick smoke
starts drifting over areas where there may be civilians or livestock, populated areas,
trafficked roads, etc.
3.5.5.3 If anybody shows symptoms of smoke poisoning (strong fits of coughing, burning,
headache, nausea, difficulty breathing, etc.) he/she is to be provided with fresh air,
rest and oxygen mask if required. The patient is to be brought horizontally to a
medical doctor as soon as possible.
100 Rev-04
3.5.5.4 Using smoke grenade launchers on vehicles

When firing smoke grenade launchers, a sector with a radius of 80 metres and a
width of 120 degrees must be free of personnel. When charging/emptying the fumes
the facilitys power switch must be turned off.
3.5.5.5 Throwing smoke from vehicles
When throwing smoke canisters from vehicles, the canister is to be held on the
outside of the vehicle when the pin is pulled out.
3.5.6 Malfunction/duds/ammunition failure
3.5.6.1 Should malfunction occur, the launching device for smoke, illumination rockets,
warning flares and Very pistols must be kept pointing in the firing direction for at
least 30 seconds. The ammunition must then be put aside, or remain on the ground,
and marked. Smoke canisters in launching devices are to remain in the device for at
least 30 minutes. Illumination rockets, warning flares and ammunition for signal
guns are to be laid down pointing in a safe direction. After a 30-minute wait, the
ammunition may be destroyed by personnel with dud competence.
3.6 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF
Chap-3
SIMUNITION TRAINING AMMUNITION
3.6.1 General
3.6.1.1 These are safety regulations developed for the use of SIMUNITION FX, which
means that they must not be applied for use of UTM-SIMUNITION FX and not get
mixed with SIMUNITION short-range ammunition (SIMUNITION CQT) or with
SIMUNITION SHORT STOP. UTM.
SIMUNITION FX is to be used during unilateral or bilateral training, indoors as
well as outdoors.
3.6.1.2 All personnel participating or staying in the training area s danger area while
training with SIMUNITION FX must wear personal protective equipment. Danger
area is defined as a 75 metre radius from where the training takes place. If the
training takes place in a confined area where it is physically impossible for shots to
get outside the area, the danger area is equal to the restricted area. The personal
protective equipment consists of field uniform with hood, or at least two layers of
clothing over the whole body, head included. Helmet, neck protector, groin protector
and gloves are to be worn. For face protection a special facemask which when
adapted covers the whole face is to be worn. The mask must be designed in a way
that prevents all face and eye protection from splintering if or when broken. The
mask (all eye and face protection) must withstand ballistic projectiles made of
plastic, with an initial velocity of up to 250 m/s. A list of authorized equipment can
be obtained from the professional authority (Manoeuvre).
Personnel within the training area must not remove personal protective equipment
while training, but may, if experiencing discomfort, order a halt in the exercise.
Personal protective equipment cannot be removed until the officer conducting the
exercise has ordered halt, empty weapon, check and a halt in the exercise.
All personnel within the safe zone of the training area may order a halt in the
exercise, if reasons of safety require it. This applies to the training personnel, token
Rev-04 101
forces, safety officers, the officer conducting the exercise or personnel in the near
vicinity of the danger area (see this paragraph).
The order to be given is HALT, all participating personnel including token forces
freeze in their positions, secure weapons and await further orders until the officer
conducting the exercise appears, in order to assess whether the exercise may be
continued. If the exercise is to continue, the officer conducting the exercise is to give
the order GET READY CONTINUE! If the exercise has to be called off, the
officer conducting the exercise gives the order EMPTY WEAPONS CHECK
END OF EXERCISE.
3.6.1.3 SIMUNITION FX is to be looked upon much in the same way as fresh food: after
some time the dye (soap, colour and water) will dry up. All packaging of
SIMUNITION FX has the production date stamped on. Storage should hold a
temperature of between 5 and 20 degrees Celcius. Storing the ammunition at a
temperature of about 20 degrees C, or below 5 degrees C, may result in shorter
durability.
At ammunition temperatures below 5 degrees C, the dye in the projectile may get
harder, and in such cases the ammunition must not be used during bilateral exercises.
Dried up SIMUNITION FX must not be used during bilateral exercises.
SIMUNITION FX has the following velocity speed:
9mm. P-80 or equivalent: 125 m/s

9mm. MP-5 or equivalen- 150 m/s
t:
5,56. C-8 or equivalent: 200 m/s
3.6.1.4 Weapons that are to have SIMUNITION FX training system mounted on them are to
be well maintained and the barrel must be kept free of any obstruction.
Weapons and magazines used for SIMUNITION FX training system must be marked
with blue tape, in order to distinguish them from other weapons. The officer
conducting the exercise should assign a highly qualified person the responsibility of
converting all the weapons and mark the weapons that are to be used.
Magazines must only be filled up to 70% of their capacity, in order to prevent
malfunction.
When about 100 rounds have been fired, the training systems barrel is to be cleaned
with a copper brush (4-5 times), in order to remove plastic that may have got stuck in
the barrel. This prevents the projectile from getting jammed inside the barrel.
3.6.2 The skills of the personnel
3.6.2.1 All personnel participating in exercises/training with SIMUNITION FX must listen
to an introduction on weapon and training system use and maintenance. This
introduction is to be given by the officer conducting the exercise.
All personnel participating in exercises/training with SIMUNITION FX must know
which routines are to be observed should the exercise be called off abruptly, as well
as routines for emptying weapons.
102 Rev-04
3.6.3 Danger area

3.6.3.1 For personnel without personal protective equipment, the danger area is a 75 metre
radius from the place where fiiring is going on. At distances above 75 metres, the
projectile, should it reach thus far, cause minimal effect irrespective of whom or
where it hits. Only personnel wearing authorized personal protective clothing, see
General, can stay within the danger area.
3.6.4 Exceptions
3.6.4.1 During some unilateral exercises, as described below, the required use of personal
protective equipment described in 3.6.1.2 may be disregarded by training
personnel. Nonetheless, protective goggles and helmet must be worn. Token forces
during unilateral exercises must always wear personal protective equipment, as
described in 3.6.1.2.
In order to be allowed disregarding the regulation concerning PPE the following
factors need to be present:
- Only one person is being trained at a time.
- Targets or token forces make up the game.
Chap-3
- Token forces involved in the exercise cannot possess weapons that may fire
SIMUNITION FX at the personnel who are training.
Safety personnel who at all times stay behind the person who is training can wear the
same personal protective equipment as he/she is. Safety personnel with the token
force or in the target area must always wear personal protective clothing according to
3.6.1.2. Other personnel in the area must wear personal protective equipment when
staying in the danger area, as described in paragraphs 3.6.1.2 and 3.6.3.1.
3.6.5 Demonstration
3.6.5.1 During demonstrations of how to use SIMUNITION FX onlookers/ observers
outside the danger area are to wear protective goggles.
3.6.6 Personnel for management and control
3.6.6.1 During all exercises using SIMUNITION FX, an 1.1.5.2 must have been appointed.
It is the officer conducting the exercises responsibility to ascertain that the exercise
is conducted in accordance with these safety regulations, and with the duties
presented in 1.1.5.2 onwards. During minor exercises the officer conducting the
exercise also functions as safety officer. During large and complex exercises, the
officer conducting the exercise is to appoint an adequate number of safety officers
for the different elements.
The unit commander appoints well-trained personnel as officer conducting the
exercise and safety officers, and ascertains that these possess the required
competence. The officer conducting the exercise must have passed the instructor
course in the use of SIMUNITION FX training systems. The course must have been
implemented or approved by the chief of the professional authority (Manoeuvre), in
accordance with the programme and regulations provided by him/her. The officer
conducting the exercise ascertains that safety officers possess the required
competence. The officer conducting the exercise must implement necessary
measures in order to prevent trespassers from entering the danger area while the
Rev-04 103
exercise is going on.

The officer conducting the exercise and the safety officers are to wear kevlars clearly
visible, as well as the personal protective equipment listed in 3.6.1
The officer conducting the exercise is to ascertain that all weapons that do not have
exercise equipment mounted are checked before they are used during the exercise, as
well as establish routines for checking that ammunition of the wrong kind does not
get into the training area. Using any other type of small arms ammunition during
exercises where SIMUNITION FX training ammunition is being used is prohibited.
Blank ammunition is excepted from this rule.
It is the officer conducting the exercises responsibility to ascertain that the
personnels skill/level and personal protective equipment is adequate before the
exercise/training commences (see 3.6.1 and ) 3.6.3.
The officer conducting the exercise is to ascertain that all participating personnel
have experience from being hit by SIMUNITION FX.
The officer conducting the exercise must especially ascertain that all participants
know which routines apply should the exercise need to be called off abruptly, as well
as the routines for empty weapons check.
104 Rev-04
3.7 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR 40MM

RIFLE-MOUNTED GRENADE LAUNCHER
Chap-3
Figure: 3.11
40mm grenade launcher on AG-3
3.7.1 General
3.7.1.1 Firing the 40mm grenade launcher requires two types of firing ranges. The training
grenade can normally be fired on all ranges where AG-3 firing is conducted. The
user must know the regulations concerning outbreak of fire on the firing range, etc.
since there is a tracer charge in the grenade which burns as far as about 200 metres.
The HE grenade requires an authorized dud field with the same requirements made
when it comes to fencing in and marking as for the M-72 impact area, see the firing
range manual. All firing positions for firing the AG-3 can also be used when firing
the rifle-mounted grenade launcher.
3.7.2.1 When firing 40mm grenades the following personnel must normally be appointed:
- Officer conducting the exercise (officer conducting firing)
- Safety controllers.
The HE grenade has a built-in self-detonator which sets off the grenade after about 8
seconds. The officer conducting the exercise is responsible for filling in form 750 B
in Appendix 6B after firing. Should duds be fired, he/she is to register where these
Rev-04 105
landed and report this to the person in charge of the training field immediately after
firing. The safety controller is to ascertain that:
- The weapon is being pointed in the firing direction.
- That the muzzle of the grenade launcher is free of snow and dirt, that the
shooter knows where the target is
- That the grenade has a free trajectory
Firing HE grenades requires a safety controller at each weapon when training
simultaneous fire. The officer conducting the exercise (officer conducting firing) is
to appoint the required number of safety controllers in order to conduct firing in
accordance with the stated criteria.
3.7.3 Ammunition check
3.7.3.1 The grenade must be checked visually by its user before launching. The grenade
must show no sign of outer damage, and must to the extent that this is possible be
kept in its original packaging. Faulty or damaged ammunition must not be used.
3.7.4 Firing above and past/to the side of personnel
3.7.4.1 Firing above and past (to the side of) personnel is prohibited.
3.7.5 Measures should the weapon malfunction
3.7.5.1 If the weapon does not discharge or if it malfunctions, it must immediately be
cocked and fired again. If the weapon still does not discharge it is to be aimed in the
firing direction, wait for 1 minute, and pull the trigger for the third time. If there is a
snap in the percussion cap the grenade is to be handled as a dud and be transported to
a suitable location for demolition.
3.7.6 Danger area
3.7.6.1 Danger area is presented in the safety templates for the respective weapon. A table of
entrance values for calculating safety template for 40mm rifle-mounted grenade
launcher is provided in Appendix 15. Method for constructing safety templates is
provided in Appendix 1.
3.7.7 Safety regulations AG-HK 416:
Figure: 3.12
HK416 with RMGL
106 Rev-04
3.7.7.1 When training for operations with the grenade launcher, the following regulations
apply:
- Advancing is allowed with the weapon charged and secured, however, it must
be pointed in a safe direction at all times, and the safety lever must not be
released until the target has been localized and the weapon is pointing towards
this.
- The ammunition is to be handled carefully and should for the most part be
kept in its original packaging or in a cartridge belt, to the extent that this is
possible.
- Due to the location of the barrel, it is important that the weapon has a muzzle
cap mounted in winter or in areas with a lot of dust and sand. The muzzle cap
will prevent strange items from entering the weapon.
- When the grenade launcher is not mounted on the HK 416 or is not being used
as the primary weapon, loading is to take place when in position.
- Should ammunition failure occur whilst firing, the following procedureds are
to be observed:
1. Secure the AG_HK416. Chap-3
2. Tap the barrel at the back left side, in order to check that it is not in a
locked position.
3. Pull the trigger for the second time immediately.
Should the weapon continue to malfunction, do as follows:
1. Empty the grenade launcher and recharge using a different grenade.
2. Fire the weapon.
Wait for 1 ONE minute before removing a grenade that

did not discharge. Grenades that did not discharge but
malfunctioned are to be handled in the same way as duds.
Rev-04 107
3.8 HAND GRENADES
Figure: 3.13
Practicing grenade throwing
3.8.1 General
3.8.1.1 Basic throwing exercises using fragmentation grenades and shock grenades are to be
conducted from a throwing pit. Throwing exercises are normally only allowed from
a pit. Throwing from several pits within the same danger area is allowed in
permanent exercise fields, but only from one pit at a time. The throwing pit is to
provide safe cover for the thrower and the safety controller (instructor).
3.8.1.2 During advanced throwing exercises, throwing from natural places of cover, which
provide safe cover, is allowed. Such throwing is only allowed when the thrower has
reached a sufficient level of skill.
3.8.1.3 If the ground is covered with snow, the snow is to be shovelled away or trampled
before throwing commences. See 3.8.8.
3.8.2.1 When throwing hand grenades, the following personnel are normally to be
appointed:
- Safety controllers (instructors) in each throwing pit.
The officer conducting the exercise can function as a safety controller (instructor)
when throwing is being conducted from one pit. An officer/NCO is to be in charge of
the waiting and resting area.
3.8.2.2 The officer conducting the exercise (officer conducting firing) must in addition to the
regular duties listed in 1.1.5.2:
- Order personnel other than the grenade thrower and the safety controller
(instructor) to take cover.
108 Rev-04
- Give the order that the grenade is to be thrown.

- Give the order that the thrower is to be relieved.
- Ascertain that duds are blasted immediately, before the exercise continues (in
accordance with UD 16-15).
- Decide how the duty is to be done in each separate case.
3.8.2.3 The safety controller (instructor) must in addition to the regular duties listed in
1.1.5.5:
- Stay with the thrower in the throwing pit. He/she must not disturb the thrower,
but be placed where he/she can intervene immediately should the hand
grenade be handled incorrectly.
- Check that the thrower is not wearing equipment that might get in the way of
throwing.
- Check the priming of the hand grenades.
- Alert the officer conducting the exercise when the hand grenade(s) has been
primed. Chap-3
- Check that the safety pin is not pulled (that the ignition is not made
functional) until on orders.
- Ascertain that the thrower and himself/herself are following the grenades
trajectory visually, in order to determine whereabouts it will hit. Then
ascertain that both take cover immediately.
- Be aware that the flying time for particularly high throws may equal the
burning time of the igniter, and that in such a case cover must be sought
earlier than what is normal in relation to the trajectory of the grenade.
- Pick the grenade up and throw it, should the grenade fall down next to the
thrower after the safety pin has been pulled out (the igniter set in function).
Then seek cover immediately. Should throwing the grenade prove impossible, take
cover immediately (outside the throwing pit or in the pit(s). Standard throwing pit is
described in Firing range manual (FB).
3.8.2.4 Other personnel
Only the grenade thrower and the safety controller (instructor) must stay in the
throwing pit. Other personnel are to be in safe cover or outside the danger area.
3.8.3.1 During educational throwing, the grenade is to be carried to the throwing pit in its
fibre container. When throwing is about to commence, the container is to be opened,
and it is to be checked that the safety lever and safety pin with loop are in place
before the grenade is taken out of the container. When throwing in the field, the
grenade may be taken out of the fibre container before the training commences. This
must be done at a good distance form ammunition stores or dumps, and at least 100
metres from buildings. When drill grenades and training grenades are being used
they are to be handled as live grenades as far as the construction allows. Using
improvised hand grenades is prohibited in peacetime. This does not apply to
improvised devices such as the Molotov cocktail, as long as they do not contain
Rev-04 109
explosives other than the percussion cap.

3.8.4 Advanced throwing exercises using fragmentation and stun grenades
3.8.4.1 During advanced throwing exercises and exercises in the field where hand grenade
throwing is part of the training, the officer conducting the exercise decides the order
of duty. Advanced throwing exercises are allowed when the participants have
acquired a good level of skill. During advanced throwing exercises, the following
regulations apply:
- The training must have been worked through beforehand.
- The place(s) grenades are being thrown from and places of cover must have
been picked out in advance.
- When choosing cover for the thrower and participating personnel within the
danger area, it must be taken into account that grenade splinters may move in
quite irregular and high trajectories.
- Throwing is prohibited when it is dark and when visibility is poor.
- Throwing is prohibited in forests.
- Only one hand grenade is allowed to be thrown at a time from each throwing
pit/place.
3.8.5 Throwing incendiary grenades, smoke grenades,
3.8.5.1 For reasons of safety, incendiary grenades, smoke grenades, signal grenades and
training grenades are to be handled as if they were fragmentation grenades or shock
grenades. The danger area for the different categories (models) will be described in
the next paragraph. Training grenades can also be thrown from positions in the field.
Throwing place and cover must be picked in advance.
3.8.6 Danger area
3.8.6.1 The danger area for hand grenades is limited to a circle which centre is the middle of
the target area (fig 7).
110 Rev-04
Da
ngero
us
rad
ius
X Target Area
Throwing pit
Waiting Area
Resting area
Figure: 3.14 Chap-3

Danger area for hand grenades
Danger radius can be found in the following table:
Type of hand grenade Danger radius Note

(model)
Live grenades
FRAGMENTATION 150 m Prohibited in
HAND GRENADE, DM (partly)confined rooms and
61 near walls because of blast
injuries, see . 2.5.1.1
SHOCK GRENADE, M 100 m See above
100
SHOCK GRENADE, 100 m See above
MK3A2
SHOCK GRENADE, 75 m These are not prohibited in
HGR 85 (partly) cofined rooms
SHOCK GRENADE, flas- 5 m See above. Distance may
h-bang be set to 0,5m if regula-
tions in new section 3.8.9
are followed.
HAND GRENADE, 5m See above
sound & flash
Training grenades:
TRAINING GRENADE, 10 m Distance may be set to
Rev-04 111
DM 78 0,5m if regulations in new

section 3.8.10 are follow-
ed.
Dummy grenades:
DUMMY GRENADES 0m
(all types)
Incendiary grenades:
INCENDIARY GRENA- 10 m
DES (all types)
Gas grenades:
CS GRENADES (all type- 5 m Prohibited in confined
s) spaces. Protection mask to
be used closer than 5 met-
res
Smoke grenades/Smoke Giftig Prohibited in confined
canisters spaces/Staying in/passing
through smoke protection
mask is to be used. HC
smoke
SMOKE GRENADE, 5m Som pkt over
M88 HC
M8HC
SMOKE GRENADE, 10 m Som pkt over
SPONTANEOUS
RED M 18
HAND GRENADE, co- 5m Som pkt over
loured smoke (all types)
For 76 mm launcher Poisonous
SPONTANEOUS GRE- 25 m Prohibited in confined
NADE HC, DM 45 and spaces. When passing
DM 45 F1 through or staying in smo-
ke wear protection mask.
3.8.7.1 All personnel within a radius of 100 metres from the weapon(s) must normally wear
both earplugs and earmuffs. See 6.21.
3.8.8 Duds
3.8.8.1 If a dud is thrown, all personnel are to stay in cover for 30 minutes, nevertheless, see
112 Rev-04
possible memorandum which may state other lengths of time. No grenades are to be
thrown on the same range in the waiting time. The dud is to be found and blasted
before throwing continues. Only personnel who have a blasting certificate category
III are allowed to move duds.
3.8.9 Flashbang
3.8.9.1 General
Safe distance from Flashbang is 0.5 metres.
Using Flashbang is prohibited in bilateral exercises.
3.8.9.2 Personal protective equipment
All personnel who are training are to wear:
- Uniform covering the entire body, with a hooded jacket
- Combat goggles
- Gloves/wind mittens
- Helmet
- Double hearing protection
Chap-3
3.8.9.3 Using Flashbang during bilateral exercises is prohibited.
Safety regulations when using token forces
- When using token forces the officer conducting the exercise is to ascertain the
following:
- Check the rooms that Flashbangs will be thrown into, in order to reduce the
risk of the grenade rebounding and hitting the training unit.
- Check that there are no closets, shelves, etc. which may cause the grenade to
roll down on the token force.
- Tell the token force what their duties are.
- Place the token force where they (or he/she) are least likely to get hit by the
grenade when it is thrown into the room.
- Check that there are no obstacles that may prevent the token force from
moving.
- Stop the training if the sight is poor (smoke, dust, etc.).
- The token force is to stand while the training is conducted in order to reduce
the risk of having FB land on the body.
All token forces are to wear:
- Field uniform (cotton) with hood
- Helmet, neck protection and groin protection (hard shell) and gloves
- Face protection that will not splinter should it get broken.
- Gloves/ wind mittens.
Personnel in the training area must never take off personal protective equipment
while training is going on. Personal protective equipment can be taken off when the
Rev-04 113
officer conducting the exercise gives the order: Halt, empty weapons, check, end of
exercise.
3.8.9.4 Personnel competence
Personnel are to be well trained and must have conducted advanced throwing
exercises for using Flashbang in combat.
All personnel participating in Flashbang training must be instructed in Flashbang
usage, handling and safety.
All personnel participating in Flashbang training must know the routines and
signs/signals that apply, should the exercise need to be stopped abruptly.
3.8.10 DM-78 Exercise grenade
3.8.10.1 General
The safety distance to DM-78 may be set at 0.5 metres providing the following
safety gear is used:
- Helmet
- Combat goggles
- Ear protection
3.8.10.2 Safety provisions regarding the use of DM-78 during bilateral exercises
Participating personnel should be made familiar with the following provisions:
- The practice grenade should be inspected for cracks and chips. If any cracks
and/or chips are found, the grenade should not be used in bilateral exercises
- Efforts should be made to ensure that an opponent is not struck physically by
a practice grenade
- Participating personnel should position themselves away from any immediate
danger of being directly struck by the grenade
- If a mock victim has to move, there should be no obstacles blocking his/her
path
- If a practice grenade should land within 0.5 metres of personnel, such
personnel should relocate to a distance of 0.5 metres from the practice grenade
- A grenade that has been thrown should not be retrieved until it has exploded
- In addition, during exercises in urban terrain, the following measures should
be implemented:
- Inspect spaces in which the DM-78 is to be thrown, in order to
minimise the risk of the grenade rebounding and hitting participating
personnel
- The mock victim should be placed where there is the least likelihood of
a grenade striking the position
114 Rev-04
3.9 CLAYMORE MINES
Chap-3
Figure: 3.15
Claymore mine M-100
3.9.1 Claymore mines, light M-19, heavy M-100 and heavy FFV 013
3.9.1.1 Details for construction of safety templates and data for making a safety template see
appendix 23
- if blindage is used the given distances may be reduced in accordance with UD
2-1, appendix 9.(The splinters from the explosive are considered as projectiles
from rifles)
the exception is the navys FFV 013 where personnel are not to to stay closer
to the explosive than 200m even if blindage is being used
For discharge/firing of the explosive personnel are to be ordered as pointed out in
UD 2-1, paragraph 2.4.2.1.
In case of possible afterburners the regulations applying to the materiel used for
discharge are to be observed.
3.9.2 Firing stand for demonstration fire of Claymores M-19 and M-100
3.9.2.1 Personnel can stay behind the blindage when discharging M-19 and M-100 in
blindage built in accordance with illustrations 62 and 63.
Minimum distance from the personnel to the blindage is 50m.
Rev-04 115
3.9.2.2 There are no restrictions in the use of radio controlled discharging systems (TASS
Tactical Activating and Safety System) when using explosives M-19 and M-100.
Before use the original codes are to be punched in the receiver(s). This is done to
avoid that codes from other units can be stored in the receiver(s).
Armered concrete with 20mm steelplate on top
Armered concrete
Filling of sand/gravel/dirt
The thickness of the protecting sand mass must be at least
min 60 cm, min 100 cm above ground level
min 1,05 m
1,50 m
1,75 m
0,60 m 3,50 m 0,60 m
Figure: 3.16
Firing stand seen from the side
116 Rev-04
7,50 m
3,00 m
1,50 m
3,25 m
1,50 m
5,00 m
Chap-3
3,50 m
Armered concrete with 20mm steelplate on top

Armered concrete
Back- and side walls must be covered with 10mm steelplates
Filling of sand/gravel/dirt
The thickness of the protecting sand mass must be
Figure: 3.17
Firing stand seen from above
Rev-04 117
Main firing direction = 00
Dangerous area
when using protective mass
o -
80 (1425)
Armered concrete with steelplate on top

Armered concrete
Filling sand/gravel/dirt
The thickness of the protecting sand mass must be
Figure: 3.18
Horizontal danger area
118 Rev-04
3.10 MORTARS
Figure: 3.19 Chap-3

Firing mortar from tracked vehicle
3.10.1 In general
3.10.1.1 In the coast artillery firing from fortified positions will normally be conducted with
the target area(s) at sea. Target area(s) when firing at target(s) on land should be
picked where the ground is firm and, to the extent that it is possible, free of
shrubbery, heather, tall grass, etc. which may make it difficult to find duds. When
firing smoke or illumination ammunition, special consideration must be given to the
risk of fires erupting.
See regulations regarding fire in the local target range instructions.
3.10.2 Personnel for managment and control
3.10.2.1 When firing mortars the following personnel must be appointed:
- Safety chief (safety officer) at headquarters, calculating firing data
- One safety controller per firing weapon. Section/squad leader may function as
safety controller even if he is participating in the training, since his duties
during firing equal those of the safety controller.
3.10.2.2 The officer conducting the exercise/officer conducting firing must in addition to his
regular duties listed in 1.1.5.2:
- Determine safety restrictions for the firing, including the boundaries of the
danger area, fire sector boundaries and target area, where to place observation
posts, etc.
- Brief participating personnel on safety restrictions.
- Ascertain that all weapons are pointing in the correct direction.
Rev-04 119
- Based on the registration firing, observations, experience, etc. change the fire
sector boundaries (boundaries of the impact area), should this be deemed
necessary. Changes may be reported in advance and be implemented on
orders.
- Check that nobody is firing over or to the side of personnel.
- Ascertain that duds are registered, to the extent that this is possible.
- Disrupt firing if an aircraft is approaching or gets into the danger area at a
height where it may be hit. If necessary, set up air observation post(s) (see
Appendix 7).
3.10.2.3 The safety chief (safety officer) must in addition to his regular duties listed in
1.1.5.4:
- Instruct the safety controllers of the fire sector boundaries and the largest and
smallest allowed tangent sight and loading
- before firing check that the fire technical basis and calculation of firing data
are so accurate that rounds do not hit outside the target area during registration
fire
- before firing check the mortars position and orientation
- before firing check the fire control terminal, that plotting table/board are
prepared correctly and that the necessary data, also data concerning safety, are
correctly programmed/plotted/ marked
- inform the OCE when firing can commence
When firing with dispersed weapons the section leader can perform the duties of the
safety officer which are:
- if firing takes place from a ground placed mortar each base plate is to be
checked before firing
- before firing use a compass to check that right and left fire sector boundaries
are correctly marked for each mortar using markers which cannot be confused
with aiming posts
- before firing check that there is at least 20m between each mortar
3.10.2.4 The safety controller at the firing stand will in addition to the general duties in
1.1.5.5 and 1.1.5.4:
- check that the barrel is dry cleaned (using button stick and clean cotton waste)
- when firing in winter be especially aware of condense in the barrel
- in case of precipitation check that there is no water in the barrel and that the
ammunition is protected
- order marking of the fire sector boundaries in accordance with the current
restrictions and check that the marking is satisfactorily done
- firing in winter and on bad ground be especially aware of how the weapon is
positioned so that it does not fall over during firing
120 Rev-04
- check carefully that the base plate is placed correctly. Hold the fire and report
to the safety officer if the setting results is more that 10 mills per round
- check that branches, twigs, etc. do not interfere with rounds being fired
- check that the mortar(s) is not aimed outside the marked fire sector boundaries
- note and make sure that demanded restrictions concerning loading and tangent
sight are followed
- check that the fire order has been correctly understood by the crew
- ontinuously check that only ONE man is loading the mortar (double loading
not permitted)
- ascertain that the safety devices are checked by the crew and that the
ammunition is made ready in the correct way
- be personally present and check that the misfire procedure is being followed
and that the emptying takes place in the correct way
- check that ear plugs are being used. See paragraph 6.21
3.10.3 Other personnel Chap-3
3.10.3.1 Personnel
No more personnel than those needed for fire control, handling and checking the
weapons are to stay on the mortar stand. Exceptions can be made during
demonstration firing, and such permissions can be obtained from the OC or
higher-ranking chief. Onlookers are to stay behind the mortars and never get closer
to these than 50 metres.
3.10.4.1 Before firing, all shells (fuses) are to be checked carefully and all shells (fuses) are to
be primed and checked according to the regulations (see weapon regulations and
technical manual):
- it is to be checked that the shell with propellant cartridge are clean and dry
and that the charges are intact, dry and securely fastened
- immediately before firing it has to be checked if the shell has the right number
of charges. Releasing of safety devices (removal of transport safety device) is
only allowed immediately before loading the weapon.
- is it possible that the fuse is damaged, the shell is to be put aside and be blown
up as soon as possible (see paragraph 2.1.3 and the following)
Rev-04 121
3.10.5 Danger area

3.10.5.1 Danger area is presented in illustration 3.20.
3.10.5.2 The following data are to be used:
81 mm mortar
D max = longest distance for the actual loading
l= 20 % of A max
M= 500 mils
W= 100 mils
Type of round WPG 40 (SMOKE), NM 123 (HE)

NM 150
(ILLUNINATION)
Amin Larger or equals 300m Larger or equals 500m
k 100 m 500 m
l+k Larger or equals 300m Larger or equals 500m
f+k 0,4 x A min, but at least 0,4 x A min, but at least
200m 500m
Table for A min
and A max, for charges, 81mm mortar rounds.
Type of NM 123 (HE) WP G40 NM 150 (ILL)

round (SMOKE)
Charge *) Dmax *) Dmax *) Dmax
0 500 520 300 450
1 500 1480 300 1200 600 1300
2 840 2440 450 2100 1000 2300
3 1160 3380 650 300 1300 3200
4 1480 4240 800 3800 1700 4000
5 1740 5030 950 4500 2000 4700
6 2010 5800 1100 5200 4500 5500
7
8
*) : Shortest range for the actual charge
122 Rev-04
W
l
Target
k
Chap-3
M
Only in use when
(k) is not covered
by (M)
Weapon
Figure: 3.20
Danger area when firing barrel safe fuses. Personnel at the mortar stand without
cover
3.10.6 Firing over personnel using a mortar

3.10.6.1 Firing over personnel using a mortar is prohibited unless the personnel being fired
over are in safe cover, even from direct hits.
By safe cover from direct hits is meant: the M113 family (or vehicles with better
armour) under closed hatches (shut and locked with the locking device). Splinter
distance (k) is 50 metres for all ammunition types.
Nevertheless, mortar fire over personnel is prohibited when the proximity function of
the fuse is chosen.
Rev-04 123
3.10.7 Firing duds with a range under 100m

3.10.7.1 When firing cold grenades with longest range less than 100 metres, it must be
ascertained that no one is in the direction of the shot, within the maximum distance.
Other safety measures are not required.
3.10.8.1 All personnel within a radius of 100 metres from the weapon(s) are to wear hearing
protection, earplugs and earmuffs in combination, or other devices providing equal
protection. See also 6.21 and onwards.
3.10.9 Measures to be taken should the weapon malfunction
3.10.9.1 If there is no discharge when dropping the shell into the tube it is a misfire. Then
wait for 1 minute after the attempt of discharge before the shell is removed from the
tube. The safety controller is to be called over to check the work of emptying the
misfire, in accordance with UD6-20-1, 191-193.
If there is no visible damage on the shell, it may be attempted fired again, in the next
round of fire and without changing position (this is a change, seen in relation to
UD6-20-1 193).
After trying to discharge a shell two times unsuccessfully, the fuse is to be secured,
the shell is to be put at a designated place to be blown up.
3.10.9.2 Duds . See 2.2 and the following.
3.10.10 Laser range finder
3.10.10.1 See 6.8 and onwards.
124 Rev-04
3.11 ANTI-TANK WEAPONS

3.11.1 M72 LIGHT ANTI-TANK WEAPON (LAW)
Chap-3
Figure: 3.21
Firing live M-72
3.11.1.1 In general
The firing range must provide open line of sight and should be free of trees, bushes,
heather, tall grass, etc. The impact area should, if possible, be picked where the
ground is firm and bare. Marshes, swamps, snow, etc. will easily cause duds. The
hind area should be tall enough to catch all grenades that do not hit their targets.
Consideration must be made of the risk of fire erupting due to the gas flow behind
the weapon.
3.11.1.2 When firing the M72 LAW the following personnel must normally be appointed:
- Safety chief (safety officer)
- One safety controller at each weapon.
The officer conducting the exercise may, if the extent of the activity allows it,
function also as safety chief and safety controller. The safety chief (safety officer)
may similarly take on the duties of the safety controller.
3.11.1.3 The officer conducting the exercise (officer conducting firing) must in addition to his
regular duties give the order to load and fire one weapon at a time, if the firing of
several weapons is being led centrally.
3.11.1.4 The safety chief (safety officer) is responsible for safety on the firing range. The
safety chief has the following special duties during this type of activity:
- Check that the gunner has safe cover in front.
- Ascertain that there is no steep slope or vertical wall closer than 2 metres
behind the weapon, and that the back edge of the weapon is being held al least
Rev-04 125
20 centimetres above ground.

- Prohibit firing from covered positions and from (partially) confined rooms due
to the risk of high pressure injuries (see 2.5.1.1)
- Prohibit firing when temperatures are higher (lower) than what is stated in the
regulations for the relevant ammunition type.
3.11.1.5 The safety controller is responsible for safety around and behind the weapon. During
this type of activity, the safety controller has the following special duties:
- Be in full control of the danger area of the flareback and ascertain that no one
is within or is moving into this area while the weapon is loaded.
- Ascertain that the gunner has no body part in a position where injury might
occur as a result of the flareback.
- Ascertain that ammunition check, priming, firing techniques and weapon
handling are according to the regulations, including drawing out the weapon
so there is locking between the inner and outer tube.
- Allow the rockets safety mechanism to be released only while loading.
- Prohibit movement (changing positions) while the weapon is loaded.
- Immediately report duds to the safety chief (safety officer, OCE).
- Ascertain that steps taken should the weapon misfire or malfunction are
according to the regulations.
3.11.1.6 Personnel for management and control
Other personnel The only personnel allowed on the firing stand are those needed for
leading the activity and for checking and handling the weapon. Exceptions can be
made during demonstration firing when training ammunition is being used.
Onlookers must in such cases stay at least 10 metres away from and to the side of the
weapon.
3.11.1.7 Ammunition check
Before firing commences all ammunition is to be checked carefully according to the
regulations. Damaged weapons are to be marked, put aside and blasted as soon as
possible on the officer conducting the exercises orders.
3.11.1.8 Danger area
The danger area for M72 LAW consists of an area in front of and and area behind
the weapon.
Danger area is presented in the safety templates for the relevant weapon. A table of
entrance values for constructing safety templates for M72 is provided in Appendix
17. Method for construction of safety templates can be found in Appendix 1.
3.11.1.9 Danger area flareback
Fragmentation dispersion must be expected within the danger area for the flareback
(see 3.22).
Wartime provisions can be found in UD 6-21.
126 Rev-04
u=40 m
y=25 m
Figure: 3.22
Danger area flareback, rocket system NM72 (left), the M72-models and the 21mm
training system (right).
Minimum distance for firing the Light Anti-Tank Weapon is 75 m. Chap-3

3.11.1.10 Safety measures should the weapon malfunction
When firing rocket system M-72 LAW and the NM72 models:
a. Should the weapon misfire (malfunction, ammunition failure or afterburner)
the following steps are to be taken:
- o Pull the trigger again
- o Report malfunction /jam, wait 10 seconds, and then pull the
triggers safety catch back towards SAFE until it catches (if a jam has
occurred, it will only move about 1 cm before it stops)
- o Wait for 1 minute with the weapon pointing in the direction of the
target, then take the weapon down from your shoulder, and press the
locking plate to release the locking mechanism
- o Pull the weapon together 15 centimetres (the firing mechanisms
return spring will prevent the firing mechanism from igniting the
detonator)
- o extend the weapon, place it on your shoulder, release the safety catch
and fire the weapon.
Should the weapon still misfire, wait for 10 seconds, secure the weapon, report
malfunction /jam, wait another minute, then transport the weapon away and blast it
at an appropriate location ( 3.11.1.13).
3.11.1.11 Blasting duds
If a dud is fired from the M72 or NM72 models, all personnel must wait in safe
distance or in safe cover for at least 5 minutes after the dud landed before entering
the impact area.
3.11.1.12 Duds from the M72 and NM72 models must not be touched or moved, but blasted on
site. If the rocket motor pipe has broken with the fuze and/or parts of the warhead
Rev-04 127
still intact, it must be considered a dud and blasted on site. If it is determined that the
rocket motor pipe does not contain explosive components, it may be discarded. For
more on the handling of duds, see UD 16-15.
3.11.1.13 Blasting misfires/malfunction
Rocket systems M72 and NM72 which, after having been handled according to UD
6-21 after malfunction, still cannot be fired, are to be handled very carefully. After
the prescribed waiting period, the weapon system is to be carried to a suitable place
and be demolished. The demolition is to be conducted in accordance with UD 16-15.
3.11.1.14 Regulations for firing training system 21mm M72-S
When firing the training system the following points apply:
- Firing the systems is prohibited when personnel, vehicles or equipment is
within the safety templates in force for the 21mm training system.
- Firing the systems is prohibited when personnel stay within a sector behind
the weapon, see 3.22.
- The training systems must be free of grease, sand, moisture, white frost, snow
and other contamination before loading.
- The weapons used for firing the training systems must not get mixed with live
weapons.
- Fragmentation discharge must be expected within the danger area of the
flashback.
3.11.1.15 Special regulations for using the training system 21mm M72-S
- Check that the tube is free of dirt, moisture, white frost, snow, grease and
remnants of cleaning devices such as steel wool, etc.
- Check that 1005-25-122-1566 Gauge can easily pass through the tube.
- The tube MUST be cleaned and gauged before each round. Use the
rough-haired brush first then finish using the wool brush.
- Check that the rocket is free of corrosion and is not crooked or has received
other injuries. Protect the rocket from moisture.
- Before loading, check that the stud plate is tight. Check that the contact pins
are spring-loaded.
3.11.1.16 Loading
- Inserting the rocket into the tube is done by holding/lowering the percussion
igniter. The rocket should slide easily until the plastic ring on the rocket meets
the contact pins. The plastic ring on the rocket can be pushed further in, over
the fikseringsstiftene, so that these protrude behind the rocket.
- After cocking the weapon on the firing stand before the order to fire has been
given, safety controllers are to check all weapons by ascertaining that the
contact pins are in their correct position behind the rocket. This must be
checked sloping sideways behind the rocket. After the check has been
performed, the order to fire is to be given, releasing the detent lever and
trigger assembly.
128 Rev-04
3.11.1.17 Modification of exercise system 21mm M-72-S

In a transition period there will be two types of exercise rockets for the M72-S. The
new rocket is called NM 36 F1. This rocket has an O-ring (rubber ring) on the rocket
head which is meant to lock the rocket in the tube and no lock is required at the rear
end, i.e. no contact pins.
The exercise systems will be adapted as new ammunition is being introduced. This
means that the sabot with the contact pins will be removed.
This new rocket NM 36 F1 must ONLY be used in exercise
systems where there are no sabots and contact pins.
Furthermore it is PROHIBITED to use the old rocket in the
modified exercise systems.
3.11.1.18 General
Irregularities occurring while firing are to be reported immediately. All forms of
improvisation in connection with firing the 21mm M72-S is prohibited.
3.11.1.19 Hearing protection
Chap-3
All personnel staying within a radius of 100 metres from the weapon(s) must
normally wear both earplugs and earmuffs. See 6.21.
3.11.1.20 Blank cartridge for M72
When firing blank cartridges the following points apply:
- Firing is prohibited when personnel or vehicles are within a sector in front of
the weapon, shown in illustration 74.
r = 40 m 20 m Direction of
fire
Figure: 3.23
Danger area in front of the weapon
- Only fire weapon(s) on the order of the officer conducting the exercise when
training.
- When moving a loaded M72 the weapon is to be secured and locked.
- Firing is prohibited when personnel stay within a sector behind the weapon,
shown in illustration 75.
- When ammunition is not carried in its original packaging it is to be packed in
a way that prevents it from being damaged.
Rev-04 129
y = 25 m u = 40 m Direction of
fire
Figure: 3.24
Danger area behind the weapon
3.11.1.21 Malfunction/dud/ammunition failure

Should malfunction occur when firing a blank cartridge, M72, the cartridge is to stay
in the firing device/ on the ground for at least 30 minutes before it is touched. After
the prescribed waiting time, the cartridge is to be taken care of by the user and be
destroyed by personnel who have a blasting certificate category I, minimum. If
necessary, the cartridge is to be marked on site, so that it can be found and destroyed
at a later stage.
3.11.2 84MM RECOILLESS GUN
Figure: 3.25
84mm Carl Gustav during firing
3.11.2.1 In general
The firing range must provide open line of sight and should be free of trees, bushes,
heather, tall grass, etc. The impact area should, if possible, be picked where the
ground is firm and bare. Marshes, swamps, snow, etc. will easily cause duds. The
hind area should be tall enough to catch all grenades that do not hit their targets.
Consideration must be made when it comes to the risk of fire erupting due to the gas
flow behind the weapon, and when firing smoke grenades and illumination grenades.
130 Rev-04
3.11.2.2 No more than 9 recoilless 84mm guns must be fired from the same firing stand. In
addition, the following points apply:
- When several weapons are being fired from the same firing stand under
central command, the weapons must be placed at least 5 metres apart.
- When firing is being led by an officer/NCO at each weapon, the distance
between the weapons must be at least 25 metres.
- Firing from moving vehicles is prohibited.
- Firing from (partially confined) vehicles is prohibited.
- Firing from covered positions and from (partially) confined rooms is
prohibited due to the risk of high pressure injuries.
3.11.2.3 Personnel for lead and control
When firing the recoilless gun the following personnel must normally be appointed:
- One safety controller at each weapon. Chap-3
The officer conducting the exercise may, if the extent of the activity allows it,
function also as safety chief, safety officer and safety controller. The safety chief
(safety officer) may similarly take on the duties of the safety controller.
3.11.2.4 The officer conducting the exercise (officer conducting firing) is to lead the firing,
and perform the OCEs regular duties. He/she may during field exercises give orders
of loading and firing to a section/squad leader who is in charge of up to 3 guns. This
is on the condition that the section/squad leader performs the special duties of the
safety chief and the safety controller.
3.11.2.5 The safety chief (safety officer) has the following special duties during this type of
activity:
- Check that there is no steep incline/vertical wall closer than 5 metres behind
the weapon.
- Prohibit firing from covered positions.
- Prohibit firing over personnel.
- Ascertain that personnel, gunner, loader and safety controller excepted, who
stay in the danger area near the weapon are in safe cover (see safety
regulations for the range/area).
- Ascertain that illumination grenades only are fired from a standing or kneeling
position.
- Ascertain that personnel who stay closer to the weapon than 100 metres wear
earplugs and earmuffs. See 6.21.
3.11.2.6 Safety controllers have the following special duties during this type of activity:
- Check that the weapon has been correctly assembled and mounted.
- Check that hearing protection is being worn.
Rev-04 131
- Keep full control of the flarebacks danger area and ascertain that no one is
staying in or moving into this area while the weapon is loaded.
- Monitor the priming of the gun as well as the firing technique, and ascertain
that all orders are observed.
- Ascertain that no part of the gunners body or the loaders body is within the
flarebacks danger area. When in a lying position the gunner is to place his
right foot across his left ankle.
- Should firing be disrupted /if the gun malfunctions, ascertain that it is still
being aimed at the target area. Observe the instructions given in the weapon
regulations.
- Check before loading that the firing pin does not protrude into the tube when
the breeching is open.
On the firing stand, there should be no more personnel than those who are required
in order to lead, check and assist the gunners. Other personnel are to stay in safe
cover or outside the danger area of the backblast. When firing in unit formation and
when firing training grenades personnel may stay closer to the weapons, but never
closer than 5 metres away and never within the backblasts danger area.
3.11.2.8 Ammunition check
(See 2.1.3.1)
Ammunition is to be handled carefully and be protected from strong impacts,
sunlight and high temperatures. An 84mm shell which has been taken out of its
packaging but not fired, must immediately be put back in its box. The box is to be
marked, and the shell must be used as soon as possible. Illumination shells have
black rubber caps protecting the fuzes. The cap is to be put back on after the shell
has been timed, due to the risk of moisture. Before firing, the ammunition and fibre
casing must be checked in order to ascertain that no gunpowder has spilled. Faulty or
damaged ammunition is not to be used. Such ammunition must be carefully marked
and put aside for demolition. Demolition is to be conducted as soon as possible, on
the orders of the officer conducting the exercise.
The danger area for light anti-tank weapons consists of one area in front of and one
area behind the weapon.
The danger area is presented in the safety templates for the relevant weapon. A table
of entrance values for constructing safety templates for M72 is provided in Appendix
17. Method for construction of safety templates can be found in Appendix 1.
The flarebacks danger area see 3.11.2.18 below.
3.11.2.10 Safe distance from splinters (k)
Ammunition 84 mm
HE shell 400 m
Anti-tank shell 150 m
132 Rev-04
Smoke shell 150 m

Illumination shell 100 m
For training shells and 7.62mm and training systems, k = 0 m. When miniature firing
is conducted with the 7.62mm and towards metallic targets k = 15 m.
3.11.2.11 When firing from shorter distances than those listed in the table below, all personnel
on the firing stand must be in safe cover.
3.11.2.12 Minimum firing distance (A min). Launching shells from shorter distances than the
ones listed in the table below is prohibited, unless all personnel within the danger
area are in safe cover. When firing HE shells, minimum launching distance is 150
metres even when in safe cover.
Ammunition 84 mm
HE shell 400 m
Anti-tank shell 150 m
Smoke shell 150 m
Chap-3
Illumination shell 300 m
Excersise shell 50 m
3.11.2.13 Firing over and past/to the side of personnel
Firing the 84mm recoilless gun over and to the side of personnel is prohibited in
peacetime.
3.11.2.14 Parachute illumination rockets/flares
To avoid harming animals the landing area for parachute illumination rockets/flares
is to be registered, and the parachute(s) removed immediately after firing.
3.11.2.15 Procedures malfunction
When firing the 84mm recoilless gun:
- the weapon is to be cocked immediately after a misfire, trigger again (if there
is no firing REPORT MALFUNCTION) then wait one minute before the
mechanism is opened and the round is removed from the chamber
- If the weapon is hot, so that there is a danger of it self-igniting, it is to be left
should it malfunction, and all personnel must be evacuated to a safe place.
The weapon may be emptied after 1 hour.
- After the charge has been removed from the weapon, it is to be kept separate
from other ammunition until it has been checked whether it was the
ammunition or the weapon that caused the malfunction. Should it be revealed
that the ammunition is faulty, the charge is to be removed from all other
materiel and be destroyed as soon as possible.
- If the weapon is faulty, the charge may be reloaded and fired, either from
another weapon or the same weapon, after it has been repaired or fixed.
Rev-04 133
3.11.2.16 Hearing protection

All personnel within a radius of 100 m from the weapon(s) must normally wear both
earplugs and earmuffs. See 6.21
3.11.2.17 Firing with 63mm training system for 84mm recoilless gun
The training system is to be used according to the handling, safety and user
procedures applying to 84mm recoilless gun. UD 6-22 and TH 9-1010-25/202-13
(Training system 63mm for RFK) must be followed. The rocket must not be fired
from a 84mm RFK unless the inner tube is in place. If this is done there is risk of
dispersion of powder particles towards the gunner. Pressure and noise will in such
circumstances be considerably higher than compared to a correct use of the training
system.The self-ignition temperature for powder in the rocket is about 170 degrees
celsius. If the chamber casing gets too hot to be handled with bare hands during
firing, it is to be cooled down before further use. Before live firing with the training
system the inner tube is always to be gauged. If the weapon has been exposed to
rough treatment the tube must be gauged again before use. During live firing only
the telescopic sight included in the exercise system is to be used because it has been
calibrated for the exercise rocket.
Protective goggles are to be used during live firing.
3.11.2.18 Danger area of the flareback
Direction of
y= 60m
fire
u= 40m
Figure: 3.26
3.11.2.19 Firing with an inner tube and training system can take place at a miniature range,
short range, ordinary range or an approved firing range. In relation to the danger area
behind the weapon all personnel, both those who operate the system and others, are
to behave as if live ammunition is being used, see ill 17.
3.11.2.20 Dangerous area for the backblast when firing duds, inner tube and training system
134 Rev-04
15m Direction of fire
15m
Figure: 3.27
3.11.2.21 Blank cartridge for recoilless gun

When firing blank cartridges with the recoilless gun the following must be observed:
- firing is prohibited when personnel, animals or materiel are within a sector in
front of the weapon, shown in illustration 76.
Chap-3
r = 40 m 20 m Direction of fire
fire
Figure: 3.28
Danger area in front of the weapon
- Only fire weapon(s) on the order of the officer conducting the exercise when
training.
- Moving with a loaded recoilless gun is prohibited.
- Firing is prohibited when personnel stay within a sector behind the weapon,
shown in illustration 17.
- When ammunition is not carried in its original packaging it is to be packed in
a way that prevents it from being damaged.
3.11.2.22 Malfunction/dud/ammunition failure
Blank cartridge that is not discharged when being fired must be handled according to
the following regulations:
Blank cartridge for recoilless gun is to remain in the firing device/ on the ground for
30 minutes before it is touched. After the prescribed waiting period it is to be
handled by the user and destroyed by personnel who have a blasting certificate
category I, minimum. If necessary, the cartridge is to be marked on site, so that it can
be recovered for destruction at a later stage.
Rev-04 135
3.11.3 149MM TOW MISSILE SYSTEM
Figure: 3.29
Firing of TOW missile
3.11.3.1 In general
In addition to the regulations provided in this directive, weapon regulations apply, as
well as any further regulations presented by the officer conducting the exercise
before each firing.
3.11.3.2 When choosing a firing position considerations have to be taken concerning the
possibilities of fire behind the weapon due to gas. The field of fire is to be chosen so
that there are no high voltage cables within the danger area. It is particularly
important to pay close attention during firing if electric firing mechanisms are used
in the field, since these may affect the TOW system. Safety distances from the
danger area to possible electric sources are to be found in table in paragraph 2.4.4.2.
No firing is to take place during thunder storms.
3.11.3.3 There must be free line of sight between the firing stand and the target area. The line
of sight from the weapon to the target must have a bearing which at no point can be
less than a 1 metre radius. The exception is when the weapon is being fired from a
position with normal cover in the front of 1-2 metres, where the muzzle of the tube is
to be at least 30 centimetres above the cover. The distance is measured with the
weapon pointing towards the target providing the lowest elevation.
3.11.3.4 The position must not have a steep slope (vertical wall) closer than 15 metres behind
the weapon.
3.11.3.5 Firing from head covered positions is prohibited.
3.11.3.6 The target area must, if possible, be picked where the ground is firm. Marches,
swamps, snow, etc. may cause duds. The hind area should be tall enough, in
comparison with the line of sight, that all rockets missing their targets will get
caught.
3.11.3.7 Looking directly at the sun or other strong light sources such as searchlights through
136 Rev-04
the telescope sight is prohibited, as the result may be severe eye injuries. The
target(s) must be placed so that this can be avoided.
3.11.3.8 Firing with greater elevation than 20 degrees is prohibited, unless special permission
has been obtained . If permission has been granted, the ground directly behind the
weapon must slope sufficiently downwards.
3.11.3.9 Firing with live ammunition is prohibited if temperatures are below 30 degrees C
or above +60 degrees C.
3.11.3.10 After live firing the guiding wires are to be rolled in. This has to be done in
accordance with the traffic regulations in the target area in the particular firing range.
3.11.3.11 Hearing protection. All personnel who stay closer than 100 m away from the
weapon must normally wear both earmuffs and earplugs (see 6.21).
3.11.3.12 Personnel to lead and control
For firing, the following personnel must normally be appointed:
- One safety controller at each weapon. The officer conducting the exercise
Chap-3
may, should the extent of the activity allow it, function as safety chief, safety
officer and safety controller. The safety chief (safety officer) may under the
same condition take on the duties of the safety controller.
3.11.3.13 The officer conducting the exercise (officer conducting firing) must in addition to the
normal duties give the order to load and fire one weapon at a time. He/she must also
ascertain that all guiding wires are collected after firing. The officer conducting the
exercise is responsible for completing form 750, see Appendix 6B, and Report of
TOW live firing after firing. The report is to be sent to the professional authority for
TOW. The officer conducting the exercise is also responsible for ascertaining that
trained personnel go through with a 3-line check of the weapon before live firing.
3.11.3.14 The safety chief (safety officer) is responsible for safety at the firing range. The
safety chief has the following special duties during this type of activity:
- Ascertain that there is no steep slope (vertical wall) behind the weapon closer
than 15 metres.
- Prohibit firing from head covered positions.
- Prohibit firing above and to the side of personnel.
- Check that personnel who stay closer than 100 metres away from the weapon
wear earmuffs and earplugs.
- Brief the platoon commanders, section/squad leaders/safety controllers on
firing stands and firing range boundaries, including marking of the fire sector,
and:
- Give orders on the signals for holding fire
- Ascertain that communication functions satisfactorily
- Order hold fire if/when he discovers that safety regulations and weapon
regulations are being breached, or when the situations for some other reason
Rev-04 137
gets dangerous.
3.11.3.15 The safety controller is responsible for safety around and behind the weapon. The
safety controller has the following special duties during this type of activity:
- Stay where he/she can hear the shooter and see the entire rocket field.
- Check that the weapon has been assembled/mounted and primed according to
the procedures described in the weapon regulations.
- Be in full control of the danger area of the flareback and ascertain that no one
stays in or is moving into this area after the weapon has been loaded.
- Monitor the handling of the weapon when it is being primed and handled and
ascertain that all orders are observed.
- Physically check that the operating handle is in the lowest position after
loading.
- Check that no part(s) of the gunners or loaders body is in the danger area of
the flareback.
- Should misfire/ammunition failure occur, ascertain that the weapon is still
being pointed towards the target area and that personnel do not enter the
danger area of the flareback. In addition the regulations provided in
3.11.3.18 and in the weapon regulations are to be observed (measures should
firing get interrupted).
Only the personnel needed for leading the activity, and for checking and handling the
weapon, are allowed on the firing stand. Other personnel are to stay in safe cover, or
outside the danger area at least 40 metres behind or directly to the side of the
weapon. Exceptions can be made during unit formation combat firing, where other
personnel may stay as close as 5 metres directly to the side of the weapon.
3.11.3.17 Ammunition check and ammunition handling
The following regulations apply to armour piercing missiles. The sealed missile is to
be treated carefully and be protected from, impacts, sunlight, high temperature and
humidity/moisture. The missile must not be taken out of the box it was transported in
until it is to be used. Inside this box the sealed missile is well protected from impacts
and being shook. Nevertheless, the missile may be taken out of the box after
ammunition check, described in this section, be placed in the vehicles ammunition
storage compartment, in order to achieve a more true resemblance of actual combat.
On reception, the following steps must be taken:
- Check the transport/storage case. If the case has visible damage indicating that
it has been exposed to a strong impact, or similar, the sealed missile must not
be used.
- Check the sealed missile. If the case has visible outer damage, the missile is
not to be used.
- Check the humidity sensor. If it has a light red colour, the sealed missile is not
to be used. Separating the missile from the case is prohibited. If a loaded
weapon is emptied without having been fired, the front cap and the contact lid
138 Rev-04
are to be put on the sealed missile.

3.11.3.18 Precautions in case of malfunction
If the procedure for what to do in case of stop is not followed by a discharge,
emptying is to start only after 30 minutes. In this time span the weapon is to be
directed towards the target area, and personnel are not allowed to enter the danger
area of the back blast. After the emptying the sealed missile is to be placed at a safe
distance from the crew with its warhead pointing towards the target area. A complete
gunners test and inspection of the weapon will take place after a malfunction. If
there is something wrong with the weapon the missile is to be fired from another
weapon. If there is still malfunctioning, ordinary procedure for fire break is to be
followed. After emptying the weapon the missile is to be considered as a dud and
will be demolished at a designated place. If nothing wrong is found with the weapon
a new missile will be fired from the same weapon, if possible. If there is a discharge
the first one is considered a dud. If a new missile also fails, both are to be fired from
another weapon.
3.11.3.19 Blasting duds
Armour piercing missiles which have not detonated on impact either in the target or
Chap-3
because the flight engine has not ignited, are to be blown up there and then, if
possible. It is prohibited to approach a dud till 60 minutes has passed. When placing
charges before 100 hours has passed it is strongly forbidden to touch the missile. The
charge is to be placed close to the missile (See UD 16-15). Training missiles in
which the flight engines do not ignite are to be considered as duds and will be
demolished in accordance with the same rules as for armour piercing missiles. Other
regulations are to be found under duds in general.
The danger areas features are described in illustration 3.30. .
3.11.3.21 Side explosion angle (W), dangerous range in the fire direction (h), splinter distance
(k), safety angle (M), minste tillatte firing distance (Amin) and longest firing distance
(Amax) can be found in the table below.
Missile W h k M A min A max A max

TOW 1 TOW 2
Armour 500 mils 5150 m 750 m 1300 950 m 3000 m 3750 m
piercing mils
BGM
71A
Exercise 500 mils 4500 m 100 m 1300 250 m 3000 m 3750 m
BTM mils
71A
( For reasons of simplicity the target areas length and width are simply not given.)
3.11.3.22 When measuring the danger area for fire against moving targets the templates
middle line is put towards the target areas outer boundaries. Thus the right and left
boundaries of the area will show.
Rev-04 139
Direction of fire
Parallell
h h
k-armour piercing
k-exercise
u Weapon
y
Figure: 3.30
Danger area for 149mm Missile system TOW
Direction of fire
u=40 m
y=50 m
Width
Figure: 3.31
Danger area for flareback for 149mm Missile system TOW
3.11.3.23 Flight safety

Firing is prohibited when aircraft enter the danger area.
3.11.3.24 Firing over personnel
Firing the TOW over personnel is prohibited.
3.11.3.25 Blanks cartridge
Blank shots have the same flareback danger area as live rockets in peacetime. See ill.
78.
140 Rev-04
The blank is to be placed INSIDE the expanding chamber in the dummy missile.
y = 50 m u = 40 m Direction of fire
Figure: 3.32
Measures if firing gets interrupted. Ascertain that personnel do not get into the
danger area of the flareback and proceed as described in the weapon regulations for Chap-3
how to act should firing get interrupted. Emptying the weapon can be done in the
following manner:
- Blank cartridge for TOW may be removed from the dummy missile after 2
minutes.
- The TOW crew is responsible for taking care of the cartridge(s) and returning
them to the store.
Rev-04 141
3.11.4 ERYX ANTI-TANK MISSILE
Figure: 3.33
ERYX during firing
3.11.4.1 In general
In addition to the regulations provided in this directive, weapon regulations apply, as
well as any further regulations presented by the officer conducting the exercise
before each firing.
Launching unit is to be checked by use of the MES test kit before each live firing
exercise. This is in order to limit the number of possible sources of malfunction
during live firing. The test is to be conducted by well qualified personnel the same
day firing is to take place. The test may, due to availability of the test kit, be
conducted 1 week before firing, but not earlier. This requires adequate storing of the
relevant live fire launching unit.
3.11.4.2 When choosing firing position the risk of outbreak of fire due to the gas flow behind
the weapon must be taken into consideration.
3.11.4.3 There must be free sight between the firing stand and the target area. The line of
sight from the weapon to the target must have a bearing which after 5 metres at no
point must go below 0.5 metres in any direction. Firing is prohibited during thunder.
Firing is also prohibited near installations emitting radar radiation.
3.11.4.4 The position must have no steep slope (vertical wall) closer than 2 metres behind the
weapon.
3.11.4.5 Firing from head covered positions is allowed. When firing from head covered
positions, the following safety templates for the cover are to be observed, at a
minimum:
- width in front and behind : 150 cm

- length : 100 cm
142 Rev-04
- height : 75 cm
- depth : 100 cm
- maximum elevation and : 10
plonge
- max sideways movement : 30
- height above the cover at : 20 cm
the weapons front edge
- width of flareback pit : 100 cm
- length of pit : 200 cm
- depth of pit : 20 cm
- width of tripod platform : 40 cm
TOP COVER
Chap-3
10 o
75
10 o
20
ca 20
40
Figure: 3.34
All metering in centimetres
Rev-04 143
Level for
tripod
200 50 Weapon
o
30
150 o
30
100
Position
Figure: 3.35
All metering in centimetres
3.11.4.6 Firing from confined rooms is allowed. The room must have an open door and an
open window. When firing from rooms the following safety templates apply, at a
minimum:
- Size of room (base) : 280 x 280 cm

- Height : 250 cm
- Window opening : 1 m2
- Door opening : 2 m2
- The rooms volume : - 19,5 m 3
144 Rev-04
Firing axis
100cm Vindu 1 m 2
1 m above the floor 20cm
Rocket casing
280cm
100cm 110cm
Min 180cm
280cm
2
Door 2 m
Chap-3
Hight 2,50 m
Volume 20 m 3
Figure: 3.36
Description of confined room
3.11.4.7 The target area must, if possible, be picked where the ground is firm. Marches,
swamps, snow, etc. may cause duds. The hind area should be tall enough to catch all
rockets missing their targets.
3.11.4.8 Looking directly at the sun or other strong light sources such as searchlights through
the telescope sight is prohibited, due to the binoculars magnifying effect. The result
may be severe eye injuries. The target(s) must be placed so that this can be avoided.
3.11.4.9 Firing with greater elevation than 20 degrees is prohibited, unless special permission
has been obtained from the officer conducting the exercise. If permission has been
obtained, the ground directly behind the weapon must slope steeply downwards.
3.11.4.10 Live firing is prohibited when temperatures are below 30 degrees C or above +50
degrees C
3.11.4.11 All personnel closer than 50 metres away from the weapon are to wear hearing
protection. See 6.21. The loader must in addition wear protective goggles in order to
avoid getting combustion residues in their eyes.
3.11.4.12 When several weapons are being fired from the same stand, towards the same target
area, the distance between each weapon is to be at least 5 metres.
3.11.4.13 After live firing the guiding wire is to be rolled in. This can be done from the firing
stand because the wire moves easily because of its insulation. Movement in the dud
area should not take place.
3.11.4.14 Personnel to lead and control
For firing, the following personnel must normally be appointed:
Rev-04 145

- Safety controllers at each weapon.
3.11.4.15 The officer conducting the exercise is to lead the firing and perform the general
duties expected. He/she can, if the activty allows, also function as safety chief and
safety controller at the same time. He/she is to make sure that the guiding wire is
gathered after the firing. After the firing form 750 Report on use of ammunition and
explosives is to be filled in. See appendix 6B and registration form for live firing
with Eryx. The form is to be sent to the manoeuvre section in the Norwegian Army
Land Warfare Centre and the Norwegian Materiel Command Ammunition.
3.11.4.16 The safety chief (safety officer) is responsible for safety on the firing range. The
safety chief can also function as safety controller, if the extent of the activity allows
it. The safety chief has the following special duties during this type of activity:
- To check that there is no steep rise (vertical wall) closer than 2 metres behind
the weapon.
- To prohibit firing over or to the side of personnel.
- To check that all personnel who stay closer than 50 metres away from the
weapon wear hearing protection.
- To brief the personnel on the firing range on the boundaries of the training
area.
- To give orders concerning signals for hold your fire.
- To ascertain that devices used for alerting people or for communication
function properly.
- To give the order hold your fire, if or when breaches of the safety
regulations or weapon regulations are discovered, or when a dangerous
situation arises.
3.11.4.17 The safety controller is responsible for safety around and behind the weapon. During
this type of activity, the safety controller has the following special duties:
- Check that the weapon has been assembled and mounted correctly
- Monitor the priming of the weapon and firing techniques, and ascertain that
all orders from the officer conducting firing or safety chief are observed.
- Make sure to make visual contact with the officer conducting firing at regular
intervals.
- Stand to the side of the shooter before firing commences.
- Maintain full control of the danger area and ascertain that no one moves into
the area after the weapon has been loaded.
- Check that no part(s) of the shooters or loaders body is within the danger
area of the flareback, and that the loader is wearing protective goggles.
- During fire break ascertain that the weapon is still being directed towards the
target area and that no personnel enter the danger area of the flareback.
146 Rev-04
Additionally, proceed according to the regulations for how to handle

malfunction, and the regulations in the weapon manual Measures during fire
break.
Only the personnel needed for leading the activity, and for checking and assisting the
gunner and loader, are allowed on the firing stand. Other personnel are to stay
outside the danger area.
3.11.4.19 Ammunition check and ammunition handling
At the firing range the bulk load and/or boxes of missiles are to be placed so that
they do not get inside the danger area.The ammunition is to be taken out of the bulk
load and/or the boxes where they are placed. Then the missile with the end cover on
is carried to the weapon. Here the end cover is removed and a visual inspection of
the ammunition is performedbefore the weapon is loaded. Remove front and end
cover and check:
- that there is no visible damage to the launch tube
- that the two horizontal steering taps on the coupling box are intact
Chap-3
- that the gliding plate to protect the coupling works
- that there is no oxidation or damage to the contact points
- that the electric circuit is intact and lies against the tube
- that there is no damage to the front of the missile
- that there are no extraneous matters in the front part of the tube
- that the cut circuit is intact
- that the IR light is not broken and clean.
Any irregularities discovered will make the ammunition unfit for use.
3.11.4.20 Transport
Live ammunition is always to be transported as bulk load or in boxes. Primarily the
bulk load is to be used. In cases where this is not possible or practical the boxes ARE
to be fastened well before transport. Never put loose boxes on top of each other
without securing them. The missile can take impacts and vibrations which may occur
during transport if packed in bulk/boxes. The ammunition is to remain in the package
until being used. Preferably there should be two persons to lift a box of ammunition.
3.11.4.21 Before priming the ammunition, it must be stored for a minimum of 8 hours in the
temperature in which it will be used: -31C to +51C. During short-term storage, the
ammunition must not be exposed to direct sunlight, great temperature changes, or be
placed directly on the ground. The ammunition should be stored in a box when this is
possible.
3.11.4.22 Steps to be taken should the weapon malfunction
No discharge after the weapon has been attempted fired may be due to a fault in the
weapon or in the missile. When discharge does not occur 2 seconds after the weapon
has been attempted fired, the crew should initially act as they would when dealing
with an afterburner or delayed discharge. The following steps are to be taken:
Rev-04 147
- The gunner tries to fire the weapon again.

- If there is no discharge, the gunner is to alert the rest of the crew by reporting
MALFUNCTION.
- The gunner must continue to point the weapon towards the target area for 1
minute, the trigger is to be pressed in the whole time.
- If there has been no discharge after 1 minute, the gunner is to secure the
weapon.
- In peacetime, wait for 30 minutes before emptying the weapon.
- The launching unit must as soon as possible be tested for MES in order to rule
out potential source of fault.
Any irregularities uncovered will result in the ammunition being classified as unfit
for use.
3.11.4.23 During measures taken in connection with a fire break, no one is to walk in front of
the weapon or enter the danger area of the flare back. Missiles that have not been
fired are to be placed in a suitable location, at a safe distance from personnel. The
warhead must at all times point towards the target area.
3.11.4.24 Blasting duds. There may be several reasons why a missile does not detonate:
features of the impact area, impact angle, technical error, the missile impacts too
early (before 50 metres) or a rupture in the guiding wire before 50 metres (arming
distance). If a missile does not detonate it must not be approached until at least 45
minutes has passed. Keep in mind that the missile might have been broken, and that
there are 4 dangerous elements (charge, main charge, flight engine and start engine)
that must be destroyed. Blasting of the dud, the entire missile or parts of it, must only
be carried out by experienced personnel. The officer conducting firing must note
where the missile lands, whether it is broken or not, and then alert the responsible
personnel. Other regulations are described under duds in general.
Danger area of the flareback is presented in illustration 24. The area is the same for
training missiles as for live missiles.
148 Rev-04
Direction of fire
u=15m
y=15m
Width
Figure: 3.37
Danger area of flareback, ERYX anti-tank missile
Chap-3
3.11.4.26 Side dispersal angle (W), dangerous distance in the fire direction (h), splinter
distance (k), safety angle (M), shortest possible fire range (Amin) and longest fire
range (Amax) can be found in the following table:
Rocket W h k M A min A max

- -
Mis AC 136 500 3170 m 150 m 1000 150 m 600 m
ERYX F1
Mis AC X 500 - 3070 m 50 m 1000 - 50 m 600 m
136 ERYX
F1
3.11.4.27 When measuring the danger area for fire against moving targets the templates mid
line is put on the target areas outer boundaries. Thus the areas RIGHT and LEFT
boundaries can be found.
Rev-04 149
Direction of fire
Parallell
K-armour piercing h h
K-exercise
u Weapon
y
Figure: 3.38
Danger area Anti-tank weapon ERYX
3.11.4.28 Special regulations

Firing over or to the side of personnel Firing ERYX anti-tank missiles over or to the
side of personnel is prohibited.
3.11.4.29 Firing from the hatch of IFV (M-113 and CV- 90). During live firing the following
applies (see 3.39, 3.40, and 3.41):
- the vehicle must stand still
- when firing from the hatch of the M-113 the elevation of the weapon must be
in relation to the bed of the vehicle. The weapon may be plonged.
- inside the vehicle personnel are not to sit at the side of the back blast
- sector of fire for M-113 and SISU is from 4-6 oclock and 8-10 oclock
- sector of fire for CV-90 is from 2-3 oclock and 9-10 oclock
- the fire is to take place over the side of the vehicle with turret at 12 oclock
- the hatches of the tank commander, the gunner and the driver are to be locked
- the gun is to be loaded and emptied over the rim of the hatch
- only the gunner is to stand in the hatch after loading
- firing is to be trained beforehand wirhout live ammunition and the officer in
150 Rev-04
charge of the exercise is to approve of the firing position before the llive firing
starts
Chap-3
Figure: 3.39
Figure 26a - Sector of fire M113
Figure: 3.40
Figure 26b - Sector of fire SISU
Rev-04 151
Figure: 3.41
Figure 27 - Sector of fire CV 90
152 Rev-04
3.11.5 JAVELIN ANTI-TANK WEAPON MEDIUM RANGE ANTI-TANK

SYSTEM
Figure: 3.42
Chap-3
Training with Javelin
3.11.5.1 General
In respect of the choice of firing position, it should be noted that fire may occur in
the exhaust gases vented from the rear of the weapon and directly in front of the
firing position. With regard to the selected field of fire, there should be no overhead
power lines within the hazardous area.
There should be a clear view between the stand and the target area.The line of sight
from the weapon to the target must have a shield clearance in which no vegetation
should be present above the missile, in proximity to its anticipated trajectory.
Sighting should take place along the missiles tube. The missile will not fall below
the position that the Javelin is being fired from.
The line of sight from the weapon to the target must have a shield clearance in which
no vegetation should be present above the missile, in proximity to its anticipated
trajectory. Sighting should take place along the missiles tube. The missile will not
fall below the position that the Javelin is being fired from.
If possible, the target area should be located on solid ground. Marshy terrain, snow,
etc, may result in unexploded shells if the missile fails to hit the target.
It is not permitted to look directly through the CLU (command launch unit) at the
sun or any other strong light source (e.g. searchlights). This may result in serious
injuries to the eyes.
It is not permitted to undertake live exercises if the temperature is below -30 degrees
C or above + 60 degrees C.
All personnel located closer than 25 m to the weapon should wear ear protection,
refer to item 6.21.
Firing is not permitted if an aircraft enters the hazardous zone.
Rev-04 153
Firing over personnel with a JAVELIN is not permitted.

Firing to the side of personnel is permitted in accordance with the 45 degree
regulation.
3.11.5.2 Personnel
When firing is being undertaken from several stands, a safety controller should be
present at each weapon. If firing is only being undertaken from one stand, one safety
controller will be sufficient.
The exercise leader (firing commander) should issue the command to fire one
weapon at a time.
The safety controller is responsible for safety around and to the rear of weapons.
With this type of activity, the safety controller has the following special duties:
- Ensure that all gunners are wearing helmets and splinter-proof vests, as a
minimum. In addition, the loader (second) should wear protective goggles.
This applies to all personnel located within caution area 1
- Be positioned in such a way that he/she is able to hear the gunner and see the
whole of the missiles trajectory
- Ensure that weapons have been assembled and made ready in accordance with
the procedures described in weapons regulations
- Ensure that no part of either the gunners or the loaders bodies are within the
backblast hazardous zone. When firing from a lying position, the body should
be located at least 30 degrees away from the bore axis
- A face shield should protect the gunners face during weapon discharge. The
face guard may become damaged between the sight and the CLU to the left of
the day sight. If the face guard should disappear, the gunner must sight with
his/her left eye so that the face receives the necessary protection during
weapon discharge
- If firing is interrupted, ensure that the weapon continues to be held towards
the target area and that personnel do not enter the backblast hazardous zone.
In addition, the provisions for measures during an interruption to firing,
specified in the weapon regulations, should be complied with
- Other personnel should be located under safe cover or outside of the
hazardous zone at a minimum distance of 100 m to the rear of the weapon or
25 m to the very side of the weapon. Exceptions to this may be made in the
case of combat firing during divisional exercises whereby other personnel
may be located up to 5 m to the very side of the weapon
154 Rev-04
Figure: 3.43
Caution areas
Chap-3
3.11.5.3 Materiel/ammunition inspection
The sealed missile should be handled with care and should be protected from blows,
sunlight, high temperature and humidity. It should not normally be removed from its
transportation and storage case before it is ready to be used. In connection with
operations and planned live exercises in which there is not a suitable or practical
option to convey missiles in transportation cases, missiles may be removed from
cases. After the ammunition has been inspected, the missile should be placed on the
vehicle's ammunition stand. The aim is to achieve a more combat-suited stand
service. Upon receiving the missiles, the following measures should be taken:
- Inspection of transportation and storage case. If the case is damaged in a way
that gives reasonable grounds to suspect that it has been subject to a strong
blow or similar, the sealed missile should not be used
- Inspection of the sealed missile . If the exterior of the LTA Launch Tube
Assembly is visibly damaged, it should not be used
Inspection of the humidity indicator If the humidity indicator is light red or pink, the
sealed missile should not be used. It is forbidden to detach the missile from the
casing. If a loaded weapon is emptied without its trigger being engaged, the front
cover and contact cover should be immediately placed on the sealed missile.
3.11.5.4 Precautionary measures in the event of functional failure
Refer to UD 6-27-1 and UD 6-27-2
3.11.5.5 Unexploded shells
Armour piercing missiles that have not exploded upon impact, or because the flight
motor has not ignited, should be detonated on site, if possible. It is not permitted to
detonate an unexploded shell until after 60 minutes have elapsed. Upon placement of
a charge less than 100 hours after a missile has been fired, it is absolutely forbidden
to touch the missile. The charge should be placed close to the missile. After 100
Rev-04 155
hours have elapsed, the charge may be placed on the missile (Cf. UD 16-15).
3.11.5.6 Firing from buildings
The Javelin may be fired from the inside of a building. The minimum size of the
room must be as specified in the table below. The following safety regulations apply
in addition to item 3.11.5.2:
- Loose objects to the rear of the weapon should be removed
- Doors and windows should be opened in order to release the backblast and
excess pressure
- Exhaust gases from the launch motor are hot and may ignite combustible
materials. Easily combustible materials should therefore be removed before
firing. Fire-fighting equipment should be available when firing from closed
rooms
Room dimensions when firing from a closed room:

The following minimum safety templates apply when firing from a room:
- - Dimensions of room : 370cm x 460 cm

(base) Width x depth
- Height : 215 cm
- Windows opening : 0,45 m 2(61cm x 77 cm)
- Doors opening (should : 1,8 m2 (90cm x 201cm)
remain open)
- Volume of room : 36 m 3
The gunner should use either the window frame for support or a tripod. When using
a tripod, the gunner should ensure that the launch motor is able to thrust the missile
through the window. The room should comprise at least one window and one door of
a dimension referred to in the above table. This is so that harmful exhaust gases may
escape from the room.
156 Rev-04
Chap-3
Figure: 3.44
Firing position in a closed room
Rev-04 157
3.12 ARMOUR ANTI-TANK GUIDED WEAPON

SYSTEM NM 142
Figure: 3.45
NM 142
3.12.1 In general
3.12.1.1 In addition to the regulations given in this manual the regulations given in UD
7-5-2-, Drill regulations for RPJ crew, UD 6-24 Rocket system TOW, UD 6-4
Machinegun MG 3 and technical handbooks apply.
3.12.2 Firing with 7.62 x 51mm medium machine gun
3.12.2.1 General. When fiiring with 7,62x51 mm MMG on RPJ the following regulations
apply, see paragraph 3.4 and following, MS 5 46 and TH 9- 1005-25/042-14.
3.12.2.2 Firing with MMG from RPJ against ground targets
When firing with 7.62x51mm MMG from RPJ the following regulations apply:
- When the weapon is not in use it is to be secured and the stand is to be locked
(sideangle lock and swing arm lock)
- the swing arm is to be placed in a suitable firing position and the locks are
released before aiming and live firing
3.12.2.3 Firing with MMG from RPJ during movement towards ground targets
When firing with 7.62x51mm MMG from RPJ during movement towards ground
targets the following regulations apply:
- The Armour Anti-Tank Guided Weapon System NM 142 (RPJ) is to move on
even ground so that no unexpected movements occur. If necessary the route
should be reconnoitred beforehand
- max speed 30 km/h
- the drivers hatch is to be closed. (closed and locked)
158 Rev-04
- the loaders hatch is to be closed. The gunners hatch is to be closed or in

observation position
- the firing is to take place from 11 oclock (right hand side of the drivers
hatch) to 3 oclock (Just to the right of commanders hatch).
- the gunner of the MMG is to be alert and make sure that the weapon is not
directed towards the roof or parts of the roof of the vehicle
3.12.3 Use of smoke bomb dischargers, Very pistol and illumination rockets,
plus throwing of smoke canisters
3.12.3.1 See the regulations in this chapter, 3.5 .
3.12.4 General regulations for live firing of guided missiles from NM 142
3.12.4.1 When choosing firing position for NM 142, the regulations in 3.13 apply.
3.12.4.2 The vehicle is to be placed so that the sideways sloping at no place in the firing
sector is more than 10 degrees. Firing with elevation/plonge greater than 10 degrees
is prohibited. The vehicle is to be placed with the front in the firing direction. Firing
over the front of the vehicle within the sector 5580 mils to 380 mils is allowed.
Chap-3
3.12.5 Live firing with several RPJs
3.12.5.1 The officer in charge of the exercise carries out the live firing in accordance with the
commanding officers orders and the Cavalrys firing programme, but the following
points must be observed:
a. The folowing regulations apply during coordinated firing with TOW Basic
missiles
- o distance between RPJ min 100 metres
- o the gunners must engage different targets
- o the guiding wires must not get crossed
b. When coordinated opening of fire is not an option the opening of fire will take
place on the orders of the officer in charge of firing, platoon leader and in
accordance with the firing programmes. Notice that when firing with TOW
BSIC missiles the same target must not be engaged simultaneously. When fire
sectors cross each other and when the the same target is to be engaged the
opening of fire has to be coordinated.
3.12.5.2 Radio communication must be established between the officer conducting the
exercise, the safety chief and the safety controller. Inside the vehicle, communication
over the interphone between the safety controller, gunner and loader must be
established.
3.12.6 Personnel to lead and control
3.12.6.1 During firing, the following personnel must normally be appointed:
- One safety controller in each vehicle.
Rev-04 159
The officer conducting the exercise may function as safety chief. The safety
controller in the vehicle may also function as vehicle commander.
3.12.6.2 The officer conducting the exercise must in addition to his/her regular duties listed in
1.1.5.2, give the order of loading and firing one weapon at a time. He/she must also
ascertain that all guiding wire is collected after firing. The OCE is responsible for
filling in and forwarding form 750 (Report after use of ammunition and explosives)
according to UD 2-1 and Report after live firing TOW, according to appendix C in
KUP 7-3-25. The reports will help form the basis for further evaluation and control
of all TOW-firing in the Army. The report will also form the basis for possible
weapon modifications, ammunition, blocking of LOTs, test firing and UD 2-1
updates. The OCE is also responsible for ascertaining that technical personnel carry
out third line check of the RPJ turret and launchers immediately before live firing
commences.
3.12.6.3 The safety chief must in addition to his regular duties described in 1.1.5.4:
- Check that the sideway sloping is of no more than 10 degrees.
- Prohibit firing over personnel.
- Check that personnel closer to the weapon than 100 metres wear earplugs and
hearing protection.
- Brief the platoon commander, vehicle commander/safety controller on the
firing stand(s) and boundaries of the training area, including marking of fire
sector.
- Give orders concerning signs for hold your fire!
- Ascertain that the ordered communications work adequately.
- A scertain that the front of the vehicle covers the assigned fire sector and that
the target is within the sector 5580 mils to 380 mils on the vehicle.
- Order fire break when he/she discovers breaches of the safety regulations,
regulations in the weapon manual or when risk of danger arises for some other
reason.
- Keep full control of the danger area of the flareback and ascertain that no one
is witin or is moving into this area after the weapon has been loaded.
- Check that the drivers hatch, the vehicle commanders hatch and the ramp are
closed.
- Be placed in a manner that makes it possible for him/her to follow the missiles
flight towards the target area.
- Check that the system functions properly by firing TOW blanks with heavy
dummy missiles from both launchers.
- Have measured the distance tot the targets using a laser range finder, hence
know the missiles flying time from being fired to target impact.
- Check on the duties of the safety controller.
- Prohibit elevation/plonge of more than 10 degrees
- Know the other safety regulations for 3.11.3.1 and 3.12.1.1.
160 Rev-04
3.12.6.4 Safety controller

The safety controller will in addition to general duties listed in 1.1.5.5:
- check that the gunners test of the weapon system is in accordance with the
manual, supervise the duties in the vehicle, order loading of the weapon
system on orders from the officer conducting the exercise, check that the
loading doors are completely locked and that the air vents are closed, and give
the gunner orders to arm
- check that the side sloping of the turret is no more than 10 degrees within
right and left boundaries
- check that the lamp that indicates correct arming on the commanders control
box is on after the gunner has armed the weapon
- order the gunner to open fire after having received the order for fire from the
officer in charge of the exercise
- in case of a misfire report to the officer in charge of the exercise and check
that the turret is turned in the direction of the impact area
- Otherwise follow the regulations in UD 6-24-2 under How to handle misfire Chap-3
- Check that the drivers and commanders hatches are locked
- when using termic sights check the mounting and use of collimator including
correct paralelling of the sights
- carry out a test of the system with TOW blanks on orders from the safety
officer
- know the other Safety rules for 3.11.3.1 and 3.12.1.1.
he following is to be especially observed when arming the right or left launcher:
- when placing the rocket and arming the rocket the procedure described in TH
9-2300-25/210 4.2.11-4.2.12 have to be observed
- When the rocket is armed the cam on the arming handle for the rocket
launcher tube which is fired has to be pressed and then drawn back. The
indicator for arming on the commanders control box may light even if the
arming handle is not drawn all the way back
- During live firing in peacetime the commander is to check that the arming
handle is in full backward position to avoid causing wire cut
3.12.7 Other personnel
3.12.7.1 Only the personnel needed for leading and checking the activity are allowed on the
firing stand. Other personnel are to stay in safe cover, or outside the danger area at
least 40 metres behind or directly to the side of the weapon. Exceptions can be made
during unit formation combat firing, where other personnel may stay as close as 10
metres directly to the side of the weapon.
3.12.8 Ammunition check and ammunition handling
3.12.8.1 Regulations for check and handling of ammunition can be found in 3.11.3.17 for
TOW. Driving with ammunition in the ammunition storage compartment in the
Rev-04 161
vehicle is allowed. During field exercises using the NM 142 for live fire, driving
with the missiles in the launchers from the forming-up area to the firing position is
allowed, if the following requirements are observed:
- All driving with missiles in launchers is to take place as part of the firing
exercise.
- All movement is to take place within the military training area.
- The missiles must not be armed until the vehicle has reached the firing
position from where the missile is to be launched.
- Before movement commences, the vehicle commander is to ascertain that the
missiles in launchers have not been armed.
3.12.9 Safety measures should the weapon malfunction
3.12.9.1 Dud. If the procedures for how to handle fire breaks do not cause a discharge,
emptying is not to take place till after 30 minutes has passed. During this time the
turret is to be aimed at the target area with the personnel remaining in the vehicle.
After empying has taken place the sealed rocket is to be placed at a safe distance
from the crew with the warhead pointing towards the target area. A complete
gunners test and inspection of the weapon is to be undertaken after a misfire. If
there is something wrong with the weapon the rocket is to be fired from another
weapon. If a misfire occurs again the normal procedure for fire break are to be
observed. After emptying the rocket is considered a dud and will be blown up at
designated place. If nothing wrong is found with the weapon a new rocket should be
fired with the same weapon system. If there is a discharge the first rocket is
considered a dud. In case also the next rocket is a misfire both rockets are to be fired
from another weapon. The regulations in 3.13.6.1. para TOW apply.
3.12.9.2 Hearing protection. All personnel within a 100 metre radius from the weapon(s)
must normally wear both earplugs and earmuffs. See 6.21"
3.12.10 Risk of fire erupting in the target area
3.12.10.1 See regulations regarding fire in the local target range instructions.
3.12.11 Blank cartridge for TOW
3.12.11.1 In peacetime, the blank shot has the same flareback danger area as live missiles. See
illustration 78.
The blank cartridge is to be placed INSIDE the expanding chamber in the dummy
rocket.
162 Rev-04
y = 50 m u = 40 m Direction of fire
Figure: 3.46
3.12.11.2 Malfunction/duds/ammunition failure

Steps to be taken. Ascertain that no personnel are within the danger area of the
flareback and proceed according to the regulations provided in the weapon manual Chap-3
concerning fire break.The weapon may be emptied as follows:
- Blank cartridge for TOW can be removed from the dummy rocket after 2
minutes.
- The weapon crew are responsible for taking care of the cartridge(s) and for
handing them in.
3.13 GENERAL JOINT PROVISIONS FOR FIRING

WITH/FROM VEHICLES
3.13.1 General
3.13.1.1 The following items regulate all firing from vehicles with turret-mounted and
hand-held weapons. In addition to these provisions, safety regulations specified in
drill books, Training Directives, technical handbooks and firing range instructions
also apply.
In the case of vehicles which have not been issued with separate firing tables,
reference should be made to Firing lines for IVECO crews and IVECO companies,
to Test from the Commander for Manoeuvres, from 2009, and Regulations for
armoured vehicle crews, CV9030N/F1, Hatch combat. These should also form the
basis for firing from other wheeled platforms.
3.13.2 Personnel for command and control
3.13.2.1 The following personnel should be assigned:
- Officer conducting the exercise(OCE)
- Officer conducting firing, when the OCE is unable to carry out this task
- Safety officer, when the officer in charge of the exercise or the firing
commander are unable to carry out this role to the extent that is required
- Safety officer(s), when the officer in charge of the exercise is unable to carry
Rev-04 163
out this task

- A safety officer should be assigned:
- During exercises at a higher level than platoon
- During exercises involving the coordination of fire and movement
between vehicle personnel and foot soldiers at platoon level or higher
- In the case of exercises involving divisions that have not been trained in
conjunction with armoured vehicle divisions, a safety officer should be
assigned during exercises at section level or higher
- Safety controller(s)
- A tank commander usually functions as the responsible safety
controller on his/her own vehicle
- For training purposes, a separate safety controller for the vehicles crew
may be designated. For vehicles fitted with an intercom system, the
safety controller for the vehicles crew should be connected to such a
system
Requirements for safety controllers:

- During divisional firing exercises, safety controllers should be qualified
personnel and should have undertaken similar tables/exercises themselves
- Such personnel should be informed of what should be controlled and how they
should control it, how they should intervene/react in the event of a breach of
safety, and how they should notify the firing commander of any irregularity
3.13.2.2 Tasks
In addition to the general duties in item 1.1.5.2 relating to field exercises, the Officer
conducting the exercise should prepare a separate training plan (or ensure that such a
plan is prepared). Where no prior instructions have been issued for the relevant firing
range and/or exercise directives/firing lines, the plan should contain:
- A sketch indicating the exercises layout and hazardous areas
- Sector of fire and targets
- A summary of specific safety measures
The training plan should be distributed to OCE(s), safety chief, safety officer(s),
platoon commanders and tank commanders, where applicable
The Safety chief is under the authority of the OCE and has duties in accordance with
items 1.1.5.3 and 2.1.14. The Safety chief may also function as the OCE and the
safety officer, if activities permit. It is usually the responsibility of the Safety chief to
carry out the practical part of the exercise and to also ensure that this is undertaken in
accordance with the prevailing provisions. The Safety chief should possess the
following qualifications:
- Firing Commander course for Manoeuvres (normally as part of a company
commander/squadron commander course, or platoon commander course)
The Safety chief is under the authority of the OCE and has duties in accordance with
164 Rev-04
item 1.1.5.4. The Safety chief should be in possession of the following equipment:
- UD 2-1: The Norwegian Armed Forces safety rules and regulations for
land-based military activities
- Instructions for the firing range and a summary of ongoing exercises, when
such material has been prepared
- Maps and protractor
- Signal pistol with ammunition
- Red armband
The Safety chief should:
- Prior to firing:
- Delineate the firing range boundaries and points (areas) with
restrictions on the map
- Brief platoon commanders and safety controllers/tank commanders
about stands and firing range restrictions to the sides and above,
including the marking of right and left hand firing sector restrictions
Chap-3
- Ascertain that equipment designated for communication with
participating tanks/vehicles is functioning properly
- During fire:
- The safety commander should order firing to cease if he/she detects a
breach of safety regulations and/or the provisions of the weapons
regulations, or when, for any other reason, a hazard arises
- Issue the order to signal a ceasefire
- The safety officer is under the authority of the safety chief when a safety chief
has been assigned and, in such cases, is responsible for the safety of parts of
the exercise. The safety officer may be assisted by safety controllers placed
under his/her authority
- When a safety commander has not been assigned, he/she will be under the
authority of the officer in charge of the exercise. The safety officer will then
have the same duties as the safety commander and should be in possession of
the equipment referred to in item 1.1.5.4
- The safety controller is under the direct authority of the safety officer. In
addition to the general duties referred to in item 1.1.5.5, the safety controller
should:
- Prior to firing:
- Receive directives from the safety officer in respect of safety
provisions, including signals and signs
- Familiarise him/herself with stands and the markings of line of fire
restrictions to the right and left hand side
- erify that vehicles internal communications are functioning properly
Rev-04 165
- During firing:
- Position him/herself at a location where he/she has the best overview at
any given time
- Pay particular attention to ensuring that participating personnel on the
ground and in vehicles do not enter the weapons hazardous zone
- On vehicles with their own tank commander (usually sergeant or higher rank),
such personnel may be assigned as a safety controller during exercises. In
exceptional cases, a corporal/grenadier deemed suitable may be assigned as a
tank commander and safety controller. The post should be assigned by a
squadron/company commander, or higher commander, and entered in writing
into the firing journal
- If the tank commander has dismounted his/her vehicle in order to direct
combat on foot/from the ground, a new safety controller should be assigned to
the vehicle
- The officers responsibilities
Activity management: refer to item 1.1.5.
3.13.3 Personnel not taking part in the training
3.13.3.1 Personnel not taking part in the exercise should remain at least 50 metres behind the
vehicle(s), or in a designated area.
3.13.4.1 The tank crew (tank commander, gunner and driver) should always use the tanks
own helmet headsets as ear protection (as well as ear plugs, when required).
Personnel required to assemble within, around or in proximity to a vehicle in combat
should normally use both ear muffs and ear plugs. No personnel should assemble
within 100 metres of a weapon/s without using ear protection. Refer also to item 6.21
3.13.5.1 When using a laser range finder, the general provisions for use of laser, item 6.2.5,
are applicable, as well as any special provisions for individual weapons systems.
3.13.6 Ammunition inspection
3.13.6.1 Ammunition should be inspected before being loaded (undented, clean) (cf.
provisions of item 2.1.4 onwards). Ammunition should be placed in accordance with
technical provisions, drill regulations and packing plans for individual vehicles.
3.13.7 Communications
3.13.7.1 Line or radio communication should be established between the officer in charge of
the exercise and the firing commander, and all participating vehicles, as well as the
safety commander/safety officer, when this is deemed necessary.
If vehicles contain an intercom, this should be used.
In the event of loss of communication, firing (the exercise) should cease.
166 Rev-04
3.13.8 Warnings/marking vehicles

3.13.8.1 During target practice in daylight, vehicles should display flags. During hours
of darkness, coloured lights should be used. Flags and lights should be clearly
visible.
These provisions apply to all forms of target practice from a vehicle, both in Norway
as well as in Norwegian divisions stationed abroad. The provisions apply to both
regular firing ranges and on improvised courses.
- Green flag or light
- Signifies that weapons are unloaded and under control
- Should be displayed by all vehicles carrying live ammunition
- Should be used by vehicles not actively participating in ongoing firing
exercises
- Personnel may be mounted on the vehicle or remain dismounted
- Red flag or light

- Signifies that weapons are loaded and ready to fire
Chap-3
- Should be used by all vehicles actively participating in the firing
exercise from the point at which weapons have been loaded
- Personnel should neither mount nor dismount the vehicle without first
ensuring that weapons have been unloaded and inspected and that a
green flag has been raised (Exception to this rule: The vehicles foot
soldiers may either remain mounted on the vehicle or dismounted
during ongoing firing exercises)
- Red and yellow flag or light

- Signifies that weapons are loaded and that a technical error has
occurred
- Should be present on all vehicles in which a technical fault has
occurred and in which weapons remain loaded
- Personnel should neither mount nor dismount the vehicle without first
receiving a command from the firing commander
- Green and yellow flag or light

- Signifies that weapons are unloaded and under control and that a
technical error has occurred
- Should be present on all vehicles in which a technical fault has
occurred and in which weapons are unloaded and under control
- Personnel may be mounted on the vehicle or remain dismounted
If flags have not been supplied, marksmen/vehicles may, as an alternative, be

equipped with clearly visible vests in order to separate firing vehicles from vehicles
that are not engaged in firing (applies to daylight exercises).
For vehicles with weapons stations (RWS), flag sets should be used (as well as lights
Rev-04 167
during hours of darkness).

Red and green lights should be used when firing is to take place during hours of
darkness.
3.13.9 Instructional firing from stands with several vehicles
3.13.9.1 During exercises, tanks/vehicles usually stand in line.
There should be a gap of at least 5 metres between vehicles.
Vehicles should be parked without any axle pitch.
3.13.10 Indirect firing
3.13.10.1 Indirect firing (target designation from an OP) is not permitted.
3.13.11 Firing whilst in motion
3.13.11.1 This type of firing places great demands on both the officer in charge of the exercise
and personnel participating in the exercise. Units intending to undertake this type of
activity must receive prior approval from the division commander.
During an advance, when the COMBAT procedure has been carried out and in the
event of RED FLAG', the following regulations apply:
- The number of vehicles and complexity of the exercise should be adapted to
the training level of personnel in accordance with the provisions of the
division commander. The level of experience and expertise of the individual
tank commander is of particular importance in respect of how
difficult/realistic/complex an exercise may be
- Cannons/barrels should never be pointed directly at personnel or other
vehicles. When moving behind the vehicle, for example, weapons should be
secured electrically, for weapons systems that provide this option elevated,
and not released before the line of fire is clear again
- Safety is primarily maintained through personnel focusing on and being made
aware of details at every level from day one of their training, together with the
adaptation of movement and target practice in accordance with the condition
of the terrain, in respect of safety angles and, not least, adapting the exercise
to the level of training
- In respect of placement in terms of width and depth, reference should be made
to the safety template for all types of weapons and ammunition
- In the case of field exercises involving the movement of several vehicles,
there should be a gap of at least 5 metres between each vehicle. In the case of
Leopard tanks, the gap should be at least 20 metres
- it should always be taken into account that there is sufficent lateral freedom
for each individual vehicle. Side ways safety angles are determined by the
various ammunitiontypes safety template
- When personnel are seated, special consideration should be given to the
distance between vehicles and personnel, and the danger of firing over and to
the side of personnel
The following regulations apply when firing in motion on a combat course/firing
168 Rev-04
course:
- Only one vehicle at a time, with weapon ready to fire, is permitted on each
course
- The safety controller should be equipped in such a way that he/she is able to
maintain contact with the vehicles crew via intercom
- Test runs or reconnaissance/inspection of the firing course should be carried
out, if required, by the firing commander and tank commander before firing
commences, in order to assess and determine the minimum permissible
elevation during vehicle movement
3.13.12 Shooting in and from a vehicle
3.13.12.1 Every type of small firearms may be fired from a vehicle
- The exception to this is firing a pistol from a gun slit/grate, in view of the
absence of a fastening point for the weapon and the consequential risk of a
ricochet occurring
An initial dry run of the exercise should be carried out
During firing: Chap-3
- The gunner should sit/stand firmly and point the weapon towards the
designated sector
- t least one-third of the weapon should extend out beyond the edge of the hatch
(shield clearance)
- On a vehicle in motion, the vehicles speed should be adapted to the condition
of the terrain, as well as the experience level of the gunner, in order to avoid
an uncontrolled weapon discharge
- With small firearms from a tank hatch or team leaders hatch, all handling of
weapons (loading and emptying) should be carried out over the edge of the
hatch
- Loaded weapons (cartridge in the chamber) are not permitted in the crew
compartment, except when firing through a gun slit
- The following regulations should be observed when firing though a gun slit or
grate:
- The mouth of the weapon should be inside the gun slit/grate
- Before the weapon is loaded, it should be secured to the vehicle by a
strap through the weapons trigger guard
When firing from a unarmoured vehicle in which the window frames and body are
being used as support, the weapons flash eliminator should, as a minimum, be on
the outside of the vehicle when the weapon is being fired
3.13.13 Firing above and to the side of personnel
3.13.13.1 Firing above and to the side of personnel is permitted in accordance with this item,
as well as the provisions for individual vehicles/vehicle types.
Firing above personnel is permitted with tank cannons and machine cannons when
Rev-04 169
firing from a distance that is greater than the sum of r+f+k, providing that:
- When firing above personnel, the trajectory is at least 8 metres above the point
where personnel are located (the division being fired over), calculated from
the ground. The same regulation applies to masks, the tops of trees and other
terrain objects
- The furthest boundary of the area in which personnel are located is at least f+k
from the closest boundary to the field of fire
- APDS/APFSDS/TPDS/TPFSDS ammunition is not used
- There is no tank movement during firing. Refer also to general part item 3.3.4
onwards
- That no firing occurs at the STAB ENGAGED level of operation for the
Leopard 1A5, Leopard 2A4, and with full firing guidance functionality with
the CV9030N/F1
When firing over personnel with tank cannons and machine cannons at A min <
2000 m, r+f+k is calculated thus:
When A min >2000m, the value of (f) is set to 400m.
Amm type r f k r+f+k

30mm TP 250 m 200 m 75 m 525 m
30mm MP 250 m 200 m 150 m 600 m
105mm HEATV 250 m 200 m 100 m 550 m
105mm HEAT 250 m 200 m 400 m 850 m
105mm HEP 250 m 200 m 400 m 850 m
120mm V 250 m 200 m 100 m 550 m
120mm HEAT 250 m 200 m 500 m 950 m
120mm HE 250 m 200 m 500 m 950 m
r = hazardous distance in front of weapon
f = hazardous distance for hits on this side of target area
k = splinter distance
When firing over personnel with a turret-mounted machine gun, the provisions of
3.4.5.3 are applicable. Safety stoppers are not required. Refer also to general part
item 3.3.4 onwards.
3.13.14 Hazardous zones for tank- and machine guns
3.13.14.1 Hazardous zones are shown in the prepared safety template for individual weapons.
A table containing the input values for the preparation of safety templates for tank
cannons and machine cannons has been included as appendix 16, 19 and 20. The
construction method for a template is specified in Appendix 1. When firing from a
tank in a built-up area, the placement of buildings in close proximity to a tank
engaged in combat may result in pressure injuries to personnel located on the
170 Rev-04
ground. In such cases, a safety zone of 50 metres should be established around

vehicles engaged in combat, where it is deemed necessary to use protective gear such
as helmets, goggles and ear protection. Attention should also be paid to glass and
other building materials that may shatter/disintegrate and fall down during discharge
of weapons.
50 m
10 m
Chap-3
Figure: 3.47
Safety zone around a firing vehicle
Unseated personnel may be injured by the backblast from a discharging weapon and
must therefore place themselves at least 10 metres to the rear of a vehicle engaged in
combat.
Vehicles engaged in combat should use their horns to warn other friendly forces,
before discharging their weapons. During joint manoeuvres in which an infantry
telephone mounted at the rear of a tank may be utilised, personnel should be trained
and coordinated to ensure that they are aware of the agreed procedure for its use.
Hazardous zone for tank ammunition refer to table item 3.13.14.
3.13.14.2 Danger sector for AFV weapons and automatic guns
DANGER 30 MM 105MM 120MM All Spreng All kald amm

SECTOR APFSDS APFSDS APFSDS Amm
and TPFS- and TPFS- and TPFS-
DS DS DS
Range in 500m 700m 700m 250m 250m
front
Side angle 500- 500- 1000- 500- 100-
This area is dangerous because of the sabots falling off.
It is prohibited to fire at shorter ranges than the sum of danger range for impacts to
this side of the target (f) and splinter distance (k). See table para 3.14.3.1
3.13.15 Firing with a Remote Weapon Station (RWS)
3.13.15.1 Great care should be taken when footsoldiers are cooperating with RWS in firing
exercises, due to the gunners limited visual area close to the vehicle. The RWS
Rev-04 171
gunner is dependent on the help from the vehicle commander or vihicle driver to stay
in control of own forces.
Firing can only commence on vehicle commanders order.
Operating weapon mounted in the RWS, should only be done by personnel who are
trained on the RWS.
When loading and emptying the weapon the RWS should be set in "ammo-reload
position kl 1, and teh arming switch should be set to "SAFE".
When adjusting the sight using a boresight, only the lowest turn rate should be used.
3.13.16 Use of smoke launchers, Very pistols and illumination rockets, plus
throwing of smoke canisters
3.13.16.1 See regulations in item 3.5.
3.14 FIRING ARMOURED FIGHTING VEHICLE
WEAPONS (WITH TANKS)
Figure: 3.48
Lepoard 2 in winterconditions
3.14.1 In general
3.14.1.1 Safety regulations presented in the weapon manual and the drill book are only
partially included in this paragraph. The regulations presented in such directives and
in firing range manuals apply in addition to the regulations presented here.
3.14.1.2 Adjustment of sight and zeroing of weapon have to be carried out before the firing
exercise starts, if necessary previous zeroing is to be checked. Before firing starts,
the tank weapons are to be ready in accordance with the regulations applying to these
weapons.
Special for Leopard 2A4:
- The casing for 120mm tank ammunition is made of cellulose and cannot
withstand strong heat and impacts. It is therefore prohibited to remove an
172 Rev-04
extra rocket/shell from reserve stocks in the turret before the shell in the
chamber has been fired. The door of the reserve stocks is to be locked at the
moment of discharge, and the loader is to hold on to something and observe
the breeching of the gun when firing is taking place. The safety controller is to
make a technical check of the reserve stock before firing commences.
The safety controller must perform a technical controll of the readiness bunker
prior to firing.
- For other safety Regulations applying to Leopard 2A4 see manual for Leopard
2A4 NO
3.14.1.3 During peacetime firing, the weapons are to be pointed towards the fire sector until
they have been emptied.
3.14.1.4 During firing, steel helmet or armoured fighting vehicle helmet is to be worn by
personnel on the outside of the vehicle. The drivers hatch is to be shut. Helmets are
not obligatory when loading ammunition.
3.14.1.5 Turret machinegun and Anti-Aircraft Artillery
Turret machinegun . When firing the turret gun from an armoured fighting vehicle
standing still, the regulations in item 3.4 apply. Chap-3
The danger area will constitute a part of the safety template described in the above.
3.14.1.6 Anti-Aircraft Artillery. When firing AAA towards ground targets, the regulations in
3.4 apply. When firing during movement, A is to equal maximum allowed distance
for the ammunition being used.
When firing AAA against airtargets, the regulations in 3.4 apply.
3.14.2.1 The saftey controller must in addition to his obligations in item 1.1.5.5 and 3.13
make sure that:
- drivers hatch must be closed during firing of the vehicles weapon
- participating personnel on the ground and in other vehicles do not enter the
weapons dagerous area
3.14.3 Firing over and to the side of personnel
3.14.3.1 Firing over personnel with AAA is prohibited.
3.14.3.2 Firing to the side of personnel with tank gun is allowed under the following
conditions:
- that the distance to passing point is at least "r" to make sure that there is no
chance of hitting the ground between the tank and passing point(personnel)
- that the angle between gun firing sector limitation and gun personnel is at
least 70 mils when the vehicle is standing still
- that the angle between gun firing sector limitation and gun personnel is at
least 100 mils when the vehicle is in motion (firing during motion cf item
3.14.4.1)
- that the distance between personnell and fire sector limitation is no less that 6
m
- that firing is only allowed on standing targets or emerging targets in fixed
Rev-04 173
position within the firing sector limitation

- that only approved ammunition (cf item 3.3.4) is used,
APDS/APFSDS/TPDS/TPFSDS ammunition is not permitted.
- that the gun barrels wear is within the allowed limits
- that the lateral and horizontal limitations of the relevant dangerous area is
marked in a manner that the participating personnel easily can see or find
them. See also item 3.3.4.
Firing to the side of personnell with turret mounted machineguns is permitted and is
comparable to firing machineguns with tripod or "Vingfot" cf item 3.4.5.3 and
consecutive and item 3.3.4and consecutive).
Firing over personnel with front- or anti-aircraft MG is prohibited.
3.14.4 Fire during movement
3.14.4.1 Firing the tank gun during movement is only allowed for vehicles that are equipped
with side and height stabilizers.
3.14.5 Fire during movement
3.14.5.1 When firing during movement in a combat course/firing course the following
applies:
- that test driving or alternative reconnaissance/inspection of the firing course is
made by the officer conducting firing and the tank commander to evaluate and
set the minimum elevation accepted during driving before commencing firing
- that position for loading is used if suitable
3.14.6 Fire marker HOFFMANN
3.14.6.1 - during loading and firing with fire marking equipment (Hoffmann) all
personnel participating are to wear ear plugs and ear muffs
- dangerous area is 50 m in front of the muzzle and 25 m to each side of the fire
direction
- it is prohibited to fire blanks DM 54 in built up areas or closer to buildings
than 150 m
- blanks DM 54 have no delay and are discharged immediately. This materiel is
not to be used in improvised ways or by using improvised firing mechanisms
- loading, main switch and fuze are to be switched off on the control box
(Hoffmann). The blanks plugs are to be covered by the short circuit cap until
all the blanks are placed in the tubes. The loader is to stand beside or behind
the launching tubes during loading. When the blanks plaugs are put into the
socket no personnel are to be inside the danger area
- emptying is done in reverse order of loading. The main switch and fuze are to
be switched off on the control box (Hoffmann)
3.14.6.2 How to handle misfire/dud
Fire marker HOFFMANN will remain in its firing device for min 10 minutes. After
this time these fire markers are to be taken care of by the user and destroyed by
174 Rev-04
personnel holding at least a demolition certificate level 1.

3.14.7 Firing with 14,5 mm inner tube in tank gun (applies only to Leopard
1A5 NO with a 105mm gun)
3.14.7.1 For danger area, see illustration 3.49. Highest allowed elevation is 5 degrees.
Farthest allowed firing distance is 170 metres.
3.14.7.2 Firing is to be carried through in accordance with the regulations in 3.14.1.1 and
3.14.5.1above. Firing over and to the side of personnel is prohibited.
200 m 200 m
h = 600 m Chap-3
Ml
x
A max < 170 m

Weapon
Figure: 3.49
Dangerous area with 14,5 mm inner tube in tank gun
3.14.8 14.5mm ammunition Duds

3.14.8.1 When firing cartridges with tracer light NM 106 or cartridge with simulation charge
NM 114, the projectiles that do not detonate on impact are to be considered as duds
and blasted on site. Projectiles with brown coloured tips contain simulation charges.
Precautions in case of malfunction when firing with tank guns
See drill book for LEOPARD 1A5NO, UD 7-4-4
3.14.9 Risk of fire erupting in the target area
3.14.9.1 OCE is responsible for extinguishing fires arising according to the regulations
regarding fire in the local target range instructions.
3.14.10.1 See 6.2.6 and onwards.
Rev-04 175
3.15 FIRING WITH WEAPONS MOUNTED ON

ARMOURED INFANTRY FIGHTING
VEHICLE CV9030N/F1
Figure: 3.50
Firing from CV9030N/F1
3.15.1 In general
3.15.1.1 The following points regulate all firing using turret-mounted and handheld weapons
from the CV9030N/F1.
Safety regulations are presented in the drill book (Manual for Armoured infantery
fighting vehicle CV9030N/F1), in technical manuals (TH-10 Turret and arming
CV9030N) and in the firing range manual apply in addition to these regulations.
3.15.1.2 When firing in peacetime, weapons must never be pointed towards personnel or
other vehicles (never point or aim as long as the RED FLAG is being used.
Before firing the safety controller is responsible for checking that the fire sector is
clear and that the weapon has bearing to 100 m so that the ammunition is not
discharged unintentionally before having crossed the safety zone.
3.15.1.3 Before firing the weapons are to be made ready in accordance with KTS cp Manual
for Armoured infantery fighting vehicle CV9030N/F1.
3.15.2 Warning/marking of vehicles
3.15.2.1 When firing is being conducted in peacetime, the vehicles are to carry flags. In
darkness, lanterns with coloured lights are used to signal the status of the weapons.
Flags and lanterns must be clearly visible. See also Manual for Armoured infantery
fighting vehicle CV9030N/F1.
176 Rev-04
Green flag or white lan- Gun: emptied and checked

tern MG: emptied and checked
or
Gun: loaded (shell in rotor) and :
- electrically secured
- mechanically secured
- axle shaft in free position
MG: emptied and checked
Red flag or red lantern: Gun and MG: loaded

- axle shaft in (only gun)
- mechanically unsecured
- electrically unsecured (depending on the
situation see 3.17.10.1. Firing with mo-
vement.)
Chap-3
Red and yellow flag or Same as for red flag plus technical error has occur-
lantern: red.
Green and yellow flag or Same as for green flag plus technical error has
lantern: occurred.
3.15.3 Personell for ledelse og kontroll
3.15.3.1 See item 3.13.2 and onwards.
Note that:
When required, the safety controller for the foot squad or vehicle squad may stay
sitting in equipment compartment 10 or 11. The safety controller must wear a helmet
or a helmet headset, as well as hearing protection and splinter goggles. The vehicle
commander must during such a circumstance show special caution when moving the
vehicle.
3.15.4.1 The laser is safe for the free eye.
There must be no laser firing on personnel which use optical devices with 8x
magnifying, closer than 80 metres from the vehicle.
3.15.5 Automatic gun MK 30 Bushmaster II
3.15.5.1 a. Empty weapon check to be carried out before dealing with the gun (cp
Weapon drill 3.2.1.1). Rotor, breech-block and chamber are to be checked
carefully, if possible using a torch to verify that emptying is complete.
b. Before firing the gun it has to be checked that:
- there is no foreign object like snow and ice in the barrel
- the procedure KTS, in accordance with Manual for Armoured infantery
Rev-04 177
fighting vehicle CV9030N/F1, has been carried out

- the procedure COMBAT, in accordance with Manual for Armoured
infantery fighting vehicle CV9030N/F1, has been carried out.
c. During firing:
- the fresh air fan is to be switched on (and remain on for at least 10
minutes after firing is over)
- during gun firing all personnel with their heads over the hatch and
personnel within a radius of 15 metres are to wear splinterproof goggles
or cover their eyes in another way, for instance by using field glasses or
hands
- during firing at a lower operational level, parts of the systems safety
functions may or will be disconnected. The tank commander will
therefore have to show the utmost vigilance.
d. After firing:
- o a link break may occur during firing. This may cause some of the
ammunition to slide back into the flexichannel/magazine. This must
therefore be checked carefully after firing.
3.15.6 Firing with handheld weapons from combat hatch, section leaders
hatch and firing slits
3.15.6.1 General
- see also Manual for Armoured infantery fighting vehicle CV9030N/F1 Action
from hatch.
- it is prohibited to fire with M72/NM72, 84mm recoilless gun, RFK/or similar
from the combat hatch or the section leaders hatch. For ERYX see para
3.11.4.29.
- the gunner is to stand firm with controlled direction of his weapon
- the weapon is to be held with at least one third of the weapon outside the
hatchway
- when firing from a moving vehicle the speed is to be adjusted to the nature of
the ground and the gunners experience in order not to cause any uncontrolled
weapon handling on part of the gunner.
- When firing handheld weapons from the combat hatch and the section leaders
hatch the firing technique (loading and emptying) is to be done over the edge
of the hatch
- loaded weapons are not allowed in the combat compartment except when
firing through a slit
- when firing through a slit with MP-5, AG-3 and HK-416 the weapon is to be
fastened to the vehicle with a strap in the trigger guard before the weapon is
loaded and it is to remained fastened until it is emptied and checked
178 Rev-04
- all firing from the combat hatch, section leaders hatch or slit on the
CV9030N/F1 is to be done from the shoulder.
- fire sector for firing with 30mm MK (automatic gun) from CV9030N/F1 at
the same time as there is fire from the combat hatch/section leaders hatch
during movement is from 11 oclock 1 (see ill 3.51).
- for other fire sectors in combat from hatch see ill 3.51.
Chap-3
Figure: 3.51
Fire sector CV9030N/F1 when section leaders hatch is closed
a. Limitation 30mm MK combat fire from hatch
b. Fire sector combat hatch
c. Fire sector fire slit
Rev-04 179
Figure: 3.52
Fire sector CV9030N/F1 when section leaders hatch is open
b. Fire sector combat hatch
c. Fire sector section leaders hatch
d. Fire sector firing slit
180 Rev-04
Chap-3
Figure: 3.53
Fire sector CV9030N/F1 when the combat hatch is closed
b. Fire sector section leaders hatch
c. Fire sector firing slit
3.15.7 Danger area

3.15.7.1 Danger area is described in the established safety template for the relevant weapon
and ammunition type. A table of entrance values for constructing safety templates
for heavy machine-guns and MK30 can be found in appendices 15 and 16. An
explanation for how to construct safety templates is provided in appendix 1.
For heavy machine-guns, see also 3.4 and onwards.
Danger area in front of the muzzle is respectively l sa and βsa, see
appendices 15 and 16 (also defined as safe distance and safety angle).
3.15.8.1 In general
This type of firing requires careful planning. High standards for weapon knowledge
and weapon handling are set for each vehicle commander and for the unit as a whole.
a. automatic gun, see para 3.14.3.1 and 3.14.3.2
Rev-04 181
b. turret MG, see para 3.16.8.2

c. see also general part para 3.3.4 and onwards
3.15.8.2 Firing over personnel
Firing over personnel with MK30 is allowed on the following conditions:
- full fire control function is used
- the vehicles are not to move during firing
- NOT to use APFSDS/TPFSDS ammunition (because of sabot)
- the trajectory in the area being fired over is at least 8 m above the point being
fired over (the unit being fired over) above the ground. The same rule applies
to bearing, treetops and other terrain features.
- the firing range is larger than the sum of l sa+f+s
- the far boundary of the area being fired over is at least f+s from the impact
areas closest boundary
l sa= safety distance danger area in front of muzzle
f = 20% of lm (A min) but minimum 200m
s = splinter distance
Firing over personnel with MG is allowed on the following conditions:
- See para 3.4.5.3, but safety stops are NOT required
See para 3.4.4 and onwards
3.15.8.3 Firing to the side of personnel
Firing to the side of personnel is allowed on the following conditions:
- the distance to the point for firing to the side of (the unit being fired to the side
of) is at least like ?sa, so there will be no possibilities of impacts between the
gun and the point being fired to the side of
- the angle made by the fire sector boundary and the point being fired to the
side of and the gun is no less than 70 mils when firing from a still vehicle.
- the angle made by the fire sector boundary and the point being fired to the
side of and the gun is no less than 100 mils from a vehicle which is moving.
- the distance between the point being fired to the side of and the fire sector
boundary is at least 6m
- APFSDS/TPFSDS ammunition is NOT to be used (because of sabot).
- firing only towards static targets or static targets popping up inside fire sector
boundaries
For firing to the side of personnel with MG the same rules apply as for firing from
tripod:
See para 3.4.5.3. and para 3.4.4.
182 Rev-04
3.15.9 Firing against air targets with automatic gun

3.15.9.1 When air target mode is used, uncontrolled direction of weapons may occur if the
target diappears out of reach of the guns limitation in height. For this reson the
combat hatch/section leaders hatch is to remain open and sikkerhetsslyfe
connected during all firing against air targets in peacetime. This implies that electric
aiming outside sector 9 oclock to 3 oclock is not possible. In addition there is to be
at least 20 metres distance between the vehicles. See para 3.19.1.2.
3.15.10 Firing with blanks with automatic gun
3.15.10.1 When firing blanks with the 30mm automatic gun the safety distance is 30m and the
safety angle is 20 degrees to each side of the barrel.
3.16 FIRING WEAPONS FROM/MOUNTED ON
WHEELED VEHICLES (DIFFERENT
VERSIONS)
3.16.1 In general
3.16.1.1 Safety regulations in the weapon manuals, technical manuals, firing tables and firing Chap-3
range(training area manuals apply in addition to these regulations.
3.16.1.2 During peacetime firing the weapons are to be sighted into the fire sector until they
are emptied and checked. It has to be checked that the fire sector is free in front of
the weapon so that the ammunition does not explode unintentionally before it has
passed the safety zone. Special precautions have to be taken during exercises with
several vehicles and personnel on foot near the vehicles.
3.16.1.3 Indirect fire (fire control from OP) is prohibited.
3.16.1.4 Before firing commences the weapons are to be primed in accordance with the
regulations for the relevant weapon.
3.16.1.5 When changing barrel, hot barrels must not be placed inside the vehicle due to the
risk of burn injuries to personnel and materiel.
3.16.2 Warning/marking of vehicles
3.16.2.1 When firing is ongoing, the vehicles are to carry flags, in darkness lanterns with
coloured glass. Flags and lanterns must be clearly visible and accessible to the
gunner.
Green flag or lantern: Weapon emptied and checked.

Red flag or lantern: Weapon loaded and ready to be fired. No mounting or
dismounting. This does not apply to personnel partici-
pating in the firing exercise.
Red and yellow flag or Weapon loaded. Technical error has occurred.
lanterns:
Green and yellow flag or Weapon emptied and checked. Technical error has
lanterns: occurred.
As an alternative to flags, if such have not been distributed, gunners may be
Rev-04 183
equipped with clearly visible vests in order to separate the firing vehicle from the
vehicles that are not firing (only applicable when firing in daylight).
For vehicles with weapon station (RWS) a set of flags must be used.
When firing in darkness, lanterns with red and green lights are to be used.
3.16.3 Communication
3.16.3.1 Field communication line or radio communication must be established between the
officer conducting the exercise/officer conducting firing and all participating
vehicles, as well as to the safety chief/safety officer when this is deemed necessary.
The firing/exercise is to be stopped should communication break down.
3.16.4.1 See Firing armoured fighting vehicle weapons, 3.16.4.1 in this chapter.
Also note that:
The vehicle commander may function as safety controller on his own vehicle
when vehicle unit weapons primarily are being used.
If the vehicle commander has to dismount the vehicle in order to lead the
advance/combat on foot/from the ground, a new safety controller for the
vehicle is to be appointed.
When members of the vehicle crew have been dismounted, there must be 1
safety controller per unit on the ground.
3.16.5 Personnel not participating in the exercise
3.16.5.1 Personnel not participating in firing are to stay at least 50 metres behind the
vehicle(s), or in a designated area.
3.16.6.1 Other personnel staying in, around or near a vehicle that is firing, must normally
wear both earmuffs and earplugs. No one must stay within a distance of 100 metres
from the weapon(s) without wearing hearing protection. See 6.21.
3.16.7.1 When the vehicle commander uses a laser range finder, general regulations apply.
See 6.8 and onwards.
3.16.8.1 Ammunition is to be checked before it is loaded (free of dents, clean, etc.) (see
regulations in 2.1.4 and onwards). Ammunition is to be placed according to the
relevant vehicles packing plan.
184 Rev-04
3.16.9 Firing during movement

3.16.9.1 This type of firing requires a lot of the officer conducting the exercise and all
participants, and is only allowed as follows. Units that are to carry through this type
of activity must in advance be approved by the unit commander, based on
competence, level of experience/progression/plan, as well as on understanding of
risk elements.
The regulations for firing which are listed in the following paragraphs are
emphasized.
3.16.10 Firing during tactical movement
3.16.10.1 When firing in the field during movement with several vehicles there is to be a
distance of at least 10 m between each vehicle. It has always to be taken into
consideration that there is sufficient side direction freedom for each vehicle. Under
no circumstances are the vehicles to be further apart in depth than what is necessary
to maintain the safety of all vehicles (distance in depth must never exeed the distance
in side).
When personnel are on foot special precautions apply concerning the distance
between vehicles. Chap-3
3.16.11 Vehicles with mounted 12.7mm Open bolt with artillery carriage
NM152
3.16.11.1 Barrel and trigger check before commencing firing.
Both the barrel and the reserve barrel to be given a pull-through
Barrel change after 100 rounds (peace).
At fire break cock the gun immediately.
All personell participating in the exercise are to wear a helmet, combat goggles, ear
plugs and ear muffs.
3.16.12 Vehicle with mounted MG-3 with artillery carriage
3.16.12.1 Both the barrel and the reserve barrel to be given a pull-through.
Barrel change after 200 rounds (peace).
At fire break cock the weapon immediately.
All personnel participating in the exercise are to wear ear plugs and ear muffs.
3.16.13 Firing small arms from vehicles
3.16.13.1 All types of small arms may be fired from the vehicle. The exception is firing pistols
through the grating, due to the risk of ricochet/possibility of getting stuck).
Only especially well trained personnel are allowed to fire from the vehicle
commanders place when the vehicle is moving.
Standard 45 degree rule applies to firing from vehicles.
When firing from moving vehicles, the ground must be level, so that no rash and
unexpected movements occur. The speed must be maximum 30 km/hour.
The weapon is to be held with at least one third of it protruding from the body of the
vehicle. When firing through the grating (the barrel must be on the outside due to the
risk of ricochet) the weapon is to be fastened to the grating with straps before it is
loaded, and it is to remain fastened until it has been emptied and checked.
Rev-04 185
Unit weapons are normally to be fired from vehicles where an artillery carriage is
mounted.
Weapons with flareback must only be used by dismounted vehicle personnel.
3.16.14 Instructional firing/firing from range with several vehicles
3.16.14.1 During instructional firing the vehicles are to be on line at least 5 m apart, 8 m when
firing at air targets. The vehicles should stand as horizontal as possible.
3.16.15 Use of smoke dischargers, Very pistols and illumination rockets, plus
throwing of smoke canisters
3.16.15.1 See the regulations in 3.5.
3.16.16.1 See this chapter, 3.4.5.
3.16.17 Firing from a SISU/PASI vehicle
3.16.17.1 When two people are standing in the hatches simultaneously for observation/firing
purposes, basic equipment should not be worn. This is to prevent personnel from
becoming trapped in the hatch in the event that the vehicle overturned.
3.16.17.2 When firing from a hatch and gun slit simultaneously, two safety controllers should
be present, one inside the vehicle and the other on top of the vehicle. In respect of
firing whilst the vehicle is in motion, the safety controller may ride on top of the
vehicle. The vehicles speed should not exceed 10 km/h and the safety controller
should be secured.
3.16.17.3 Sectors:
- When the rear hatches are being used, the gunners sector is from 9 oclock to
3 oclock
- When firing from the tank commanders hatch, the gunner should not wear a
combat vest
When both hatches are being manned simultaneously the following sectors apply:
- The gunner(s) at the right-hand hatch has the sector from 1 oclock to 6
oclock
- The gunner(s) at the left-hand hatch has the sector from 5 oclock to 10
oclock
When the tank commander is using the foremost right-hand hatch, the gunners
sector is from 2 oclock to 11 oclock.
3.16.17.4 Firing whilst the vehicle is in motion is permitted with vehicle mounted weapons.
Refer also to items 3.16.9 to 3.17.13 regarding firing whilst in motion.
186 Rev-04
3.17 ARTILLERY, FIRING TOWARDS GROUND

TARGETS
Chap-3
Figure: 3.54
155mm field artilleri M109
3.17.1 In general
3.17.1.1 The regulations in this directive apply before possible weapons manual regulations.
Special safety regulations concerning the handling and use of the weapon, and which
are not described in this directive, apply in full extent.
3.17.1.2 The word gun is used as a joint reference for both guns and howitzers.
3.17.1.3 Loaded gun is to be pointed towards the target area.
3.17.1.4 Fire warning is to be conducted in accordance with the firing range manual.
3.17.2 Choosing fire range for artillery
3.17.2.1 Training area for artillery fire is the area artillery may be fired towards when all
factors forming the basis for determining the danger area around the target have been
taken into consideration. When firing, it must be checked whether the danger area
around the target is within the training area. The check must be carried out relative to
the training areas outer boundaries with the fire control system or safety templates.
The exception is certain training areas where risk of ricochets may be disregarded
due to high mountains. The firing range/training area manual regulates such
conditions.
3.17.2.2 A fire range for artillery is to be indicated by the shortest and longest target height
within the range and a 10-digit map coordination for all break points on the fire
range boundary. The officer in charge of the exercise is responsible for defining the
fire range and to make this known to the officer in charge of the firing, the chief
safety officer and the safety officer (cp para 3.17.3.2). A ten-digit grid reference for
certain fire ranges for artillery may be listed in the regulations for the fire range in
question. If this is not the case, a ten-digit grid reference for the break points must be
Rev-04 187
established by using an artillery protractor.

Notice: When using a fire control system the inner angle of a break point is NOT to
be more than 3,200 mils.
3.17.3.1 During firing, the responsibility for safety is assigned to the following personnel:
- The officer conducting the exercise (OCE).
- The officer conducting firing, when the OCE for professional reasons cannot
or should not function as officer conducting firing.
- Safety chief.
- Safety officer.
- Safety guards/posts.
- Target chief, when this is deemed necessary for the exercise/training to work
properly.
3.17.3.2 The officer conducting the exercise
Firing field artillery can only be carried out under the leadership of an officer
conducting the exercise, who is in charge. Normally, the officer conducting the
exercise is the commander of the training unit. When this is undesirable or
inconvenient, an experienced officer/NCO may be appointed as OCE.
Examples:
- When firing in battalion formation, the battalion commander is the officer
- When firing in battery formation, the battery commander is the officer
- During educational firing, demonstration firing, unit testing, etc. an OCE is to
be appointed.
All duties of the OCE in connection with firing field artillery towards ground targets
are described in this paragraph. The OCE is responsible for planning, leading and
running the exercise/training (combined exercise) in a manner that is in accordance
with safety regulations and instructions in force. He/she is to:
- Produce required regulations in addition to the safety regulations in force, and
give these in writing to all safety personnel.
- Inform participating personnel (including bystanders and observers) and
assistants about the safety regulations and instructions which apply during the
exercise.
- Point out the firing positions, OP positions, fire range, preferably also the
target area, and make certain that all safety personnel are informed.
- Decide fire sector for safety personnel occupied with direct laying.
- Make sure that all blocking and safety measures are in accordance with the
safety manuals.
- Ascertain that the medical service is in accordance with 6.20 and onwards.
188 Rev-04
- Ascertain that fire protection measures are in accordance with The local firing
range instruction
- Order hold your fire or call the training off, when this is deemed necessary
for reasons of safety.
- Register and report duds in accordance with 2.1.11.1, 2.2.1.4 and the
manual for the firing range or training area.
- Ascertain that all personnel staying closer than 100 metres away from the
guns wear hearing protection (see 3.17.16.1 and 6.21).
3.17.3.3 The officer conducting firing
The officer conducting firing is to be picked from among well experienced and
skilled personnel. Normally, he/she will be picked from among the training units
officers/NCOs. When several officers conducting firing use the same target area,
communication must be set up between them. For training-related purposes, he/she
should be equipped with a map where assigned firing range/training area, preferably
also the target area, plus areas where restrictions have been imposed, are marked.
He/she is to: Chap-3
a. Before firing commences:
- receive directives for the positioning of OPs and possible area of
manoeuvre for OPs
- check that the positions of the OPs are sent to the command post and
that the OPs are present in the positions sent to the Command Post. If
there are more than one OP in the same position it is acceptable for
safety reasons that that one OP sends his/her position. When the
position of an OP is calculated at the Command Post it has to be
checked that the OP is the position the Command Post sends back to
the OP. Report to the safety chief and all officers conducting the fire in
the same target area of possible movements changing the OPs
positions
- for training purposes choose targets which for safety reasons can be
fired at. The target area should be indicated on his/her map if possible.
b. During firing:
- report to the command post possible unnormal rounds and if necessary
stop the fire if these cause danger outside the boundaries of the fire
range or within a restricted area
- stop the fire if personnel are observed or reported being inside the
danger area
- register possible duds (position) to be reported later.
c. After firing:
- o fill in and hand over Form 750 (see appendix 6B) to the management
of the firing range (see para 2.1.10.1.).
d. Firing, using direct laying, see para 3.17.9.3.
Rev-04 189
3.17.3.4 Safety chief

When firing in battalion formation (or higher levels), a safety chief is to be
appointed, usually the units S-3. He/she must have communication with the
officer(s) conducting firing and the safety officers, as well as with safety posts
regulating traffic on the safety chiefs orders.
All safety chief duties in connection with firing field artillery towards ground targets
are described in this paragraph. To the OCE, he/she is responsible for:
- Implementing the posting of safety guards, on the OCEs directive.
- Ordering hold your fire when this is necessary due to reasons of safety (e.g.
when he/she has authorized traffic in the danger area).
- Ascertaining that all reported observation posts and restrictions are known by
the safety officers.
3.17.3.5 Safety officer
There is to be a safety officer in each battery (position area). The fire control officer
is normally the safety officer. In his absence the duty officer acts as safety officer. If
the battery is firing from two different positions simulataneously there is to be a
safety officer in each position. All the duties of the safety officer are to be found in
this and the following paragraphs. He/she is responsible to the exercise officer that
all safety regulations are being observed, thus:
- preparing calculator before firing commences
- changing of OP positions and dispatching of calculated OP positions back to
the OPs (if this has not been calculated by the OP)
- checking the zero line (see para 3.17.3.9.), firing data and safety control at the
same time checking the position of the battery target against the artillery map
- transmitting the firing data to the guns
- use, handling and check of ammunition in the battery
- hold the fire when necessary for safety reasons
- positioning of safety posts
3.17.3.6 Manual plotting of data into the fire control system
All manual plotting of data is to be double checked, i.e. one person plots the data and
a second person reads and checks that the data are correct.
3.17.3.7 Preparation of the fire control system before firing
Before firing, the safety officer is to check that the following is entered correctly into
the computer:
- the guns gunnery data
- OP positions and restricted points
- the boundaries of the artillery range and minimum and maximum elevation
- invalid data for Vo and weather telegram are to be nulled or replaced with
standard data
190 Rev-04
The following is to be entered when the data are ready::

- top crest data when needed by the actual battery position
- Vo data for the guns (calibration data) for batteries with calibrated guns
- Vo data for ammunition (lot Vo)
- weather data
- powder temperature and shell weight class
3.17.3.8 Distibution of OP positions
The safety officer is to check that all OP positions are distributed to the safety officer
in charge. If the OP position has been calculated at HQ the OP positions are to be
distributed to the OP for control (6-digit grid reference, height and direction to the
gunaiming mark).
3.17.3.9 Check of zero line
a. The team leader/controller reports ready to HQ when the zero line has been
checked
Firing is not to be started before the zero line has been checked and found in Chap-3
order.
3.17.3.10 Transfering gunnery data to the guns
a. Digital transfer. The gunnery data are primarily to be transfered digitally to
the guns by the fire control system.
b. Oral orders. If the didital transfer fails thy gunnery data are to be transferred
orally. In this case the gunnery data are to be read back to the fire control
system from the gun.
The duty officer is to employ an assistant who sees the data screen or the
artillery form at the same time as the duty officer reads the gunnery data to the
guns. The assistant is to say wrong. if the data read to the guns are wrong.
When back-up systems are being used the assistant filling in the artillery form
is to say wrong in the same manner as above.
Example: Duty officer: 1st gun direction 1426, elevation 211.
Assistant: Wrong elevation.
Duty officer: Correction, elevation 311.
Gun: 1st gun direction 1426, elevation 311.
Rev-04 191
3.17.3.11 Use, handling and check of ammunition in the battery

The safety officer is to ascertain that the battery:
- Handles ammunition carefully, protecting it from rough weather, heavy
impacts, sunlight and high temperatures.
- Observes the provided regulations when using ammunition that has had
restrictions imposed.
- Does not remove the transport safety mechanism on mechanical time fuzes or
the rubber cap on proximity fuze until immediately before loading.
3.17.3.12 Interrupt firing when this is necessary for safety reasons
The safety officer is to interrupt all battery firing when this is required due to reasons
of safety. Reasons of safety may include:
- Danger area outside the boundary of the firing range or training area.
- Observation post(s) or areas where restrictions have been imposed within the
danger area.
- Personnel within the dangerous area in front of the gun
- Aircraft or helicopter within the danger area
- Other reasons laid down in the firing range/training area manual.
The safety officer is to report to the officer conducting firing/safety chief if firing
must be interrupted or called off due to reasons of safety.
3.17.3.13 Posting of safety guards
The safety officer must post the required number of safety guards (in addition to
guards ordered by the Oce/safety chief) to direct possible traffic in the danger area in
front of the guns. He/she is to ascertain that the safety guards know their duties.
3.17.3.14 The gun commander
The gun commander is responsible to the safety officer that his gun fires on orders
from battery HQ using the correct ammunition and gunnery data.
All safety duties for the gun commander during indirect firing are described in this
paragraph. He/she is to make sure that:
- handling of ammunition in/near the gun is safely done
- operating the gun is done the way it is described in the manual for the gun
- the crew use hearing protection
- the crew do not move into dangerous area in front of other guns in the position
area
Before each round is fired he/she is to check especially that::
a. b. the gun is loaded with the ordered:
- shell
- fuze and timing
- charge
b. the gun is directed with the ordered :
192 Rev-04
- direction
- elevation
c. from the gun is not observed:

- personnel in the danger area in front of the gun
- aircraft/helicopters in or on their way into dangerous areas
d. there is no firing top crest or other obstacles in the danger area

Note: When it is suitable, e.g. with self-propelled vehicles, he/she orders one of the
gunners who works outside the vehicle to observe and warn.
3.17.3.15 Course students
When course students as part of their training perform duties which normally require
safety responsibility, other officers are ordered to bear this responsibility. The
exercise leader may decide from the standpoint of the student that he/she is to cover
the safety responsibility linked to the job he/she holds.
3.17.4 Medical service
3.17.4.1 See 6.20 and onwards.
Chap-3
3.17.5 Safety control using safety template
3.17.5.1 Safety control using safety template is always to be performed before sending
gunnery data to the guns. When the fire control system is being used to calculate the
gunnery data, the safety control is to be done with the safety programme in the
computer. If the gunnery data is produced by use of graphic back-up equipment, the
safety control may be done either with the safety template or with the fire control
system. (The fire control system may be used if graphic HQ back-up equipment is
used for training purposes.)
3.17.6 Danger area
3.17.6.1 The danger area on the horizontal plane can be found in the safety templates for the
relevant ammunition and ordnance type.
The danger area can be divided into the following three areas (illustration 3.55 ):
- Danger area around the weapons.
- Danger area around the target.
- Area where one might fire over somebody (area between the danger area
around the weapons and the danger area around the target).
3.17.6.2 a. Danger area around the guns. The danger area around the guns is limited by
the safety angle (M) in relation to the firing direction and dangerous distance
in front of the guns. The safety angle (M) is 500 mills and indicated on the
safety template. Danger area in front of the guns is 300 m and may, if
necessary, be put on the template using a grease pencil or similar. In some
templates distance(s) is marked. This distance has no practical purpose using
the templates.
b. Danger area around the target. In the danger area around the target the
following is included:
Rev-04 193
- dangerous distance to impact on this side of the target (f)

- dangerous distance to impact beyond the target (I)
- side spray angle (W)
- ricochet angle (Q) and ricochet distance (c)
- splinter distance (k).
Since the effects of some of these factors are dependant on firing distance the
danger area around the target will vary accordingly.
c. The area being fired over. In this danger area is included:
- safety angle (M)
- splinter distance (k).
Firing over this area is accepted when special requirements are met (see para
3.17.14.1).
3.17.6.3 The danger area in height is the airspace above the danger area(s) up to the highest
altitude that will be used during firing, plus splinter distance (k). Highest altitude is
determined based on ammunition, charge and elevation. Safe height is calculated
based on this and rounded up to closest 1,000 feet (see appendix 7).
3.17.7 Manual use of safety template for safety check when firing:
3.17.7.1 When safety templates are used for safety check, this is to be carried out by the
safety officer. It must be carefully ascertained that the templates have the right scale
and charge. Example of safety template can be found in illustration 36.
194 Rev-04
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Dr -Dmaks
Dotted line shows the Dangerous area
danger area if ITG is around target for
uncurtain and when firing Firing distances
is decided by from 2000-7000 m
gun firing table
+
2-4000
5000
6000
D r Dmaks
2000 (Amin)
Chap-3
3000
Area for firing above

4000
(Not in scale)
5000
6000
7000 (Dr)
M M
Dangerous area by gun
Figure: 3.55
Example of danger area given on safety template
3.17.7.2 Preparations for firing are :

a. Mark on the map:
- the outer boundaries of the designated firing range
- the position of gun 1
- OPs and possible other restricted points in the area
b. When firing over an area the lowest acceptable elevation to the area being
fired over for charge(s) in question is decided like this:
- a. decide the elevation to the point to be fired over, add the saftety
Rev-04 195
addition in height (20 mills)

- b. put down the lowest acceptable elevation on the safety template for
the charge in question (ill 3.60).
3.17.7.3 Check when firing

a. Mark the point (target) on the map for which the gunnery data have to be
established. Check that the given target height is between the lowest and
highest acceptable target height.
b. Put the safety templates target point over the marked point and adjust the
template so that the centre line (BM line) lies over the gun position. Check
that the correct safety template is used (scale and charge).
c. Check that no part of the line representing the danger area around the target is
outside the boundaries of the firing range.
d. Check that no restrictive points are in around the target around the target.
e. When firing over the target check in addition to points a-d that the elevation is
larger than the lowest acceptable elevation marked on the template.
f. When firing with other shells/combination of fuses than mentioned under
3.17.14.1.
check in addition to points a-d that areas with personnel are not inside the area
being fired over.
g. If the firing is done on the basis of an uncertain fire technique or if the
gunnery data are based on a gunnery scale, the first round is to be safety
controlled like this:
a. Danger area on this side of the target is limited by the line Dr Dmax,
danger area beside the target is limited by a broken line on the safety
template and the danger area beyond the target is limited by the line
indicating the firing distance in question. Firing over the target is
prohibited for the last fourth of the trajectory.
h. If the firing is in the upper register the danger of ricochets can be neglected.
The line Dr Dmax limits the danger area.
3.17.8 Using the fire control system for safety control when firing
3.17.8.1 firing in peacetime. This programme is based on the same basic data used for the
construction of safety templates. When the fire control system is ready as described
in 3.17.3.7 the fire control system will automatically perform safety control before
gunnery data are displayed. The check is done for each gun and the check is done in
the following order:
a. The target height used lies between the indicated lowest and greatest
acceptable height. This check is done to make sure that possible grave errors
in height at the target do not have consequences in the danger area outside the
firing area.
b. Danger area around the target is inside the indicated firing area.
196 Rev-04
c. Stored OP points are outside the danger area. This check is done to make sure
that no OP or restrictive points (stored as OPs) are inside:
- danger area around the target
- the area being fired over when firing with HE shells with proximity
fuze
d. The height of the trajectory is higher than the height of the area being fired
over plus safety addition
e. If a safe fire technical base has not been established the safety control must be
performed manually ( see 3.17.7.3 bullit pt g).
3.17.8.2 The safety programme in the fire control system stops the calculation of the gunnery
data to a target which cannot be fired at for reasons mentioned under 3.17.8.1 points
b-d. Special warners in the fire control system indicate the reason why gunnery data
cannot be calculated. A warner about the target height (paragraph 3.17.8.1) makes it
possible to calculate fixation data and gunnery data. Firing can take place in cases
like this if after plotting of the fixation data on the map it turns out that the given
target height is the same as the height on the map. Chap-3
3.17.9 Direct laying
3.17.9.1 During firing using direct laying the responsibility for safety lies with the following
personnel:
- the officer in charge of the exercise
- the officer in charge of firing
- the gun commander
3.17.9.2 The officer conducting the exercise is to perform the relevant duties listed in para
3.17.3.2. When deciding danger area a special safety template for direct laying is to
be used (ill 3.57).
3.17.9.3 The officer in charge of firing is responsible to the OCE that current safety rules are
observed. All duties related to safety during firing, direct laying, are described in this
point:
He/she is to:
- make sure that all guns are in line
- make sure that the targets are inside the fire sector
- make sure that the distance gun target is more than 800 m for 155mm field
howitzer and 600 m for 105 mm field howitzer
- make sure that the gun is not directed outside the fire sector. Sector markers or
sector stoppers can be used to indicate the fire sector
- make sure that all received instructions for the use of ammunition are
followed
- hold the fire when breeches in the safety regulations or when for other reasons
danger may arise
Rev-04 197
3.17.9.4 The gun commander is resposible to the officer in charge of firing that his gun only
fires against designated targets. All duties related to safety during firing, direct
laying, is described in this paragraph:
He/she is to make sure that:
- the gun is loaded with the ordered type of shell and charge
- the gun is directed against the target in question
- the handling of ammunition in/around the gun is in accordance with safety
rules
- the operating of the gun is done as described in the guns drill regulations
- the gun crew use ear protection
3.17.10.1 See chapter 2.
3.17.11 Procedures at malfunction
3.17.11.1 A misfire is a malfunction where nothing happens after pulling the trigger once and
then repeating it twice. This may be due to an error in the trigger mechanism, the
ignition, propellant or a clogged flame canal.
It is not possible to immediately distinguish between an afterburner and an
incomplete functioning of the trigger mechanism and/or the ignition. Therefore a
misfire is considered an afterburner until this possibility has been ruled out.
Removing the ignition cartridge, or opening of the sliding wedge/breech is not to
take place till 10 min after the last time the trigger was pulled. The gun is to be
directed towards the target all the time.
a. When a misfire has occurred the following is done:
- if possible secure the gun
- the firing lanyard is loosened (if possible) and handed over to the gun
commander
- the personnel are evacuated under full control
b. After waiting for 10 min the gun commander appoints an assistant from the
gun crew. The assistant removes the ignition cartridge and shows it to the gun
commander:
- Has the ignition cartridge not been discharged the error may be the
cartridge itself or the trigger mechanism. Is there a clear mark of impact
on the cartridge a new one is put in and the firing can continue.
- The removed cartridge is kept separately from the others until it can be
destroyed. Is there no impact or only a very weak one in the cartridge,
the error lies in the trigger mechanism. The sliding wedge/breech is
opened, the charge removed and the error put right. The firing can now
continue.
3.17.11.2 For all ammunition types with fuzes, the rule is that shells having been removed
from the chamber from the front of the gun are not to be used. To avoid ejection it is
198 Rev-04
always wise to try and fire shells that are already loaded. An ejected shell is to be
removed from the battery area and destroyed.
3.17.12 Construction of safety template for field artillery
3.17.12.1 For live firing in peacetime, safety templates are to be constructed for the charges in
question. The template are to be in scale 1:50 000 and/or 1:25 000. A separate safety
template is constructed for direct laying. Each template applies to a certain charge
and to a certain interval of muzzle velocity (Vo). If two types of guns are ballistically
similar they can use the same templates. The final decision about this rests with the
higher authority for artillery and AAA. The templates are to be marked with scale,
type of gun, charge and Vo area. The lay-out and marking of safety templates can be
seen in illustration 3.60.
3.17.13 Construction of templates
3.17.13.1 a. The following factors are taken into consideration when constructing
templates:
Dmax: Max firing distance which can be achieved with a cer-

tain charge/combination of shells Chap-3
Amin: Shortest accepted firing distance for a certain charge/
combination of shells
Dr: If the firing distance is larger that D r the danger of ri-
cochets can be ignored
A: The actual firing distance (each 1000 m from A min to
D max)
Qp: The distance from the target to the point from which
the ricochet angle Q is to be measured
c: Ricochet distance
BRh: The width of the danger area on this side of the target
k: Splinter distance
M: Safety angle
Q: Ricochet angle
W: Side spray angle
l: Danger distance beyond the target
f: anger distance on this side of the target
Survey of D max, Dr and Amin for 155 mm and 105 mm guns:
Calibre Charge Dmax Dr Amin Vo-area

155mm 3W 8000 7000 2000 275-310
4W 9000 8000 4000 310-355
5W 11000 10000 5000 370-415
Rev-04 199
6W 13000 11000 6000 445-490

7W 15000 13000 7000 530-580
8/7W BB 20000 16000 10000 640-715/530-580
9/8 BB 25000 19000 13000 790-860/640-715
9 BB 30000 22000 18000 790-860
105mm 1,2,3 5000 4000 2000 -245
4 5500 3000 250-270
5 7000 4000 290-310
6 8500 5000 350-380
7 10000 6000 450-475
b. When firing Base Bleed ammunition it has to be observed that there is a

theoretical possibility that the Base Bleed element does not function and that
the shell therefore will have a considerably shorter range than estimated. To
include this in the calculation of the safety template Danger distance on this
side of the target is to be calculated on the basis of a shortened firing distance
A according to the table below:
Charge: 7 BB Charge: 8 BB Charge: 9 BB

Firing dis- Shortened firing Shortened firing Shortened firing
tancce(km) distancce (km) distancce (km) distancce (km)
10 8,7
11 9,4
12 10,2
13 11,1 11,1
14 11,9 12,0
15 12,7 12,7
16 13,6 13,4
17 14,1 14,3
18 15,2 15,1 15,2
19 15,6 15,9 16,0
20 15,6 16,7 16,8
21 17,6 17,6
22 18,4 18,5
23 19,1 19,2
24 19,6 20,0
200 Rev-04
25 19,6 20,8
26 21,6
27 22,4
28 23,2
29 23,4
30 23,4
c. Danger area is calculated like this:

For A <Dr (ricochet may occur)
l =0,4 x Dr - 0,3 x A
c = 0,001 x (Dmax x W) + 0,1 x (Dr -A)
BRh = 0,001 x Dmax x W
f = 0,1 x A
Chap-3
NB! f min = 400 metres
For A > Dr (Danger of ricochet is not taken into account)
l = f = 0,1 x Dr
c = BRh = 0,001 x Dmax x W
Rev-04 201
Avst < D r Avst > D r
c+k
l+k
l+k
f+k
Br h+k
Q Q p+k
f+k
Figure: 3.56
Construction of safety templates for field artillery
3.17.13.2 Common data

a. Qp= 0,1 x Dr + k NB! Qp min = 1200 metres
W = 20 (mils)
Q = 400 (mils)
M = 500 (mils)
b. The value for k depends on calibre and can be found in this table:
Calibre k (metres)
155 mm 600
105 mm 400
40 mm 150
20 mm 100
The calculation gives all distances in metres. Danger area beyond the target is
202 Rev-04
found by drawing a cicular crescent around the target with radius (l+k).
Danger area on this side of the target is found by drawing a circular crescent
around the target with radius (f+k).
c. The area being fired over
The area being fired over has a width BR h where the danger area on this side
of the target ends and narrows to a width of k 300 m in front of the gun.
d. Danger area when the fire technical basis is uncertain
The area is found by drawing the line Dr Dmax to the maximum width of the
danger area beyond the target and then draw the line for maximum width
down to the contact point. The lines are to be broken.
e. The construction of the template is in ill 3.56.
3.17.13.3 For artillery ranges with designated position areas and limited impact areas, a special
template where Dmax is equal to the longest acceptable firing distance in the range in
question is made (Daccept). The template is to have additional marking SPECIAL
TEMPLATE FOR POSITION AREA GRIDARTILLERY FIRING
RANGE. Chap-3
Daccept=.........M.
3.17.13.4 Safety template, direct laying (ill 3.57) is constructed for the following firing
distances:
- 155 mm FH 800-2000 m
- 105 mm FH 600-2000 m.
If the firing goes beyond 2,000 m, a template for indirect laying is to be used. The
basic data for the construction of a safety template can be found in the following
table:
Rev-04 203
Dangerous distan- Splinter dis- Ricochet ang- Ricochet dis- Danger dis-
ce for impacts on tance (k) le (Q) tance (c) tance beyond
this side of the the impact
target (f) area(l)
20% of A min but at 155mm:600 m 400 mils 0.1 (D max - A D 0.4 x D max -
least 200 m 105mm:400 m min) 0.3 x A max
If ricochets are neglected the ricochet angle (Q) and the ricochet distance can be left
out.
Dangerous distance for impact beyond the impact area (l) is then calculated like this:
l = 0,1 x Dmax.
The side spray angle W is:
- 20 mils with static targets
- 100 mils with moving targets
204 Rev-04
2000
Chap-3
600
Gun
Scale 1:25000
105/Charge 6
Direct laying
Shortest distance 600 m
Greatest distance 2000 m
Figure: 3.57
Example of safety template, direct laying. NB! Not in scale
A safety template for direct laying applying to both static and moving targets can,
practically speaking, be constructed like this:
a. Danger area on this side of the target is calculated like this (ill 35):
- decide f+k
- draw a semicircle around the shortest firing distance with a radius f+k
b. Danger area beyond the target is calculated like this (ill 35):
- mark off Q
Rev-04 205
- mark off k from Q

- mark off f+k from the firing direction where it is larger than Q+k
- decide c+k and mark off this from the firing direction where it is
smaller than Q+k
- decide l+k and with this as radius draw a circular arc from 2,000 m.
c. Example of marking off the template, see ill 34.
l+k
c+k
Q
2000 k
f+k 800
f
Gun
Figure: 3.58
Construction of safety template, direct laying
206 Rev-04
3.17.14 Firing over target by field artillery, calibre 105mm and larger
Figure: 3.59
Chap-3
Field artillery firing
3.17.14.1 Firing over the target means firing over personnel staying in the area being fired over
between the gun position and the target.
Firing over the target is allowed with the following ammunition:
- HE shells with percussion fuse
- HE shells with time fuses in the part of the trajectory which is more than the
splinter distance k above the ground
- WP shells with percussion fuses
- illumination shells with time fuses
- smoke shells (HC) with time fuses
- bomblets with time fuses in the part of the trajectory which is more than 1,540
metres over the ground
firing other types of ammunition is prohibited.
When firing over the target the following conditions have to be met:
- the personnel inside the safety angle (M) must be at least 300 m from the guns
- the personnel must be at least f+k from this side of the target boundary (if
precautions have been taken to protect the personnel against splinters the
effect of rk can be reduced)
- the height of the trajectory at the point being fired over must be higher than
the points height plus an additional safety addition in height. 1
Rev-04 207
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Dr -Dmaks
+
2-4000
5000
6000
D Dmaks
r
Min elev 250

2000 (Amin) min tp 13,6
3000
4000
(Not to scale) 5000
6000
7000 (Dr)
M M
TEMPLATE 1:50000
155/CHARGE 3 W
Vo: 275 - 310 m/s
Figure: 3.60
Example of marking off the lowest elevation on the safety template
1 To avoid impact in the point fired over because of the weapons spray in
height, irregularities in calculating height of battery and point being fired
over, and variations in weather conditions, an additional safety height is to be
used. By using a calculator the safety addition is 4fs + 75 m (in metres). Firing
with HE/time fuses and bomblets the additional height mentioned above is to
be added. When there is manual safety control the safety addition is 20 mils.
208 Rev-04
3.17.15 Burning of propellant charge

3.17.15.1 The following regulations apply concerning burning of powder bags which have not
been used after live firing at an artillery range. These regulations form the
background for burning powder bags in small amounts (up to 30 kilograms) near
firing positions. Regulations concerning destruction (demolition) of large amounts of
powder can be found in TFF 763. Possible restrictions at the different artillery firing
ranges (e.g. seasons etc.) have to be considered in connection with the regulations.
3.17.15.2 The burning is to take place at an appropriate place near the respective gun groups
before the gun commander leaves the area. If not the powder bags are to be gathered
and taken away in tagged quivers.
a. Section leaders and gun commanders are to be trained in the technique of
burning small amounts of powder. Personnel who are to burn large amounts of
powder are to have a demolition certificate class I or class III. The safety
officer is to make sure that the personnel know the extensive regulations
applying at the firing range.
b. The section leader will decide an appropriate place for burning to his crew and
appoint one of the gun commanders to be responsible for the burning in his Chap-3
area.The section leader will point out the place to burn the powder to the
appointed leader of the burning, and make sure that he knows the regulations
and gives the necessary additional information about the burning.
When choosing an appropriate place to burn the powder the section leader will
consider:
- Wind direction
- wind force which may cause danger to personnel and antenna material,
vegetation, etc.
- the place of burning is to be at least 300 m from residential areas, public
transport, etc.
- a danger zone with a 100 m radius so that personnel and materiel are not
damaged
- the place of burning is to be chosen so that vegetation and other material do
not add to the fire
3.17.15.3 The gun commander who is appointed responsible for the burning is responsible to
the safety officer that the burning is in accordance with the regulations. Assistant is
the other gun commander in the section.
3.17.15.4 Regulations for the burning
Simultaneously up to 20 (155 mm FH), possibly 75 (105 mm FH) powder bags can
be burned. The powder bags are laid out in one layer as shown in ill 37. For ignition
is used a one-metre long black powder fuse to which a bunch of matches are
attached. If special matches are not available a box of ordinary matches can be used.
The box is opened about 10 mm so that the sulphur ends are clearly visible.
The black powder fuse is to be put into the box from the other end till it reaches the
sulphur. The sulphur is to have contact with the first powder bag. Powder is never to
be ignited directly by use of one match stick. This may cause severe burns to
Rev-04 209
personnel. Powder is not to be thrown on the fire to increase the fire.

After the burning it has to be made sure that the fire has completely died out so that
the surrounding vegetation is not ignited later on. Possible residues of powder are to
be gathered and burnt separately.
Burning of powder is not to take place more than once in the same place per day. If a
new burning is to take place the same day this will have to be moved at least 50 m
from the area in which the previous burning took place.
Wind direction
5 bags
5 bags
5 bags For 105 mm FH:

maximum 75 charge-
4 bags bags
3 bags For 155 mm FH

2 bags Maximum 20 charge-
bags
1 bags
Ignition site
Construction of the ignition system
1. Storm matchstick methode

A storm matchstick
placed in front of the
Firing hose firing hose in the middle
Tape
2. Matchstick methode
Firing hose
Figure: 3.61
Burning of powder bags

3.17.16.1 All personnel staying within a radius of 100 metres from the weapon(s) must wear
hearing protection, earmuffs and earplugs in combination, or other approved devices
providing equal protection. See also 6.21 and onwards.
210 Rev-04
3.17.16.2 Firing with large charges

With large charges is meant charges equivalent to charge DM72 4 modules or larger.
Firing with large charges the guns are to be grouped with at least 50 metres of
distance. The gun crew is to stay at the gun or closely behind it.
3.17.17 Risk of fire in the target area
3.17.17.1 See regulations regarding fire in the local target range instructions.
3.17.18.1 See 6.8.1.1 and onwards.
3.18 FIRING HELLFIRE MISSILES
(Safety regulations for firing Hellfire missiles are to be found in The Navys instruc-
tions for firing guns and missiles SDP-103.)
3.19 ARTILLERY FIRE TOWARDS AIR TARGETS
3.19.1 In general
3.19.1.1 When radar tracking is used to direct guns the firing is to stop when the target
Chap-3
aircraft no longer can be seen.
3.19.1.2 To recover loosened wire the officer conducting the exercise is to order personnel if
not special reasons prevent this from being done (for instance because of the current
contract rules with the air company). The personnel are to be told not to touch the
wire until it has been established that it is not in contact with any electrical wiring.
3.19.1.3 When firing with direct laying the telescopic aiming device is to be equipped with
eye protection and head support if this is part of the equipment.
3.19.1.4 In case of misfire the weapon is to remain pointed in the firing direction. Personnel
who are not in cover are not to stay in front of or at level with the muzzle when the
error is being put right. Besides they are to act in accordance with the weapon
manual (see para 3.22.1.1 and onwards).
3.19.1.5 When firing across water one (if deemed necessary two) manned motorboat(s) are to
be present and having communication with the exercise leader so that both sector
boundaries can be guarded effectively against vessels trying to pass. A safety boat
may not be necessary if the exercise leader has the necessary control/view of the
firing sector from the firing position or by using observation posts outside the firing
position to check all traffic into the firing area.
3.19.1.6 When weapons have mounted uxiliary weapons the Safety regulations apply also for
this weapon.
3.19.1.7 When Norwegian units conduct firing at firing ranges/areas abroad the Safety rules
applying to the firing area in question are to be observed. If the regulations do not
break with this manual the foreign regulations apply fully. In case of of disagreement
between the two regulations, the strictest interpretation of the regulations apply.
3.19.2.1 When firing the following personnel are normally appointed:
- OCE/exercise leader
- safety officer(s)
Rev-04 211
- safety controller(s)
- assisting safety controller(s)
- safety plotter
- safety plotter post(s)
- safety post(s)
3.19.2.2 The OCE appoints firing leader(s) when necessary, e.g. when there is firing going on
from two different positions at the same time or with different weapons. The OCE
has in addition his normal duties listed in para 1.1.5.2:
a. Before firing:
- make sure that the ammunition is checked
- check the direction of the weapon
b. After firing:
- o make sure thet the remaining ammunition is counted
- o check that the weapons are empty
- o check possible transport of ammunition
- o post guards to look after ammunition not being transported
3.19.2.3 The safety officer is to be a commissioned officer. He is in charge of all safety

personnel in the unit. He is responsible to the exercise leader that the safety duties
are in accordance with the safety regulations and given orders, and for the carrying
out of the safety duties. In addition to the duties given in para 1.1.5.4 he is to:
- teach the safety controllers the rules that apply for the exercise in question
- check the work of the safety controllers and constantly keeping them updated
on vessels, aircraft, etc. in the area
- checking the personnels equipment (helmet, hearing protection, flag, etc.)
- Make sure that the regulations for misfire are followed
- make sure that no one stays in front of the muzzle after the order to load has
been given
- instruct the safety posts
- place, instruct and check the safety plotter posts
- when guns fire individually make sure that firing can take place before the
order to fire is given
- report to the OCE when ready to open fire and if something obstructs the
firing for safety reasons
- stop all firing:
1. when the barrel points against or in front of the target aircraft or a point
behind the aircraft which is closer than of the towing wires length
2. when air and/or sea vessels are inside (or during firing expected to
212 Rev-04
enter) the danger area

3. when the target aircraft is exposed to danger because of ricochets etc.
4. when he sees the shell(s) (tracer) passing close to the target aircraft
(within half the length of the towing wire)
5. if the target aircraft is about to crash, has engine trouble or has given a
signal to stop the fire (radio or light signal).
The safety officer is to have a siren to stop the fire if necessary for instance when the
firing prevents the personnel from hearing a normal whistle signal.
3.19.2.4 The safety controller. A safety controller is appointed to each weapon/gun. A safety
controller is appointed to the tracking radar when the firing is remote controlled. The
guns safety controller will in addition to his normal duties in para 1.1.5.5::
- make sure that the gun is not directed outside the boundary for the side angle
and elevation given by the safety officer and that the barrel is not directed at
or in front of the target aircraft or at a point behind the aircraft which is closer
to the aircraft than of the towing wires length (see para 3.19.2.3)
- when the target is followed give a sign when for safety reasons there is Chap-3
nothing to prevent opening fire. As a sign that firing may start he can hold up
a red flag. If the guns are under remote control he is to stay in a place in which
he will not be injured when the barrel is turned quickly.
The radar safety controller is to survey the materiel and target and give permission to
open fire when everything functions normally and the guns safety controllers hold
up their red flags.
3.19.2.5 Assistant safety controller. An assistant safety controller is to be posted to each gun:
- when there is firing over or to the side of troops
- when firing against approaching targets when the attack angles horizontal
projection is < 20 degrees
An assistant safety controller at the gun is to:
- report to the safety controller when the gun is directed outside the given
boundary for the angle of traverse or elevation
- assist the safety controller on his order. See paragraph 3.20.2.1 for the duties
of the assistant safety controller before firing RB 70.
3.19.2.6 The safety plotter. He is appointed when the observation conditions make it
necessary. The safety plotter is on the basis of the reports from the safety plotter
posts all the time to plot vessels etc. in the danger area and brief the safety officer
about this.
3.19.2.7 The safety plotter post. The safety plotter post is appointed when the observation
conditions make it necessary. The plotter post can consit of a suitable number of men
(at least two) who are experienced in operating the instrument. The plotter post is to:
- continuously survey the sea and/land area in question
- report to the safety plotter vessels etc. that do not participate in the exercise,
stay in or approach the danger area
Rev-04 213
- report if the task cannot be accomplished because of fatigue, poor visibility,

etc.
3.19.2.8 Safety post: Is to be posted when it is necessary to monitor the air space.
3.19.3 Danger area
3.19.3.1 During firing (except mirror firing) the target pilot and the necessary personnel for
firing may stay in the danger area. Special rules apply for the safety of the pilot.
Other personnel do not have to take cover when there is firing.
3.19.3.2 The nature of firing at air targets (large firing area, fast moving targets) makes it
necessary to simplify the establishment of the danger area compared to firing against
ground targets. Normally it is impossible to seal off the danger area completely.
Therefore it often becomes necessary, in addition to the danger area, to expect a
random inner danger area which is moveable with the target. Simultaneous firing
against two towed target counts as two (inner) danger areas. If vessels etc. enter the
danger area the firing can continue as long as it possible to establish beyond doubt
that the vessel will not enter the inner danger area.
3.19.3.3 The danger area is established flexibly as indicated in the field firing drill book. The
appearance of the danger area can be seen in illustrations 3.62. Danger area for firing
RB 70 see para 3.20.6.1.
3.19.3.4 A divided danger area is acceptable provided:
- that the firing takes place in a combination of projectiles and barrels/tubes
which accept a divided danger area (see para 3.19.3.6)
- that the trajectory inside the area being fired over is at least 6m above terrain
features
3.19.3.5 During firing over and to the side of troops with anti-aircraft machine gun and
automatic anti-aircraft gun and with guns that have machine tracking, precautions
have to be taken to prevent that the barrel is directed in a dangerous direction.
3.19.3.6 Dangerous distance for direct hit (air blast) on this side of the firing area (f), plus
dangerous distance for splinters (k), danger area around the gun and side spray angle
and safety angle firing at air targets with different combinations of projectiles and
barrels can be seen in the table below. (For firing at groung targets, see paragraph
3.17.1.1 and onwards).
Projectiles and Split danger Muzzle dis- Safety angle Side spray
fuzes area allowed tance r in M in clicks angle W in
metres clicks
12,7 mm and smal- Yes 50 100 100
ler calibers
20 and 40 mm, All Yes 50 100 100
massive projectiles
All HE shells in- Yes Vo 250 100
cluding MP shells
All anti-tank shells No Vo 250 100
214 Rev-04
3.19.3.7 The inner danger area is made up of one sector:

- the point in the weapon
- the centre line through the predicted point
- the further limitatation like an arc with radius h
- with side spray angle W
An inner danger area is not to be established when there is firing with guns that are
remote controlled with radar direction. This means that the danger area always has to
be free of personnel and vessels. An inner danger area can be established when
manual laying and remote optical laying can be used. All firing will stop
immediately when aerial vehicles (except tow target aircraft) enter the danger area
whether the inner area is established or not. The danger area around the gun is
decided by:
- safety angle (M)
- muzzle distance (r)
- splinter distance (h).
Chap-3
These figures are found in the tables 3.19.3.6. The inner danger area for RB 70, see
3.20.6.1..
MKI rocket: 13,500m, k: (warhead) 158.5m (see TO 60A-1-1-4)
MKII rocket: 13,500m, k: (warhead) 178.5m (see TO 60A-1-1-4)
Centre line =
prolonged core line
Lead point
Movable target
k k
Movable inner
dangerous area
M M W W
M M h
W W
k k
Figure: 3.62
Example of moveable inner danger area when firing at air targets
Rev-04 215
Lead point
lead
Target course
Movable target
Dangerous area Movable inner

dangerous area
Firing sector
Dangerous area around the gun
Firing stand
Figure: 3.63
Example of danger area and inner danger area which can be used when firing at air
targets using manual laying and remote optical laying. With remote radar laying the
firing sector is similar to the danger area sector minus 25 degrees on either side.
(Inner danger area is not used during remote radar laying)
216 Rev-04
3.19.3.8 Dangerous distance firing direction (h) and splinter distance (k).
K
Calibre h HE and MP Cold projectiles and exerci-
shells se shells
Anti-tank Exercise
shells ammunition
12,7 mm 7 000 m 50 m 25 m 25 m
20 mm 7 200 m 75 m 40 m 40 m
40 mm L/60 12 000 m 400 m 75 m 75 m
40 mm L/70 14 000 m 400 m 75 m 75 m
3.19.3.9 Danger area (inner danger area) is decided with the extent of the front area on the
ground (sea). When firing this is included in the danger area (inner danger area) the
air space above this ground (sea) to the following altitudes
Chap-3
Calibre Altitudes
20 mm 5 000 m
40 mm L/60 8 000 m
40 mm L/70 9 000 m
>40 mm 12 000 m
3.19.3.10 The highest accepted elevation is 65 degrees. This elevation can only be exeeded for
special trial firing. When using anti-aircraft machine gun (except auxiliary weapons
of 40mm or larger guns) and 20mm anti-aircraft automatic gun against approaching
targets (the attack angle horizontal projection <20 degrees) it is only accepted to
open fire when the tow aircraft has reached 65 degrees (target angle).
Rev-04 217
3.20 GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM ROBOT 70
Figure: 3.64
Firing RB70
3.20.1 In general
3.20.1.1 skytingIn addition to these regulations, the directions laid down in the weapon
manual and additional rules for the exercise leader for each firing apply. When
choosing firing position the possibility for fire in the gas outlet behind the weapon
must be taken into consideration. No firing during thunder storms. There must be
good visibility between the firing stand and the target area. The aiming line to the
target is to have a minimum of 1m bearing. The position is not to have a steep slope
closer than 50m behind the gun.
3.20.2.1 At the artillery range there are to be no more personnel than necessary for leading,
control and service. Other unprotected persons are to stay under safe cover or outside
the danger area, at least 100m behind and straight to the side of the gun. When firing
the following personnel are normally to be appointed:
The OCE is in addition to his/her normal duties in para 1.1.5.2. tomake sure that
form 750 see appendix 6B is filled in accordance with para 2.1.10.1. He/she is
responsible that technical personnel go through third line check of the weapon before
the live firing starts. The OCE can function as officer conducting firing. 1.1.5.2
The officer conducting firing will in addition to his/her normal duties laid down in
para 1.1.5.3 run the firing and give orders about loading and firing of the weapon.
He/she is responsible for control of communication to the air traffic services local
air control body so that it functions during the period of firing and make sure that the
firing area is ready before the firing commences.
The safety officer will in addition to his/her ordinary duties laid down in para:
1.1.5.4
218 Rev-04
- check that there is no steep slope (vertical wall) behind the weapon closer than
50m
- will not allow firing over personnel
- check that only necessary personnel are on the artillery firing stand
- check that there are no personnel inside the danger area for rear blast after the
weapon has been loaded
- brief the section leaders and safety personnel about the artillery firing range
and the boundaries of the firing area, order firing sector and signals to stop the
firing
- make sure that the safety communication works satisfactorily
- report to the officer in charge of firing when safety measures are met and
firing can start
- stop the firing when he finds breaches of regulations and when for other
reasons danger occurs
A safety controller is to be appointed for each gun. He/she is responsible for Chap-3
maintaing the weapon systems safety and will in addition to his/her general duties in
para 1.1.5.5. and the local firing areas regulations:
- monitor the gun duties in making the weapon ready as well as firing technique
and check that orders are followed
- check that the weapon terminal is correctly mounted and made ready
including that all parameters are correctly entered
- observe and check that the weapon terminal is correctly used before, during
and after engagement
- when a live missile has been loaded check that the FIRE button on the weapon
terminal is not pushed before firing permission is given by the firing leader
- check that personnel at the firing range wear helmets and use hearing
protection
- inform the safety officer when the safety of the weapon has been taken care of
and fire can be opened
- order firing to be stopped if anything occurs which might jeopardise safety
An assistant safety controller is ordered for each weapon. He/she is responsible for
safety of the launching unit and is to:
- check that the weapon is correctly assembled and that all switches at the left
handle are in correct position
- make sure that no one stays in front of the muzzle or inside the danger area for
rear blast after the launching unit has been loaded
- make sure that the launching unit is not laid ouside the firing sector after it has
been loaded
- make sure that the launching unit is not laid towards target aircraft or closer to
Rev-04 219
target aircraft than of the towing wires length

- inform the safety controller when the safety of the launching unit is
maintained and fire can be opened
- be placed so that he can see all of the rocket trajectory
- order stop firing if anything happens that may jeopardise safety
- make sure that the launching unit during fire break and misfire still is laid in
the firing sector and that personnel move into the area of rear blast
Safety plotter, safety plotter post, see para 3.19.2.6 and onwards.
3.20.3 Check and handling of ammunition
3.20.3.1 The sealed rocket is to be treated carefully to avoid impacts, sunlight, high
temperatures and moisture. It is not to be removed from the transport and storing box
until use. In this box the sealed rocket is specially protected against impacts and
shaking. However, the rocket can be removed from the box for check of ammunition
included in this paragraph. It is then placed in the ammunition rack of the trailer or
similar in order to achieve a more warlike firing range atmosphere. Upon reception
the following is to be done:
- check of transport and storing box. If there is damage which makes it
reasonable to to assume that it has been exposed to a heavy impact or similar
the sealed rocket is not to be used
- check of the sealed rocket. If the box/quiver has visible signs of damage, the
rocket is not to be used
- check of the moisture indicator. If it has a pink colour the sealed rocket is not
to be used
3.20.4 Precautions in case of malfunction
3.20.4.1 When there is break in the fire the procedures given in the technical handbooks for
this weapon system are to be followed. When there is misfire and activated missile,
the missile can be removed from the launching unit only after 60 minutes. All
personnel will be moved under cover at least 200m from the unit during the wait. In
case of no booster ignition, and the rocket lands in front of the firing stand, all
personnel are to be evacuated at least 200m from the impact area. In case of a misfire
no radio transmitters are to be used within 30m from the missile. All radio
transmitters within the distances described in paragraph 2.4.4.2 are to be turned off.
3.20.5 Destruction of duds
3.20.5.1 A rocket which has not detonated on impact or by means of self destruction is to be
blown up there and then, if possible. No one is to approach the dud until after 60
minutes. The destruction of dud is to be performed by certified EOD personnel.
3.20.6 Danger area in front of the weapon
3.20.6.1 Moveable inner danger area is formed by a sector with its point in the gun, 45
degrees to each side in relation to the rockets trajectory. The sector has also a
maximum width of 1,000m to each side of the rockets trajectory. The length of the
area is equal to the danger distance in the firing direction which is 13,500m. The
220 Rev-04
altitude of the danger area is 8,000m above the firing stand. The total limitations of
the firing area are called danger area. Firing sector RB 70 is decided by establishing
a safety sector (danger area) into the area. The rockets trajectory is under no
circumstance to exceed the approved firing sector. If the rocket leaves the approved
firing sector the rockets guiding beam is to be turned off (the rocket is destroyed).
Firing with RB 70 is not allowed if personnel, vessels, boats or vehicles are within
the area covered by the firing sector and moveable inner danger area.
3.20.7 Danger area behind the weapon
3.20.7.1 Danger area of backblast Robot 70 is an area behind the RB 70 unit. The area
extends itself 6 metres to each side, in a straight angle, and from thence in an angle
of 25 degrees out and backwards in relation to the firing direction. Safe distance is
50 metres.
3.20.8.1 Firing the RB 70 over and to the side of personnel is prohibited.
3.20.9.1 All personnel within a 100 metre radius from the gun mounts must normally wear
both earplugs and earmuffs, see also 6.21. Chap-3
3.21 ARTILLERY, TESTING AND TRIAL FIRING
Figure: 3.65
New equipment is tested
3.21.1 In general
3.21.1.1 The regulations in the paragraph called Artillery, firing against ground targets also
apply for this paragraph. The regulations mentioned in this paragraph are additional.
The following is meant by test and trial firing:
- all firing with not qualified weapons and/or ammunition.
3.21.1.2 Weapons and ammunition are to be approved for the test/trial by the authorities in
Rev-04 221
charge.
3.21.2.1 During test and trial firing the following personnel responsible for safety are to be
appointed:
- test and trial leader (may also be firing leader)
- firing leader (officer conducting firing)
- safety officer
- safety controller
- safety posts (according to rules and type of test)
3.21.2.2 The test and trial leader is appointed from among well qualified personnel from the
unit/institution responsible for the test/trial. The one who is appointed is to possess
great knowledge of the materiel to be used in the test/trial. At test and trial firing the
test and trial leader takes over the responsibilities of the OCE (see para 3.17.3.2). In
addition he is to:
- make a plan (desription) for the test/trial with the necessary Safety rules. The
plan will be presented to the professional authorities for approval 1 month
before the test/trial is to take place
- brief all involved personnel on the test/trial and make sure that all personnel
have received and understood instructions and orders
- allow for deviations from the plan if this is deemed necessary and does not
involve considerable consequences for safety
3.21.2.3 The officer conducting firing/firing leader is appointed from among well qualified
personnel. He/she can also act as test and trial leader, and is then to be appointed
from the unit/institution that is responsible for the test/trial. His/her duties are
described in para 3.17.3.5. In addition he/she is to:
- decide left/right limitations and max/min elevation
3.21.2.4 A safety controller is appointed if the test and trial leader deems it necessary in order
to carry out the test/trial. A safety controller is always to be appointed at test and trial
firing with artillery from areas outside a firing area. The safety controllers duties are
described in para 3.21.3.7.
3.21.2.5 Safety posts are appointed in accordance with the current firing range instructions
and if the test/trial leader deems it necessary in order to carry out the test/trial.
3.21.3 Test and trial firing with artillery from area outside firing areas
additional regulations
3.21.3.1 The area to be used has to be approved by the DIF.
3.21.3.2 Warning is done in accordance with the Firing area regulation and the Firing area
drill book and appendix 7. In addition the test and trial leader has to decide whether
further measures have to be taken in each single case.
3.21.3.3 Firing can normally not take place over public roads, rail roads or residential areas
unless the area can be sealed off/checked for personnel during firing. Firing may
however take place over small roads which can be sealed off/checked and over built
222 Rev-04
up areas where there are no people, e.g. areas of cabins, summer houses (see warning
in the firing area drill book).
3.21.3.4 To check that personnel are not in the area being fired over a search has to be
performed. Primarily a search is made from the air by helicopter/aircraft every day
before the firing commences. Possible search on the ground can be carried out if this
is found to be more practical.
3.21.3.5 The correct number charges of the right size are to be prepared and checked before
firing starts. Charges that are left over and powder bags are to be removed from the
gun before firing starts.
3.21.3.6 When firing with mechanical time fuzes the timer is to be checked by the gun
commander and safety controller.
3.21.3.7 A safety controller per gun is to be appointed. The safety controller has the following
duties:
- check that firing takes place within the left and right limitation and max/min
elevation
- mark the guns to carry out the above check
- check ready ammunition correct number and size of charges Chap-3
- check extra powder bags, number and condition
- check the timer of the time fuze when necessary
- stop the firing if needed for safety reasons
The safety controllers cannot be ordered to perform other duties that have nothing to
do with safety.
3.22 PRECAUTIONS, MALFUNCTION
3.22.1 General
3.22.1.1 Firing with automatic gun 20mm or larger, except tank guns (see para 3.16.16.1) and
machine cannon MK 30 Bushmaster (see para 3.17.9.2) the following precautions
have to be taken in case of malfunction:
a. If there is malfunctioning (no firing) a new attempt at firing is to be made if
the trigger mechanism can be cocked without having to open the sliding
wedge or the breech block or locking of this is revoked. If there is still no
firing wait for one minute until the sliding wedge or the breech block is
opened and the cartridge is removed from the chamber.
b. For guns where the trigger mechanism cannot be cocked again without
opening the sliding wedge or the breech block or/and revoke the locking, wait
for one minute after after trying to fire before opening the sliding wedge and
the breech block and removing the cartridge.
c. After the cartridge has been removed from the gun it is to be kept separate
from other ammunition until it has been examined to find out if there is
something wrong with the ammunition or the gun that has caused the
malfunction. If it is established that that there is something wrong with the
ammunition (cartridge), it is to be removed from all other materiel and be
Rev-04 223
destroyed as soon as possible.

d. If the error lies in the gun the cartridge can be loaded again and fired in
another weapon or the same after the error has been put right.
e. Before the sliding wedge and the breech block is opened to remove a cartridge
which has not fired, personnel who do not have to take part in the operation
are to be evacuated to cover or to a safe distance from the gun.
f. The muzzle of the gun is all the time to be pointed towards the target and all
personnel are to stay away from possible muzzle blast.
g. If a gun with a very hot chamber is loaded and the cartridge does nor fire and
cannot be removed from the gun within 15 seconds, no attempt is to be made
to remove the cartridge until the chamber has cooled.
h. For 20 mm RH 202 gjelder flgende rutine nr funksjoneringsfeil oppstr:
In case of malfunction wait for 30 seconds before the cartridge is removed
from the chamber. If more than 75 rounds have been fired the gun is to be
considered as hot. When the gun is considered to be hot the cartridge is to be
removed from the chamber within one minute. If the cartridge cannot be
removed from the chamber within 1 minute from the time the malfunctioning
occurred, extra personnel are to be evacuated and the barrel is to be cooled
until it can be touched without any problem. Then the cartridge can be
removed from the chamber.
3.22.1.2 Firing with:
- 40mm guns all types of ammunition (except automatic guns and tank guns,
see para 3.16.16.1 and the paragraph above)
- 75mm guns all types of ammo
- 105mm guns, all types of ammunition, the following precautions are to be
taken when malfunctioning occurs:
a. If there is a malfunction (no firing) two more attempts at firing are
made if the trigger mechanism can be cocked again without opening the
sliding wedge or the locking is revoked. If there is still no firing wait
for 2 minutes after the latest attempt before the sliding wedge is opened
and the cartridge is removed.
b. For guns where the trigger mechanism cannot be cocked again without
opening the sliding wedge or the locking is reversed, wait for 2 minutes
from the latest attempt at firing before the sliding wedge is opened and
the cartridge is removed.
c. After the cartridge has been removed from the gun it is to be kept apart
from other ammunition until it has been established whether it is the
ammunition or the gun that has caused the error. Is it established that
the error lies in the ammunition, the cartriidge is to be removed from all
other equipment and destroyed as soon as possible.
d. If the error lies in the weapon the cartridge can be loaded again and
fired either in a different gun or in the same gun after the error has been
224 Rev-04
put right.
e. Before the sliding wedge is opened to remove a cartridge which has not
fired, personnel who do not take part in this operation are to be
evacuated to a safe place.
f. The muzzle of the gun is all the time to be directed towards the target
(safe direction) and all personnel are to stay away from possible muzzle
blast.
g. If a gun with a very hot chamber is loaded and the cartridge cannot be
fired or removed from the gun within 5 minutes all personnel are to be
evacuated to a safe or remote place for two hours. After two hours the
weapon is to be moved to a safe or distant place, and the cartridge
removed. If the weapon is moved the following has to be observed:
- the use of separate ammunition requires the sliding wedge to be
closed, then the casing is to be removed before moving the
weapon and the chamber and the sliding wedge are covered with
e.g. cotton waste to protect the chamber and the front side of the
breech in case the shell falls out during transport Chap-3
- when using fixed ammunition, emptying of the gun has to wait to
the gun has been taken to a new place
h. When emptying guns under conditions mentioned above an
ammunition officer should be present.
3.22.1.3 Special remarks. For all types of ammunition with fuses shells/cartridges that have
been pushed out of the chamber from the front are not to be used. If the cartridge is
stuck in the chamber it might be because of a wrong dimension (casing and/or
projectile), in addition the fuse may be damaged during the process of pushing out.
3.22.1.4 High pressure in the gun
a. Certain conditions however may cause too high pressure and to eliminate this
possibility the following has to be observed:
- ammunition holding temperatures outside given limits is not to be used
- avoid loading with too hot chamber
- only booster charges for the types of ammunition in question have to be
used
- no more powder bags than required as full charge for the special
ammunition and weapon type must be used
3.22.1.5 Added information is to be found in the respective weapon drill books.
Rev-04 225
3.23 FIRING AT LAND BASED TARGETS WITH

SHIP ARTILLERY
Figure: 3.66
Double 3" firing from Oslo class frigate
3.23.1 General
3.23.1.1 When firing with ship artillery against land targets SPD 103 regulates the safety and
everything that takes place on board the vessel. According to SPD 103 the captain
and his crew that man the traditional posts as officer conducting firing, safety officer
and safety controller for the weapons on board the vessel.
3.23.1.2 What is described here are the duties and responsibilities that rest on the land range
safety officer and are special for firing ship artillery against land targets. In addition
to the special duties the safety officer is to observe and instruct his subordinates in
the the points described under the personnels responsibilities and duties in chapter
1.
3.23.1.3 Safety regulations and map of firing area for firing with ship artillery against land
targets are to be made and used for the firing range in question.
3.23.1.4 Where the regulations in this paragraph cannot be applied the regulations in chapter
1 have to be used.
3.23.1.5 Suggestions for safety instructions and map of firing area are made by KNM/T and
are to be forwarded for approval at JOHQ
3.23.1.6 Range safety officer:
- the range safety officer is to be approved for his duties by MJVT or KNM/T
- make sure that the area is published as NOTAM and announced in accordance
with the safety regulations
- responsible opening and closing of the area before and after firing
- make sure that danger close reports are given in accordance with safety
226 Rev-04
distances I ATP 4 (E)

- responsible that the spotters are not placed inside the danger sector, the safety
officer is to focus especially on the danger area behind the impact area
- marking the area in accordance with the safety regulations
- deploy and instruct the safety posts in accordance with the safety regulations
and chapter 1
- check that communication between the firing unit and the guard boat is in
accordance with the safety regulations
Chap-3
Rev-04 227
4 PARACHUTE JUMPING
4.1 PARACHUTING
Figure: 4.1
Parachuter in flight
4.1.1 In general
4.1.1.1 Safety regulations for parachuting apply to:
- Personnel
- Materiel
- Aircraft
- Jump field
- Static line jumping
- Free fall jumping
- Regulations for water jumping
- Tandem jumping
- Test jumping
4.1.1.2 Units that are to be allowed to conduct parachute duty independently, must have
been approved by the Chief of FSK/HJK, after evaluation of the personnels level of
competence/skill. The unit is to be referred to as a parachute unit.
4.1.2 Personnel
4.1.2.1 General
Recruiting personnel for parachute training and duty is to take place on a voluntary
228 Rev-04
basis. Should personnel during training wish to be taken off parachute duty, they
may be transferred to different service or to a different unit. Trained personnel may
be ordered to conduct parachute duty, like any other duty.
4.1.2.2 Before education/training commences, all personnel must meet the current physical
requirements.
4.1.2.3 Personnel with authorized Norwegian military parachute training may participate in
military parachuting. If the parachuter has not met the maintenance standards,
training with an instructor is to be carried throughout until a satisfactory level of skill
has been reached.
4.1.2.4 Civilian personnel holding a valid parachute certificate may, on approval from the
Chief FSK/HJK, participate in military parachuting.
4.1.2.5 Military personnel still in duty, who have gone through military parachute training
abroad, may submit their application to the Chief FSKHJK to get their training
approved as equivalent to Norwegian training. Each person is to be checked out by
Chief FSK/HJK. Allied military personnel may participate in Norwegian military
parachuting at their own risk, after having been approved by the commander of the
jumping unit.
4.1.2.6 All personnel are bound by duty to report any circumstances that may pose risk of
injury to personnel and/or materiel.
4.1.2.7 Responsibilities of personnel
Chap-4
The officer in charge of jumping is responsible for carrying through all parachuting
in accordance with the safety regulations, directives and manuals in force. He/she is
in command of all personnel involved in parachute duty, and is to ascertain that these
act in accordance with the regulations. The officer conducting jumping must be a
jumpmaster, approved by Chief FSK/HJK. The officer conducting jumping may
participate as jumpmaster while training is going on. The officer conducting jumping
is to be an officer. NCOs may be approved for such duty after having been approved
by Chief FSK/HJK.
4.1.2.8 The jumpmaster is to carry through the parachuting according to the safety
regulations, directives and manuals in force, as well as the instructions from the
officer conducting jumping.
The jumpmaster must have gone through jumpmaster training and been approved by
Chief FSK/HJK to lead the type of jumping that is to be conducted.
When necessary (e.g. when jumping from large aircraft, dropping cargo, etc.) several
jumpmasters are to be appointed. The jumpmaster in charge is to be referred to as
JM1, the others JM2, etc. JM1 must be trained to lead the relevant type of jumping.
The jumpmaster must observe the jumpmaster instructions in the Parachute Manual
FSK/HJK.
4.1.2.9 The officer in charge at the jump field is to carry through jump field duties in
accordance with the safety regulations, directives and manuals in force, as well as
the officer conducting jumpings instructions.
The officer in charge at the jump field can be NCOs or equivalent, or qualified
privates approved by the officer conducting jumping.
In special cases, the officer in charge at the jump field may be appointed from among
Rev-04 229
the paratroopers in the aircraft.

The officer in charge at the jump field is to observe the instructions provided for this
duty in the Parachute Manual FSK/HJK.
4.1.2.10 During basic training, water jumping, nighttime jumping and jumping in the field, a
medical doctor or ambulance must be available to present himself/herself/itself at the
jump field within 10 minutes after being summoned. The doctor may go along on the
aircraft, ready to jump if required.
4.1.2.11 The pilot is responsible for ascertaining that the duties aboard the aircraft are being
carried through in accordance with the regulations in force for the relevant aircraft
type, and that the sortie is being conducted in accordance with current regulations for
air security and air traffic. He/she holds the overall command over all personnel
aboard the aircraft.
4.1.3 Materiel
4.1.3.1 General
Parachute materiel, including the actual chutes, instruments, equipment for oxygen
jumping, and parachute training materiel (harness, etc.) must be approved for use by
the professional authority.
4.1.3.2 Two parachutes must always be used when jumping, a main chute and a spare chute.
The main chute is to be equipped for manual or automatic activation (line
activation). The spare chute is to be equipped for manual activation.
4.1.3.3 During free fall jumping the spare chute is to be equipped with an automatic release,
except when planning to land on water, during special types of jumping such as test
jumping, or if the difference in altitude between the planned loading site and the
planned jump field exceeds the adjustment tolerance for the automatic release.
4.1.3.4 Other equipment:
- The parachutist is to be equipped with a helmet during all parachuting.
- During free fall jumping, the parachutist is to be equipped with an altimeter,
except during water jumping.
- Life jacket to be used during parachuting must be approved by Chief
FSK/HJK.
4.1.3.5 Parachute materiel used for jumping must be subject to military checking and
maintenance routines. Civilian parachute equipment is to be approved by a military
materiel controller or by the jumpmaster before it may be used.
4.1.4 Aircraft/ speed
4.1.4.1 When military aircraft are being used for parachuting, the duty is to be carried
through in accordance with the regulations in force for the relevant aircraft type.
4.1.4.2 When civilian aircraft are being used for parachuting, the relevant category of
aircraft must have been approved by Chief FSK/HJK. Specific approval must be
obtained for use of automatic chutes and free fall chutes. Further, it must be stated
whether door loader can be used.
4.1.4.3 Automatic jumping requires an anchor cable withstanding minimum 500 kilograms.
4.1.4.4 During basic training of automatic jumps the speed of the aircraft is not to exeed
230 Rev-04
80kts when jumping.

4.1.5 Jump field
Figure: 4.2
Over the dropzone
Chap-4
4.1.5.1 General
All jump fields are to be reconnoitered by qualified personnel and approved by the
military jumpmaster. The nature of the field must in each case be considered in
relation to what type of jumping is to be conducted and the jumpers level of
experience. Around the jump field there is to be a safety zone. The safety zone must
not contain any high voltage lines, buildings taller than one floor, railway line,
trafficked road, or densely built-up areas. Should there be deep water (e.g. a lake)
within the safety zone, a manned rescue boat must be on site, and paradivers must be
equipped with life jackets. Rescue personnel may be on land if the deep water is a
river less than 10 metres wide, or a lake with a size of less than 500 square metres.
4.1.5.2 Round parachutes
When parachuting using round chutes, the jump field must be of the following size:
Length of the area must be 100 metres minimum, with an additional 70 metres per
following diver in the pack (one diver per second). Around the landing area, there is
to be a safety zone of an additional 200 metres in width and 300 metres in length.
4.1.5.3 Square parachutes
When parachuting using square chutes the jump field must be of the following size:
The landing area must have a width of 50 metres in relation to the planned landing
direction. The length of the area must be 100 metres minimum. Around the landing
area there is to be a safety zone of an additional 100 metres in all directions.
4.1.5.4 When parachuting in the field and during other non-educational jumping, the
regulations concerning the extent and nature of the jump field described above may
be deviated from.
4.1.5.5 Permission to deviate from the general regulations concerning extent and nature of
Rev-04 231
the jump field is to be obtained for one single exercise/jump from the officer
conducting jumping.
4.1.5.6 The jump field is to be marked with a wind indicator, T or similar device indicating
the landing direction. During demos and tactical jump fields, and when training for
this, marking may be omitted.
4.1.5.7 In darkness or when conditions make it necessary, the jump field is to be marked
with light spots. On tactical jump fields, marking may be omitted.
4.1.5.8 During all kinds of jumping, a plan for how to signal Hold! Do not jump! must
have been made in advance, should communication between the officer in charge at
the jump field and the aircraft be interrupted.
4.1.5.9 The jump field for show jumping is to be reconnoitred by qualified personnel and
has to be approved by the jump master. The parachutists are to be approved by the
jumpmaster individually.
4.1.6 Automatic release jumping
4.1.6.1 Wind speed limits
The following ground wind limits apply for automatic released round chute:
- Students: 7m/sec
- Other jumping: 10m/sec
- Water jump: 12m/sec
4.1.6.2 Jumping altitude
The lowest acceptible jumping altitude using automatic release is 500 feet AGL
4.1.7 Free fall jumping
4.1.7.1 Wind speed limits
The following ground wind speed limits apply to all jumping using wing fall chute:
- The first eight students jumps: 8m/sec (16kts)
- Other jumping: 12m/sec (24 kts)
- Water jump: 12m/sec (24 kts)
- Night jump: 8m/sec (kts)
4.1.7.2 Local conditions and the jumpers training level and qualifications may make it
necessary to impose lower wind speed limits than normally required. These are to be
decided by the jumpmaster.
4.1.7.3 Release altitude
Release altitude for terminal speed in free fall jumping 3,000 feet (915 m) above the
ground. During show jumping and demonstrations and special jumps this rule may
be ignored on the Chief of FSK/HJKs decision.
4.1.7.4 Jumping altitude
The lowest jumping altitude for free fall is:
- For students: 3,000 feet (915 m) above the ground
- For other jumpers: 1,500 feet (458 m) above the ground
- For tandem jumps: 5,000 feet (1,525 m) above the terrain
232 Rev-04
- Jumps can be made from all altitudes down to the lowest.

- Jumps from 3,000 feet to 2,000 feet maximum 4 seconds of free fall is
accepted
- Jumps fom 1,999 feet to 1,500 feet maximum 2 seconds of free fall is
accepted
- The highest altitude accepted without access to oxygen is 15,000 for msl. The
parachutists are not to be exposed to more than 10 minutes from 13,000 to
15,000 feet msl. For jumps from above 15,000 feet the regulations about the
use of oxygen are to be observed.
4.1.7.5 Oxygen jump
The parachutists who are ordered to jump from altitudes where oxygen is required
are to have passed a pressure chamber course in accordance with the regulations of
the Aviation Medical Institute.
4.1.7.6 When jumping from altitudes above FL 150 the paracutist will breathe 100% oxygen
continuously as protection against Hypoxi and problembs related to change in
pressure. The following timespans at given periods apply before the cabin pressure
rises above FL 100:
- Jump altitude FL 150 FL 179: Breathing oxygen starts when the cabin
pressure passes FL 100 Chap-4
- Jump altitude FL 180 FL 249: 30 minutes oxygen breathing at cabin altitude
under FL 100
- Jump altitude FL 250 FL 299: 45 minutes oxygen breathing at cabin altitude
below FL 100
- Jump altitude above FL 300: 75 minutes oxygen breathing at cabin altitude
below FL 100
Jumping from altitudes requiring oxygen, the oxygen supply in the aircraft is to be
sufficient for all flying time and free fall/parachute time over FL 130.
If one or more of the parachutists during the ascent when oxygen is used, feels sick,
nauseates, itches, is dizzy and may faint 100% oxygen under pressure is to be given.
The ascent is aborted and the aircraft will descend to a safe altitude (under FL 100)
as quickly as possible. The parachutist is to report any pressure symptoms (pains in
joints, general weakness, sense distortions).
With such symptoms the parachutist is not to jump but continue breathing 100%
oxygen. Should decompression symptoms occur when on the ground after a jump,
the jumper is to be given 100 % oxygen.
Only qualified jumpmasters can prepare and run the preparations for carrying out
oxygen-asingend jumps. The jump master has to be approved by the Chief of
FSK/HJK. Personnel having completed a course in aviation medicine at the Instutute
of Aviation Medicine are to be on board the aircraft at jumps from altitudes above
FL 180.
Rev-04 233
4.1.8 Special regulations for parachute jumping in water

4.1.8.1 The nature of the jump field is to be in accordance with the regulations for the type
of chute that is being used. The safety zone may be on land.
During water jumping, approved life jackets must be worn. The diver is to be
equipped with a knife, which must be easily accessible.
4.1.8.2 During water jumping a manned working boat for each 5 divers must be on disposal
at the jump field. Crew per boat, at least 2 persons, where at least one must know
how to perform first aid, have gone through relevant parachute duty and have a knife
available. The boat must have a suitable engine. Additionally, one boat for the
officer in charge at the jump field is to be present and check on the divers in the air
and in the water. The boat must be able to quickly assist divers who experience
problems. A medical doctor is to be on board, and this boat must have no other
duties such as equipment recovery. Aside from that, the same requirements as for
working boats apply.
During parachute jumping in water a medical doctor with adequate resuscitation
equipment must be present on the jump field.
4.1.9 Tandem jumps
4.1.9.1 Military tandem jumping can only be carried out by persons who are tandem
jumpmasters.
Criteria that tandem jumpmasters must meet:
- Tandem jumpmasters must have been approved by the Chief FSK/HJK
- They must be officers/NCOs assigned to the jumping unit
- hey must have passed Tandem Jumpmaster Course arranged by the Parachute
Section of the Norwegian or a similar course arranged by FSK/HJK.
- Maintaining operational status by meeting the minimum requirement: 100 free
fall jumps yearly of which 15 are to be tandem.
The tandem jump master has the final decision as to who is to be approved as
passanger.
4.1.10 Test jumping
4.1.10.1 Personnel conducting test jumping using particular materiel that is beyond the
maximum or minimum limitations described in this directive, are to be experienced
parachute instructors working professionally within this particular field within the
Armed Forces, and who have been approved by Chief FSK/HJK.
234 Rev-04
5 DRIVING AND TRANSPORT DUTY

5.1 COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS
Figure: 5.1
Driver in armoured vehicle
5.1.1 In general
Chap-5
5.1.1.1 This part presents general regulations and instructions for using military vehicles and
vehicles that are in the militarys possession. Specific regulations for each type of
vehicle will come in addition to the regulations presented here.
5.1.1.2 Only drivers holding a valid military driving license are allowed to drive military
motor vehicles.
Officers, NCOs, enlisted personnel and civilians must in addition hold civilian
driving licenses for the relevant vehicle category.
Garage/repair personnel and technicians are to have completed courses that have
been authorized by the works manager, the unit commander or the professional
authority, before they are allowed to test drive vehicles.
Those who are to man equipment such as hooklifts, winches, snowmobiles or ATVs
are to have passed professional courses, in accordance with the regulations made by
the professional authority. See the Working Environment Act, regulation 555.
The vehicle commander is responsible for making sure that the personnel manning
the vehicle have been trained professionally. The crew must observe the safety
regulations for their materiel under all conditions.
Only personnel who have passed the approved 1st line War Damage Repair course
can carry out war damage repair work on vehicles that have received a valid military
driving license.
5.1.1.3 Personnel staying inside or near military motor vehicles must all wear hearing
protection when required. See 6.21
Rev-04 235
5.1.1.4 The commander of the unit in charge of transportation, or the person he/she
authorizes, is responsible for ascertaining that the safety regulations for this type of
duty are observed.
5.1.1.5 Requirements for vehicle check before, during and after driving:
- Before driving commences, the driver is to ascertain that the vehicle is in
proper condition, and that it has been loaded according to the regulations. The
driver is to make sure that the vehicle and load stay in proper condition also
while driving.
- After driving, the driver is to check the condition of the vehicle and report
irregularities.
The owner of the vehicle, or the person who on the owners behalf is in possession
of the vehicle, is responsible for making sure that the vehicle is not used unless it is
in proper condition.
See the Norwegian Road Traffic Law 23
5.1.1.6 When driving through adverse terrain and difficult terrain, and when transporting
personnel, a ground guide is to be ordered to assist the driver. For vehicle types
where the commander of the vehicle is in charge of movement, he or she is to take
on the duties of the ground guide.
The duties of the ground guide:
- The ground guide is in charge of all vehicle personnel.
- The ground guide is to alert the personnel being transported by calling to them
if necessary, e.g. if a sharp curve is coming up, there are low-hanging
branches, wires above the ground, etc.
- Firing guns and/or heavy machine guns (live or blank ammunition) is
prohibited when personnel are on the outside of the vehicle. (Exceptions: the
officer in charge of firing/safety controllers and while firing AAA also the
gunner/loader.)
- The ground guide is to check that the turret is locked and that the anti-aircraft
gun is locked before mounting or dismounting the vehicle.
- Check that all covers are in place and shut, and that the engine hood is in
place and locked.
- Check that all hatches are closed and locked or open and secured.
- Ascertain that the back doors are closed and locked.
- Check that all equipment compartments are closed and locked.
- The ground guide is to ascertain that the safety regulations have been made
known to the personnel who are to be transported, before they mount the
vehicle.
5.1.1.7 Crossing terrain where there is a risk of avalanches or landslide is not to take place
unless there are pressing reasons for doing so. If crossing such terrain is to take
place, it has to be done according to 6.24.4.
5.1.1.8 When using BT systems, special caution must be shown in relation to personnel and
236 Rev-04
materiel transport, so that dummy charges do not cause damage when they are fired.
While driving, it must be taken into account that communications might be lost
during the impacts/hits of other BT systems.
5.1.1.9 Safety belts
Anyone driving or being a passenger in a military vehicle is to wear a seat belt where
such are installed. Exceptions to this rule are made wherever UD 2-1 explicitly says
that seat belts are not to be worn due to the specifics of the task.
5.1.1.10 Rest for drivers
Resting time for drivers is to be planned. Under no circumstance is the driver to
drive the vehicle if he/she is too tired or weary, see the Norwegian Road Traffic Law
21.
5.1.1.11 Personnel moving on roads
When moving alongside lanes on roads where there is traffic but no compulsory
footpath or bicycle path, all personnel must walk on the left shoulder of the road, and
in the direction facing oncoming traffic. If there is a compulsory footpath or a
bicycle path next to the road, this path is to be used.
When marching along trafficked roads at dusk, during darkness or in grey light,
personnel in groups of a minimum size should ensure that the following minimum
measures are implemented:
- All personnel should have reflective tape attached to their right ankles
- During administrative movements, the person positioned at the front of the
group should additionally be in possession of a white light that points in the
direction of travel. The person positioned at the rear of the group should be in Chap-5
possession of a rearward-facing red light. If visibility at the location is further
reduced, the officer in charge should evaluate the need to use additional
reflectors
Under the same conditions, individual personnel should use reflectors. Personnel
connected to vehicles should, under the same conditions, use mandatory reflective
vests in the vehicles when assembled along a road.
5.1.2 Transporting personnel
5.1.2.1 The number of personnel in the vehicle must not exceed the number allowed by the
registration book. Nobody must be transported on the outside of vehicles, this does
not apply to gunners in hatches, etc., who are given dispensation in other UD 2-1
paragraphs.
5.1.2.2 The following numbers of passengers apply to transport of personnel:
Vehicle Number of persons

Scania 8 tons 26 persons on the platform body
Scania, 8 tons, with hook- 20 persons on the platform body
lift
Scania 5 tons 20 persons on the platform body
BV 206 Tracked Utility 6 in the front cab, driver included, 11 in the rear cab
Rev-04 237
Vehicle
ATV (summer) 2 on the ATV, driver included, 2 on the trailer
ATV (winter) 2 on the ATV (snowmobile), driver included, 4 on the
sled
P6-300M 4 persons in the front cab, driver included
5.1.2.3 Personnel are not to be transported on trailers/towed vehicles unless these have been
construed for that particular purpose.
5.1.2.4 Personnel are not to share transport with flammable liquids or explosives. Personnel
may be transported in command post vehicles that have fuel for generator sets. Other
exceptions are described in the regulations for each vehicle type. Personnel can be
transported with unit equipment when training, all materiel must be secured so that it
does not shift or move.
5.1.2.5 Vehicles that are towing or being towed are not to be used for transporting
personnel. Excepted is the 2-man crew on certain ATVs.
5.1.2.6 When driving through adverse terrain, passengers are to dismount the vehicle until
the difficult stretch has been crossed.
5.1.2.7 The commanding officer of the unit being transported is to appoint a qualified
ground guide for each vehicle, and if necessary inform the guide of his duties, see
5.1.1.6 The ground guide is to ensure that the personnel being transported and the
driver all observe the safety regulations.
5.1.2.8 Lorries that are used for transporting personnel are to be equipped with roll-over
protection, benches with safety belts and tarpaulin. Maximum speed is 60 kilometres
per hour. When driving individually, one person is to be appointed as a ground
guide. When transporting large numbers of personnel (four vehicles or more), the
transport is to be organised into a column, with appointed ground guides in the front
and in the rear vehicle of each group. Maximum allowed speed is 40 kilometres per
hour.
5.1.2.9 Transporting personnel on lorries with hooklifts is prohibited.
5.1.3 Transporting materiel on vehicles
5.1.3.1 The driver of a military motor vehicle transporting materiel is to be trained for
transporting the relevant sort of materiel.
The weight of the cargo must not exceed the weight that is stipulated in the vehicle
registration, and if relevant, in the registration of the trailer.
5.1.3.2 All cargo is to be secured according to the loading security programme LADOK,
which is accessible on FISBasis. The programme is based on European, Norwegian
and Norwegian Defence Forces standards, requirements and regulations for securing
cargo.
Health, environmental and security legislation demands that responsibility must be
visible on all levels. In LADOK, the responsibility for updating, maintaining,
training and practical securing of cargo is clearly defined. The following levels hold
special responsibilities:
- The Norwegian Defence Logistic Organization/System Management/Land
238 Rev-04
Capacities (FLO/S/L)
- The Norwegian Defence Driver Education Centre (FKV)
- All commanders who have vehicles under their command.
- All vehicle drivers.
5.1.3.3 Transporting flammable liquids and dangerous substances.
- Appendix 11 A.
5.1.3.4 Transporting radioactive sources.
- Appendix 11 B
5.1.3.5 Transporting chemical agents and chemical agent simulators.
- Appendix 11c
5.1.3.6 Transporting ammunition and explosives.
See:
- Tff 782
5.1.3.7 Banking
Scania P93 must not be used for transporting containers with a high centre of
gravity, due to the danger of banking since the vehicle does not have a stabilizer or
similar.
5.1.4 Towing personnel on skis
5.1.4.1 All vehicles may tow personnel on skis. All personnel being towed, as well as the
driver of the vehicle, are to be trained before towing personnel on public roads. Chap-5
5.1.4.2 One person is to be in charge of each towing team. The person in charge is to move
to the rear of the towing team. He/she is to appoint a scout on the vehicle doing the
towing. He/she must also ascertain that all personnel observe the regulations in force,
including making sure that the personnel let go of the rope when this is required due
to terrain conditions.
5.1.4.3 The scout on the vehicle doing the towing is to communicate with the driver. The
scout is to alert the driver should the personnel being towed fall, or experience other
problems. The scout must also alert the personnel should there be a change in speed,
or if the vehicle is to start, stop, drive in reverse, etc.
5.1.4.4 When driving in columns the distance between the person at the rear of one towing
team and the next vehicle is to be at least 50 metres. The last vehicle driver is not to
tow personnel.
5.1.4.5 When driving in the dark, the last person in each towing team is to wear a flashlight
with a red light on his back.
5.1.4.6 When towing, the speed must not exceed 30 kilometres per hour.
5.1.4.7 The best skiers are to be placed at the front of the rope. The number of skiers being
towed is to be adjusted according to vehicle type and the conditions on site. For
distances and placing, see illustration 67.
Rev-04 239
Figure: 5.2
Towing after vehicle - example
5.1.5 Driving military vehicles in reverse - ground guide

5.1.5.1 A military vehicle must never be driven in reverse unless the driver has a full
overview of the area that is about to be reversed into. If a ground guide has been
appointed, he/she is to maintain eye contact with the driver and have an overview of
all obstacles near the vehicle.
When directing vehicles, signs used should in accordance with Tf 1-3 Manual for
drivers of motor vehicles, part 1.
5.1.6 Military vehicle recovery
5.1.6.1 During recovery operations, including self recovery, the recovery regulations in
technical manuals, TF 1-3 Manual for drivers of motor vehicles, HF 16-2 Useful tips
for car rescue, MS 16-7 A guide for car recovery, and the drill book are to be
observed.
5.1.6.2 During recovery operations, the oldest specialist within recovery or the person
appointed by him/her is to monitor the work.
Personnel on the ground are to follow the directions of the recovery leader, and the
safety regulations described in HF 16-2. Personnel in vehicles are to shut the hatches
above their seats.
240 Rev-04
5.1.6.3 When executing 1st line recovery, personnel must have been trained according to the
military training programme for drivers.
5.1.6.4 When executing 2nd line recovery, personnel must have been trained according to
the military training programme for field/unit recovery.
5.1.6.5 When executing 3rd line recovery, personnel must have been trained according to
the military training programme for 3rd line personnel.
5.1.6.6 When towing and bar towing Armed Forces materiel, the safety regulations and the
regulations in the Technical Manual are to be observed for the relevant vehicle type.
Towing on public roads using ropes, straps, wires, etc is to be limited to 1 kilometre
at a maximum allowed speed of 10 kilometres per hour.
5.1.6.7 When towing on public roads maximum allowed speed is 60 kilometres per hour, or
the speed allowed by the Technical Manual for the vehicle type in question.
For maximum weight of what is being towed, see the Norwegian Road Traffic Law.
5.1.6.8 When towing in the terrain, or when towing a wrecked vehicle without brakes, the
weight of the wrecked vehicle must not exceed the weight of the vehicle doing the
towing.
5.1.6.9 Vehicles that are towing or that are being towed must not be used for personnel
transport.
5.1.7 Driving with personnel in the gunners place in vehicles
5.1.7.1 For wheel-driven vehicles, driving with personnel staying in the gunners place is
allowed during exercises and training in Norway, and during international
operations. This is on the condition that the vehicles are registered and in the Armed
Forces use. Staying in the gunners place is prohibited during driving that is Chap-5
unrelated to exercises and training. This also applies to administrative transports.
(The above regulations have received authorization from the Norwegian Public
Roads Administration.)
Rev-04 241
5.2 TRACKED VEHICLE P6 - 300M
Figure: 5.3
P6-300 in terrain
5.2.1 In general
5.2.1.1 The tracked vehicle is to be driven with the doors shut. All personnel must wear
safety belts. The vehicle has a roof hatch. A 12.7 mm heavy machine gun can be
mounted on the roof.
5.2.1.2 Personnel are not to be transported on the outside of tracked vehicles.
5.2.2 Crossing frozen rivers and lakes
5.2.2.1 See 8.2.10
5.2.3 Wading
5.2.3.1 The tracked vehicle is not fully amphibious.
The tracked vehicle can wade as deep as 0.8 metres.
5.2.3.2 As wading may take place under varying conditions, only general safety directions
may be provided for this duty. The officer conducting the exercise must in each case
consider how safety measures and precautions are to be organised. He/she must take
into consideration the specific conditions on site, including water depth, currents,
wind, waves, conditions on the bottom of the river or lake, traffic, season and the
professional/educational level of the unit.
5.2.3.3 Requirements for crossing site:
- the beach and the bottom of the lake must make it possible for vehicles to
drive into and out of the water at a right angle at the crossing site
- where the vehicles enter and drive out of the water, the slope has to be level
underneath and above water, and it must not be so steep that water may flow
into the vehicle
- The bottom at the crossing site must be firm enough to support the vehicles
and be free of obstacles.
242 Rev-04
- Water depth at the place of crossing must not exceed the recommended
wading depth for the vehicle type in question, and the damming height caused
by the vehicles speed and by the current must be taken into consideration.
5.2.3.4 The officer conducting the exercise must in each case consider where to enter the
water, the route and where to drive ashore and determine if marking is necessary.
5.2.3.5 When wading with a tracked vehicle when the current is so strong that personnel are
unable to wade, see 8, particularly the sections on wading and swimming.
5.2.3.6 Preparation of the vehicle, vehicle check and the conduction of wading must all be in
accordance with the technical manuals and drill books.
5.2.4 Towing tracked vehicles
5.2.4.1 See this chapter, 5.1.6
5.3 COMMAND POST CONTAINER 2X1 AND
3X1
Chap-5
Figure: 5.4
Command room in full activity
5.3.1 In general
5.3.1.1 Command post containers are to be transported by hooklift or on a container vehicle,
and safety regulations for loading and unloading the vehicle can be found in the
Safety Regulations for Transport Duty.
Command post containers must not to be transported on a Scania P 93 or similar, due
to potential instability.
5.3.1.2 Regulations for folding containers
The officer in charge at the container must always ascertain that no personnel stay
inside the container while this is being folded and made ready for transport, in order
to avoid crush injuries.
Rev-04 243
5.4 FUEL TANKFLAK 10,500 LITRES

5.4.1 In general
Personnel who are to use the Norwegian Armed Forces tankflak must have been
professionally trained for this
5.4.1.1 Check before transport
The following points must be preparedby the user, but must be checked by the
driver.
The driver is to:
- Check that the main electric switch is turned off
- Check that the emergency trigger is in and shut
- Check that the cover in front of the fan has been pulled down
- Check that the lids are shut and that the steps are up and the railing is down
- Check that the ADR signs and the Tremcard (Transport Emergency Card) are
in place and in accordance with the cargo
- Walk around the tank container and check that there is nothing loose in the
compartments, check that all doors are shut and that there is no visible
damage.
5.4.2 The drivers duty to check before transport
5.4.2.1 The driver is to check that the following items are in place:
- Transport document/consignment note/freight bill
- Damage report (To be found in the door of the vehicle).
- Certificate of Acceptance of the tank container. (To be found in the left
compartment on the tank container.)
- ADR Certificate of Acceptance of the vehicle
- The driver must have an ADR-tank Certificate of Competence and keep it
with his drivers license.
5.4.3 Drivers duty to check before unloading
5.4.3.1 The driver is to:
- step out of the vehicle and check that the ground is level and flat in order to
avoid inflicting damage on the tank container when it is placed on the ground
- check that there is no leakage from the bottom of the tank container
5.4.4 Check before use
5.4.4.1 Safety regulations before use:
- marking the area
- absorbents are to be prepared and laid out
- earthing of the tank container down in the ground
- fire extinguishers are to be fetched, and placed in the area where the work is to
244 Rev-04
take place
- protective clothing is to be worn (suit, gloves, mask and protective goggles)
- sounding of the tank container in order to determine quantity
Before starting the aggregate, the user is to:
- Check that the fuel tank of the aggregate has been filled with F-34
- Check that the cover in front of the fan has been rolled up
- Check that there is no dirt or irrigation on the batteries
- Check that the earthing is in order
- Check the oil
- Turn on the main electric power switch
- Turn on the main electric power switch
- Let the aggregate heat for 5-8 seconds if it is cold
- Start the aggregate
5.4.5 Safety distances for setting up a fuel tanking store
5.4.5.1
Public areas and roads 7,5 meter
Railroad/High voltage 25 meter
power line
Open flame 50 meter Chap-5
Quarters/kitchen 50 meter
Between stacks of cans 3 meter
5.5 TRACTOR
Figure: 5.5
Traktor digger
Rev-04 245
5.5.1 In general
5.5.1.1 The engine is to be started from the drivers seat.
5.5.1.2 While driving the braking circuit must be in order.
5.5.1.3 Driving a rearing tractor resting on the containment boom is prohibited.
5.5.1.4 When driving onto a road after having driven in the terrain, it must be checked that:
- all wheels are firmly in place
- the belts are whole
- the suspension system for belts is in order
- that the suspension is okay
- the brake circuit is in order
5.5.1.5 Before driving through adverse terrain, the route must be reconnoitred in advance.
5.5.1.6 Where there is a danger of skidding, rearing or banking (slope sideways) the tractor
is to be secured with a rope.
5.5.2 Personnel transport
5.5.2.1 Transporting personnel on tractors is prohibited, except in the authorized seats in the
drivers cabin.
5.5.3.1 In addition to the regulations in 8.2.10 , the following measures are deemed
necessary:
- Roof hatch, rear window and doors are to be opened
- About 30 metres of rope with an empty fuel can or similar is to be attached to
the tractor for marking
5.5.4 Special regulations
5.5.4.1 Driving tractors without roll-over protection/reinforced drivers cabin is prohibited.
5.5.4.2 Hearing protection. Drivers of tractors are to wear ear protection while driving or
during static labour with the vehicle, should the noise exceed 85 dba. See 6.21
246 Rev-04
5.6 TRACKED VEHICLE 206
Figure: 5.6
Tracked vehicle going off road
5.6.1 In general
5.6.1.1 The tracked vehicle is to be driven with the hatches closed. The exceptions are when
wading, crossing rivers, embarking and disembarking landing craft and when towing
personnel on skis. In easy terrain the hatches can be open to facilitate reconnaissance Chap-5
missions, and with BV 206 with ring gun carriage and 12.7mm/.50 calibre machine
gun mounted, the gunner is permitted to stand in the hatch while operating the
machine gun. Note! The foremost hatch is to be closed when the weapon is not
secured in transport position. All personnel must use safety belts when these are
installed, except during training of battle technique in terrain, wading, crossing
rivers, and during on- and off loading of landing craft
5.6.1.2 - This chapter and chapter 8 paragraph 8.2.10 in this directive must be
presented to all officers and tracked vehicle drivers. These regulations are
guidelines on how the activity should be carried out!
- It is emphasized that establishing driving routes and reconnaissance of
possible water holes is very important to avoid potentially dangerous
situations
- All bottom/drain plugs must be closed while driving
- When transporting personnel and materiel in the rear car the emergency doors
are to be accessible for possible evacuation
- When transporting personnel and materiel in the rear car, the materiel must be
secured in accordance with LADOK
It is not permitted to transport personnel in the rear car with loading
frame/loading net until the frame/net has been adjusted so that the
emergency exit is accessible and emergency procedures have been
Rev-04 247
practiced.
- The roof must not be loaded in a manner that makes it impossible to escape
through the roof hatch.
- It is not permitted to transport personnel in the rear of versions of BV 206 that
do not have approved emergency exits (above the water line when floating in
water)
This means that the loading wall must be rebuilt, or alternatively the loading
frame must be removed.
5.6.1.3 Emergency procedures/drill should a tracked vehicle catch fire (equivalent drill used
during air strikes).
- Short blows with signal horn
- All personnel must exit through the nearest door and quickly move away, a
minimum of 30 meters from the tracked vehicle
- Personnel in command must ensure that everyone is out of the vehicle and
evacuated to a safe area.
5.6.2 Crossing frozen lakes or rivers
5.6.2.1 The regulations in chapter 8, paragraph 8.2.10 are to be followed. The following
points must be checked before crossing with the BV 206.
- Drainage plugs are closed
- Doors closed and the seals are in good condition
- Top hatches open
- When transporting personnel in the rear car the side hatch is to be open
- A ski rope is fastened to the towing hook and is laid on the roof in an open
coil with a life buoy/ empty jerry can attached
5.6.2.2 Emergency procedures/drill should the tracked vehicle break through the ice:
- Long blow with signal button
- All personnel lay down weapons, shoulder harness and other equipment on the
floor of the vehicle
- Only emergency exits are to be used during evacuation
- Rear and side doors are not to be used (check the markings)
- Personnel climb onto the roof of the vehicle
- Ski rope no. 2 is to be laid in a coil in the rear car so that it can be used in case
anyone has problems in connection with the evacuation of or from the vehicle
- From there, the situation is to be evaluated with regard to getting to safe ice in
a secure manner
- Personnel in command must ensure that everyone is out of the vehicle and
evacuated to safe ground
In the radio tracked vehicle a tent hammer or a similar tool must be easily accessible,
248 Rev-04
to break a window in the rear door and use this as an emergency exit.
5.6.3 Crossing open rivers and lakes
5.6.3.1 For driving across open rivers and lakes, see chap 8
5.6.3.2 The tracked vehicle can be used in deep water (over 1 metre) as long as the wave
height does not exceed 10 cm and the current speed is not above 1 m/s. The
following BV 206 DN6 versions cannot swim: mortar version, cargo carrier version
and Hook lift version.
5.6.3.3 All personnel are to use approved floating devises category 2.
5.6.3.4 The passenger in the front seat must stand in the roof hatch looking for any obstacles
in the water. The passenger in the front seat controls that the seals are in good
condition
5.6.3.5 Passengers in the rear car are to be evenly distributed. Backpacks and equipment are
to be carried loosely. No one is allowed on the outside of the vehicle
5.6.3.6 Before driving into the water the following points must be checked /carried out:
BV 206:
- That the draining plugs are tightly screwed. The vehicles top hatches are to
be open.
- That the door moulding is clean/tight and that the doors are closed
- That communication between back and front vehicles is functional
- That the drainage pump is functional (function control; at least 20 litres of
water poured into each vehicle)
- Cover the front air intake with a covering cloth and put up the grating at the Chap-5
front
- Fasten the towing wire to the towing hook on the rear car and fasten a towing
shackle on the other end
Fasten a 30 m long line with a floater on the end of the shackle. The line is to
be laid on the roof of the front vehicle in an open coil
- When transporting personnel in the rear car, the side hatch is to be open
5.6.4 Tracked vehicle, used as command post /communication base
5.6.4.1 During transport where function vehicles, command post and communication base
(equivalent) are to be operative, a generator set with up to 4 fuel cans filled with
generator fuel may be transported together with the required personnel. The
generator sets gas tanks or fuel cans must not be opened inside the vehicle.
Fuel cans are to be tested for leaks by shaking them (no visible wetness) before they
are loaded into the vehicle. Generator set and fuel cans are to be placed as far away
as possible from any heat sources in the vehicle.
Smoking is prohibited during these transports. When a heater is used during driving,
the handle for air supply must be positioned so that the heater receives air from the
outside (not recirculated air from the vehicle). If possible the generator set and fuel
cans are to be transported separate from personnel.
In the case of stationary operation the generator set and the fuel cans are to be taken
Rev-04 249
out of the vehicle. Pre-emptive measures against exhaust fume poisoning when the
vehicle is stationary, see this chapter, 5.19.
5.7 LIGHT ALL-TERRAIN VEHICLES, SUMMER
Figure: 5.7
ATV in difficult terrain
5.7.1 In general
5.7.1.1 The driver and passenger should wear crash helmets approved by the Norwegian
Public Roads Administration. Reflective vests should also be worn.
When the vehicle is driven at speeds above a walking pace, the driver and passenger
should wear goggles. The driver and passenger should wear sturdy boots that extend
above ankle-height (e.g. marching boots). Clothing that provides adequate protection
should be worn. Loosely-hanging garments should not be worn (e.g. scarves) as
these can become entangled in rotating equipment or trees/bushes while the vehicle
is in transit.
During operations, exercises and training both at home and abroad, army helmets
may be used. In such cases, the speed limit is 40 km/h. Use of army helmets is upon
the orders of the division commander or his/her authorised representative.
5.7.1.2 Before starting up an ATV with variator drive, the driver mustensure that the gas
cable is free of obstruction.
5.7.1.3 The maximum wade depth for an ATV is 60 cm. For further information refer to
Chapter 8
250 Rev-04
5.7.1.4 The maximum permitted speed of an ATV is 60 km/h, or 40 km/h with a trailer. In
the case of transport of personnel in an approved trailer, the maximum speed should
not exceed 30
In respect of towing an ATV, reference should be made to item 5.1.6 of this chapter.
An ATV is equipped with all-terrain tyres with low tyre pressure. Thus, the tyres
have inferior running characteristics to ordinary tyres and caution must therefore be
taken when driving along roads. This is especially the case at crossroads and on
sharp bends.
Individual divisions may impose separate speed restrictions of less than 60 km/h.
5.7.1.5 Towing of personnel on skis should be undertaken in accordance with item 5.1.4 of
this chapter.
5.7.1.6 The maximum permitted speed for an ATV using chains is 40 km/h. Two steering
chains should be fitted together with spicers for all front wheel bolts. 2 driving wheel
chains should always be fitted (rearmost axle on 6x6). It is not permitted to use a
smaller number of chains because of the vehicles running characteristics, as well as
wear and tear. Chains should onlybe used on roads. Any other use of chains in
outlying terrain or along ATV trails should be authorised by an environmental
officer. When the vehicle is in use, wheel nuts should be tightened on a daily basis.
5.7.2 Transit across frozen water
5.7.2.1 Transit across frozen water should comply with the provisions in section 8.2.10.
5.8 SNOWMOBILE
Chap-5
Figure: 5.8
Snowmobile on patrol
5.8.1 In general
5.8.1.1 The driver and passenger should wear crash helmets approved by the Norwegian
Public Roads Administration. Reflective vests should also be worn.
Rev-04 251
When driving faster than at walking speed, the driver and passengers should wear
protective goggles. While driving, protective clothing should be worn. Avoid
clothing that hangs loosely (e.g. scarves), as such clothing might get stuck in rotating
equipment or in trees/bushes while driving.
During operations, exercises and training both at home and abroad, army helmets
may be used. In such cases, the speed limit is 40 km/h. (On public roads the speed
limit is 30 km/h.) Use of army helmets is upon the orders of the division commander
or his/her authorised representative.
5.8.1.2 Before the engine is started the throttle wire must be checked to see if it runs freely.
Where an emergency rip cord is installed it must be fastened to the driver. When
driving in difficult terrain where there is a risk of capsizing or damage, something
which may cause the emergency rip cord being released, the leader of the activity
may instruct the driver to release the cord.
5.8.1.3 Towing of personnel on skis is to be done according to this chapter, section 5.1.4.
5.8.1.4 Maximum speed on public roads is 30 km/th with or without sled (with or with out
personnel on the sled)
For towing of snowmobiles, see this chapter, paragraph 5.1.6
In general, driving on roads is only to be done as an exception, if the shoulder of the
road or another route is inaccessible. While driving on snowy and icy roads, terrain
vehicles lose much of their navigation and gripping power. For that reason, a great
deal of caution must be shown when driving on roads. All civilian lights are to be
turned on when travelling on roads where there may be other traffic and personnel on
foot.
Maximum speed in terrain and on roads not open to public traffic is 60 km/h. With a
sled, with or without personnel, the maximum speed is 40 km/h
Each unit may decide on lower maximum allowed speed than the speed limits
presented in the regulations above.
5.8.2.1 When crossing frozen rivers and lakes, follow the regulations given in chapter 8
paragraph 8.2.10.
5.9 MOTORCYCLES
5.9.1 General
5.9.1.1 The driver and passenger of a motorcycle should always wear crash helmets
approved by the Norwegian Public Roads Administration. In addition, motorcycle
suits, boots, gloves and reflective vests should be worn. Weapons should be strapped
to a rack or carried on the back with the barrel pointing towards the right shoulder.
252 Rev-04
5.10 CROSS COUNTRY VEHICLE MB 240/290

(VARIOUS VERSIONS WITH MOUNTED
GUN, ETC.)
5.10.1 General
5.10.1.1 Exceptional caution must be demonstrated when driving with personnel located at
the gunner's position. When the gunners position is manned, a special evaluation of
road conditions in relation to speed must be made. Protective goggles must always
be worn.
When the gunners position is not manned the weapon should be disassembled (for
reasons of transport safety).
The maximum permitted speed with personnel located at the gunners position is, in
any case, 50 km/h.
All materiel should be firmly strapped and secured before driving commences.
When using the vehicle on public roads, the front windscreen grille should be in the
raised position.
Users of vehicles fitted with a winch should have undertaken a self-recovery course,
as a minimum. Refer to item 5.1.6 of this chapter.
5.10.2 IVECO LMV
Chap-5
Figure: 5.9
RNoArmy LMV
5.10.2.1 General
Additional regulations can be found in The technical manuals for IVECO.
- HUP IVECO
- TH 9-2320-25/238-10
- TH 9-2320-25/238-10D
Rev-04 253
- TH 9-2320-25/238-24
- TH 9-2320-25/238-24E
All personnel must use seatbelts whenever these are mounted except during wading,
crossing rivers and streams and during embarcation to and dismounting from landing
craft
All doors must be locked, when parking, since there are no ignition key for the
vehicle.
All material must be properly strapped and secured prior driving. Notice that the
vehicle must not be loaded in a manner that adversly affects the stability of the
vehicle. This can increase the danger of overturning the vehicle. In addition the the
driver must check that all fastenings on the side and at the back of the vehicle, can
withstand the load of the moun ted equipment during driving.
For vehicle with winch mounted, teh user must have at least the self-rescue
coursebefroe the winch can be used. (see 5.1.6)
5.10.2.2 Boarding and alighting
Only step on areas intended for stepping.
Opening and closing of doors must be done in a proper manner by using the latches
as to avoid damaging the locking mechanism.
5.10.2.3 Transported personnel duties.
The doors must be closed and locked with the minelocks during driving.
5.10.2.4 Transport on and off road
During driving off road special care should be taken during sideways angulation.
During driving with personnel in the shooters position, the speed must be kept
according to the road conditions to avoid injuries.
5.10.2.5 Action if overturning
To limit the damages when overturning, all equipment must be mounted in approved
fixtures(GPS-fixtures must be checked).
During an overturn, the personnel must hold on and try to press their body against
the seatback.
When driving with topsafety, the personnel inside the vehicle must pull the topsafety
down and pin him down till the vehicle comes to rest.
When the vehicle has come to rest, teh driver must turn off the engine and report
incident up the chain of command and the cut the main power supply.(NB! Jammer).
Unlock doors and tophatch, so that rescue and medical personnel can enter.
Execute first-aid on personnel and prepair for salvage.
Secure the rescue site/own position.
254 Rev-04
5.11 JOINT PROVISIONS FOR TRACKED

ARMOURED VEHICLES, AS WELL AS
SISU/PASI AND FUCHS
Figure: 5.10
Bergepanzer on mission
5.11.1 General
5.11.1.1 In addition to joint provisions for driving and transportation services, this section Chap-5
also includes general provisions, provisions for the boarding and alighting of
vehicles, movement along roads and across terrain, driving while conducting
periscopic observations, as well as with shielded lights/blackout lights, use of night
vision periscopes and transfer via waterways of heavy armoured vehicles.
Clothing:All personnel whose primary function is to man armoured fighting
vehicles must wear approved fighting vehicle suit/driving suit when manoeuvring in
the field. If body armour is being worn, it must be put on underneath the suit, in the
purpose of making evacuation easier, should the vehicle suffer engine breakdown or
other damage.
By armoured fighting vehicles is meant vehicles where the tasks are being solved
from or by use of the platform, including:
- Tanks, all kinds, and similar vehicles built on tank chassis
- Armoured fighting vehicles, all kinds, plus similar vehicles built on the same
chassis
- M-113 with weapons (Javelin, ToW)
- SISU with 12.7 mm turret
Exceptions may be made for platoon leaders and company commanders/squadron
commanders who often command units/divisions mounted or dismounted.
Jacket(field/membrane) may be used as outer clothing by personnel in open hatches.
Rev-04 255
Supplementary provisions may be found in section 5.1.1.1 of this chapter, in

technical handbooks and in the drill book.
5.11.1.2 When the vehicles engine is running, a crew member should always be seated in the
drivers position or the vehicle should be parked in accordance with the prevailing
provisions:
- the vehicle should be parked on the best possible surface
- the handbrake should be engaged
- on public roads parking lights should be used
- automatically stabilised systems should be disengaged
- weapons systems should be secured
- the gear selector should be placed in neutral
5.11.1.3 During vehicle movement within camp zones, parking areas, into and out of
buildings, within buildings, loading and unloading from a trailer, boat, railway and
port areas, and in a bivouac, a guide should direct the movement at all times.
For each vehicle a ground guide is to be appointed. He/she is responsible for
ascertaining that the movement takes place in a safe manner.
The guide should:
- always be used during vehicle movement within camp zones, parking areas,
into and out of buildings, within buildings, loading and unloading from a
trailer, and in a bivouac
- remain at least 5 metres away from tracked vehicles
- use standardised signs and signals
- before the vehicle is set in motion, ensure that nobody is under, in front of or
behind the vehicle
- be able to quickly establish eye contact with the driver
- move at a walking pace
- never walk backwards, only forwards and to the side
- use an assistant during reversal of vehicles and in difficult terrain
- ascertain that no personnel stay on the vehicle body during movement
- ascertain that no personnel are situated between a vehicle with its engine
running and a fixed object, if the distance is less than 10 metres
5.11.1.4 Smokingand use of an open fire on or in vehicles is not permitted. Smoking outside
of vehicles is permitted, except in the case of vehicles carrying ammunition.
5.11.1.5 Hatches and doors should be secured, regardless of whether they are open or closed.
5.11.1.6 When personnel move from a turret to the drivers position (emergency hatch) or
v.v., the turret should be locked and the hydraulic/electric rotation system
disengaged (does not apply to M109 A3GN). No personnel should move beneath the
gun's breech when the hydraulic/electric rotation system is engaged.
5.11.1.7 Vehicles may only be used when fire- fighting and first aid equipment is in place and
256 Rev-04
in order.
5.11.1.8 Drivers and tank commanders should be notified of any situations in which there are
personnel on foot in the immediate vicinity. Tank commanders should make
observations of the area from an open hatch and pay special attention to such
personnel. During exercises involving tracked armoured vehicles, personnel on the
ground should move away from shelters, hollows, dugouts, etc., and make their
presence known when vehicles approach closer than 50 metres.
5.11.1.9 Ear protection. The crew should normally use both ear muffs (headset) and ear
plugs. Cf. sect. 6.21.
5.11.1.10 The transportation of personnel on the outside of a vehicle is only permitted on the
Leopard 1 tank.
5.11.1.11 Boarding and alighting
Cf. item 5.1.1.1
5.11.1.12 Boarding and alighting must only take place when the vehicle is stationary and the
handbrake engaged. All boarding, alighting and movement should be supervised by
the tank commander.
5.11.1.13 When the engine is running, the driver should be notified of all boarding and
alighting.
5.11.2 Movement on roads and across terrain
5.11.2.1 Any movement without a guide should be supervised by a person who has
undertaken an approved tank commander training course in respect of the particular
vehicle that is to be driven.
The person should normally be positioned at the tank commander's hatch and should Chap-5
maintain internal communication with the driver. However, the tank commander
should be positioned where he/she may best direct the vehicle. When the tank
commander is unable to effectively carry out his/her task from the vehicle, he/she
should alight and direct the vehicle from the ground.
All instructions should be issued using standardised signals and commands.
5.11.2.2 The tank commanders duties:
- the tank commander has command over all personnel situated in the vehicle
- the tank commander must allways ensure that the area around the vehicle prior
to setting the vehicle in motion
- the tank commander issues orders in respect of boarding and alighting
- the tank commander will, when necessary, issue shouted warnings to
personnel being transported, e.g. at sudden bends, low-hanging branches,
cables across the ground, etc.
- discharge of guns and/or machine guns (live or blank ammunition) should not
take place when personnel are located on the outside of the vehicle (with the
exception of the firing commander/firing officer/firing controller and during
discharge of the anti-aircraft machine gun, as well as gunner/loader)
- the tank commander should ensure that the turret is secured with the lock and
the anti-aircraft gun is locked on the side and vertically before any ascent is
Rev-04 257
undertaken
- the tank commander should ascertain that all personnel being transported have
familiarised themselves with the safety regulations before boarding and
alighting commences
- the tank commander should ensure that all covers are in place and closed and
the engine hatch is in place and closed
- the tank commander should ascertain that all hatches are closed and locked or
open and secured
- the tank commander should ascertain that rear doors are closed and locked
- the tank commander should ascertain that all equipment rooms are closed and
locked
5.11.2.3 When the engine is running and during all transit, as well as with use of the rotation
and stabilisation systems, all tank crew located inside the vehicle should maintain
internal communication. For vehicles containing crew compartments without internal
communication at every seat, at least one person should maintain contact with the
driver when such communication equipment is installed.
5.11.2.4 Before driving commences, the turret should be secured with the turret lock.
Exceptions to this are terrain driving with tanks, canons and tracked armoured
vehicles. In such conditions, the crew should be particularly attentive so that materiel
or personnel are not damaged/injured during turret rotation. During turret rotation,
the drivers hatch should remain closed.
5.11.2.5 During road transit, forward and rearward observation should be maintained so that
overtaking may be undertaken safely.
5.11.2.6 During transit, aerials should not come into contact with electric power lines.
5.11.2.7 During transit, crew members should remain in their respective seats in the vehicle,
but are permitted to stand if training or other reasons deem this necessary. When
personnel are seated, seat belts should be worn, if fitted.
5.11.2.8 During educational training and live exercises, the instructor is permitted to be
situated on the outside of a moving vehicle. In such cases, the instructor should
maintain internal communication with other crew members. The instructor should
also be adequately secured and extreme caution should be demonstrated in respect of
speed and manoeuvring. During such training, turret rotation is permitted.
5.11.3 Reversing
5.11.3.1 When reversing heavy armoured vehicles within camp zones, parking areas, into and
out of buildings, within buildings, loading and unloading from a trailer, and in a
bivouac, TWO guides should direct the vehicles movements at all times.
Refer to item 5.11.6.1
5.11.3.2 In training zones, the tank commander may direct the driver via internal
communication. The tank commander should ascertain that reversing may be
undertaken without causing damage.
Reversing vehicles equipped with a reversing camera:
The tank commander should ascertain beforehand that the area to the rear of the
258 Rev-04
vehicle is free of obstruction. This provision applies in connection with training,

practice and field exercises on secure army training grounds/firing ranges.
5.11.3.3 When operational conditions allow, the reversing of Norwegian Armed Forces
vehicles should take place by reversing off the road and then driving back onto the
road with the front of the vehicle. The vehicle should be driven completely off the
road in such a way as to avoid collision with other vehicles.
5.11.4 Co-training/ duty between armourde vehicle and footsoldiers
5.11.4.1 When co-training between armoured vehicle and soldiers on the ground, the
following must taken into account:
- All personnel in the vehicle and on the ground must exercise extreme caution
for this type of activity to avoid accidents
- The vehicles blind spots must be avoided and the distance to the vehicle must
be at least 5 meters if eye contact is established between the ground crew and
the creew on the aroured vehicle and at least 10 meters if eye contact is not
established between the ground crew and teh vehicle crew.
- It is not permitted to sit directly behind armored vehicles if the backdoor or
ramp is closed or being closed after alighting. Only exception to this rule is if
the door/ramp stays open for further unloading of equipment for the
groundcrew
- The vehicle must not be set in motion without the tank commander/driver first
ascertaining that maneuvering can be achieved without danger of injuries to
personnel on the ground
- The squad leader and the soldiers on the ground must make sure that no one is Chap-5
in the blind spots, but stays at a safe distance before the vehicle sets in motion
- Sign and /or signals must be agreed upon and established between vehicle
crew and soldiers on the ground before the vehicle can be moved.
- See sect 6.1 for special regulations for other personnel on the ground
- See sect 6.8 for special regulations during SIBO/ MOUT training
5.11.5 Driving with periscopes/closed hatches
5.11.5.1 Provisions for driving with shielded lights/blackout lights are included in the
Provisions for transport services in the Norwegian Armed Forces (BTF 1-010).
5.11.5.2 Driving with an IR periscope/night vision periscope should only be undertaken when
there is clear visibility and in open terrain where it is easy to manoeuvre. During
road transit, the IR periscope/night vision periscope should only be used with
blackout lights or shielded lights.
5.11.5.3 During vehicle movement in which the driver is making observations through
periscopes, in daylight or darkness, the tank commander should make observations
from an open hatch. Any road movement should only take place on Norwegian
Armed Forces firing ranges and training grounds, or within requisitioned training
zones with regulatory markings. Such road movements should only be undertaken
with the prior authorisation of the division commander, based on local traffic
conditions and the crews level of training.
Rev-04 259
If the tank commander is seated in order to operate the tank commander sight in
respect of a tactical march, the loader/gunner should make observations from their
own hatch and warn of any obstructions to the vehicles movement.
5.11.5.4 During road transit with shielded lights/blackout lights or blacked out, night vision
goggles should be ready and easily accessible to the tank commander or
loader/gunner, so that these may be used for making observations in order to issue
instructions and warnings of any obstructions.
5.11.5.5 In the case of ABC exercises or tank commander training in clear terrain, the tank
commander is also permitted to make observations from periscopes with a closed
hatch. The vehicles loader/gunner should then make observations from their own
hatch and warn of any obstructions to the vehicles movement.
5.11.5.6 In the case of live exercises, it is permitted, during movement, to make observations
from the vehicle's periscopes and sights in daylight and darkness, when such
movements take place along prepared trails.
5.11.5.7 Strong white light and infra-red light may damage the eyes. This particularly applies
to light emitted from searchlights. It is forbidden to look directly at such searchlights
from a distance of less than 50 metres when they are in operation.
It is also harmful to look directly into driving headlights at a short distance. To
ensure that an IR periscope/night vision periscope is functioning correctly, a hand
should be placed over the lenses to establish whether the lights are warm.
5.11.6 Transit across waterways/wading
5.11.6.1 As wading may occur in exceptionally diverse conditions, only general safety
guidelines can be provided for this type of operation. An exercise leader or qualified
officer, selected by the division commander, should, in each individual case, assess
how safety measures should be organised.
For further information, refer to chapter 8
The exercise leader or qualified officer should take into account the particular
conditions at the location, including depth of water, current, wind, waves, ground
conditions, traffic, light conditions, time of year and the divisions level of training.
They should also evaluate, in each individual case, whether the crossing point, route
and landing point should be marked.
5.11.6.2 Before any wading and transit across a waterway is undertaken, the vehicle should
be made ready in accordance with the prevailing regulations.
5.11.6.3 Emergency breathing equipment: Before wading/ crossing of waterways takes place,
the personnel must have been trained in evacuating the vehicle. On vehicles that
have emergency breathing equipment mounted, personnel must have gone through
education and training in accordance with the requirements set by the professional
authority.
Cylinders should be present and working in accordance with requirements.
5.11.6.4 Requirements for the crossing point:
- the beach and ground conditions should permit the vehicle to drive and wade
at the straightest possible angle at the departure and landing points
- there should be smooth slopes at the departure and landing points, above and
below the water, and these should be shallow
260 Rev-04
- the departure and landing points should be free of obstructions, both above
and below water, and should not be marshy
- the departure and landing points should not be so steep as to allow water to
accidentally pour in through the vehicles hatches
- the surface of the water should be free of large branches, logs, etc.
- the ground at the departure point should be firm enough to bear the vehicles
weight and should also be free of obstructions
- the current velocity and water flow should not be such that it may cause the
vehicle to be carried away by the current
5.11.6.5 Before wading, the ground conditions at the wading locations should be thoroughly
inspected by a diver. When wading across streams and waterways with minimal
water flow (current) and in which the ground conditions have been previously
verified and do not represent a risk to personnel/materiel, the requirement for a diver
may be waived.
5.11.6.6 Prior to wading, all armoured vehicles should be made ready with a rigidly mounted
rear towing cable. The other end of the cable should be attached by rope to the turret
roof/hull roof so that when the rope is pulled, the cable is released and may be
hauled in. A buoy/empty water can, which will float to the surface if the vehicle
should sink, should be attached to the other end of the rope.
5.11.6.7 A recovery vehicle should be made ready/inspected prior to wading. This vehicle
should be manned by a tank commander and driver, as well as two assistants, but
should not carry any additional load. A boat may be used instead of a vehicle for Chap-5
rescue/recovery. Rescue/recovery boats should be equipped in accordance with the
requirements for rescue/tender vessels, section 8.1.7.
5.11.6.8 During wading/swimming and transit across frozen rivers and lakes, radio
communication should be maintained between all participating vehicles, as well as
the exercise leader.
5.11.6.9 One recovery vehicle should be available when wading across waterways that are
less than 100 metres wide. The recovery vehicle should be located downstream at or
near the departure bank. If the waterway is over 100 metres wide, two recovery
vehicles should be available, preferably one on either side.
5.11.6.10 For wading along a waterway, one rescue/recovery vehicle should be available if the
distance to the nearest bank is less than 100 metres.
The vehicle should, at any given time, be downstream to wading vehicles and should
maintain eye contact with them. If the distance to the nearest bank is more than 100
metres, two recovery vehicles should be available.
The vehicles should, at any given time, be downstream to wading vehicles and
should maintain eye contact with them. One of the vehicles should be in the water
and should remain at the same distance from the bank as the outermost vehicle of the
wading party.
5.11.6.11 In the case of swimming/deep wading when either the water is so deep or the current
so swift that personnel are unable to wade, all personnel, with the exception of the
driver, should remain outside of the vehicle and be in possession of a life jacket. The
Rev-04 261
tank commander should be seated at the edge of the hatch with his/her feet inside the
vehicle. The drivers life jacket should be placed by the tank commanders hatch.
5.11.6.12 During wading, the water may reach a higher level than its actual depth, depending
on the wave that occurs as a result of the speed of the vehicle and/or the water. It is
the waves height which determines the vehicles practical water depth. Prior to and
during transit, the driver and tank commander should evaluate whether the actual
water depth is, or could be, so deep that water could wash over the front bonnet. If
this is the case, or if there is a risk of this occurring, preparations for deep
wading/swimming should be made, as described in the prevailing regulations.
5.11.6.13 In the case of wading/swimming when the water is so deep and the current so swift
that personnel are unable to wade, the following materiel/personnel should be made
ready at the departure point:
- frogman/diver
- recovery vehicle (made ready/inspected for wading in the deepest prepared
water depth for wading vehicles)
- rescue boat, cf. item 8.1.7.
5.11.6.14 When wading across streams and smaller waterways with minimal water flow that
does not represent a risk to personnel and materiel, the requirement for a recovery
boat/vehicle may be waived.
5.11.7 Driving across frozen rivers and lakes
5.11.7.1 During land movements with tracked and armoured vehicles in which it is difficult to
determine whether a frozen lake or river is being crossed, the following measures
should be carried out:
- Tanks and self-propelled artillery:
- if the division passes through such areas, measurements should be
taken to determine the thickness of the ice and the water's depth. For
details regarding implementation and requirements for ice thickness,
refer to items 8.2.10 - 8.2.12
- vehicles should be driven with open hatches. The driver will operate the
vehicle with a closed hatch and make observations through the
periscopes
- emergency breathing equipment should be made ready
- the turret should be locked in a position that ensures that the driver may
exit the vehicle immediately through the emergency exit and drivers
hatch
- ensure that the vehicle is properly packed, that the drivers emergency
exit is free of equipment (loose equipment, team equipment, etc.) and
that the driver, gunner, loader and tank commander may easily evacuate
through the emergency hatch or turret hatches
- tank, tracked armoured vehicle and armoured recovery vehicle are
made ready for wading (refer to drill book and technical handbook)
- the crew of self-propelled artillery alight and transfer, if applicable, on
262 Rev-04
foot, and foot troops CV9030N/F1 / M113 and SISU/PASI also alight
- Other armoured vehicles:

- vehicles should be driven with hatches open
- vehicles of the M113 group should be made ready for swimming
- vehicle evacuation drill should be practiced prior to vehicle movement
- refer to details in the drill book and technical handbook
5.11.8 Swimming
5.11.8.1 When swimming is to be undertaken, a frogman/diver (cf. item 8.2.2.1) should be in
place at the swimming location.
The following materiel should be made ready at the swimming location:
- recovery vehicle
- rescue boat (cf. item 8.1.7 )
5.11.8.2 When swimming/deep wading is to be undertaken, all personnel, with the exception
of the driver, should remain outside of the vehicle and be wearing a life jacket (i.e.
with the tank hatch open, sitting on the edge of the vehicles roof with his/her legs
inside the hatch. The tank commander should be seated at the edge of the hatch with
his/her legs inside the vehicle. The drivers life jacket should be placed by the tank
commanders hatch.
5.11.9 Recovery
5.11.9.1 Refer to item 5.1.6in this chapter. Chap-5
Rev-04 263
5.12 LEOPARD TANK 1A5NO, LEOPARD TANK

2A4NO, ARMOURED RECOVERY VEHICLE
(BERGEPANZER) NM217, ARMOURED
COMBAT ENGINEER VEHICLE NM189 AND
ARMOURED BRIDGE-LAYING VEHICLE
NM190
Figure: 5.11
Leopard 2A4
5.12.1 General
5.12.1.1 Supplementary provisions are described in:
HUP Training programme, Leopard 1
HUP Training programme, Leopard 2
TH 9-1015-25/201-10 Leopard 1 A5 NO, trn del 1
TH 9-1015-25/201-10 Leopard 1 A5 NO, trn del 2
TH 9-1015-25/201-24 Leopard 1 A5 NO, del 2
TH 9-2350-25/203-13B Leopard 1, hull, inspection regulations
TH 9-1015-25/201-13B Leopard 1 turret, inspection regulations
TH 9-2350-25/203-10 Leopard 1 A5 NO, vehicle section
TH 9-2350-25/204-10 Leopard 2, vehicle section
TH 9-1015-25/200-10 Leopard 2, turret section
TH 9-2350-25/228-10 Armoured bridge-laying vehicle, vehicle section
TH 9-2350-25/228-10 Armoured bridge-laying vehicle, paving section
264 Rev-04
TH 9-2350-25/228-13B Armoured bridge-laying vehicle, inspection

regulations
TH 9-2350-25/227-10 Armoured combat engineer vehicle
TH 9-2350-25/227-13B Armoured combat engineer vehicle, inspection
regulations
TH 9-2350-25/204-13B Leopard 2 A4, inspection regulations
UD 7-0 Main programme for Cavalry training
UD 7-1 Shooting instruction for the Cavalry
UD 7-2-2 The Cavalry's progression firing tests
UD 7-4-4 The Cavalrys drill book, Leopard 1 A5 NO/NO2
UD x-x-x The Cavalrys drill book, Leopard 2 A4 NO
FR 7-0-3 The tank platoon in the field
FR 7-4-1 The tank squadron in the field
KUP 7-1-5 Detailed programme, individual training, Leopard 1 A5 NO
KUP 7-2-1 Detailed programme, division training, crew, Leopard
KUP 7-7-5 Detailed programme, Officer training, tank course
Armoured recovery vehicle (Bergepanzer) NM217:
- TH 9-2350-25/219-10
- TH 9-2350-28/219-10D Chap-5
- TH 9-2350-25/219-13B
- SO 9-2350-25/219-10
- TH 9-2350-257219-24
5.12.1.2 Primus stoves should be lit on the ground. Refer to item 5.11.1.4 Smoking and use of
an open fire on vehicles. When the primus stove has heated up it may be used on the
rear of the vehicle. Particular caution should be demonstrated and a portable fire
extinguisher should be available at the rear of the vehicle.
5.12.2 Boarding and alighting
5.12.2.1 Under p- og avstigning skal hndbrems vre tiltrukket og rattls vre p (kun
Leopard 1 har rattls).
5.12.3.1 During field exercises and particularly when driving on roads with the Leopard 2,
exceptional alertness should be demonstrated in the use and operation of the PERI
tank commander sight. The division commander should have evaluated the local
traffic conditions and the crews level of training. It is the tank commander's duty to
give notification if he/she feels doubtful about conducting exercises along the road.
If necessary, the sight should be disengaged to prevent the turret from accidentally
rotating into the PERI's line of sight.
Rev-04 265
5.12.3.2 When using the Leopard 1 and Leopard 2 tanks at the highest level of operation, all
positions should be manned.
5.12.4 Wading and driving over soft ground
5.12.4.1 When driving the Leopard 1 or Leopard 2 in water to a depth of more than 50 cm, or
that would appear to be more than 50 cm, the diving hydraulics should be pumped
and additional procedures should be followed in accordance with items 5.11.6.2 and
8.2.1.1.
5.12.4.2 If the BA3 test (Leopard 2) in accordance with the testing of diving hydraulics is not
approved during preparation, wading is forbidden.
Figure: 5.12
Leo 2
5.12.5 The duties of personnel being transported

5.12.5.1 The transportation of personnel on the outside of a vehicle is only permitted on the
Leopard 1 tank. The number of personnel carried should not exceed nine persons.
Personnel being transported should sit in a squatting position and hold onto the rail
with both hands. The turret should be locked at 12 oclock, the rotation system
engaged and TROOP READY established. Transit on the outside of the vehicle may
only be undertaken by trained personnel.
266 Rev-04
5.13 TRACKED ARMOURED VEHICLE

CV9030N/F1
Figure: 5.13
CV9030N/F1 on the move
5.13.1 General
HUP CV9030N
TH 9-2350-25/202-10 (Vehicle section) Chap-5
UD 7-4-5 (Drill book) Mechanised infantry in the field
TH 9-1005-25/203-10 (Turret)
TH 9-2350-25/202-10D (Turret and hull)
UD 7-1 Shooting instruction for the Cavalry
UD 7-2-2 The Cavalry's progression firing tests
5.13.1.2 Exercises with open tank hatch and/or team leaders hatch (hatch battles) should be
undertaken in dedicated zones. Dedicated zone is defined as a zone in which a
battalion commander or similar has determined that there is a minimum risk of
accidents occurring.
When assessing the suitability of given zones, the nature of the vegetation and
topography, as well as the competence level of personnel, should be taken into
account. During all exercises with open tank hatches and/or team leader hatches, the
gun barrel MUST remain within the outer edges of the hull.
Furthermore, the tank commander should have his/her head above the hatch's edge
and one hand on the rotation handle in order to reduce the risk of the gun barrel
rotating beyond the hulls outer edges.
5.13.1.3 The rear door should remain closed whilst driving. Before any vehicle movement is
undertaken, a check should be made to ensure that no personnel are loading or
unloading within the crew compartment.
Rev-04 267
5.14 M113 SERIES VEHICLES
Figure: 5.14
From the top hatch on M-113
5.14.1 General
HUP M-113
TH 9-2350-25/230-10
5.14.2.1 Boarding and alighting must only take place when the vehicle is stationary. Loading
and unloading should be carried out on the ramp or through the door. The driver,
tank commander and gunner may board and alight at the front.
Boarding and alighting at the side is not permitted (does not apply to M 548).
5.14.3.1 Before any movement takes place, the following items should be checked by the tank
commander:
- covers should be in place and closed and the engine compartments front
hatch secured and screwed down
- all hatches should be closed and locked or open and secured the tank
commanders hatch ring should be locked
- the tank commanders hatch ring should be locked
- the ramp should be raised and locked
- the machine gun should be locked at the side and vertically when not in use
5.14.3.2 When driving the NM 142 armoured rocket launcher the following also applies:
During movement, the loading hatch should be closed. The turret hatch should either
be closed, be in the observation position, or remain open. The shield hatch should be
closed. The turret may be rotated during tactical movement but should be locked
during administrative movement. During transit, the tank commander's hatch ring
268 Rev-04
should be locked and the mounted MG-3 should be locked in the transit position.
5.14.3.3 A tent should be erected on the ramp of the NM 142 for bivouacking of the vehicles
crew. If the vehicles heating apparatus is used, one person should be placed on
sentry duty in the vehicle with the hatch open, cf. item 5.19 in this chapter.
5.14.3.4 The heating apparatus should not be used during the transportation of fuel. Fuel
canisters should not be opened inside the vehicle.
5.14.4 Swimming
5.14.4.1 In the following special versions, swimming is not permitted: NM 195, NM 196, NM
197, NM 198, NM 200, NM 201, NM 202, NM 204, NM 205, NM 209 and NM 216.
5.14.4.2 Vehicles with additional armour plating are not permitted to swim.
5.14.4.3 When swimming with the MN 142, 5-10 sandbags should be placed at the very rear
of the vehicle in order to ensure greater stability.
5.15 SISU/PASI AND FUCHS
Chap-5
Figure: 5.15
SISU in medical vehicle version
5.15.1 General
- HUP SISU
- TH 9-2350-25/207-10 Armoured vehicle, wheels, XA-186
- TH 9-2350-25/216-10 Armoured vehicle, wheels, XA-203
5.15.1.2 It is forbidden to stand or walk on the front windscreens collapsible protective
panels.
5.15.1.3 Movement of Sisu/Pasi and Fuchs vehicles within a camp zone may be directed from
the vehicle under the following conditions:
- a tank commander should be positioned at the foremost right-hand hatch, as
well as a rear observer at the rear hatch
Rev-04 269
- the vehicle should be locked in first gear and the vehicle should move at a
walking pace
5.15.1.4 During reversal of Sisu/Pasi and Fuchs vehicles within a camp zone, TWO guides
should direct vehicle movement from the ground at all times.
5.15.1.5 All personnel should wear seat belts if they are installed, except during terrain
training in combat technique, wading, transit across waterways, as well as during
embarkation and disembarkation of a amphibious landing craft.
5.15.2.1 Personnel should only walk on designated areas.
5.15.2.2 Boarding and alighting of foot troops should only be carried out through the rear
door.
5.15.3 The duties of personnel being transported
5.15.3.1 The rear door should remain closed during transit. Before any vehicle movement is
undertaken, a check should be made to ensure that no personnel are loading or
unloading within the crew compartment.
5.15.3.2 When the crew has finished loading a SISU/PASI vehicle, the crew may comprise, in
certain cases, only a driver and gunner. In such cases, the gunner will adopt the role
of tank commander and direct the vehicle from the tank commanders position. At
the same time, the gunners role as a gunner will cease. Exceptional caution should
be demonstrated when driving in such situations.
5.15.4 Reversing
5.15.4.1 For reversing that is directed from a vehicle, three persons should be used: One
driver, one tank commander and one rear observer.
5.15.5 Transit across waterways, wading
5.15.5.1 Refer to item 8.2.1.1
The tank commander should maintain his/her position (foremost right-hand side)
during the period that the vehicle is swimming/wading. Each vehicle should carry a
rear observer who maintains internal communication with the tank commander. The
rear observer should monitor the crew compartment and immediately notify of any
leakage or other condition that would necessitate the vehicle's transit to be
discontinued.
5.15.6 Swimming
5.15.6.1 Swimming is not permitted with SISU XA-185, XA-186 and PASI XA-203N
vehicles.
All crew compartment hatches should be closed during swimming with a Fuchs
vehicle fitted with a mass spectrometer (MM1).
270 Rev-04
5.16 LOADING AND TRANSPORTATION OF

WHEELED AND TRACKED VEHICLES
ONTO RAILWAY TRUCKS/DRIVING
WITHIN RAILWAY ZONES
5.16.1 General
5.16.1.1 Vehicles should not be driven into or across a railway zone before permission has
been obtained from an authorised railway employee, or any transport control
personnel who are in contact with the railways duty officer.
5.16.1.2 When there are overhead power lines for electric locomotives in the railway zone,
aerials should be lowered before vehicles are driven into the area. They should not
be raised again before the area has been vacated. Aerials should also be lowered
when crossing railway tracks where overhead power lines are present.
5.16.1.3 When a vehicle is to cross a railway track within or outside of a station area, over a
level crossing that is not secured by a barrier and/or colour light signals, one sentry
should be positioned at the crossing point and one sentry on the track in both
directions. Appropriate signals should be agreed upon and the sentries should
maintain proper eye contact with each other. The sentries should stop vehicles in
good time and at a safe distance from the railway track when a train is approaching.
If there are several parallel tracks at the crossing point, several sentries should be
positioned to ensure that the railway tracks may be safely crossed. The sentries
should ensure that contact has been made with the railways duty officer and that
his/her instructions are followed. Chap-5
5.16.2 Loading and unloading from railway trucks
5.16.2.1 NSB (Norwegian State Railways) is responsible for the railways safety service.
Loading/unloading should not commence before permission has been obtained from
an authorised railway employee. Cf. appendix B to TF 2-1, Regulations for the
transportation of military vehicles by railway. All orders to military personnel
MUST be issued by ONE officer.
5.16.2.2 Before loading/unloading commences, an authorised officer should obtain
confirmation from an authorised railway employee that:
- the train is standing on the correct track
- the railway trucks brakes are engaged and connected to the hook on the end
ramp
- the electric current to any overhead power lines has been switched off and
there are no other live cables in the vicinity
5.16.2.3 It is not permitted to climb onto a vehicles roof or load before a go-ahead signal has
been given by an authorised railway employee. The go-ahead signal will be given
when the authorised railway employee is satisfied that the current to the overhead
power lines has been switched off and earthed.
5.16.2.4 During loading and unloading of goods wagons, freight must be handled with care so
that the freight, or the person handling the freight, is not in hazardous proximity to
Rev-04 271
the overhead power lines, or other live components. (Hazardous proximity is

regarded as a distance of less than one metre from live components.)
5.16.2.5 In the case of a track change that requires the overhead power lines to be switched
on, ALL work above the relevant track must be suspended. Work may not
re-commence before permission has been given by an authorised railway employee.
5.16.2.6 One guide should be available for each vehicle that is driven onto or off of a railway
truck. The guide should act in accordance with the guides duties, cf. item 5.11.1.3in
this chapter. If it becomes necessary for the guide to move during loading/unloading,
the vehicle should be stopped, the guide should move to the new position and
continue directing from there. The guide should walk forwards or sideways but
NEVER backwards while directing vehicles.
5.16.2.7 In the case of any loading/unloading from an open line (outside a station area)
special safety measures must be adopted in consultation with a representative of
NSB (Norwegian State Railways).
5.16.2.8 Loading/unloading and securing of vehicles should take place in accordance with TF
2-1 Regulations for the transportation of military vehicles by railway and TF 2-2,
Freight manual for the transportation of military vehicles by railway.
5.16.2.9 In respect of military personnel who will be present at a railway zone or participate
in railway transportation, it is the duty of the authorised officer to familiarise all such
personnel with the regulations stipulated in this section before arrival at the station
area.
5.17 LOADING AND UNLOADING OF WHEELED
AND TRACKED VEHICLES ONTO
SHIPS/DRIVING WITHIN PORT AREAS
5.17.1 General
5.17.1.1 Vehicles should not been driven into a port area before permission has been obtained
from an authorised port employee, or any transport control personnel.
5.17.1.2 Driving into a port area should only take place on the orders of transport control
personnel, or any authorised port employee.
Personnel moving around a port area should wear helmets and reflective vests.
Vehicles that drive into a port area should use hazard warning lights or ordinary
rotary flashing lights in order to be more visible.
Exceptions to this regulation may only be given by transport control personnel.
5.17.1.3 Individual persons should not move around a port area without the permission of
transport control personnel. The transportation of personnel should be organised in
such a way that it does not obstruct other activities in the port area.
Military vehicles have a duty to yield right-of-way to the normal traffic (lorries,
container lifts, etc.) in a port area.
5.17.2 Loading and unloading from ships
5.17.2.1 The port authority is responsible for the ports safety. Transport control personnel
should only commence loading and unloading after receiving permission from an
authorised port employee. Each deck of the vessel should have an authorised deck
272 Rev-04
commander (from one division) who should ensure safe and controlled
loading/unloading in accordance with the instructions of transport control personnel.
5.17.2.2 In the case of embarkation/disembarkation from landing crafts and ferries, only the
driver and any tank commander may remain in the vehicle.
5.18 LOADING/UNLOADING OF TRACKED AND
WHEELED VEHICLES FROM AN
ARTICULATED TRAILER (HEAVY GOODS
VEHICLE)
5.18.1 General
5.18.1.1 - The driver of an articulated trailer (heavy goods vehicle) is responsible for
loading/unloading.
- During vehicle direction, correct signals should be used (TF 1-3-1, item 28).
- In poor visibility, when it is not possible to give hand signals, signals should
be given with a flashlight.
- All personnel, with the exception of the driver of the vehicle being directed
as well as any assistant to the person directing the vehicle should maintain a
distance that is equal to at least four times the length of the vehicle that is
being loaded or unloaded.
- If there is a requirement for an assistant to be present during
loading/unloading, the assistant should stand at a safe distance and maintain
Chap-5
eye contact with the person directing the vehicle, until the vehicle is stationary
with its engine switched off and its brakes engaged.
- The driver of the vehicle being directed should only move the vehicle when he
has established eye contact with/received a signal from the individual who is
directing the loading/unloading.
- It is forbidden for personnel to be situated on the articulated trailers body
when the vehicle is loaded and its engine is running.
5.18.1.2 Loading
- When the vehicle being directed is driven/directed onto ramps, the person
directing the loading must immediately move away from the articulated
trailers body and take up a safe position on the swan neck before giving any
further directions.
- If the ramps need to be adjusted after the vehicle has driven onto them, the
vehicle should be directed to return and its engine switched off.
- The vehicle should remain stationary at the ramp until the person directing the
vehicle has moved him/herself from the articulated trailers body and onto the
swan neck.
5.18.1.3 Unloading
Unloading should take place in reverse order.
Rev-04 273
- All personnel, with the exception of the driver, should be at a safe distance
from the vehicle, as stipulated in bullet point 4 of this section.
- The person directing the vehicle should be in position on the articulated
trailer.
- The vehicles driver should NOT start the engine before he/she has
established eye contact with and received a signal from the person directing
the vehicle.
- The person directing the vehicle should remain in position until the vehicle
has been unloaded from the articulated trailer.
5.18.1.4 Securing/releasing of fasteners
Before fasteners are secured/released, a loaded vehicle should remain stationary with
the engine switched off and the brakes engaged.
5.19 STATIONARY USE OF
VEHICLES/PRECAUTIONS AGAINST
CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING
5.19.1 General
5.19.1.1 After driving in terrain, the exhaust system should be examined for breakages, etc.,
before the vehicles engine is used in stationary mode.
5.19.1.2 When personnel must remain in the driving compartment of a command vehicle or a
communications vehicle, and the vehicles engine is running in stationary mode, and
a petrol/diesel heating apparatus is being operated, or a heating unit is being used,
one person must, at any given time, remain awake and the vehicle must also be
ventilated at regular intervals.
5.19.1.3 It is the responsibility of the commanding officer to ensure that the above-mentioned
prohibitions/orders are complied with. For first aid in respect of carbon monoxide
poisoning, see section on 6.20.4.
274 Rev-04
5.20 INSPECTION AND WORK UNDER, IN

FRONT OF OR TO THE REAR OF MOTOR
VEHICLES
Figure: 5.16
Repairs to a Mercedes vehicle
5.20.1 General Chap-5

5.20.1.1 Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle unless the vehicle has been secured against
jack failure. The vehicle should be secured with a trestle, or similar.
5.20.1.2 Before commencing any inspection of or work on a vehicle, the party responsible for
the repair/inspection should check that:
- any ignition key has been removed from the vehicle. In the case of diesel
vehicles (e.g. M 620 series), pull out the stop handle
- vehicles in which the engine is not running have the handbrake engaged and
are placed in low gear
- no other person remains in the driving compartment unless this is agreed and
also necessary to resolve the task
- the handbrake is engaged on vehicles, which, due to inspection work, must
have their engines running
- vehicles standing on a hill or a slippery surface are safeguarded against
rolling or sliding with the help of wedge-shaped wooden blocks (minimum
gradient 35 degrees), or stones, etc.
Rev-04 275
5.21 ROADBLOCKS SENTRY DUTY AND

MARKINGS
5.21.1 General
5.21.1.1 Roadblocks on public roads should only be set up during exercises in which the area
has been requisitioned. The roadblock should be set up as a marked barrier.
Concertina wire fences are used for marking (alternatively Spanish riders). It is
forbidden to use vehicles, stones, etc., that may result in accidents or damage to
materiel. Roadblocks should not be set up in hazardous locations (road bends, hill
crests, etc.), which may represent a danger to traffic.
5.21.1.2 The responsible exercise leaders would normally contact the local police or road
authority prior to the exercise (for agreement and consultation regarding traffic
density, the roads condition, assistance/loan of materiel, etc.).
5.21.1.3 Roadblocks with sentries and warning signs should be positioned as indicated in fig
68In addition to sentries and obstacles, a roadblock comprises a roadblock set.
A roadblock set comprises:
- 10 traffic cones, height 75 cm, with horizontal reflective strips
- two 20 m rolls of stop cord with reflective tape
- 2 warning signs no. 105 (narrow road)
- 2 secondary signs (Army roadblock)
- 2 stop sticks, 20 cm diameter, reflective
- 2 safety vests (to be worn by the sentries)
- 2 OPTIMA flashers (to be attached to the two traffic cones closest to the
centre of the roadway)
During hours of darkness, the sentry should be additionally equipped with a red
flashlight.
276 Rev-04
0m
15
Militr 0 m
vegsperring -5
25
m
25
5m
m
10
m
0
-5
25
m
0
15
Figure: 5.17
Figur 68 - Roadblock
5.21.1.4 The commanding officer of the division that has received an order to carry out a
designated roadblock (troops, or similar) is responsible for appointing sentries and Chap-5
ensuring that these sentries have received sufficient instruction to enable them to
perform their duties safely and effectively.
There should be a clear view from the warning sign to the roadblock. The traffic
cones closest to the edge of the road should be placed 50 cm into the roadway. A
concertina wire fence or a Spanish rider should be used as a barrier. Each barrier
should not cover more than 1/3 of the roadway. The outermost cone at each
concertina wire fence should be placed centrally to the obstacle and at least 0.5
metres outside of the obstacle itself, allowing at least half of the roadway on the
opposite side to remain clear.
On heavily trafficked roads, sentries should comprise MP-trained personnel. Sentries
should be functionally connected directly to the tactical watch at the location, but, in
terms of traffic safety, should be completely independent of this. Tactical watch and
checking of vehicles at the roadblock should, where practicable, take place outside
the roadway.
5.21.1.5 Civilian traffic should not normally be stopped except when traffic safety reasons
deem this necessary. Such traffic should be directed and given a signal to reduce
speed. Civilian vehicles/road users should not be checked. The sentries should
ensure that no loitering takes place at or near the roadblock.
Rev-04 277
5.22 AIR TRANSPORT
Figure: 5.18
Bording a C-130 Hercules
5.22.1 General
5.22.1.1 The safety regulations for air transport below are in accordance with:
- BSL E 4-1 "Regulations regarding access and transit at land-based airports"
- BTF 4-002 "Provisions for the transport service of the Norwegian Armed
Force"
- BTF 4-005 "Provisions for the transport service of the Norwegian Armed
Force", planning and implementation of air transport during peacetime
- IATA "International Air Transport Assosiation"
- AFMAN US Airforce Manual
5.22.1.2 The provisions in this section deal principally with the transportation of personnel by
aircraft. In respect of transportation of materiel and especially dangerous goods
refer to the provisions of IATA and AFMAN. In addition to the general provisions in
respect of air transport, the Royal Norwegian Air Force and airline companies may
occasionally have separate specific provisions. Information about these provisions
must be sought by applying to FLO/Logops/Transport.
5.22.2 Responsibility
5.22.2.1 The division being transported is responsible for instructing personnel in respect of
the prevailing safety regulations for transportation by aeroplane. In the case of
transportation of materiel, (goods), the dispatcher should make contact with the
transport control organisation's representatives or FLO/Logops/Transport.
The Royal Norwegian Air Force/airline company are responsible for ensuring that:
- aircraft are equipped in accordance with the assigned mission
278 Rev-04
- personnel are familiarised with the use of relevant rescue equipment onboard
aircraft
- all cargo is safely stored and secured in accordance with provisions (cf.
transport control officers responsibility for the preparation of cargo)
5.22.3 Movement at airports
5.22.3.1 All airport movement is monitored and directed by the control tower. Moreover, at
military airports, the military police has responsibility for the regulation of traffic
and traffic control within the airports perimeters.
5.22.3.2 The following safety regulations should be observed during movement at an airport:
a. Vanguards:
- upon arrival at an airport, the divisional liaison officer/transport leader
report to the transport control officer while the division is assembled in
a holding area outside the airport
- personnel should be assembled in pre-arranged air cargos under the
control of divisional officers (transport leaders)
- movement should be restricted to the necessary minimum. Movement
outside areas/roads that have been placed at the disposal of personnel
(holding areas, loading areas) must only take place with the express
consent of the operations room and control tower
- movement in hangars and workshops, on runways and aircraft parking
bays is forbidden
- runways should be crossed at a quick march or at double time upon the Chap-5
express consent of the control tower
- only personnel responsible for the implementation and inspection of
loading and unloading, or in the process of boarding/deplaning, have
access to aircraft or loading areas. All other personnel should remain at
least 50 metres from aircraft
- personnel should always remain at a safe distance from propellers or
engine inlets/exhausts of jet aircraft
- it is forbidden to smoke or use other forms of open fire on the ground,
or within a 50 metre radius of aircraft
- earplugs should be used when personnel are assembled within 50
metres of propeller aircraft and within 150 metres of jet aircraft with
engines running
b. For motor vehicles:
- it is forbidden to drive on runways or aircraft parking bays. Roadways
(taxiways) may only be used with the express consent of the control
tower and when personnel have become familiarised with the
prevailing safety regulations
- runways may only been crossed with the express consent of the control
tower, and only at precisely agreed locations. Crossings are normally
Rev-04 279
controlled by traffic lights (see item 5.22.3.3)

- drivers of vehicles that have received permission to drive on a runway
or roadway should keep a lookout for signals from the control tower
(see item 5.22.3.3)
- it is forbidden to park on runways, roadways or aircraft parking bays
- vehicles must always stop and yield right-of-way to oncoming aircraft
or aircraft they are approaching that are being driven or towed
- vehicles should not overtake a moving aircraft but should maintain a
safe distance to the rear of the aircraft
- vehicles must not use headlights in such a way that they could distract
aircraft that are about to land or take off, or that are being manoeuvred
to a landing ground
- vehicles should not drive any closer than 20 metres to aircraft that are
parked or have their engines running
- the minimum distance for jet aircraft is 50 metres from the nearest
exhaust pipe. In the case of jet aircraft with engines running, the
minimum distance is 150 metres
- driving to a parked aircraft is only permitted in connection with loading
and unloading and the dispatch of the aircraft, and by personnel who
have previously received instruction and are authorised to carry out this
service
- it is forbidden to drive under the wings or engines of a parked aircraft.
When reversing to or onboard an aircraft, vehicles should be directed
by personnel selected for this task
- speed limits and other regulatory provisions specified by signs or
instructions must be strictly observed
- all smoking in connection with driving on runways or roadways is
forbidden
engines running
280 Rev-04
5.22.3.3 Signals in connection with movement at airports
Signals made by:

Signification Signal lamp Airport traffic Sound
light system
Stop Fixed RED LIGHT
Move away imme- Flashing RED
diately LIGHT
Move away from Approach lights on
the approach zone or flashing
immediately
All clear. You may Fixed GREEN
continue LIGHT
Return and contact Flashing WHITE
the control tower LIGHT
Look at the control Two short and
tower for further ONE long blast
light signals from the sirens
5.22.4 Loading and unloading
5.22.4.1 Loading and unloading should be directed by qualified transport control personnel in
collaboration with a representative of the Royal Norwegian Air Force or relevant Chap-5
airline company/flight crew.
5.22.4.2 The following regulations apply to the loading and unloading of aircraft:
a. Personnel:
- boarding and deplaning of personnel should be carried out under the
direction of an officer in accordance with the provisions of BTF 4-002
- smoking is forbidden
- firearms are not permitted in the cabin but must be forwarded as
luggage (except in the case of divisional transports)
- deplaning should be carried out on the orders of, and under the
direction of, dispatchers in accordance with the directives of a transport
control officer
engines running
b. Cargo:
- loading and unloading of cargo should be carried out in accordance
with the provisions of the relevant aircraft type
- cargo should be positioned in such a way that is does not obstruct
Rev-04 281
access to the aircrafts emergency exits. The flight crew should also
have free access from the cockpit through the whole of the cargo
compartment
- only an approved lashing medium may be used for lashing cargo
- personnel must not be placed in front of cargo or vehicles
- the assigned loading team does not have access to the aircrafts cockpit
- any damage that occurs must be reported immediately, regardless of the
extent of the damage
- in respect of the transportation of dangerous goods, etc., refer to the
provisions of HFL 10502
5.22.5 During flights
5.22.5.1 From the moment that an aircraft has been loaded and prepared for departure, the
aircrafts captain has command over all personnel onboard, regardless of rank.
5.22.5.2 The following safety regulations apply onboard aircraft:
- seat belts should be used at take-off and landing, as well as on the command
of the captain
- personnel should remain seated in their designated places. Movements should
only occur when absolutely essential, and then on an individual basis. This is
due to the displacement of the aircrafts centre of gravity
- smoking is only permitted with the captains consent. Smoking is forbidden on
the ground and during take-off and landing
- personnel do not have access to the cockpit without the consent of/an
invitation from the captain
- any electronic devices that contain transmitters/receivers should be switched
off during the flight. Any other electronic devices should be switched off
during take-off/landing or when the Fasten seat belt sign is lit
- personnel should remain seated with their seat belts fastened until the order to
deplane has been given
- upon receiving notification of an emergency landing, the following measures
should be taken:
1. tightly secure seat belts
2. remove any prostheses, high-heeled shoes, glasses and other sharp
objects such as pens, needles, etc. Loosen ties and straps
3. put on a life jacket (if landing on water) but do not inflate it
4. raise the seat to an upright position, tighten the seat belt securely. Lean
forward so that the forehead is held tightly towards the arms, which
should be folded over the knees
5. follow all orders issued by the crew
282 Rev-04
Ear protection should be used by all personnel being transported by C130 Hercules,
Twin Otter and similar propeller aircraft. For further details, refer to item 6.21
5.23 HELICOPTER TRANSPORT
Figure: 5.19
Transport of wounded
5.23.1 General
5.23.1.1 The helicopter is nowadays regarded as the safest type of aircraft. It is, however, Chap-5
assumed that users will have familiarised themselves with some of the general safety
regulations, as well as the particular provisions of the various types of helicopter.
Refer also to TF 4-2 Parts 1 and 2), Helicopter transport in the field.
Personnel assembling in or by a helicopter should ensure that their mobile phones
are switched off when the helicopter is in operation.
5.23.1.2 Personnel being transported must pay particular attention to the following risk
elements when the helicopter is on the ground with its engine running (see fig.70):
- the main rotor blades height above the ground
- the tail rotor blades height above the ground
- exhaust gas from helicopters with gas-turbine engines
- noise level that makes it impossible to hear a warning shout, for example
- the downdraft from the main rotor blades (loose objects, sand, snow, etc.)
- several helicopters simultaneously or directly after one another at the same
landing zone
- possible engine failure during landing, take-off or hovering. If this occurs, the
helicopter should move to the LEFT, while personnel on the ground should
move to the RIGHT, as viewed from the direction of flight
- protruding aerials, etc., in the noses of certain types of helicopter may easily
Rev-04 283
be damaged/deformed if, for example, personnel hold onto or collide with

them. Therefore, personnel moving in proximity to the helicopters nose must
be attentive
5.23.2 Danger zone
5.23.2.1 In respect of helicopter transport, an area that extends from the helicopter and 15
metres outside the path of the rotor blades (outer tip of main and tail rotor blades) is
defined as a danger zone (ref. ATP 49). The movement of personnel and vehicles in
the danger zone should be directed/controlled and should only occur when a
go-ahead signal has been given by the helicopters crew, and in designated
directions/sectors. In sloping terrain, the movement of personnel should take place
on the downward side of the helicopter.
5.23.3 Responsibility
5.23.3.1 The division being transported is responsible for studying/providing instruction in
the prevailing safety regulations for the transportation of personnel and materiel by
helicopter. The required assistance can be obtained from the supporting helicopter
division. The helicopter division is responsible for ensuring that:
- helicopters are equipped in accordance with the assigned mission
- personnel are equipped with life jackets, as well as being instructed in the use
of life jackets if the helicopter is to fly over water
- the user/transported division is provided with instructions regarding safety
regulations and actions to be taken in the event of an emergency landing, as
well as any particular conditions for the relevant helicopter type
- all cargo is properly secured in accordance with provisions
- underslung loads are checked/approved
IMPORTANT: NEVER WALK BACKWARDS ALONG THE

HELICOPTER'S TAIL BOOM (BEHIND THE
HELICOPTERS FUSELAGE) WHEN THE
HELICOPTERS ENGINE IS RUNNING
284 Rev-04
Hovedrotor
Utblsningspning
for gass
Halerotor
Figure: 5.20
Figur 70 - Helicopter risk areas
5.23.4 Smoking/open fire

5.23.4.1 Smoking and other use of open fire inside a helicopter, and on the ground, within a
50 metre radius, is forbidden.
5.23.5 Ear protection
5.23.5.1 Ear plugs or any other type of approved ear protection should be used by all
personnel assembled on the ground within a 50 metre radius of a helicopter. For the
assembly of personnel in a helicopter, refer to Introduction, personnel and
leadership, rescue services and definitions, section 6.21
5.23.6 Landing zone Chap-5
5.23.6.1 At the landing zone:
- good order should always prevail, as well as careful leadership and
management of the operation
- only personnel who have been ordered to serve in direct relation to
helicopters, or personnel who are boarding/deplaning, should be present
- ground marking tarpaulins or other loose materiel used for marking the zone
should be removed before any helicopters land, in order to avoid any such
materiel being sucked up into the rotor blades
- the movement of personnel and vehicles must be directed/controlled. When
a helicopter is on the ground, a go-ahead signal should be given by the
helicopters crew before any movement is undertaken (cf. item regarding
5.23.2.1 above)
- adequate first aid and organisation of fire-fighting should be established. The
minimum requirement per landing point is:
1. medical bag no.1 and stretcher
2. 6 kg fire extinguisher
Rev-04 285
Forbudt sektor
Figure: 5.21
Figur 71 - Movement to and from a helicopter
5.23.7 Transportation of personnel

5.23.7.1 a. a. The following should be observed during boarding:
- boarding of personnel should be directed by a previously instructed
transport leader
- personnel ready for boarding should remain in their respective holding
areas until receiving the order to board
- boarding commences after the go-ahead signal has been received from
the helicopters crew. Movement from the holding area to the
helicopter should proceed from an angle at the front, preferably from
the helicopters right-hand side, as viewed from the direction of flight,
or, if in sloping terrain, on the downward side of the helicopter (cf. fig
71).
- kitbags should be carried loosely over the shoulder/by hand and placed
in the helicopter. Kitbags and equipment must never be thrown into or
out of the helicopter
- weapons must be unloaded and secured
- long items (skis, poles, weapons, aerials, etc.) should be carried
horizontally
- when moving under the helicopters main rotor blades, personnel
should bend forward and hold onto caps and any other loose, light
286 Rev-04
items
- seat belts should be securely fastened and kept fastened from the time
that personnel are seated in the helicopter until the order to deplane has
been given
- the helicopters doors should be securely closed so that they are not
distorted by the downdraft from the rotor blades
b. During flights:
- all personnel should remain seated with their seat belts fastened until
the order to deplane has been given
- weapons should be held between the knees with the butt facing up ( in
order to avoid possible damage to the cargo compartments ceiling)
- instructions/orders from the helicopters crew, as well as any
instructions/orders from the transport leader in respect of aircraft safety,
must be fully and immediately complied with
- upon receiving notification of an emergency/emergency landing (refer
to table in item 5.23.9 below), follow the set procedures and orders
issued by the helicopters crew
Generally, the following applies:
1. Lay any weapon on the floor, place both feet on the weapon.
Tighten the safety belt, bend forward as far as possible and grasp
arms tightly under the knees. Remain in this position until the
helicopter is stationary. Chap-5
2. After landing: Remain in the helicopter until the crew or the
transport leader gives the order to deplane.
3. Landing on water: Do not inflate life jackets before exiting the
helicopter.
c. Deplaning:
- if personnel are required to exit the helicopter quickly on one side or
the other, depending on helicopter type and instructions, unload any
divisional equipment and lie on the ground within the path of the rotor
blades
- be particularly aware of other helicopters in the vicinity
- when the helicopter has taken off again, personnel may be led away
from the landing zone
5.23.8 Transportation of materiel

5.23.8.1 a. Preparation:
- the transportation of hazardous cargo (ammunition, explosives,
combustible or corrosive fluids/matter, gas cylinders, etc.), for interior
loading, must receive prior authorisation from the helicopter
division/crew
Rev-04 287
- check packaging and particularly ensure that containers/cylinders for

combustible fluids and gases are sealed
- check that the lifting device for underslung loads is undamaged and has
adequate lifting capacity (SWL/WLL)
- check that each helicopter cargo has been properly prepared and packed
in nets/secured with straps and that the cargos load does not exceed the
maximum stipulated load
b. Loading and unloading:
1. in the case of transportation of materiel as an interior or exterior load,
loading and unloading should take place in accordance with
instructions from the helicopters crew
2. In the case of transportation of materiel as an underslung load, the
following points should be observed:
- for each landing point there should be a signalman. The
signalman should be equipped/marked in a way that enables the
pilot to easily identify who is responsible for directing air traffic
- the number of people working beneath the helicopter on hooking
up a load should be kept to a minimum
- both the signalman and the person responsible for hooking up the
load (and any assistant) should be equipped with goggles to
protect the eyes from sand or snow that swirls around as a result
of the downdraft from the rotor blades. The person responsible
for hooking up the load should use an earthing set, due to the
static electricity generated by the helicopter while hovering
- in the event of engine failure during the hooking up of a load, the
helicopter should move to the left (as viewed from the
helicopters longitudinal direction)
In such cases, personnel beneath the helicopter should move as quickly as possible to
the right (see fig 72).
288 Rev-04
Vind
Signalmann
30x
Opphuker
Last
10x
Ved opphuking Ved innflyging

og avgang
Chap-5
Figure: 5.22
Figur 72 - Placement of personnel when flying with an underslung load (cf.
ATP490g TF4-2-1)
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE: Helicopter moves to the LEFT, personnel move to the

RIGHT
5.23.9 Overview of signs and signals

5.23.9.1 Cf ATP 49.
Signification In daylight In darkness

Start loading! Thumbs up from the One long flash with a flas-
pilot or flight engineer hlight or loading light
Standby! Internal communication As in daylight
or two short audible sig-
nals or continuous red
light
Rev-04 289
Emergency landing! Internal communication As in daylight

and continuous audible
signal or flashing red
light
Start unloading! One short audible signal As in daylight
or continuous green light
Personnel deplaned! Thumbs up from the Two flashlight flashes from
transport pilot the transport pilot
5.23.9.2 General
Night vision goggles (NVG) have become a normal tool for helicopter operations at
night. The advantage of night vision goggles is that the crew may fly in
approximately the same manner as during daylight flights, while also being provided
with the cover of darkness.
5.23.10 Procedures within loading and unloading zones
5.23.10.1 It is important that lights are used as little as possible in a loading and unloading
zone during an NVG operation as they will disturb the helicopters crew. If
necessary, a lighting plan should be prepared in which conventional lights or IR
lights are used.
Red lights should be avoided as this is the colour reserved for marking obstacles to
air traffic. In addition, night vision goggles are sensitive to this colour. The
individual landing point may be marked with a light stick or flashlight.
If there is a risk of swirling snow, grass, sand or similar, the marking of the landing
points must be undertaken with a view to ensuring good reference points for the crew
during landing and take-off. In such cases, personnel at the landing point can be
good points of reference.
5.23.11 Planning of NVG operations
5.23.11.1 Generally, the planning of an NVG operation requires more detailed planning than a
similar operation undertaken during the day.
5.24 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR
OPERATIONAL DRIVING IN CONNECTION
WITH ESCORT SERVICES AND MILITARY
BODYGUARD SERVICES
5.24.1 General
5.24.1.1 These safety regulations apply to the following training/exercises and driving
course: VIP driver and tactical/technical driving course, as well as escort/user and
instructor course.
Safety regulations should be reviewed with students before driving lessons are
undertaken. Technical and tactical driving exercises should be practiced separately.
5.24.1.2 Responsibility
The responsible instructor should be approved by a competent authority (FMPA
290 Rev-04
The Norwegian Armed Forces Military Police Division). In addition, instructors

should be approved by the division commander. The number of students per
instructor should not usually exceed six. Students should be in possession of a Class
B driving licence (submitted before the driving course commences) and should have
been driving a vehicle for at least one year.
The driver is responsible in accordance with the provisions of the Road Traffic Act.
All vehicles used for training should be registered, inspected and approved in
accordance with the Road Traffic Act, and associated vehicle regulations. Exceptions
are made for vehicles that are to be used for barricade breeching exercises, as well as
vehicles to be used for specific exercises on a closed course. Such use should be
approved by the instructor in each individual case. Refer to item 2.2. Prior to the
commencement of exercises, vehicles should be inspected and emptied of all loose
equipment.
5.24.1.3 Vehicle inspection
The following points should be considered during vehicle inspection prior to
individual and high speed exercises:
- tyre condition, (air, wear and tear, rips, bulges, foreign objects in the rubber,
etc.)
- wheels (whole wheel, examine the underside of the wheel, wheel nuts firmly
tightened)
- spring units and shock absorbers (broken spring, possible leakage or wear to
shock absorbers)
- brakes (booster brake, constant braking effect, breakage/system leakage) Chap-5
- engine (be particularly aware of: oil level, oil leakage, any oil cooler, coolant,
leakage in the fuel system)
Before the exercise commences, students should undergo training in the correct
handling of damaged vehicles, accidents, actions in the event of a fire, environmental
damage, etc. The following should be in place at all stands:
- basic medical bag, medical orderly, woollen blanket, stretcher and evacuation
vehicle
- crowbar, sledgehammer, window breaker, seat belt cutter
- four 12 kg fire extinguishers (inspected)
- mobile phone and other means of communication
5.24.1.4 Exercises
All technical driving exercises should be undertaken on a closed course, cordoned
off from other traffic with traffic cones/mine tape. Separate zones may be designated
to provide students with the opportunity to practice on their own. These zones should
be similarly marked.
Parking, rescue and rest zones on the course should be defined and announced to all
participating personnel.
ONLY exercises that have been taught by the instructor may be practiced. In the case
of exercises that are complex in relation to drill, as well as exercises that require a
Rev-04 291
particularly high degree of focus on safety, the exercise should be performed by the
instructor before students attempt to carry it out.
The exercise should only be practiced when the instructor has given the order to do
so.
Students are required to demonstrate a sensible and mature attitude towards
adjustment of speed both within and outside of the training zone, among other
things.
Students and/or the instructor are responsible for aborting an exercise when a
hazardous situation arises.
5.24.2 Technical driving exercises
5.24.2.1 Technical driving
Technical driving, in this instance, refers to isolated exercises or training in which
focus is placed on the technical performance of the individual, e.g. driver training on
a closed course, cone driving, emergency braking, evasive manoeuvres, barricade
breeching, tilting, vehicle contact at speed, etc.
5.24.2.2 Joint provisions
- The instructor should ensure that students take regular breaks.
- All students should wear safety belts.
- Windows should be closed.
5.24.2.3 Driving exercises on an individual skills course
- Only one vehicle at a time on the training course.
- When braking exercises are being undertaken, the course should be free of
obstruction.
- Instructors should be positioned in such a way as to avoid exposing
themselves to any danger. Instructors should not normally stand on the
roadway.
- Students should observe any signs/signals given by the instructor.
- The return route and holding point should be defined in all exercises.
5.24.2.4 Exercises in barricade breeching, vehicle contact at speed and fishtailing
- Helmets and gloves should be worn.
- Any sharp objects should be removed from the vehicle.
- Speeds should normally not exceed 30 kph.
5.24.2.5 Driving on a high-speed course
Local safety instructions for the relevant course should be reviewed by the students
and the instructor.
5.24.2.6 Shooting exercises from a car and through the front windscreen
- The instructor should study the instructions for the relevant firing range.
- Students should use shooting goggles, gloves and a mask/hood to protect
themselves against glass splinters.
292 Rev-04
- Vehicles should usually remain stationary with the handbrake engaged and the
engine switched off.
- Ensure that the weapons trajectory is higher than the vehicles armour plating
because of the risk of a ricochet occurring (particularly important when using
an optical sight in which the line of sight is somewhat higher).
5.24.3 Tactical driving exercises
5.24.3.1 Tactical driving
Tactical driving, in this instance, refers to exercises or training in which focus is
placed on combined tactical actions, e.g. front/rear blocking, two-car driving,
positioning in connection with driving onto/off the road, for example, crossroads and
roundabouts, loading drill, impact drill, etc.
5.24.3.2 Military training zone
- The Road Traffic Act and local SO should be complied with.
- Exercises should be reviewed before being carried out.
- The instructor should set the rate of progress and pace.
- The instructor must notify of/mark roads upon which exercises are taking
place that may obstruct other traffic.
- Drivers should pay particular attention to loading drills and impact drills.
- Drivers should ensure that the handbrake is engaged before evacuating the
vehicle.
5.24.3.3 Outside military training zones Chap-5
- The instructor should ensure that traffic regulations are observed.
- The civilian police should be notified of any ongoing activity.
- In the case of exercises that require the particular attention of the general
public, vehicles should be marked as follows: Forsvaret velse pgr
(Armed Forces exercise in progress).
Rev-04 293
6 EXERCISES AND OTHER DUTY

6.1 CONDUCT OF PERSONNEL ON THE
GROUND WHEN TRACKED ARMOURED
VEHICLES PARTICIPATE IN EXERCISES
Figure: 6.1
Winter duty
6.1.1 In general
6.1.1.1 The following regulations apply when tracked armoured vehicles participate in
exercises in peacetime.
6.1.1.2 The personnel on the ground must leave cover, pits, dugouts, etc. and identify
themselves when such vehicles get closer than 50 metres. When personnel on the
ground get closer than 50 metres from the vehicle, the vehicle commander is to
observe from an open hatch. When training urban warfare (MOUT Military
Operations in Urban Terrain) where vehicles and personnel on foot interact special
alertness must be shown.
6.1.1.3 Sleeping underneath or closer than 20 metres behind or in front of tracked armoured
vehicles is prohibited (sleeping on the rear of the vehicle is allowed).
294 Rev-04
6.2 PERSONAL SAFETY IN THE USE OF

MATERIEL THAT CONTAINS OR MAY
CONTAIN RADIOACTIVE MATTER, OR
WHICH EMITS RADIATION DURING USE
Figure: 6.2
Observation post during active service
6.2.1 General Chap-6

Radiation is divided into ionising and non-ionising radiation. Ionising radiation
covers radiation from radioactive matter, x-rays and corpuscular radiation.
Non-ionising radiation covers optical radiation, radio frequency radiation, electric
and magnetic fields and ultrasonic radiation.
6.2.1.1 Radiation protection unit
Individual DIFs (Norwegian Armed Forces management unit) should have a
radiation protection unit. Radiation Protection Officers should be assigned clear
responsibility and authority to safeguard the DIFs statutory obligations in respect of
radiation protection. The following personnel are responsible for safeguarding
radiation protection in the Norwegian Armed Forces:
Radiation Protection Supervisor
This term should only be used in respect of the Norwegian Armed Forces' highest
designated responsible officer for radiation protection within the NDLO (Norwegian
Defence Logistics Organisation.
Radiation Protection Officer
This refers to a person responsible for the follow-up of radiation protection locally in
Rev-04 295
the DIFs. There may be a requirement for several Radiation Protection Officers at
each DIF. The responsibility and authority connected with the role should be
clarified in writing for each individual party. If the designation is used without any
addition, this will cover a higher level of responsibility for all radiation protection
within the relevant unit/division.
Radiation Protection Officer Laser
In English this is referred to as the Laser Safety Officer (LSO). The term is used in
both STANAG 3606 and the European Laser Standard IEC 60825 -1, with which the
Norwegian Armed Forces has a statutory obligation to comply. The Radiation
Protection Officer Laser is an officer whose responsibility is restricted to lasers.
Radiation Protection Officer Ionising radiation
This Radiation Protection Officer has a responsibility that is restricted to ionising
radiation (x-rays, radiological radiation, etc).
Radiation Protection Officer Radio frequency radiation
This Radiation Protection Officer has a responsibility that is restricted to radiation
from radar and communication equipment. This involves, among other things,
checking to ensure that approved materiel configurations, in accordance with the
provisions specified by the administration, are used in radio frequency radiation.
Radiation Protection Officers at DIF or in DIF divisions should have an overview of
all radiation sources within their respective areas of responsibility.
Users should not utilise any other radiation source other than those that have been
approved by the NDLO.
Operators of materiel that emits radiation should utilise such materiel in accordance
with the provisions specified by the NDLO.
Operators of radiation sources should have received the required training in the
application and use of the radiation source and should possess the necessary
authorisation.
The local Radiation Protection Supervisor should be immediately notified of any
incidents and accidents that occur during use of a radiation source. Reporting should
take place in accordance with item 1.1.6
6.2.2 Radiological sources
6.2.2.1 See item 6.5 Radiological sources and Appendix 11B Transport, handling and
storage of radioactive sources.
6.2.3 X-radiation from non-medical radiation sources
6.2.3.1 Operators of x-ray sources should have received basic training in the safe handling
of such sources and should be certified as operators.
6.2.3.2 Operators of x-ray sources should be authorised in the use of these.
6.2.4 Radio frequency radiation from radar and aerials in the frequency
range 10 KHz 300 GHz
Radar materiel and certain types of communication materiel emit radio waves contai-
ning a high energy content. If these waves strike personnel they will cause the irra-
diated body tissue to warm up. Injuries may occur to parts of the body that have a
296 Rev-04
poor capacity to conduct heat, especially the eyes and testicles. The extent of the in-
jury is dependent upon the intensity and duration of the radiation. The likelihood of
injury occurring diminishes as the distance from the radiation source increases but
will increase with a prolonged period of radiation. The marginal values for the stipu-
lation of danger zones are determined by the marginal values of the ICNIRP
(International Commission on Non-Ionising Radiation Protection). A competent aut-
hority should convert these marginal values into a safety template for radio fre-
quency radiation sources for the benefit of the user.
6.2.4.1 Only electromagnetic radiation systems that comply with approved configurations
stipulated by a competent authority may be used.
6.2.4.2 The applicable safety template for the individual radio frequency radiation source
should be followed.
6.2.4.3 Hazardous zones should be marked in accordance with the requirements of the
competent authority.
6.2.4.4 All personnel have a duty to demonstrate extreme caution when dealing with
materiel capable of emitting radio waves within this frequency range. Even if the
specified safety zones are observed, injuries may occur. Injury to hereditary material
may especially occur, even with an extremely low intensity, if irradiation is repeated
regularly over a period of time.
6.2.5 Laser radiation
6.2.5.1 Risks
Use of laser range finders and other laser-based equipment may result in eye injuries
to personnel who are struck by a laser beam, either directly or via a reflection.
Injuries may occur if the distance between the laser and the person is less than the
lasers safe working distance. With a sufficiently high level of intensity, a laser beam
can also cause serious burns to personnel (skin, clothing), as well as fire damage to
materiel. Exposure to ultraviolet laser radiation can result in sunburn or Chap-6
snow-blindness, while exposure to excessive doses of such radiation may increase
the risk of cancer.
Lasers in the visible range may also result in a risk of dazzling personnel performing
critical functions, e.g. aircraft pilots, vehicle and crane drivers.
6.2.5.2 Laser hazard classes
In accordance with the international standard IEC 60825-1, lasers are classified in
the following hazard classes, relative to the risks they represent:
Class 1: Lasers that do not represent any real risk of causing

eye injuries.
Class 1M: Lasers that are only hazardous if an individual looks
directly at the beam through a magnifying lens.
Class 2: Lasers with a wavelength in the visible part of the
spectrum, which will not cause injury providing the il-
luminated party shuts his/her eyes when he/she beco-
mes aware of being illuminated (natural blink reflex).
Class 2M: Lasers with a wavelength in the visible part of the
Rev-04 297
spectrum, which do not usually represent a hazard

because of the eyes' natural blink reflex (cf. Class 2),
but which can cause injury if an individual looks di-
rectly at the beam through a magnifying lens.
Class 3R: Lasers that represent a potential, but low risk of cau-
sing eye injuries. This means that personnel would
have to be extremely careless or unfortunate to recei-
ve a permanent eye injury. This class also includes so-
me of the laser pointers that are used in connection
with lectures, etc. Previous standards used hazard
class 3A, which in most areas now corresponds to the
new class 3R.
Class 3B: Lasers that represent a gradually increasing risk, from
low for effects down towards the limit of Class 3R
to extremely high, for effects up towards the limit of
Class 4. Lasers in this class will usually cause eye in-
juries if the individual receives the whole effect in
his/her eyes and the extent of the injury will grow as
the effect increases. Minor skin injuries may also
occur.
Class 4: Lasers that represent an ongoing and extremely high
risk of causing eye injuries. Such lasers may also cau-
se eye injury if an individual is looking at a diffuse re-
flection from the point where the beam strikes. This
may result in serious burns to the skin, clothing, etc.
- Lasers that have not been classified in accordance with IEC 60825-1 are
illegal, according to Norwegian law.
It is evident that only lasers in Class 1 may be used freely without any concern for a
risk of injury. Use of all other types of laser presupposes knowledge of the hazards
they represent and further assumes that personnel will implement the necessary
measures to prevent any party from being illuminated in a manner that could result in
injuries. This requires personnel to have a complete overview of areas in which
hazards may exist (risk zone) and that personnel situated in the risk zone use
approved protective equipment (e.g. protective goggles or protective filters on
observation equipment).
6.2.5.3 Safety distances and risk zones
All lasers, with the exception of lasers in hazard class 1, can cause eye injuries to
personnel located within a given safety distance. Equipment manuals often refer to
the safe distance from the naked eye as the NOHD (nominal ocular hazard distance).
If a laser beam is looked at through binoculars, the energy that strikes the eyes
increases and the safe distance will, roughly speaking, increase proportionally to the
size of the binoculars. Thus, the term EOHD (extended ocular hazard distance) is
often used. The safe distance is determined by the lasers characteristics, such as
power output, pulse energy, pulse rate, wavelength and beam divergence (discharge
298 Rev-04
angle). If several lasers are used simultaneously from the same platform, the safety
distance could increase even more. A list of lasers used by the Norwegian Armed
Forces, with specifications of hazard class and NOHD and EOHD values may be
found in Appendix 13.
- NOHD and EOHD for individual lasers, specified in Appendix 13, should be
complied with
Objects in the target area that have reflective surfaces can result in the hazardous
area expanding out of control insofar as the laser beams continue in directions other
than intended. Examples of such surfaces could be window glass, vehicle driving
mirrors and shiny metal components. Therefore, persons located in the hazardous
area will generally not be sufficiently protected by merely turning their faces away
or not looking at the laser. Such objects in the operating range should be removed,
painted with matt paint or covered, before any laser is used. If this is not possible or
desirable, each individual target should be closely observed so that reflective objects
are not targeted. If reflective objects are targeted, the hazardous area must be
expanded.
- To the extent that is practicable or necessary, reflective surfaces in training
zones should be covered or removed prior to a laser being used
The risk zone in an exercise is determined by the stipulated safety distances (NOHD,
EOHD) and the directions (sectors) that the laser beams are permitted to point
towards during the exercise. Consideration must also be given to the possibility that
the laser beam may strike reflective surfaces in the target area (see above). It is
imperative to safety that both laser operators and other involved personnel are
familiar with the size of the risk zone.
- The risk zones boundary should be clearly marked
6.2.5.4 Eye protection
Chap-6
If it is necessary for personnel to be located in a risk zone during an exercise, such
personnel must be equipped with adequate eye protection. This could be special
goggles with high optical attenuation of the relevant wavelengths or it may be
attenuation filters that are fitted to observation equipment (binoculars, etc). A table
showing the connection between optical attenuation and correction factors used to
calculate adjusted safety distances may be found in Appendix 13.
The Radiation Protection Officer Laser is responsible for approving the use of
goggles and optics in relation to the lasers and wavelengths being used.
Under no circumstances do operators have the authority to determine which goggles
should be used during a laser exercise in which personnel are located in an irradiated
area.
6.2.5.5 Protection to skin and clothing
When Class 4 lasers are being used, attention should be paid to the risk of burns to
the skin and the combustion of clothing or other articles.
In the case of lasers with a wavelength in the ultraviolet range (less than 400 nm), it
may be necessary to protect the skin in order to avoid sunburn, as well as an
increased risk of skin cancer.
Rev-04 299
6.2.5.6 Training grounds and approval

Laser should be primarily used at an approved location. Approval for the use of a
laser in exercises outside of approved firing ranges will be given by a Radiation
Protection Officer who possesses DIF approval.
6.2.5.7 Indoor use of a laser
The responsible instructor or user should ensure that laser use takes place in a safe
manner that does not result in third-party risk. Safety measures should be in
accordance with the laser class and should be approved by a person with competence
within laser safety.
Presentations
Authorised laser pointers used in connection with indoor presentations (e.g.
PowerPoint) should be of laser hazard classes 1, 2 or 3R.
6.2.5.8 Marking
Permanent training grounds should be marked with warning signs. In the case of
arbitrary use of training grounds, the exercise leader should assess, in consultation
with the local Radiation Protection Officer or Laser Safety Officer, the requirement
for and extent of markings, as well as the requirement to establish sentry posts. The
risk zones boundary should be clearly marked and all personnel involved should be
provided with information about this.
The Norwegian Defence Estates Agency is responsible for the appropriate marking
of established firing ranges.
6.2.5.9 Additional measures
When using lasers with a wavelength within the visible spectrum, an assessment of
risk should be carried out in respect of dazzling drivers, aircraft and marine pilots
and other personnel who are critically dependant upon their eyesight in order to
perform their duties, and the identified safety measures should be implemented.
Direct illumination by laser of sensitive optical and infrared detection equipment
such as a TV camera or light amplifier, should be avoided.
During use, it should be noted that a laser may also cause eye injuries to animals.
6.2.5.10 Accident procedures
If there are grounds to suspect that an individual has received an excessive dose of
laser light to the eyes, the person concerned should be taken immediately to a doctor.
In addition, the local Radiation Protection Officer or Laser Safety Officer should be
notified at once of what has occurred.
6.2.5.11 Supervision and inspection personnel
Line duties
The responsibility for safety in respect of the use of lasers is assigned to the
following personnel:
- Exercise leader
- Safety Officer
- Safety commander (when measuring from several stands simultaneously)
- Laser system operator
300 Rev-04
Exercise leader
A responsible exercise leader should be present at all times. In addition to the duties
specified in 1.1.5.2 when laser equipment is being used, the exercise leader should
ensure that:
- safety instructions for the use of laser light during training have been prepared
- safety instructions are complied with
If the exercise leader does not possess the required authorisation to prepare safety
instructions, he/she should delegate this task to an authorised adviser. The Radiation
Protection Officer may carry out this task if he/she has received the required training
or the task may be also be carried out by the Radiation Protection Officer Laser.
Safety officer (refer to item 1.1.5.4)
A safety officer should be assigned if the exercise leader is unable to participate in
the exercise. The safety officer may simultaneously take charge of another exercise
in which radiation sources are being used as a tool. The safety officer will take over
the duties of the exercise leader, in respect of the use of radiation sources at stands,
in accordance with the provisions of the exercise leader. The safety officer should
ascertain that safety measures specified in the training order have been implemented.
Safety commander (refer to item 1.1.5.4)
If radiation sources are being used simultaneously at several stands in such a way
that the exercise leader/safety officer is unable to maintain a safe level of control, a
safety commander should be assigned. The safety commander should coordinate
safety and notify personnel located within hazardous areas in which radiation
sources are being used.
Laser system operator
A laser system operator should: Chap-6
- have undertaken training within laser safety in accordance with item 6.2.5.13
- be an authorised user of the relevant laser system
- be familiar with safety instructions in respect of laser use during an exercise
- prior to use, ensure that optical equipment is not visibly damaged
- ensure that the laser is always directed towards the operating range when the
power source is connected, or directed towards the ground when it is not
appropriate for it to be directed towards the target area
- observe the target through the lasers sighting tools before activating the laser
- never activate the laser before the required warning has been issued to all
personnel involved in the exercise
- never point the beam towards any personnel located in the risk zone if there is
uncertainty as to whether such personnel are using mandatory eye protection
- during mandatory use of a laser in exercise mode, ensure that the laser has
been activated
Rev-04 301
6.2.5.12 Safety instructions

During training-based use of a laser, the exercise leader should ensure that safety
instructions have been prepared that have been incorporated in training orders or
standing orders, cf. item 6.2.5.11. All involved personnel should be familiarised with
the instructions and the instructions should contain the following information:
- Requirements for training of laser operators and other involved parties
- Types of laser systems being used and their hazard classes
- NOHD and any EOHD for the individual systems
- Authorised observation systems (binoculars, etc)
- Specification of risk zones
- Requirements for marking of risk zones
- Requirements for protective equipment (goggles, filters, etc) if personnel are
to be located within the risk zone, and verification of same
- How laser systems should be used (e.g. where it is permitted to direct the
beam, whether the exercise mode should be used, etc)
- How reflective objects should be handled (covering, etc)
- Warning procedures (how all involved personnel should be warned prior to
laser activation and how such personnel should be notified that lasers are no
longer in use, or permitted to be used)
- Access control (how unauthorised personnel and personnel not in possession
of approved protection are prevented entering the risk zone)
6.2.5.13 Training
The Norwegian Armed Forces Logistics Competence Centre at the Norwegian
Armed Forces Logistics College (FKL FLS) is responsible for all laser safety
training of operative users in the Norwegian Armed Forces.
Course for Radiation Protection Officers Laser. The Radiation Protection
Supervisor at the NDLO System Control division is responsible for the training of
Radiation Protection Officers Laser.
Course in laser safety for chief instructors. FKL FLS trains and approves chief
instructors Laser for the relevant divisions, according to requirements.
Basic course in laser safety for laser operators. Approved chief instructors Laser
are responsible for the training of laser operators in their own division in accordance
with the recommendations made by FKL FLS.
Authorisation course for laser systems. Individual divisions are responsible for
ensuring that the required materiel-specific training of laser operators, with focus on
the appropriate use and handling of the relevant laser materiel, is undertaken before
authorisation of the laser operator is issued.
- Laser materiel should not be used by personnel who have not received the
required training within laser safety and who are not authorised to use laser
materiel
302 Rev-04
6.2.6 FIBRE
6.2.6.1 General
Certain precautions should be taken when working with optical fibre cable.
Work can be divided into two phases:
1. Connection phase: in which the fibre is laid and then made ready for use by
connecting each end. This should be undertaken by trained personnel who are
knowledgeable about how fibres should be handled, as well as how tools
should be operated. There are several reasons for this. Equipment is expensive
and may be destroyed through improper use. An example of this is the Kevlar
fibre cap.
The actual fibre is made of glass. If a tip of this glass is broken off and cannot
be located, caution should be exercised. A small piece of glass of this nature
may, in certain cases, penetrate the skin and end up in the bloodstream. This
also sets requirements for how floor and table surfaces should be cleared after
fibre work has been carried out.
2. Utilisation phase: after the cable has been made operable and the equipment
connected, personnel should avoid looking directly into the fibre. In most
cases the light emitted by the fibre is infrared and therefore not visible to the
naked eye. Even though no light is visible, the radiant effect can be so severe
that serious eye injury may occur if personnel look directly into the fibre.
Fault localisation in fibres must ONLY be undertaken with a flashlight or with
suitable optic fibre illumination equipment.
Chap-6
Rev-04 303
6.3 RB 70 GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM
Figure: 6.3
Sight for RB 70
6.3.1 General
6.3.1.1 These provisions apply to the launching unit. The missile is guided by a laser beam
that is transmitted from the sight towards the target. Laser light is harmful to the eyes
in the respect of both direct illumination and reflection. In order to transmit laser
light, the laser diodes must be cooled. This is achieved with an R 22 cooling agent
(Difluorochloromethane CHF 2 C1).
6.3.2 Laser filters
6.3.2.1 In all exercises, with the exception of live exercises, a laser filter should be affixed to
the sight. The filter reduces the laser light by almost 100%.
6.3.3 Hazardous areas without laser filters
6.3.3.1 Hazardous areas for laser light cover (fig. 85):
a. a. Distance of 0-10 m: a cylinder with its axis in the line of sight and a radius
of 10 m.
b. b. Distance of 10-140 m: a shortened cone with its axis in the line of sight and
a semi-vertical angle of 40 degrees.
304 Rev-04
10 m
40 o
40 o
10 m
140 m
Figure: 6.4
Figure 85 Hazardous zone for laser light
6.4 USE OF SIMULATORS FROM SAAB

TRAINING SYSTEMS
6.4.1 General
6.4.1.1 Simulator materiel belonging to the Combat Training Centre/HTTS has been
procured in order to provide training for individuals and divisions in battle tactics.
The simulator materiel simulates firing by utilising laser light and radio signals. The
consequences for persons or objects that have been struck by laser light, or have
received a radio message giving notice of detonations from heavy weapons in the Chap-6
vicinity, will be communicated to individual parties via loudspeakers and/or in the
display panels of associated equipment.
All lasers being utilised are safe to the eyes (Class 1).
Safety provisions for the use of standard blank ammunition apply. Ear protection
should be worn when using pyrotechnics in anti-tank weapon simulators, main
artillery tanks and signal pens, and explosion marks. Ear protection should also be
worn when the sector charges simulator is fired (high sound level in the loudspeakers
marks the discharge).
In respect of the hazardous distance to be maintained from pyrotechnic ammunition
that simulates the report/flash/smoke from the individual simulator, the safety
provisions are the same as wartime provisions for the individual weapons that the
simulators replace. Exceptions to this are listed below together with safety provisions
for other types of marking ammunition.
A pyrotechnic holder, indicating that a vehicle has been hit (Target Effect Signature
Simulator TESS) is mounted on all armoured vehicles. The pyrotechnic (red
smoke) is automatically released when a vehicle has been hit.
After delivery, all pyrotechnic ammunition should be stored in separate cases when it
is not loaded in the simulators.
Rev-04 305
Detailed descriptions of individual simulators, and what must be taken into account
by users, are contained in the instructor manuals and user manuals (folders) that are
available via the Norwegian Armed Forces intranet.
6.4.2 User requirements
6.4.2.1 The supply and use of simulator material requires training by an approved (certified)
instructor. Instructor courses/certification are carried out under the direction of the
Combat Training Centre.
6.4.3 Specific provisions
6.4.3.1
Simulator for protective The simulator does NOT provide protection from
mask filter smoke/gas
ERYX weapon simulator Hazardous area to the rear of the simulator (when py-
rotechnics are being used): distance 5 m, angle 60 de-
grees
TOW weapon simulator Hazardous area to the rear of the simulator (when py-
rotechnics are being used): distance 5 m, angle 60 de-
grees
TESS on armoured vehic- Hazardous area surrounding the holder: distance 0.5
les m (vertically and horizontally)
Launching unit for explo- Hazardous area surrounding the holder: distance 0.5
sion marks m (vertically and horizontally)
Hand-held explosion Turn away from the body during use. The aluminium
marks tubing can be extremely hot (burn injuries/fire hazard)
Signal pen, explosion Turn away from the body during use. Ensure that no
marks obstacles are in the trajectory of the charge being fire-
d.
306 Rev-04
6.5 CBRN TRAINING, EXERCISES AND

OPERATIONS
Figure: 6.5
Chemical search with CAM (Chemical Agent Monitor)
6.5.1 Chemicals
6.5.1.1 Exercises with simulants, chemical combat agents
The simulants SIFON, SIFOS and SIFOX are being phased out of the Norwegian
Armed Forces but will continue to be used until stocks have run out.
More environmentally-friendly simulants have been introduced to replace SIFO
Chap-6
simulants. These are C-yellow (non-persistent nerve agent) and C-green (persistent
nerve agent).
C-red (mustard agent) is classified as hazardous to health and environmentally
dangerous, Class 9 hazardous goods with hazard number 90 and UN number 3082.
Exercises with these simulants should take place under the direction of an officer
who has met the competence requirements specified in the Norwegian Armed Forces
provisions for CBRN defence training.
6.5.1.2 Safety inspection of protective masks
- Prior to exercises with CS, personnel should have carried out an inspection of
protective masks to ensure that they are sealed properly
- In respect of officers in charge of safety controls of protective masks, as well
as training in eating and drinking in contaminated zones, it is sufficient that
such training is provided during basic officer training
- When checking that protective mask are sealed, the following concentration
calculations should be used:
- o Coarse control (low concentration): room volume (m3) / 30. Whole
tablets are always used and rounded down to the nearest whole tablet
Rev-04 307
(minimum 1 tablet)
- Fine control (high concentration): room volume (m3) / 4. In this case,
the tablet should be rounded up to the nearest whole tablet
- Protective mask inspection may be combined with a customisation exercise

(sniff test) in which soldiers may experience the effects of CS without a
protective mask for a maximum of 10 seconds, as well as eating and drinking
in a contaminated area. The concentration should be the same as for coarse
control (low concentration) and should not exceed 5 mg/m3
- All personnel should wear personal safety clothing when carrying out a mask
safety inspection. Ref. UD 4-3-11, appendix 1 for implementation
- The authorised exercise leader should ensure that civilian traffic is prevented
from entering an area in which a safety inspection is being carried out
- CS grenades should NOT be used in a closed room when carrying out a safety
inspection of protective masks
- Personnel who feel unwell or who possess a protective mask that is not
adequately sealed must immediately leave the room/tent in which the
adjustments are being carried out. Further adaptation and adjustment should
take place in fresh air before any new safety inspection is undertaken
- When a safety inspection is being carried out with CS gas, at least 2
instructors should be present, one located inside the room/tent and one located
outside
- If the safety inspection is being carried out at a permanent installation such as
a gas shed or similar, a poster, or similar type of information indicating the
concentration calculations, as well as the concentrations applicable to the
specific room, should be present
- At locations where safety inspection of protective masks is being carried out,
visible information should be posted that contains the following text:
In the case of low concentrations, the following activities may be carried out:
- sniff test
- eating and drinking
- filter cartridge exchange
- personal washing
- other tasks that personnel wish to practice in a contaminated zone, e.g.:
communication, weapon cleaning, repairs, maintenance
- ensure that the mask is sealed before using a high concentration
In the case of high concentrations, activity is restricted to:
- ensuring that masks are sealed
This should be undertaken while wearing a safety mask and any protective clothing
by performing the following exercises:
308 Rev-04
- 10 knee bends, press-ups, counter-movement jumps and back stretches

6.5.1.3 Use of CS during training and exercises
- Use of CS must not take place:
- closer than 800 m in a downwind direction to civilian buildings or
locations at which civilians usually assemble
- closer than 500 m in a downwind direction to aircraft or helicopter
landing grounds when flight operations are in progress
- closer than 500 m from operational facilities at air control radar and
radio stations
- in closed rooms, tents or vehicles (with the exception of safety control)
- when CS grenades are being used, the reciprocal distance should be at
least 20 m, positioned crosswise to the wind direction. Wind direction
may be verified with an ordinary smoke canister
- During exercises in which CS is being used, the responsible exercise leader

should ensure that participating personnel are:
- fully briefed that CS may be used
- aware of the effects of CS and the measures to be implemented if
extreme discomfort should occur
- trained in the use of a protective mask that has been adjusted and
inspected
- equipped with a protective mask that is being carried in the standby
position
- Before the exercise, each individual should check that the mask is undamaged Chap-6
and working properly by holding the mask filters inhalation opening and
breathing in (the mask should adhere itself to the face without air filtering in).
Filter cartridges should be checked and any cartridges displaying significant
breathing resistance should be replaced
- The responsible exercise leader should ensure that civilian traffic is prevented
from entering a contaminated zone, as well as checking that drivers of military
vehicles are wearing protective masks before passing through the zone, and
that the vehicle's speed is reduced sufficiently to ensure safe transit
- Personnel displaying strong signs of discomfort must be helped out of the
contaminated zone as soon as possible and prevented from removing the
protective mask before an uncontaminated zone has been reached. Personnel
who have heavy colds, asthma, bronchial disorders, are pregnant, or who
display diminished well-being, should not be exposed to CS during field
exercises
- During exercises in darkness in which CS is being used, or when using CS
grenades as booby traps, or in connection with demolition exercises, the
responsible exercise leader/instructor should particularly ensure that the
above-mentioned safety regulations are complied with. CS should not be used
Rev-04 309
if exercise conditions are unsuitable

6.5.1.4 Use of Simultitox training kit
- Simultitox is being phased out of the Norwegian Armed Forces. The system
will be used until there is no further ammunition
- The safety distance for operators is, respectively, 8 metres to the rear of the
system and 15 metres to the side
- The safety distance for other personnel is the same as for the operator and
personnel are not permitted to locate themselves in front of the system during
loading and firing
- The system should be securely fastened to the ground with the 6
accompanying steel pins
- The system may be used while rigidly mounted to a ton army trailer with
fasteners. Due to the trajectory of the plastic bullet and the height of the
detonation, the system should be placed horizontally
- Personnel in the line of fire should be protected by splinter-proof cover or be
adequately protected in some other way against plastic splinters that can range
in size from 1-50 square centimetres
- Plastic bullets for loading into a Simultitox training kit should be classified as
ammunition
6.5.2 Radiological
6.5.2.1 During peacetime, the Norwegian Armed Forces is subject to national laws and
provisions relating to exposure to ionising radiation. Moreover, Norwegian Armed
Forces personnel are subject to the same provisions as the rest of the population and
should not be exposed to more than 1mSv per year beyond normal background
radiation.
When handling radioactive sources, materiel containing radioactive sources or
materiel that can produce radioactive emissions, the Norwegian Armed Forces
should abide by national provisions and regulations, together with the materiels
separate user guide and safety provisions.
Further reference may be made to:
- Regulations on radiation protection and use of radiation (radiation
regulations)
- Provisions for the protection of personnel against ionising radiation
- Provisions for use of the Norwegian Armed Forces dose metering system for
ionising radiation
- UD 2-1, Appendix 11B: Transport, handling and storage of radioactive
sources
6.5.3 Toxic industrial materials
6.5.3.1 Statutory civilian law and civilian provisions apply in respect of approval for
Norwegian Armed Forces personnel assigned to operate in an environment that has
310 Rev-04
been contaminated by toxic industrial materials. Civilian requirements should be

complied with in relation to measures and routines for the maintenance and
inspection of every type of materiel.
6.5.4 Live Agent Training
6.5.4.1 Practice and training with genuine chemical combat agents and radiological sources
is restricted to Norwegian Armed Forces CBRN specialists.
The Norwegian Armed Forces does not have stocks of such agents and must
therefore enter into the necessary agreement, in each individual case, with training
zones located abroad.
For exercises involving the use of genuine chemical combat agents, personnel should
carry out a safety control of their personal protective masks (independently of the
annual inspection). Safety clothing designated for exercises should NOT be used
during Live Agent Training.
Blood tests and corresponding analyses should be carried out on personnel before
and after such exercises and training, in order to verify whether any personnel have
been exposed to a combat agent.
Materiel to be used for search and detection, for example, should be in a reasonable
condition.
The Norwegian Armed Forces ABC School (FABCS) should be consulted prior to
the implementation of Live Agent Training.
6.5.5 Routines and procedures for the transportation of sample materials for
analysis and verification
6.5.5.1 Reference should be made to:
Directive for the protection of personnel against ABC threats and threats classified
as Release(s) other than Attack (ROTA) during international operations'.
6.6 DISINFECTION OF DRINKING WATER IN Chap-6
THE FIELD
6.6.1 General
6.6.1.1 Military personnel in the field should be supplied with drinking water of good
hygienic quality. Drinking water in the field should be approved by a veterinary,
where practicable. When approved bottled water is not being used, drinking water
should be disinfected with a chlorine preparation approved by the Norwegian
Defence Medical Service.
The chlorine additive destroys pathogenic microbes that are found in water sources
and ensures that the quality of the water will not deteriorate during storage in a
sealed container. Bottled water will last for one day after it has been opened. This
may be extended by adding chlorine.
During peacetime, drinking water should be disinfected with chlorine so that after 30
minutes the water has a free chlorine content that is at least 0.5 mg per litre.
During international operations/crises/war, drinking water should contain 1 mg of
free chlorine per litre after 30 minutes of disinfection.
Rev-04 311
When conditions require personnel to be supplied with water from a natural source,
which has not been approved by a veterinary, the drinking water should be boiled for
at least 10 minutes and/or filtered through an MSR water purifier and then
disinfected in a canteen/camelback.
To disinfect water in a canteen/camelback, 1 chlorine tablet should be added to 1
litre of water. After 30 minutes the water is ready for use. If the water is muddy or
yellowish brown in colour, 2 disinfection tablets per litre should be used. After use,
canteens/camelbacks should be rinsed with chlorinated water and placed so that the
interior will dry completely.
Water disinfection tablets, single-use, chlorine tablets foil packs of 10
(6850-25-148-8052) may be requisitioned from the NDLO.
Chlorine measuring may be carried out by a veterinary or a water purifying team.
6.7 CLOSE COMBAT
Figure: 6.6
Soldier prepared for training in close combat
6.7.1 General
6.7.1.1 Instruction and training in close combat should be carried out by a qualified
instructor who has undertaken and passed Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3 of the
Instructors Close Combat Course after 2006, under the direction of a competent
authority, or a separate instructors course from the Army War College after 2001.
In accordance with new provisions, previous courses undertaken at BS, KS, or
312 Rev-04
separate instructors courses undertaken before 2001 do not give authorisation to

provide instruction in military close combat.
Regular serving military personnel who have undertaken a close combat course prior
to 2001 may be used as assistant instructors, under the direction of a qualified
instructor.
Civilian instructors who have undertaken civilian courses and who possess civilian
grades or certifications do not have the authority to provide instruction in military
close combat.
Close combat instructor Level 1:
The instructor may independently provide education, training and practice in his/her
own division within the limits of the company.
Level 1 approval will be given after the Close Combat Instructors Course Level 1
has been completed and passed under the direction of a competent authority.
The instructor should have attained a satisfactory level of knowledge, proficiency
and conduct in order to independently provide education, training and practice in
his/her own division within the limits of the company.
The instructor may independently provide education, training and practice in his/her
own division within the limits of the company, as well as approving new instructors
for Level 1 under the direction of a competent authority.
and Level 2 has been completed and passed under the direction of a competent
authority, as well as a minimum of two years working as a Level 1 instructor within
the instructors own division.
The instructor should have attained a satisfactory level of knowledge, proficiency
and conduct in order to independently provide education, training and practice in Chap-6
his/her own division within the limits of the company, as well as the authority to
certify new instructors to Level 1.
and Level 2 has been completed and passed, as well as a total minimum of 5 years
working as an instructor at Level 1 and 2. Level 3 approval will be given upon
separate application and according to requirements.
The instructor should undertake training, certification and approval of new
instructors to Level 1 and 2, together with development of the principles and tactics
of combat technique, development of the rules of combat, professional feedback and
advice.
6.7.2 Weapon combat
6.7.2.1 It is not permitted to practice close combat blocking and impact techniques with
weapons as this may result in injury to personnel or damage to weapons. Dummy
weapons should be used for training in blocking and impact techniques with
weapons.
Rev-04 313
Sharp weapons may be used for sparring when an opponent possesses an impact
weapon that does not damage the sharp weapon, for example, light training batons or
light wooden canes.
During combined SIBO and close combat training and exercises, sharp weapons may
be used. In this respect, combatants should switch to dummy weapons if weapons are
to be used for blocking and impact techniques at some point.
Safety provisions for SIBO and Simunition must be viewed from the perspective of
the safety provisions for close combat during training and practice in which these
combat techniques and ammunition are being used.
When there is a requirement to practice techniques in which the head and throat are
the targets, a weapon may be used against an opponent who is not using protective
gear, providing the weapon does not come into direct contact with the opponent. The
techniques aim to achieve correct implementation but the distance is regulated in
order to avoid bodily contact.
Close combat with dummy weapons should be adapted to the appropriate level of
proficiency, as well as available protective gear.
It is not permitted to use dummy bayonets in close combat. Dummy bayonets refer
to bayonets without sheaths.
During training in attack and defence against pointed weapons such as bayonets,
knives, sharp objects, etc, dummy rubber knives or thick felt pens with blunt tips
(Penol 100 or similar) should be used as offensive weapons. Protective goggles
(combat goggles or similar) and mouth guards should be worn.
The upper body, arms and legs should be the primary targets of offensive bayonet
and knife techniques. Offensive bayonet and knife techniques should not be used
towards the head, throat and neck.
If it is necessary to practice offensive bayonet and knife techniques with the head,
throat and neck as targets, such training should be carried out with the close combat
dummy Poor Bob, or similar.
6.7.3 Unarmed combat
6.7.3.1 Falling, throwing and tripping techniques should be practiced without a helmet, with
a thorough warm-up, and at an appropriate level of progression, because of the risk
of neck injury. Helmets may be used in accordance with the instructors assessment
of the level of proficiency, but not before more advanced techniques have been
mastered.
Sparring with blows, kicks and impact techniques may be practiced without
protective gear if the intensity level is low and is focused on technical performance.
Mouth guards should be used.
High intensity sparring and vigorous techniques should only be practiced with
personnel who have reached an advanced and experienced level. It is the
responsibility of the instructor to assess whether an individual is qualified for this.
With high intensity sparring and vigorous techniques, the whole body may be used
as a target. All strikes, kicks and blows to the head and neck should be controlled
and primarily used to indicate that an opponents guard is deficient. In this respect,
protective gear should be used comprising, as a minimum, boxing helmet, gloves,
314 Rev-04
jockstrap and pads. The degree of intensity should be adapted to the level of
proficiency.
6.7.4 Close combat shooting
6.7.4.1 When carrying out a combination of close combat and shooting exercises with live
ammunition, it is the duty of the exercise leader to have familiarised him/herself with
the safety regulations for the relevant firearms and ammunition types.
The exercise leader is responsible for instructing the firing commander in respect of
the number of safety controllers required to ensure that exercises may be carried out
with a reasonable degree of safety.
The training ground with stands should be divided into clearly marked zones, e.g.
Zone 1 shooting, Zone 2 close combat, Zone 3 running.
Semi-loaded weapons are permitted. It is also permitted to carry live ammunition
magazines in a GRU/combat vest. Safety controllers should particularly ensure that
weapons are not loaded until gunners are in position and have received the command
to FIRE from the firing range commander.
6.7.5 Exercise leaders (instructors) duties
6.7.5.1 The exercise leader has a duty to familiarise him/herself with safety regulations for
individual exercises. He/she is also responsible for ensuring that participating
personnel are briefed about safety provisions.
6.7.5.2 Before exercises are performed vigorously and at a high pace, the exercise leader
should ensure that all participants have received detailed instruction and practice in
individual strikes, kicks, holds and weapon techniques. The exercise leader should
point out which actions should be performed with caution. In the case of exercises in
which interaction with opponents is required, similar provisions apply to the
opponents conduct. During such exercises, collaboration should be emphasised. A
separate plan for mock victim interplay should be prepared for all bilateral close
combat courses and exercises.
Chap-6
6.7.5.3 The exercise leader should select stands for these exercises with a view to achieving
a good overview so that injuries from falling, etc, may be avoided.
6.7.5.4 Close combat training aims to develop the individuals capacity for controlled
aggression. Participants unable to control their aggression will be ordered to
withdraw
6.7.5.5 The exercise leader should ensure that suitable protective gear is available and in an
approved condition before all training and practice commences. Suitable protective
gear should be used when high intensity training and practice is being undertaken.
Mouth guards should always be used during close combat activity, regardless of the
degree of intensity and proficiency level.
6.7.5.6 Close combat is permitted during bilateral field duty exercises if this is a part of the
exercise programme and is under the direction of a qualified close combat instructor.
During bilateral close combat training, mock victims should have attained, as far as
is practicable, a satisfactory and similar degree of physical fitness to the combatants.
In the case of physically demanding positions, mock victims should be able to
double up and rotate at frequent intervals.
Rev-04 315
During bilateral close combat training, the first pupil chosen to carry out a close
combat element should be the pupil who is assumed to be the most proficient of all
the participating combatants. This will provide the instructor with a starting point
upon which to modify the close combat trainings technical content, progression and
level of intensity.
6.7.5.7 Stretchers, blankets, medical bag no. 1 or larger, ice bags, tape, as well as a medical
vehicle, should be in place during close combat training.
6.8 URBAN WARFARE TRAINING (SIBO)
Figure: 6.7
Combat training in a urban area
6.8.1 General
6.8.1.1 During bilateral exercises in buildings in which blank ammunition is being used,
protective goggles or protective masks should be worn. Helmets should be worn in
exercises that involve entering and clearing buildings.
When using the DM 78 practice hand grenade, FlashBang and drill hand grenade,
extreme care should be exercised to prevent personnel from becoming injured as a
result of being struck by grenades. When using FlashBang, under no circumstances
should mock victims be lying down. Refer to item 3.8.9
During exercises in ascending/descending from the 3rd floor or higher, or at heights
above five metres, personnel should be secured from above. Fastenings for rope
anchors during ascent/descent should be approved by the exercise leader or qualified
316 Rev-04
personell approved by the exercise leader. When using a building for

ascending/descending exercises, the ground surrounding the house should be made
of a shock-absorbing material such as sand, rubber, bark or grass.
Improvised ladders, or similar aids, should be approved by the exercise leader or
qualified personell approved by the exercise leader.
Stretchers, blankets, medical bag no. 1 and a medical vehicle should be in place
during exercises.
SIBO installations should have their own safety instructions.
The following regulations apply during co-training of foot and armoured vehicle
personnel:
- All personnel in vehicles and on the ground must take exceptional care to
avoid accidents
- Dead zones to the side and rear of vehicles should be particularly avoided.
The distance from a vehicle to a fixed object may be a minimum of 5 metres
providing eye contact is established between personnel on the ground and the
vehicles crew (ref. Leopard 2 drill book, p.11). If eye contact is not
established, the minimum distance should be 10 metres
- The vehicle must not turn or drive forwards or backwards without the driver,
tank commander or any rear observer (applies to tracked armoured vehicles)
having ascertained that this is possible (e.g. avoid the risk of personnel located
between the vehicle and buildings becoming trapped)
- During SIBO training, an exception is made to item 5.13.1.3, insofar as the
rear door should remain closed during vehicle movement. However, personnel
should not enter or leave the vehicle while it is in motion.
In addition, the provisions in the following chapters/items are emphasised:
Chap-6
Chapter Item
3 "Firing of all weapons" Item 3.4.4 Regulations for use of blank ammunition in
weapons up to and including 12.7 mm. Item
3.8.6.1Hazardous area during use of hand grenades.
Item 3.5.4 Warning flare
5 "Driving and transpor- Item 5.11.1.3 Movement with armoured vehicles.
tation services" Item 5.11.2 Movement with CV9030N/F1
Rev-04 317
6.9 MOUNTAIN CLIMBING AND PASSAGE

ACROSS DIFFICULT TERRAIN
Figure: 6.8
Rappelling down a precipice
6.9.1 General
6.9.1.1 The following provisions apply to exercises in mountainous and difficult terrain in
which there is a risk of rockfalls and landslides, or in which special materiel is
required in order to gain passage. The provisions also apply to climbing in snow and
ice-covered mountainous terrain, as well as passage across glaciers. Respective
division commanders will determine, in accordance with the foregoing definition,
when the following provisions should be applied.
6.9.1.2 Exercises of this nature should be led by a qualified officer. In this respect, it is
understood that qualified means the relevant officer has undergone a
mountaineering course or has received similar specialised training, and, moreover,
the relevant division commander regards the officer as being qualified to take
command of such exercises.
6.9.2 The exercise leaders duties
6.9.2.1 The exercise leader should have familiarised him/herself with the applicable safety
regulations for mountain climbing exercises and is responsible for ensuring that
participating personnel are also familiar with safety regulations. Personnel should be
briefed about rockfalls and landslides so that unnecessary triggering can be avoided
and, moreover, be briefed about the appropriate actions to be taken if a difficult
situation should arise. The exercise leader is also responsible for ensuring that
climbing exercises do not commence before all participants have been provided with
instruction in mountain climbing techniques.
6.9.2.2 The exercise leader is responsible for the following safety measures:
- inspection of ropes and other climbing equipment prior to use
318 Rev-04
- ensuring that the required first aid equipment is available

- ensuring that measures are in place for any necessary evacuation of injured
personnel
- ensuring that the following provisions for undertaking mountain climbing are
observed
6.9.2.3 Mountain climbing exercises and passage across difficult terrain should be
thoroughly prepared and reconnoitred.
6.9.3 Implementation
6.9.3.1 During mountain climbing exercises, the minimum number of persons working
together should be two.
6.9.3.2 The following separate provisions should be observed during climbing exercises:
- during traversing or zigzagging with fixed ropes, personnel should be secured
by a carabiner attached to the rope if the terrain is steep and there is a
significant drop beneath the rope
- during zip lining or climbing with one or more ropes across a ravine or
waterway, an extra safety rope should be used
- when zip lining across a ravine or waterway, as well as rope descent, refer to
items 6.9.4 to item 6.9.6 .
6.9.3.3 During passage across a glacier, ropes and ice-axes should be used to secure
personnel. All personnel should use crampons. If possible, a mountain guide or local
expert should be used as a guide. Information from a local expert should always be
obtained before undertaking any passage across a glacier.
6.9.3.4 Suitable footwear and approved helmets should be used for mountain climbing
exercises, as well as ropes of the appropriate type and dimension.
6.9.3.5 During exercises of this nature, which are not undertaken in connection with a
Chap-6
garrison, at least one emergency ration per participant should always be carried, as
well as any other equipment that will prepare personnel for a stay in the mountains.
6.9.4 Zip lining across ravines
6.9.4.1 The height from the zip line to the base of the ravine should not be higher than is
necessary to carry out the exercise efficiently.
6.9.4.2 Prior to commencing the exercise, the exercise leader should:
- check that ropes and all other materiel being used in the exercise are in a
reasonable condition
- check that the zip line is tightly stretched and securely fastened ensure that
the stretcher is securely fastened to the zip line
- check that hauling ropes are securely fastened
- check that suspension ropes (stretcher straps) are securely fastened to the
stretchers legs, as well as ascertaining that the knots in the stretchers legs are
tight
- if pitons are being used, check that the pitons are securely lashed through the
Rev-04 319
stretchers legs
6.9.4.3 For each zip lining exercise, the exercise leader should:
- check zip line fastenings and fasten again, if necessary
- check that suspension ropes (stretcher straps) are securely fastened to the
stretchers
If pitons are being used, the fastenings for these through the stretchers legs should
be checked. If wooden pitons are being used, check and change, if necessary (use
hard, dry wood).
6.9.5 Zip lining across waterways
6.9.5.1 Inspection of materiel before and during exercises should take place in accordance
with items 6.9.4.2 and 6.9.4.3.
6.9.5.2 Before the exercise commences, the exercise leader should additionally ensure that:
- a rescue boat or raft is in place at the zip lining location, manned for rowing or
poling. The boat (raft) should be tied to land about 10 m below the zip lining
location. During zip lining above stagnant water (small ponds or similar) the
boat (raft) should be tied to land at the zip lining location. The crew of the
boat (raft) should comprise at least one competent swimmer, while the rest of
the crew should be capable of swimming. The crew of the boat (raft) should
be clad according to the time of year but should, however, be ready to jump
into the water at short notice. In addition, the boat (raft) should contain two
life jackets (life belts), two 15 m lines and one boat hook
- A swimming station comprising a minimum of two competent swimmers
should be situated on the opposite bank to where the boat (raft) is located
- A lifeline should be suspended downstream across the river. During zip lining
above stagnant water (small ponds or similar), the lifeline should be placed
directly beneath the zip line
- One lifeline should be secured to the waist of the soldier undertaking the zip
lining exercise. One station on land should let out the line as the soldier is zip
lining and should be ready to haul the soldier if he/she falls into the water
6.9.6 Rope descent
6.9.6.1 Rope descent should not take place on cliffs that are more than 10 m high. All
personnel participating in the exercise should wear helmets.
6.9.6.2 Before the exercise commences, the exercise leader should:
- check that all ropes and other materiel being used in the exercise are in a
reasonable condition
- ensure that knots and hitches fastening the safety rope to the stretcher are
properly secured
- ensure that knots and hitches fastening the descent rope to the stretcher, as
well as the Constalita (jury) knot, are properly secured
- ensure that spectators (military and civilian) remain at a safe distance (rope
cordon or sentry to be established)
320 Rev-04
- ensure that soldiers guide the descent rope and safety rope in the manner
specified in the instructions. An experienced officer should particularly ensure
that this takes place during the whole exercise and offer assistance, if
necessary
- ascertain that the soldier directing the rope descent understands the orders
being issued
- ensure that a stretcher team with first aid equipment is positioned beneath the
location where the stretcher descent is being carried out
- ensure that all personnel are wearing helmets
- ensure that the rope anchors are satisfactorily secured
6.9.6.3 Rope descent should be carried out in the following way:
- a strong rope is tied to an army stretcher
- a safety rope is tied to the stretcher in the same way as the descent rope
(without a Constalita (jury) knot)
- the soldier being transported with the stretcher, sits in the Constalita (jury)
knot
- the descent rope (which is tied to the stretcher) and the safety rope are
wrapped around each of the solid rope anchors (wood, piton, etc) at a certain
distance from the cliff
- the first member of the stretcher team (or the team leader) should remain at
the edge in order to direct the activity. The first member is secured with
his/her own rope. This is belayed to a different rope anchor than that to which
the descent rope and safety rope for the stretcher/third member have been
belayed. The first member of the stretcher team is secured in a firemans chair
Chap-6
and belayed with a fixed knot/hitch. The third member of the stretcher party
accompanies the stretcher. The other members of the stretcher team take hold
of the descent rope and safety rope and release them on the command of the
first member (cf. UD 4-5).
Figure: 6.9
Figure 93 Special knot used in rope descent
Rev-04 321
6.10 SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN SETTING

DOWN FROM A HELICOPTER VIA RAPPEL,
FAST ROPE, SPIE PICKUP AND HELOCAST
Figure: 6.10
Training with a fast rope
6.10.1 General responsibility

6.10.1.1 Responsibility for implementation lies with the helicopter coordinator (HLCO) who
is responsible for ensuring that personnel possess the required knowledge for the
exercise and use safety equipment of a satisfactory standard. Personnel should have
undertaken static execution of techniques and procedures before any practical setting
down manoeuvre is undertaken.
All personnel should wear helmets and gloves.
In addition to this provision, the guidelines described in HFL 191 Special
Helicopter Operations in the Royal Norwegian Air Force and Provisions for
Military Aviation BML-100 apply.
6.10.2 Rappelling
6.10.2.1 Before practical implementation is undertaken, the manoeuvre should be carried out
vertically. As a minimum, a climbing harness with a belaying device or a Rapell 8
should be used. When utilising the apparatus, or similar equipment, for the first time,
personnel should be secured from below.
322 Rev-04
For personnel undergoing training, the first two set downs should be carried out with
personnel secured from below while the helicopter is hovering. Subsequent set
downs may be undertaken without personnel being secured from below. During
practical setting down, a belaying device should be used. When using a Rapell 8, a
friction knot should be used for securing personnel.
6.10.3 Fast rope
6.10.3.1 Before practical implementation, the manoeuvre should be practiced with a fast rope
apparatus, or similar. Personnel should not use footwear containing loops. If
footwear contains loops these should be covered in duck tape, leggings, or similar.
For personnel undergoing training, the first two set downs should be undertaken
while the helicopter is hovering.
Set downs via fast rope are an extremely high risk activity. Therefore, personnel
undergoing basic training are NOT permitted to participate in this method of
setting down.
6.10.4 Spie pickup
6.10.4.1 Personnel should use a climbing harness and backup protection. Personnel should be
coordinated and familiar with procedures, signs and signals.
6.10.5 Helocast
6.10.5.1 Personnel should be secured by a sling mounted to the helicopter's deck. As a
minimum, personnel should hold the sling until the helicopter has reduced its speed
to the speed of the helocast.
When a helocast is situated in water, life jackets should be worn.
Chap-6
Rev-04 323
6.11 CLIMATE-RELATED INJURIES
Figure: 6.11
Service in cold regions
6.11.1 General
6.11.1.1 Service that is undertaken in areas with high and low temperatures represents a
health hazard to Norwegian Armed Forces personnel. The prevention of
climate-related injuries is the responsibility of the officer in charge. General
prevention techniques and first aid for climate-related injuries are described in
UD4-1-5.
Factors such as exposure time, degree of physical activity, fluid consumption/access,
humidity and acclimatisation must be included in the assessment, together with
additional safety risks.
The divisions doctor has overall medical responsibility and should be included in
any such assessment. The officer is responsible for follow-up and inspection of the
team and for ensuring that necessary measures have been implemented to prevent
injuries from occurring.
6.11.2 Special conditions in high temperatures
6.11.2.1 In order to prevent heat exhaustion and heatstroke, attention should be paid to the
temperature in respect of the amount of clothing being worn, as well as the type of
physical activity being undertaken. When the daytime temperature is expected to
exceed 25 degrees, vigorous physical activity should be adapted to the temperature.
Such physical activity should be restricted to the time of day when the temperature is
at its lowest (e.g. before 10.00 or after 16.00). Personnel should have access to
sufficient quantities of electrolyte drinks.
Special consideration should be given in respect of deployment to international
operations or training/exercises in different climatic zones. In order to reduce the
health hazard, physical activity should be restricted in the period immediately
324 Rev-04
following deployment so that the body may become acclimatised. This should take
place in consultation with a responsible doctor.
Restrictions to physical activities such as exercises and competitive events are
described in item 6.12.6.
6.11.3 Special conditions in low temperatures
Figure: 6.12 Chap-6

Total control through the use of the telemark technique
6.11.3.1 Officer should ensure that the team is adequately dressed for the conditions. In
temperatures below minus 10 degrees Celsius, when there is low temperature
combined with wind (a wind chill factor of minus 10 degrees, or colder) and/or when
there is a low temperature in combination with a high degree of humidity,
inter-soldier inspection should be implemented and followed up.
Particular attention should be paid to the prevention of injuries to the extremities. In
the case of a stay of more than one day in a cold and damp environment, a daily foot
inspection should be carried out to check for signs of trench foot.
In the case of frostbite, the measures described in UD 4-1-5 should be implemented.
This contains an outline of frostbite symptoms and the immediate measures to be
taken in order to treat such symptoms.
Concise information may also be found in the safety handbook.
Competitive events in cold weather are described in item 6.12.6.
Rev-04 325
Calm Light breeze Fresh breeze High wind

5 m/sek 10 m/sek 15 m/sek
o
0
o
-10
o
-20
o
-30
o
-40
o
-50
o
-60
The Normogrammet shows how wind chill effect on open skin increases
when the wind speed is increasing
Figure: 6.13
Figure 91 Wind chill factor table
6.11.4 Special conditions in UV radiation (sunlight)

6.11.4.1 Exposure to sunlight results in a risk of damage to the skin (skin burns/skin cancer)
and eyes (snow-blindness). Such injuries should be prevented. When a soldier is
exposed to strong sunlight, all exposed skin should be protected. This means that the
skin should be either covered or a sun cream with a high protection factor should be
used. When sunlight, light clouds or mist is present and soldiers are assembled over a
long period (more than 2 hours) on reflective surfaces such as snow, sand or water,
sunglasses should be worn.
326 Rev-04
6.12 SPORTS FACILITIES AND SPORTS EVENTS

6.12.1 Assault courses and steeplechases
Figure: 6.14
Crossing by rope during an assault course
6.12.1.1 Assault courses that have been provided for competitive events in accordance with
the applicable regulations for a military pentathlon should be constructed in
accordance with the regulations of the International Military Sports Council, and in
accordance with approved designs. Adaptation of such assault courses is not
permitted. Special course instructions are not required.
Competitive assault courses should be approved and registered at the Norwegian Chap-6
School of Sports Sciences/Norwegian Armed Forces Institute (NIH/F).
6.12.1.2 Permanent assault course facilities of a different type that have been made available
for education/training and internal competitive events outside of the previously
mentioned CISM facility should be submitted for approval to the relevant branch of
the military services. Instructions should be prepared for the use of such courses.
Obstacles in other field exercises and competitive events should be approved by the
relevant division commander/exercise leader. General safety regulations for assault
courses/steeplechases should be complied with.
6.12.1.3 The construction leader (Norwegian Defence Estates Agency/other) is responsible
for ensuring that the course is constructed to a satisfactory standard.
6.12.1.4 Course instructions for non-CISM assault courses should contain provisions
regarding:
- exposed locations on the assault course requiring the implementation of
special measures. This may include signs or posters warning of the exposed
locations
- placement of medical personnel and medical materiel and any other personnel
and materiel regarded as necessary to ensure that the assault course may be
Rev-04 327
used with a reasonable degree of safety

- instructions for using the course. The course instructions should contain
detailed instructions in respect of the appropriate way of crossing the relevant
obstacles
6.12.1.5 The exercise leaders duties. The exercise leader should have previously familiarised
him/herself with safety regulations regarding assault courses, as well as the relevant
course instructions. Before the exercise commences, the exercise leader should check
that all materiel used on the assault course (ropes, trestles, etc) is in a sound
condition and in accordance with regulations, and that landing pits, etc, have been
made ready. The exercise leader should assess whether any special conditions (icing,
slippery woodwork, poor visibility, etc) could make it necessary to omit (cordon off)
certain obstacles, as well as the possible postponement of course activity. The
exercise leader should also ensure that the necessary medical materiel is in place.
6.12.1.6 The exercise leader should ensure that all participants have received detailed
instruction and practice in crossing each individual obstacle before ordering them to
undertake the assault course. Moreover, the exercises should follow a natural and
suitable progression, as well as considering physical and mental factors. A
competitive element should not be introduced before participants have achieved a
satisfactory level of proficiency in crossing individual obstacles.
6.12.1.7 Special provisions. When shooting, swimming, wading or other risky exercises are
included in the assault course, the applicable safety regulations for these disciplines
must be observed. In the case of multi-divisional assault courses, each registered
division is responsible for ensuring that participants have received detailed
instruction and practice in the crossing of each individual obstacle and have also
achieved a satisfactory level of proficiency. However, this only applies to standard
type obstacles. The organiser is responsible for ensuring that participants are briefed
and are provided with the opportunity to familiarise themselves with non-standard
obstacles (obstacles not included in assault courses in accordance with the designs of
the International Military Sports Council). In the case of assault courses open to the
general public, the LFM must ensure that obstacles do not represent any hazard to
children who are playing, for example. In particular, rope ladders should be secured
so that they cannot be used as swings. Defective obstacles that cannot be repaired
should be demolished immediately if they represent a hazard.
6.12.2 Transit across waterways
6.12.2.1 Wading during sports competitions may be undertaken in various conditions. Thus,
only general safety regulations can be provided.
6.12.2.2 The division commander or exercise leader should reconnoitre the ford before the
exercise commences. The width, depth, current and ground conditions at the ford
should be examined. The ground should be firm enough to ensure that participants
do not sink. The depth of the water should not exceed 1 metre and the current
velocity should not be so great as to cause personnel to lose their footing. (This
should be tested.) The width of the ford should be no greater than is required for
rescue personnel to reach participants who are in difficulty.
6.12.2.3 The ford should be delimited and clearly marked. A guide rope/rescue rope should
be suspended across the ford. If there is a current in the water, the rope should be
328 Rev-04
suspended downstream. The rope should be clearly visible and easy to grip. Buoyant
nylon rope should be used.
6.12.2.4 Rescue personnel should normally be assigned (refer to exceptions in item 6.12.2.5),
and should have prepared and be capable of using rescue materiel suited to the
specific needs. Refer to item 8.2.1.
6.12.2.5 When wading across streams and smaller waterways with minimal water flow in
which there is a negligible risk of accidents occurring, the provisions of items
6.12.2.3 and 6.12.2.4 may be waived.
6.12.3 Transit by rope or temporary bridge arrangements
Chap-6
Figure: 6.15
Using two ropes provides greater stability and control
6.12.3.1 Transit by rope or temporary bridge arrangements.

In addition to the provisions of items 6.12.2.2, 6.12.2.4 and 8.2.1, ropes should not
be suspended so high that there is a risk of participants sustaining injury if they were
to fall. A rope/bridge arrangement should also be dimensioned to bear the load for
which it is intended.
6.12.4 Use of weapons
6.12.4.1 During any military sports event in which live firing is part of the event, the
following provisions must be complied with:
a. Weapon inspection should be carried out immediately prior to firing by
running through the weapon with a cleaning rod. (This does not apply to .22
calibre weapons which have their own muzzle protectors.)
Rev-04 329
b. Affix magazine load weapon should not be undertaken before the participant
is in position at the stand. It is not permitted for weapons to be loaded
(chamber/magazine/band) during the event.
c. Unload weapons inspect should be undertaken by the individual before
firing positions at stands are vacated.
d. Verification that the weapon is unloaded should be carried out as follows:
- when the competitive event or arrangement is undertaken as a team or
patrol event, the team leader or patrol leader should inspect all weapons
that have been fired before firing positions at stands are vacated
- automatic weapons such as machine-guns, pistols and sub-machine
guns should always be inspected before firing positions at stands are
vacated
- during events in which the number of hits of each participant is
recorded, or participants are checked, weapons should always be
inspected before stands are vacated. If several shooting events take
place during the same event (biathlon) and if the number of shots each
participant is recorded, or participants are checked, weapons should be
inspected after the last shot has been fired
- during larger championships and biathlon events, the regulations of the
Norwegian Biathlon Association may apply
- in all other cases, weapons should be inspected directly after passing
the finishing line, at the latest
e. Ammunition that has not been used should be collected during the inspection.
Refer also to chapter 3, item 3.2.1.1Weapon regulations.
Ear protection. Refer to item 6.21. In competitions with .22 calibre weapons, or even
weapons that are less loud, ear plugs or ear muffs should be used, as a minimum.
Conscripts with hearing level 2 are not permitted to participate in sports events
involving the use of live ammunition.
6.12.5 Physical activity in hot weather
6.12.5.1 The background literature for safety regulations for physical activity in hot weather
is the Norwegian Confederation of Sports topical booklet no. 5 Sport in hot
climates by Professor Sigmund B Strmme and the text book on Human
Physiology, chapter 12, on temperature regulation, by Sand, Sjaastad and Haug.
Further reference may be made to UD 12-7-9 Technical communication from the
medical commander, heat and cold, UD 4-1-5, Text book on medical services,
chapter 22, as well as the Armys Safety Manual. All officers in charge of physical
activity, including close and dispersed order and competitive events, must familiarise
themselves with the above-mentioned literature. This applies regardless of the
prevailing climatic conditions.
6.12.5.2 When the temperature (measured in the shade) is 25 degrees Celsius or higher,
physical activity should be undertaken before 10.00 or after 16.00. When the
temperature in the shade is from 25-27 degrees, lighter clothing, such as shorts and
330 Rev-04
singlet, should be worn. If it is necessary to undertake special exercises in battledress

or fatigue dress, the following points should be observed:
- tunics should be unbuttoned and possibly held together by a waist cord
- trousers should be rolled up to knee height
- caps should be removed
6.12.5.3 When the temperature is from 27-28 degrees Celsius in the shade, caution should be
exercised in respect of strenuous physical activity. Long distance runs over 1500 m,
etc, should not be organised or pack marches/marching competitions of more than 30
minutes duration. Exercises in close and dispersed order should not be of more than
30 minutes duration. The break between lessons should be of at least 30 minutes
duration and should offer the possibility for the consumption of cold drinks, as well
as a period of time in the shade.
When the temperature is from 28-30 degrees Celsius in the shade or higher, long
pack marches, marching competitions, etc, should be avoided. Medical personnel
should also be present.
When the temperature exceeds 30 degrees Celsius, all physical activity should be
suspended. This also applies to close and dispersed order.
6.12.5.4 When the temperature is 25 degrees Celsius or more, an opportunity should be
provided to consume drink before, during and immediately after physical activity.
Runs and pack marches of more than 5000 m should be organised to allow for the
consumption of fluids every 4-5 km. At the end of dispersed order, it should be
possible to consume fluids several times per hour. Fluid consumed should preferably
contain between 30 and 70 g of sugar per litre, 1-2 g of common salt per litre, as well
as added flavouring, e.g. orange extract, lemon extract, apple juice, etc. The fluid
should be chilled to around 10-15 degrees Celsius. There should also be an option of
consuming ice-cold drinks.
Chap-6
General recommendations for the consumption of fluids (the individual party must
ascertain his/her own needs during training and customise these recommendations
according to his/her own requirements):
- Aim to achieve the correct fluid balance before training
- Train to tolerate a frequent level of fluid consumption
- Drink at least 5-7 dl per hour during heavy, physical activity
- Drink before you feel thirsty
- Drink frequently (every 10-15 mins) but ideally in small amounts (100-150
ml)
- In activities that last for more than 1 hour, use sports drinks containing both
carbohydrates (4-7%) and salt
- Increase fluid and salt consumption when undertaking strenuous physical
activity at more than 1000 metres above sea level
- Increase the water and salt content of the drink
6.12.5.5 When the temperature is 25 degrees Celsius or more, it is incumbent upon the officer
Rev-04 331
in charge to inform other officers and participants about the symptoms of heat
exhaustion and heat stroke. (Refer to the Norwegian Confederation of Sports topical
booklet no. 5, pp 40 and 41.) Personnel should be informed of the importance of
consuming ample quantities of drink before, during and after physical activity. This
should also include information about first aid measures..
6.12.6 Competitive events in cold weather
6.12.6.1 Cold weather restrictions in respect of the organisation of military competitive
events should be in accordance with the regulations of the Norwegian Skiing
Association. This involves a temperature limit of -15 degrees Celsius for events
longer than 15 km and -18 degrees for events of less than 15 km. In the case of
temperatures below these limits, the division commander, in consultation with the
divisions doctor and sports officer, should determine whether a competitive event is
to be carried out, and, if so, how.
6.12.6.2 In addition to the temperature and the duration of exposure to cold weather, air
humidity and wind speed are vital factors that must be taken into consideration in
any assessment of whether the competitive event should be carried out. Thus, there
may be situations in which the weather conditions call for a safety assessment before
the temperature has reached as low as -15 degrees Celsius.
6.12.6.3 The effective temperature (with consideration being made for the wind chill factor)
may be read in fig 91.
332 Rev-04
6.13 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR INFUSION

COURSES IN THE NORWEGIAN ARMED
FORCES
Figure: 6.16
Infusion of injured personnel
6.13.1 General
6.13.1.1 Any service that involves contact with blood carries a risk of bacterial/viral
transmission (infection). Necessary measures should be implemented to restrict
direct contact with blood, in order to reduce the risk of infection if such contact Chap-6
should occur, and to clarify any risk of infection if direct contact should have
occurred.
6.13.1.2 In this respect, all personnel participating in an infusion course should be briefed and
have a duty to notify the doctor if they have had, or suspect they have had, any of the
illnesses referred to in item 6.13.1.1.
6.13.2 Precautionary measures
6.13.2.1 Before practical exercises commence, the instructor MUST run through hygienic
precautionary measures that apply to exercises in which blood spillage may occur:
- Blood spillage should be kept to a minimum
- All disposable materiel contaminated by blood should be disposed of in
separate containers and bags. Such waste matter should be destroyed at an
incineration plant that processes hazardous waste
- lood-soiled equipment and fixtures that are not destroyed should be cleaned at
the end of the training session. With significant contamination, most of the
spillage should be removed with absorptive materials, packaged in yellow
anti-contamination bags and treated as hazardous waste. A suitable
disinfectant such as KLORAMIN 5% should be applied to contaminated
Rev-04 333
surfaces/equipment with a cloth or sponge. This will take effect after 60

minutes on soiled surfaces and after 30 minutes on surfaces that have been
wiped. After disinfection, infectious material will be rendered harmless and
ordinary cleaning may be undertaken
- Personnel who have sores/scratches on their hands should apply a plaster
before the training session commences. Such plasters should not be removed
before cleaning/disinfection has been undertaken with CHLORHEXIDINE
0.5 mg/ml or 70% alcohol
- ALL PERSONNEL SHOULD USE DISPOSABLE GLOVES
6.13.3 Infusion course procedures for testing of HIV and Hepatitis
6.13.3.1 Procedures for the follow-up of needle stick injuries/blood spillage:
First aid in the event of a needle stick injury:
- Promote bleeding from the wounded area, e.g. by gently pressing the
surrounding area, but avoid excessive squeezing or massage
- Wash and rinse the injured area with soap and water
- Disinfect with chlorhexidine 5 mg/ml or 70% alcohol
First aid in the event of blood spurts in the mouth:
- Rinse several times with water and hydrogen peroxide 3% for 3-4 mins.
(ordinary mouth rinse with hydrogen peroxide)
First aid in the event of blood spillage in the eyes:
- Rinse with ample amounts of physiological saline/water for 3-4 mins
Additional measures:
The doctor in charge of the course must assess individual incidents and implement
measures based on his/her observations. In the event of a needle stick accident that
could result in infection, the following measures should be taken:
- A blood sample should be taken, on the same day, of the person using the
cannula. This should be tested for HIV antibodies, Hepatitis C antibodies,
Hepatitis B antibodies (anti-HBc) and Hepatitis B antigens (HbsAg). A 0
test should be taken from the person who pierced him/herself with the
cannula This should be tested for HIV antibodies, Hepatitis C antibodies,
Hepatitis B antibodies (anti-HBc) and Hepatitis B antigens (HbsAg)
- After the needle stick accident, the exposed party should be offered a
Hepatitis B vaccine and specific immunoglobulin (HBIG). After 48 hours
HBIG is no longer effective and only the vaccine should be administered. The
vaccination should be administered as a rapid vaccination, i.e. 1 dose at 0, 1
and 2 months, as well as a booster after one year. The vaccine should be
administered before the results of the blood test are ready
In cases of suspected HIV, post exposure prophylaxis should be implemented
within 2 hours. If such a case arises, an infective medicine specialist should be
contacted.
- The subsequent follow-up of persons who have been exposed to possible
334 Rev-04
blood infection is dependant upon the results of the serological tests. If the
source person proves negative then no other measures are necessary, apart
from a control test 6 months after the incident. It is up to the individual doctor,
in consultation with the patient, to determine whether the vaccination
programme should continue. Persons who test positive must be followed up
by the divisions sick bay/medical office
- The person in charge of the course must always notify of any needle stick
accidents. An accident report should be submitted to the Norwegian National
Insurance Administration, RTV form 4022. The completed form should be
sent to the address that appears on the form. Expenditure on the Hepatitis B
vaccine and specific immunoglobulin used as a post exposure prophylaxis will
be covered by National Insurance (blue receipt regulation 4, item 3). The
vaccine and specific immunoglobulin may be ordered from the vaccination
department of the National Institute of Public Health, Pb 4404 Nydalen, 0403
Oslo, Norway, tel: +47 22 04 22 00, or from the nearest hospital
6.13.4 Practical exercises
6.13.4.1 A responsible medical doctor should always be assigned to the course. It should be
possible to contact the doctor during the practical part of the course. The doctor will
assess course instructors for approval. All instructors and assistant instructors must
have undergone the relevant practice necessary to provide direction and instruction
in this type of training.
6.13.4.2 Practical exercises in venipuncture should be set up in such a way that an instructor
takes charge of the practical implementation of each individual venipuncture
exercise. The minimum requirement for instructors is authorisation as ambulance
personnel or nurses. Conscripts who have authorisation as ambulance personnel or
nurses may be used as assistant instructors/controllers.
6.13.4.3 Prior to commencing an exercise in venipuncture, the instructor should verify that all Chap-6
equipment being used has been sterilised. Further verification should be made that
blood spillage has been adequately cleaned from previously used equipment.
6.13.4.4 During ordinary training, fluid should not be infused into an artery or cannula that is
located in, or is to be inserted into, the skin.
In connection with training for international service, these provisions may be
waived, in accordance with the following criteria:
- Completed education and training in the use of equipment and fluids on an
infusion dummy
- Training with an infusion dummy should be kept separate from live training.
Equipment and fluids used in dummy training and live training should not be
combined
- Equipment and fluids to be used in live training should be within their use-by
date and principles of cleanliness and sterility should be strictly observed
- Only physiological electrolyte solutions should be used, NaCl 0.9%, Ringers
Lactate or Ringer's Acetate
- A fluid infusion should never exceed 500 ml
Rev-04 335
6.14 WINTER SERVICE
Figure: 6.17
Vassdalen
6.14.1 Divisional competence requirements within winter service for

land-based operations in the Norwegian Armed Forces
The Chief of Defence has issued a directive for divisional competence requirements
within winter service for land-based operations to be used by the Norwegian Armed
Forces.
Cf. the directive, waivers from this directive follow the same provisions for UD 2-1
and are described in UD 2-1, item 0.1.3. The responsible party in this respect is the
head of the Norwegian School of Winter Warfare (NSWW) and requests for a wai-
ver should be submitted to the NSWW.
6.14.2 Preparation and implementation of exercises in terrain in which there is
a risk of avalanches occurring
6.14.2.1 Exercise leaders responsibility
The exercise leader is responsible for assessing and implementing measures to
determine the avalanche risk. Conditions that may influence the risk of an avalanche
are:
- precipitation, wind and temperature
- the snow packs stratification and stability
336 Rev-04
- shape of terrain and steepness

This applies to the planning as well as the implementation of the exercise. During the
implementation of the exercise, it is the exercise leaders responsibility, at any given
time, to remain aware of the particular avalanche risk. This is so that he/she may
make any necessary adjustments to the exercise programme such as, for example, the
march route and bivouac placement, and implement measures necessary to ensuring
the safety of personnel. The overall responsibility should be assigned to a specially
trained individual or group.
Cf. UD 6-81 Instruction in winter service, Part 9.
6.14.2.2 Assessment of avalanche risk prior to the commencement of exercises
An assessment of avalanche risk should commence when the planning of the
exercise has progressed to a point where the training ground has been determined.
The exercise leader, or an individual that he/she has appointed, should undertake a
thorough study of training ground maps, taking into account areas that represent an
avalanche risk. In addition, information should be obtained regarding the prevailing
weather conditions at the training ground.
6.14.2.3 Avalanche risk maps should be used. If an avalanche risk map is not available, both
the release areas (ZONE 1) and the discharge areas (ZONE 2) should be marked on
the map. The areas should be confirmed through a field reconnaissance.
6.14.2.4 A reconnaissance should be undertaken as close as possible to the start of the
exercise in order to obtain the most updated picture of the snow and terrain
conditions. In addition, a reconnaissance should be undertaken of the training ground
on bare ground.
6.14.2.5 An avalanche warning should be issued prior to the commencement of an exercise.
6.14.2.6 Assessment of avalanche risk during exercises
A daily routine inspection of the snow pack should be carried out to verify whether Chap-6
the stability of the snow has altered. The exercise leader should have access to
weather reports at least two times per day.
6.14.2.7 An avalanche warning should be issued at least once per day.
6.14.2.8 The exercise leader should be accompanied by a qualified person or group that have
completed an Avalanche Rescue Course provided by a competent authority for
winter service, or similar training programme approved by the commander of the
Norwegian School of Winter Warfare. This person/group has overall responsibility
for the preparation of daily avalanche warnings.
6.14.2.9 Avalanche group
With larger field service exercises (brigade or higher) a separate avalanche group
should be established. The manning requirements of the avalanche group are
dependant on the training grounds geographic area and the number of participating
divisions, and are stipulated for the individual exercise.
6.14.2.10 The leader of the avalanche group should be placed under the authority of the
exercise leader.
Rev-04 337
6.14.2.11 Mock victim pit, use of a completely buried mock victim during avalanche
rescue exercises.
General
During avalanche rescue exercises and training in avalanche rescue, it is natural to
use mock victims. If the mock victim is to be completely buried, a pit should be
used. The exercise leader is responsible for ensuring that the exercise is undertaken
in terrain in which an avalanche risk is not present and that the pit satisfies the
specified requirements.
6.14.2.12 The following requirements should be observed:
- The snow above the pit should be firm
- The mock victim should be a volunteer
- The mock victim should not be buried for more than 3 hours and, in any case,
must not be buried for more than 4 hours
- The mock victim should possess a search pole that is partly assembled and
inserted through the roof
- The mock victim should possess radio communication with an extra battery
and a communication check should be made BEFORE the mock victim is
buried
- The mock victim should have a groundsheet and should wear warm and tight
clothing
- The mock victim should have facial protection from search poles, e.g. a spade
- The comfort of the mock victim should be prioritised
6.14.2.13 Requirements for the pit:
Figure: 6.18
Digging a pit for the mock victim
338 Rev-04
- Dig around 2 m directly down into the snow. Thereafter, dig around 75 cm
beneath the firm snow, with a width (body length) of around 220 cm
- The pit should be high enough to permit the mock victim to lie freely,
minimum 60-75 cm
- The search pole should be assembled and inserted to the point where the mock
victim has his/her right hand. This should be inserted in such a way that it is
not visible from the surface
- It should be possible to locate the pits position in at least two independent
ways
6.14.3 Safety regulations for snow holes/pits
6.14.3.1 General
The snow bank in which a snow hole/pit is dug should not be higher than 5 m. This
is measured from the base of the cleft beneath the snow bank to the highest point on
the snow bank measured vertically.
6.14.3.2 The snow hole/pit should be dug as high as possible in the snow bank.
The walls and roof should have a minimum thickness of 30 cm of hard-packed snow,
in respect of both stability and insulation.
6.14.3.4 The snow hole should be ventilated via a hole in the roof with a minimum diameter
of 10 cm. A ski pole should be inserted here so that the hole may be kept open by
moving the ski pole from inside the hole if it is covered by a snowdrift.
6.14.3.5 When remaining overnight in a snow hole/pit, a patrol guard should be assigned who
should check the following:
- The snows structure
- Whether the snow holes roof is shifting Chap-6
- That the air vent with the ski pole is open
The condition of the snow hole/pit and the prevailing weather will determine how
often the patrol guard carries out an inspection. The entrance should be clearly
marked with a search pole/stick/spade, or similar. The markings should also be clear
during poor visibility and in darkness. A spade should be accessible on both the
inside and the outside of the entrance to the snow hole and pit. The patrol guard may
carry a spade.
6.14.3.6 Use of heat sources/cooking apparatus is not permitted in the snow hole/pit.
6.14.3.7 Cf. UD 6-81 Instruction in winter service, part 6, Bivouac.
6.14.4 Actions in special circumstances in avalanche risk terrain
6.14.4.1 In particular
A division may be forced to travel across and/or assemble in an avalanche risk area
due to special circumstances such as:
- Search and rescue operations
- Unintentional and unexpected entry into an avalanche risk area
Rev-04 339
It must be emphasised that exercises in themselves are not cogent grounds to travel
across and/or assemble in an avalanche risk area.
6.14.4.2 Precautionary measures
In the case of search and rescue operations, the officer in charge at the location must
assess the terrain and choose a marching route which, based on his/her knowledge
and experience, as well as the prevailing conditions, represents the least possible risk
to his/her own division.
6.14.4.3 In the case of search and rescue work in an avalanche, the officer in charge of the
rescue work should select escape route(s).
6.14.4.4 If a division unintentionally and unexpectedly enters an avalanche risk area, the first
person to discover this should shout: Avalanche risk area Stand still! The officer
in charge must then assess the various courses of action; either remain in the area or
exit the area by the safest route possible.
6.15 PROVISIONS FOR HANDLING FIRE,
HEATING IN A TENT, LIGHTING COOKING
APPARATUS AND LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
6.15.1 Heating in a tent
6.15.1.1 When a heat source is used in a tent, (cooking apparatus, wood-burning stove,
multifuel M94) or stearine candles are used as a light source, a fire watch should
always be assigned. When using the hot air unit VA/M-15/40 as a heat source, the
unit should be inspected once every hour to ensure that it is functioning
satisfactorily.
Before a camp stove is used inside a tent, the division should ensure that it has not
been painted with aluminium paint, or similar.
6.15.1.2 The purpose of the fire watch is to maintain a continual inspection of sources of light
and heat in order to prevent tent fires as well as ensuring that the heat source does
not go out.
When a heat source containing an open flame is used (Optimus, Primus, etc), the
flame should burn with a clean blue flame. The combustion will then be at its most
effective. The fire watch should pay particular attention when a kettle/frying pan has
been placed on the burner. In such cases, the tent should be ventilated.
The fire watch may not be combined with other guard duties outside of the tent. The
guard should sit on his/her groundsheet or monitor the light and heat in some other
way. He/she should not be occupied with duties that distract him/her from
monitoring the heat.
During change of fire watch it is the retiring guards responsibility to waken the next
guard. The retiring fire watch should not conclude his/her duty as fire watch before
the next guard has completely awoken, left his/her sleeping bag and is in a sitting
position.
6.15.1.3 In a tent in which a heat source is being used, knives or bayonets should be present
and placed appropriately in order to be used to cut the tent canvas in the event of a
fire.
340 Rev-04
6.15.1.4 In the case of camp stoves that are only suitable for wood-burning, it is strictly
forbidden to use petrol, paraffin, spirit or other highly combustible fluids. However,
in the case of lighting a cold oven, if extreme caution is exercised, it is permitted to
soak wood in paraffin which, under no circumstances, should ever be poured directly
from a jerry can/bottle, etc, straight into the oven.
6.15.1.5 The multifuel camp stove has been developed for fluid and solid fuels. The most
important fuel is F 34 fuel, although the camp stove also works well with paraffin,
diesel and wood.
6.15.1.6 Before using the stove, jerry cans should be checked to ensure that they contain F 34
fuel, paraffin or diesel. The jerry can should not contain petrol and should be placed
outside the tent. In order to prevent the fuel hose from melting, breaking or
becoming blocked, it is important that it is completely unwound and under no
circumstances should it be coiled within the stove's protective cage.
The hose must be placed at a distance from the most trafficked areas of the tent so
that it will not become damaged by being stepped on.
Fuel cans and hoses should be placed on the side of the tent that is defined as the
'dirty' side.
6.15.2 Lighting cooking apparatus and lights
6.15.2.1 Cooking apparatus and lights (Primus Optimus 111, Feuerhand and Petromax tent
lights) used by the Norwegian Armed Forces are designed for the use of paraffin and
F-34 unit fuel. These units are not suited to other types of fuels. The use of PETROL
and CATALYTIC FUEL in these types of COOKING APPARATUS, as well as
LIGHTS, is therefore forbidden
Cooking apparatus that is designed to use other types of fuel should use fuel
recommended by the manufacturer.
6.15.2.2 When petrol, ethanol or methylated spirits are used to heat cooking apparatus and
lighting equipment, or as fuel for cooking apparatus, users should demonstrate Chap-6
extreme caution with regard to the danger of fire and explosion. In order to avoid
accidents from occurring, the following points should be observed:
- The heating of cooking apparatus and filling of fuel bottles should be
undertaken in controlled conditions away from the tents sleeping quarters
(preferably outside the tent). During filling, all use of open fire is forbidden.
Particular attention should be paid to the ban on smoking
- When fuel cans are being changed, petrol-burning cooking apparatus should
be switched off and the apparatus should cool down before being lit again
- All heat sources should be extinguished and the air vent screw opened before
the spirit cup is filled with fluid
- The spirit cup should be filled from a small can
- In daylight, the fluid burns with almost no visible flame the fluid should be
treated as an A fluid
- The fluid contains additives that make it dangerous to drink
Rev-04 341
6.15.3 Carbon monoxide poisoning

6.15.3.1 Refer to item 6.20.4
6.15.4 Shrubland burning and grass and heathland burning in Norwegian
Armed Forces areas
6.15.4.1 On 5th September 1958, the Ministry of Defence determined that it was forbidden to
burn shrubland and carry out the burning of grass and heathland, etc, in and around
military establishments, without the express consent of the establishments chief fire
officer. The ban applies regardless of the time of year and is a supplement to the
regulations on shrubland burning and heathland burning, etc, in the regulations of the
Fire Brigade Act of 19th November 1954. (Fire prevention acts and regulations, Part
HI, p. 16). Refer also to the Forest Fire Act of 14th July 1893 with regulations. (Part
VI of the above-mentioned publication.)
6.15.5 Use of fire during exercises in forests and fields
6.15.5.1 On 25th November 1958, the Ministry of Defence issued the following directives,
etc:
Attention is drawn to the Act of 14th July 1893 in respect of restrictions to the use
of fire in forests and fields. Paragraph 1 of the Act determines that:
During dry weather or strong winds, the use of all fire shall be forbidden in forests or
fields in such places and under such circumstances that a risk of forest fire may be
present.
As a consequence of the occurrence of forest fires of which the cause, in all
likelihood, has been careless use of fire, all officers are ordered to strictly ensure that
their men demonstrate due care and attention during exercises in forests and fields.
In this respect, officers shall draw the attention of their men to paragraph 352 of the
General Civil Penal Code regarding the careless use of fire or combustible matter.
6.16 USE OF MACHINERY AND TOOLS
6.16.1 In general
6.16.1.1 General
See Regulations for use of work equipment (FOR 1998-06-26-608). The
regulations apply to various work equipment, defined in 2. Examples of work
equipment: tools, lifting devices, apparatuses, recovery vehicle, different types of
mechanical diggers, mobile cranes, etc. Drivers must have a valid license for
operating machines, and is to be trained internally before the materiel is put to use.
The person responsible for education and training is to update the database SOPP.
Each piece of machinery is to have a technical manual where the safety regulations
are presented. Below follows a list of the technical manuals for the pieces of
machinery most commonly used in the Armed Forces:
Chainsaw, Sachs - Dol- TH 5-3695-25/200-12 (temporary)

mar 115
Chainsaw, Partner TH 5-3695-25/207-12
Rock drilling machine, TH 5-3820-25/200-10
342 Rev-04
fuel Pionjr 120

Tractor, tracked, slow- TH 5-2410-25/207-10
moving, Liebherr 731 C
Rotary snow plough, self- TH 5-3825-25/200-12
driven, veraasen Twin-
Spin UPV
Tracked compressor AM- TH 5-4310-25/211-10 (siste)
V-170 BK
Towed compressor, Sul- TH 5-4310-25/210-10
lair F94D
Kompressor, tauet, Atlas TH 5-4310-25/209-10
Copco XAS80DD
NEMEK 503TXI TH 5-3805-25/203-10
ATLAS COPCO ROC TH 5-3805-25/206-10
D7
Drilling rig, hydraulic 2 TH 5-1925-25/202-12
1/2 tow boat, diesel,
GM/DAF
Ferry winch TH 5-2030-25/200-10
Outboard motor, OMC 55 TH 5-2805-25/215-12
HK
Outboard motor, OMC 70 TH 5-2805-25/216-12
HK
Dump-truck, Volvo TH 5-3805-25/229-10
Chap-6
A25C
Dump-truck, Moxy TH-5-3805-25/230-10
MT31
Bulldozer, KOMATSU TH 5-2410-25/200-10
D65EX
Bulldozer, KOMATSU TH 5-2410-25/201-10
D85EX
Teleskoptruck JCB TH 5-3930-25/100-10
540-140
Mobile crane, PPM ATT TH 5-3810-25/200-10
590
Mechanical digger, TH 5-3805-25/204-10
KOMATSU PC210-6
KOMATSU PC210-7
Rev-04 343
CATERPILLAR 307B
KOMATSU PC78US TH 5-3805-25/205-10
KUBOTA KX-3V TH 5-3805-25/207-10
Loader, Volvo BM 6300 TH 5-3805-25/225-10
LNNEN 940
Grader, Caterpillar 140 G TH 5-3805-25/224-10 (temporary)
AWD VHP
Grader, Champion 736 A TH 5-3805-25/202-10
Grader, Volvo G976 TH 5-3805-25/209-10
Mechanical bridge layer, TH 5-5420-25/200-10
Leguan
Armoured Engineer Ve- Completed
hicle
Tank launched bridge Completed
Hjullaster:
Volvo 4500
Volvo L-50C TH-5-3805-25/218-10
Volvo L-50D TH-5-3805-25/201-10
Volvo L-70C TH-5-3805-25/226-10
Volvo L-90D
Volvo L-120C TH-5-3805-25-227-10
Volvo L-120D TH-5-3805-25-227-10
Volvo L-120E
Volvo L-150C
Hearing protection. Minimum earplugs must be worn by all personnel operating og
staying near noisy machinery/tools (noise level 85-110 dBA, difficult to assess), also
inside headset/ear muffs for radio/communications.
When noise levels reach or exceed 110 dbA a combination of earplugs and ear
muffs/headset must be worn. Tools/pieces of machinery that generally make so much
noise that hearing protection will be required are to be marked according to the
Regulations for use of heavy construction machines. 26 June pt 1998 29. See also
chapter 6.21
6.16.1.2 Regulations for use of machinery on repair trucks
a. In general
The workshop foreman is to ascertain that machinery and tools on the repair
truck is provided maintenance continuously, and that the repair truck is
checked and taken care of in a manner that makes personnel and the
344 Rev-04
maintenance crew safe from injury.

b. Preventing fires
Fire extinguisher is to be easily accessible in the vehicle, and must be
maintained and checked according to the regulations in force, including the
Regulation for use of heavy construction machines, 26 June 1998. It must
continuously be checked that the fire extinguisher has been filled.
c. Using the aggregate
The aggregate must not run inside a confined room unless it has a tight
exhaust gas pipe leading outside. When operating the aggregate, it must be
ascertained that the earth lead is good. Hearing protection. Minimum earplugs
are to be worn, see 6.16.1.1.
d. Using grinders
The largest allowed rotational speed for the grinding wheel must have been
checked and found correct (for the speed of the spindle) before it is mounted
in the machine.
See Regulation for use of heavy construction machines. 26 June 1998.
Ascertain that mounting is being done in accordance with the user manual.
Hearing protection. Minimum earplugs are to be worn, see 6.16.1.1.
e. Gas welding apparatus
See Regulations for working hot construction equipment 26 February 1998.
Gas and oxygen cylinders must be solidly mounted on the trolley. The
cylinders must not impinge on each other, or fall down. When moving the
trolley, manometers must be dismounted and the safety caps screwed on.
Cylinders, manometers, hoses and welding bar must be checked for leakages.
The gas cylinders must be exposed to heat. Only personnel who have been
Chap-6
trained in welding must have access to the apparatus. Goggles or face shield
must be used when welding.
f. The turning lathe
See Regulations for use of heavy construction machines. 26 June 1998. The
lathe must only by used by competent personnel. The person operating the
lathe must have adequate space and peace to work, so that he/she does not
accidentally come in contact with moving machinery parts and his/her clothes
cannot get caught in the machine.
The person operating the lathe is to wear tight-fitting leather cuffs or similar on
his/her arms, and not wear loose-fitting clothes that might get caught in the machine.
Long hair should be put in a ponytail, or concealed underneath a cap. The choke
actuating lever should be removed.
Hearing protection. Minimum earplugs are to be worn, see 6.16.1.1.
6.16.1.3 Use of motor chainsaws with auxiliary components and equipment
a. In general
The following regulations apply to any use of motor chainsaws, and for
auxiliary components (ice drill). The regulations apply for all Armed Forces
Rev-04 345
personnel, and are based on corresponding civilian regulations presented by

the Norwegian Labour Inspection Authority. Within certain areas, however,
the regulations have been adapted to military conditions.
Personnel are not to have access to motor chainsaws without having gone
through adequate training in advance. This training is to include the following
components:
- Elements of danger
- Protection materiel
- Maintenance
- Correct work technique
b. Requirements of the motor chainsaw
The motor chainsaw is to be equipped according to the Norwegian Labour
Inspection Authoritys regulations and have:
- roll-over protection with chain brakes
- devibrated handles shaped in a manner that facilitates wearing
protective gloves.
- block carburettor handle
- chain breakage protection underneath the rear handle and chain guard
in front of the saw saw chain with protective links.
- automatic disconnection of the chain when the saw is running at idling
speed
- Transport cover for the saw blade.
The batch should be equipped with felling wedges, jemmy, axe with shaft,
hooks/shears for handling the timber, and files with file templates.
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE)
Personal protective equipment is to meet the specifications made by the
Norwegian Labour Inspection Authority. Personnel manning a motor
chainsaw must have had distributed and wear:
- protective trousers, forest worker, with sewn-in protective lining,
protection of thighs with belt and sewn-in protective lining.
- protective helmet, plastic, mountable, with short brim and visor of
mesh.
- safety boots, forest worker, or Wellingtons with protective lining.
- protective mittens, forrest worker, fibre fur, w/ protective inlay on left
mitten
Should the personal protective equipment or parts of it seem inadequate in the
field where the work presents little risk, the unit commander may exempt
people from wearing such equipment. Hearing protection. Minimum earplugs
must be worn, see 6.16.1.1.
346 Rev-04
d. Medical service
Each operator is to have a field dressing in a watertight package in his/her
breast pocket. Where several operators are working simultaneously, there
must be organized medical service. This requires the following equipment at
hand:
- Stretcher, medical, with two blankets and strapping ropes.
- Medical bag no. 1
- Means of transport.
e. Regulations for use
At least two people should be working together when operating a motor
chainsaw. Whenever several saws are being used simultaneously, there is to
be skilled labour supervision.
In addition, the several regulations for use apply:
- The centrifugal coupling is to be adjusted so that there is a safe interval
between idling speed and running speed.
- Filling fuel or adjusting the saws fuel system must never take place in
the vicinity of open fire or while smoking. Fuel must not be filled while
the engine is running. In order to avoid spilled fuel being ignited by
sparks from the exhaust pipe, the saw should be moved a few metres
after fuel has been filled, and then started.
- The blade or chain must never be adjusted while the engine is running.
- During transport the chain is to be dismounted or under protective
cover.
- When starting the engine is must be ascertained that the saw stands Chap-6
steady.
- Never operate the chainsaw indoors. The exhaust gas is poisonous.
- During movement while working with the engine running, the saw
should be carried by hand with the blade pointing forwards. Never
place your finger on the gas handle on saws that have centrifugal
coupling if the engine is running during movement.
- When felling trees, ascertain that no one is within reach of the tree. Call
out, but keep in mind that the warning might be difficult to hear due to
the engine sound.
- When felling trees, ascertain that no one is within reach of the tree. Call
out, but keep in mind that the warning might be difficult to hear due to
the engine sound.
- The back cut must be made in the same height and no lower than the
face cut. If the back cut is placed too low, one will lose control over the
trees felling direction and fall path.
- If the face cut is made by use of a motor chainsaw, it has to be checked
Rev-04 347
carefully that both cuts have been made equally deep. This is easier if
the notch cut is placed first, and then the undercut.
- Use a felling wedge. This should be inserted as soon as the blade has
reached adequate depth.
- When sawing upwards using the upper edge of the saw it may be
thrown backwards when put to the wood. It should therefore be run at
full speed before it is applied carefully to the wood.
A similar risk may occur during normal sawing if the upper edge of the blade
gets stuck. Operate the saw in a manner that prevents this from happening.
- Additionally, it is important that the chain at all times has been filed
correctly.
f. Regulations for ice and ground frost drill
When using this materiel, the following personal protective equipment must
be worn:
- safety boots with insole
- protective goggles or helmet with face shield
- protective gloves/mittens
Caution must be shown when setting up the drill (particularly ice drills). The
work is to be commenced at low rotational speed, which is to be increased
evenly in order to prevent the drill from rambling. When changing steel the
engine is to be stopped.
Hearing protection. Minimum earplugs must be worn, see 6.16.1.1.
6.16.1.4 Use of rock drilling machine with additional equipment
a. In general
The following regulations apply to use of all types of rock drilling machines
in the Armed Forces. The regulations are in accordance with corresponding
civilian regulations published by the Directorate of the Norwegian Labour
Inspection Authority.
b. Personal protective equipment (PPE)
Personal protective equipment is to satisfy the regulations published by the
Directorate of the Norwegian Labour Inspection Authority.
Personnel operating rock drilling machines must have had distributed and
wear:
- leather gloves (protective gloves) without lining with a long plastic cuff
or
- leather gloves (protective gloves) with lining (winter)
- protective helmet, plastic, mountable, with short brim, face shield and
earmuffs.
- mask with exhaust gas filter
- safety boots, leather with inlaid steel sole or
348 Rev-04
- field boots M/66, normal height

- protective goggles
- Hearing protection, minimum earplugs.
Should wearing the helmet seem inadequate and safety allows it, the helmet
might be omitted. Hearing protection must be worn.
c. Drilling machine, mountain, petrol/fuel driven
When using the machine the following regulations apply:
- petrol/fuel must never be filled near an open flame.
- petrol/fuel must never be filled if the machine is warm or when the
engine is running.
- petrol/fuel must always be tapped off the machine before it is put into
the transport cage.
- the exhaust from the engine emits carbon monoxide. When drilling
trenches, ditches, tunnels, etc. the personnel operating the machine
must switch frequently, and if necessary artificial ventilation must be
provided.
- never turn the machine directly towards anybody, since there is a
danger of equipment loosening and causing injury.
- Cleaning must never be carried out using volatile fluids (petrol/fuel,
lynol, etc.).
d. Grinder for drilling equipment
Check the grinding surface before use. This is supposed to be level, and the Chap-6
grinding wheel is to run without jerking. If it does not do so, the grinding
wheel must be trimmed. The grinding wheel is to be dry.
Protective goggles must always be worn when the machine is being used.
Keep in mind the risk of fire breaking out, caused by sparks from the grinding
wheel.
6.16.1.5 Drill jumbo (drilling rig)
The following points must be carefully observed when using or during movement of
drill jumbos/drilling rigs:
- the feeder is to be laid down during transport or movement on order to keep
the centre of gravity as low as possible (risk of tipping over).
- in rough terrain, the winch is to be used to secure the rig. Fasten securely and
keep the wire taut.
- keep in mind the risk of skidding (particularly sideways) in steep terrain.
- close off air supply to controls that are not in use.
Rev-04 349

6.16.1.6 Compressed air installations/compressors
a. All personnel who are responsible for using/supervising compressors and
compressed air installations are bound by duty to observe the following
regulations:
- never play with compressed air. Never direct air hoses towards
anybody. In short range the air pressure is to strong that it can lead to
severe injury.
- check safety valves before use. A pressure air cylinder has the same
blasting effect as a bomb.
- never remove safety caps, shields, etc. and never make adjustments on
the compressor while the engine is running, unless the procedure is
described in the technical manual.
- check that the air has been turned off before hoses are disconnected.
- never tamper with the mounting or the settings of the safety valves.
- petrol/fuel must never be filled while the engine is running or near an
open flame. Never use flammable liquids when cleaning parts or
equipment (petrol, lynol)
- Check that the compressors control system functions normally after
starting up.
b. When using pneumatically operated hammer drills, the following regulations
apply:
- Never point pneumatically operated drilling jars towards anybody.
Drill, spades, chisels, etc. may loosen and get hurled with great speed.
- Before blowing the hoses clean they need to be secured.

6.16.1.7 Moving and operating armoured engineer vehicles and armoured bridging
vehicles
a. Plain movement, see 5.11.1.3.
b. When operating vehicles with complimentary special equipment, the vehicle
commander is to have completed and passed the user course for the relevant
vehicle type, in addition to point a above.
6.16.1.8 Driving engineer vehicles and armoured engineer vehicles
a. Never start the engine from any other place than the drivers seat.
b. Never let the vehicle start moving without having ascertained:
- That no one stays underneath, behind or in front of the vehicle
- That the brake pressure is sufficient
- That lights, horn, manoeuvre- and control panels function properly.
350 Rev-04
c. Safety belt is mandatory while driving/working, except when crossing frozen

lakes/rivers and onboard ferries.
d. Smoking/eating is prohibited whilst driving along the road.
e. Never take passengers on the vehicle or in the bulldozer blade. Exempt from
this rule is when the vehicle has 2 seats and has been authorized for 2 persons,
or has been authorized for riding, also during basic training. Nobody must
mount or dismount a moving vehicle.
f. Ascertain that no one walks underneath the bulldozer blade. If work is to be
done underneath the blade (e.g. repair work, etc.) the blade is to be securely
supported.
g. Keep the engine and the drivers seat clean and tidy. Never leave items such
as bottles, tools, etc. lying around. These might prevent necessary braking for
instance if an items gets underneath the brake pedal. Loose items could also
pose risk to the driver, should the vehicle tip over. The grease gun might,
however, be left behind the seat in winter.
h. Keep windows, mirrors, steps and control panels free of dirt, oil, ice and
snow.
i. Never leave the vehicle without lowering the tool down on the ground. When
parking:
- If possible, the engineer vehicle is to be parked on dry, level ground,
and the parking brakes are to be on (in winter, this should be considered
in each case, due to the risk of freezing), the bulldozer blade is to be
lowered and tipped all the way forwards, so that the share is in the
ground. The circuit breaker key is to be removed and the vehicle
locked. For long-time parking/storage, the main power switch is to be
turned off. Chap-6
6.16.1.9 Transport/working with engineer vehicles and armoured engineer vehicles
a. Before driving commences it is to be checked that the vehicles weight class
does not exceed the weight the road is meant to support.
b. Pay attention when driving. Make sure no one is in the danger zone and look
out for loose shoulders, bumpy road, rocks, etc. that might cause
tipping/crashing.
c. When driving on public roads, a warning light must always be used when the
breadth of the vehicle exceeds 2.5 metres. A warning light must always be
used when the vehicle is working on or near a road, and when it is used in
violation of traffic regulations or in other ways might pose danger to other
traffic.
The warning light is to be placed on the vehicle in a manner that makes it
possible to see from all sides. Lights must always be on when driving on
public roads.
d. The vehicle must always be driven with the dozers blade to the front, tilted
all the way back and about 30 centimetres above the road. On armoured
Rev-04 351
vehicles the blade is to be in the highest position. When driving in reverse the
operator must look in the same direction. On armoured vehicles, the vehicle
commanders instructions are to be followed.
e. Keep speed low whilst driving downhill. Use the same gear when driving
downhill as you would have used when driving uphill.
Never let the vehicle roll in neutral gear.
f. When transporting masses, the bulldozer blade must always be in a position as
short from the ground as possible while driving. This provides better sight
forwards and the vehicle becomes steadier and is less strained.
g. If materiel is to be transported in the dozers blade on public roads, the
materiel is to be secured according to Norwegian Road Traffic Law
regulations, 141:
- The load is to be placed in a manner that provides the driver with
adequate sight, and does not prevent him/her from manoeuvring the
machine in a responsible manner, and does not cover up obligatory
marking, lights or registration plates.
- The load is to be placed in a manner that distributes its weight evenly
on wheels that are on the same axle, and which distributes the weight
evenly between the axles. For machines that have steer wheels at least
20% of the vehicles possible total weight must rest on these wheels.
- No part of the load must protrude from the sides of the vehicle without
having obtained special permission from the police (when driving in a
city area), from the road manager (when driving within a county) and
from the Directorate of Public Roads (when driving through several
counties). The load must not protrude in front of the vehicles original
forward limitation. Nevertheless, during single transports the load may
protrude 1 metre in front of the vehicles forward limitation.
- The load must be fastened if required due to its weight or other
conditions. The load must be fastened in a manner that prevents it from
causing danger to persons, causing damage to property, getting dragged
along the road, falling off the vehicle or producing unnecessary noise.
Chains, ropes, tarpaulin, or other items that may be used for fastening
or protecting the load must be of sufficient strength, and be fastened
securely, so that they do not hang loose on the outside of the vehicle or
get dragged along the road.
h. Chains are to be used on all wheels when conditions on the road advice it. On
icy or slippery ground the 4-wheel drive must always be connected.
i. When driving on roads the vehicles braking system is to be operated so that
the transmission will not be disconnected if braking.
j. When driving on frozen lakes/rivers and when driving on or off military
ferries:
- o The driver must always loosen his safety belt
352 Rev-04
- The driver is to wear a life jacket

- The roof hatch is to be open (when applicable)
- The doors are to be in open position
- The 4 wheel drive is to be connected
- The brake pedal is to be used where the gearbox cannot be
disconnected (disconnection valve handle is to be drawn out).
k. During road transport, the air pressure in the tires must be adjusted for each
vehicle type, as described in the vehicles technical manual.
l. When using the vehicle as a lifting device, it has to be checked that the chains
and hooks are without fault.
m. Required certificates on the lifting equipment are to be found in the vehicles
or at the work site.
6.16.1.10 Special regulations
a. Should the brakes fail when driving downhill, change to a lower gear, or set
the direction indicator in reverse and step gently on the accelerator. Should
this prove insufficient, use the hand brake and if required the dozers blade in
order to stop the vehicle.
b. A wheeled loader with hydraulic transmission must not be towed without
taking special precautions. See the instruction manual for the machine/vehicle
in question.
c. Be aware of the danger using articulated vehicles/machinery. When repairing
the articulated joint, when using the jack and during transportation on a trailer
or railroad the lock must always be in place.
Chap-6
d. When using a winch for recovery, etc. see TF 1-3, booklet 3.
6.16.1.11 Safety regulations and use of PPE during bolt gun exercises
a. The bolt gun is a firing tool, which must be handled with the same care and
consideration as all other firing arms.
b. The bolt gun is to be stored in a solid box where cartridges, bolts and other
equipment can be placed in separate compartments.
c. Check that the gun functions normally before firing. When loading, the same
safety regulations as for small arms apply.
d. While firing, helmet, hearing protection (combination of earplugs and
earmuffs) and protective goggles must be worn. The correct type of splinter
protection is to be used while firing.
e. Warning signs (A5 format) reading Warning. Bolt gun firing ongoing are to
be put up before firing commences, wherever necessary in the vicinity of the
firing range.
Keep in mind the risk of deflection and piercing.
f. Ammunition must not be carried loosely in pockets, but kept in designated
Rev-04 353
boxes. These are to be marked so that the ammunition is identifiable.

g. Should the bolt gun malfunction it is not to be opened until at least 30 seconds
after firing.
6.16.2 Mechanical Bridge Layer, Leguan
6.16.2.1 In general
a. The bridge layer must only be driven and operated by trained personnel.
b. Due to the bridge layers weight, good ground conditions are imperative. Pay
special attention to potentially weak road shoulders.
c. The bridge layer has a high centre of gravity, and is therefore particularly in
danger of tipping over, especially in the terrain. Drive straight/ uphill, and
avoid slopes.
Driving without bridge
a. When driving without bridge, the sole plates must always be taken off, in
order to increase general traffic safety. The width will hence be reduced to 2.9
metres and neither dispensation nor escort vehicle will be required.
b. If two or several Leguans are driving together, communication must be set up
between the two vehicles. Communication is to be operated by an assistant.
Driving with bridge
a. When driving with bridge, the bridge is to be secured and marked in
accordance with the technical manual, and all driving is to be conducted
according to the instructions provided in the dispensation document (apply
early, allow 2 days for the application to be considered).
b. A special assistant to the driver, who is to operate communications etc., must
always be appointed.
c. The transport must always be accompanied by an escort vehicle manned by
personnel who have been trained professionally for this, and in accordance
with INGR regulations. When driving on a motorway with two or more lanes
running in the same direction, the escort vehicle is to drive in the back in order
to alert passing vehicles. The escort vehicle is to be marked according to the
regulations in force.
The transport is to drive in the right lane. If for some reason the transport has
to drive in the left lane, the escort vehicle has to drive in front in order to alert
oncoming traffic.
d. If two or more Leguans drive together, two escort vehicles must accompany
them, and each must have communication.
e. When driving through narrow passages and when driving in reverse, the
assistant must always step out and direct the vehicle.
f. Adjust the speed according to driving conditions.
Laying bridges (points a-d do not apply to tank launched bridge).
a. The area where the bridge is to be laid must be reconnoitered in advance, in
354 Rev-04
accordance with the requisition form.

b. Staying on the bridge layer/bridge while bridging is going on is prohibited.
c. Pay special attention to the cases of the stabilizer jacks. These can often get
caught and then fall down. Potential risk of crush injuries.
d. Also pay attention when the sliding arm is moving. Risk of crush injuries.
e. During serial laying of bridges, conditions on the bottom must be
reconnoitered. Current and where to place the bridgeheads must be considered
carefully.
Other equipment on the bridge layer, such as the chainsaw, is to be used according to
UD 2-1 regulations.
6.17 SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN BUILDING
A FIELD COMMUNICATION LINE
Chap-6
Figure: 6.19
Building field communication lines
6.17.1 In general
6.17.1.1 General
When building a field communication line, the regulations in Field Manual Signals,
Part 4, Field communication lines, are to be observed. Special attention must be
given to the regulations concerning how to cross roads, railways and power current
Rev-04 355
circuits. Climbing power line poles and masts, low-voltage as well as high-voltage,
is prohibited. When using line sticks, sticks, etc. near power lines caution must be
shown, so that these do not accidentally touch the live power lines.
6.17.1.2 Building field communication lines along roads
When building a field communication line along roads, traffic rules are to be
observed. The vehicle must always drive on the right side of the road. When coming
to a halt, the vehicle is to be driven as far towards the shoulder of the road as
possible, so that it does not obstruct other traffic. On difficult road sections and
during poor weather and light conditions, the personnel must be particularly attentive
in order to avoid dangerous situations. Reflective vests are to be used by personnel
building field communication lines along trafficked roads, regardless of light
conditions. The vehicle must also be equipped with and use rotating yellow warning
lights.
6.17.1.3 Mounting equipment on vehicles
The laying apparatus is to be securely mounted on the vehicle, so that it will not be
pulled off should the cable get stuck during laying/assembling, in other words, the
cable must be able to be torn off, and not pull off the apparatus. Other equipment
such as cable drums, equipment cases etc. must also be secured so that they cannot
shift or move while driving.
6.17.1.4 Crossing power circuits
Crossing power circuits is to be conducted as described in Signals Field Manual,
part 4. Climbing power line poles and masts, low-voltage as well as high-voltage, is
prohibited. . When using line sticks and field line poles near power lines, caution
must be shown, so that these do not accidentally touch the live power lines.
6.17.1.5 Use of climbing equipment and pole climbing
Before climbing commences it must always be checked whether the poles can
withstand the strain.
6.17.1.6 Safety harness
When working on poles, masts, or in other places high up, a safety harness must
always be worn. Safety harness with straps, belts and carabiners must always be
checked before the equipment is put on. The safety harness is to be put on before
mounting the pole or mast. When working on poles, the safety strap is to be used
also when climbing up and down. The safety strap is to be adjusted to the correct
length in the following manner:
- Stand with climbing irons attached to the pole
- Pull the safety strap around the pole and fasten the carabiners
- Lean backwards with your body straight until the safety strap is taut
- When the safety strap is of the correct length, you should be able to join hands
at the backside of the pole, without them overlapping (arms straight).
6.17.1.7 Climbing irons (pole climbers)
Before climbing irons are put on it has to be checked that:
- All spikes are stuck and are of adequate length and sharpness
356 Rev-04
- The irons have no dangerous corrosion

- The grips and base plate are not deformed
- The leather straps are in good condition
The climbing irons are to fit tightly around the pole. The straps are to be securely
fastened. Well-trained climbers may refrain from using the breeching. When
ascending the heel is to be lifted so that the spikes are released. The irons are to be
moved up the pole 15-25 centimetres, then put your heel down and press the spikes
into the pole. The grips of the irons must not be lifted sideways. When reaching the
appropriate working height, the irons are to be fastened directly opposite each other.
Body weight is to rest on your heels. Safety harness and climbing irons must be
checked annually at superior levels repair shop. Check mark is to be attached on the
equipment.
6.17.1.8 Marking of guards at military roadblocks. See chapter 5 5.21.1.3.
6.18 RADIO AND RADIO LINE DUTY
6.18.1 In general
6.18.1.1 Staying inside stationary vehicles when the engine is running and/or the generating
set is being used.
See chapter 5 5.19.1.1 and onwards.
6.18.2 Handling of accumulators
6.18.2.1 Accumulators must be handled carefully to prevent the electrolyte from leaking. This
applies in particular when setting it in/taking it out of a vehicle and during transport.
Special caution must be shown during helicopter transport, etc. The acid is highly
corrosive, and may cause great injury to personnel and damage to materiel. Should
electrolyte leak out, it has be washed off with water as soon as possible.
Accumulators must be handled carefully to prevent the electrolyte from leaking. This Chap-6
applies in particular when setting it in/taking it out of a vehicle and during transport.
Special caution must be shown during helicopter transport, etc. The acid is highly
corrosive, and may cause great injury to personnel and damage to materiel. Should
electrolyte leak out, it has be washed off with water as soon as possible.
6.18.3 Fastening equipment inside vehicles
6.18.3.1 While driving, all radios/radio line equipment and accumulators are to be securely
fastened to the vehicle. Other equipment must also be secured so that it will not shift
or move while driving. The vehicles loading plan is to be observed.
6.18.4 Earthing of radio/radio line equipment
6.18.4.1 Radio/ radio line equipment mounted in vehicles is to be earthed to goods in the
vehicle, so that no potential difference will occur between apparatus goods and
vehicle. This earthing is also a condition for making the radio antennae get the best
radiation pattern possible. In this connection and especially when using space wave
antennae, the vehicle should also be earthed.
Stationary equipment mounted in buildings. Should radio/ radio line equipment
require earthing for reasons of functionality or safety, this equipment must not be
mounted or used in buildings or parts of buildings (rooms) where the wiring is not
Rev-04 357
earthed, at least not without assessing the danger of contact voltage between the
permanent wiring and the radio equipment. If the wiring in the room is rigidly
mounted and in good condition, and there is little danger of simultaneous contact
between radio equipment and wiring, the risk is considered to be low.
Radio/ radio line equipment of this kind should only be used in buildings or parts of
buildings (rooms) where the wiring already is earthed.
Earthing of equipment is to take place by connecting to earth on an electric panel. If
the equipment is earthed by use of earth rod, an equalizing bar must still be laid to
the earthing system in the building, with connection to the electric panel. Earthing by
connecting to water pipes in the building is prohibited.
6.18.5 Antennae
6.18.5.1 Antennae are to be erected as described in Field Manual Signals, parts 2 and 3.
Short masts may be fastened in other ways than described (to trees, poles, etc.) if this
seems more practical and will pose no risk for personnel and/ or materiel. For very
short masts, the regulations concerning wiring may be deviated from as long as this
poses no risk that the antenna mast and/or antenna element may get damaged or
cause harm to personnel.
6.18.5.2 On radio sets with high maximum output power (100 w and upwards) there will be
very voltage levels on the antenna connection. Touching can be lethal. When
connecting and disconnecting the antenna, the radio set must therefore be switched
off.
6.18.5.3 Fastening antennae during movement.. During driving all antennae mounted on
vehicles are to be tied down so that they do not interfere with power lines, telephone
lines and other items that can harm personnel and materiel. The free passage
underneath power lines must be at least 5 metres. On private roads, driveways and in
open terrain the free passage goes down to 4 metres. The driver of a communication
vehicle is to concentrate on all other crossing lines, culverts, and trees, etc. where the
free passage may be reduced even further. Antenna AS-1729 must not be tied down
further than 45 degrees. Should this prove insufficient, the antenna is to be
dismounted. This might be of particular relevance when driving through sub
passages, underneath trees, etc. and particularly when driving into garages and
workshops. When reversing with the antenna tied down, it has to be checked that the
antenna does not fasten in lines, branches of trees, etc.
6.18.6 Microwave equipment
6.18.6.1 In general
Strict precautions must be taken when handling the field cables between the base
band unit and the control unit, as these may distribute a voltage of 148 volt.
When using radioline equipment in the Ghz area, no personnel must stay near the
reflector when the equipment is operating. Even when the effect is small, these radio
beams may cause injury to the eyes if one looks directly at the reflector. Safe
distance from the antenna Is 1 metre.
For more on radiation danger, see 6.2.4 onwards.
358 Rev-04
6.18.7 Safety regulations when building field communication lines

6.18.7.1 See 6.17.1.1.
6.18.8 Where to place communications installations, radio/ radio lines when in
the proximity of high-voltage power lines
6.18.8.1 A communications installation, radio/ radio line, or a vehicle containing
communications equipment must not be placed closer than 20 metres away from a
high-voltage power line. This distance also applies to the installations additional
equipment, such as antennae, wires and generator sets.
6.18.9.1 In the signals unit and particularly whenever headsets are being used (including
walkman) the volume of the signal/speech will often be so strong that there is a risk
of noise injury. The volume must therefore be turned on as low as possible without
reducing the reception of the signal. If there is strong background noise (exceeding
85 dBA, that is, in or near a vehicle, vessel, aircraft, aggregate, or similar) earplugs
are to be worn, also within headsets. This will usually result in unchanged or
improved speech perception, because the earplug muffles the signal as well as the
sound, so that the distinctness (that is, the relative strength of the signal and the
background noise) will remain unchanged, with the volume at a slightly more
comfortable level. Using an open microphone where there is noise should be reduced
to a minimum, since the microphone picks up the noise and will send it amplified
into the headset (ears) of both sender and receiver, and will provide increased risk of
sound injury, and poor hearing conditions for them both. See also chapter 1 6.21
6.18.10 Transport and handling of flammable liquids
6.18.10.1 See Appendix 11 A
6.19 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR TRAINING
Chap-6
CONDUCT AFTER CAPTURE (CAC)
6.19.1 In general
6.19.1.1 Conduct after capture (CAC) training is regulated by the Chief of Defences
directive for conduct after capture during military operations,Conduct After
Capture (CAC).
The commandant of the Norwegian Defence Intelligence and Security School is
professionally responsible for CAC training. As the professional authority, the
commandant is responsible for drawing up safety regulations for CAC training.
6.19.1.2 Only personnel who have been trained and qualified by the commandant of the
Norwegian Defence Intelligence and Security School can carry out CAC training.
Unauthorized CAC training is prohibited and may result in investigation and
disciplinary repercussions. The unit requisitioning CAC training and the course
instructor are responsible when carrying through CAC training.
Rev-04 359
6.20 MEDICAL SERVICE
Figure: 6.20
Field hospital
6.20.1 In general
6.20.1.1 Although safety is highly prioritized in the Norwegian Armed Forces, the activity is
of a character that occasionally will see injuries occur. This is true when it comes to
exercises/training as well as in live missions. To limit the extent of injuries all
personnel must know how to perform first aid adequately. There is to be enough
sufficient, qualitatively satisfactory medical equipment to maintain safety for
personnel. Each unit is to have a medical plan. This is the responsibility of the
Commanding Officer.
6.20.2 Required competence
6.20.2.1 - Officers/NCOs must have medical competence corresponding to First Aid
Level 2, before they can be appointed to lead units or parts of units in the field
or during exercises
- All conscripts are to learn first aid level 2 during basic training.
- All personnel participating in exercises are to bring their personal first aid kit
depending on level of training, minimum individual first aid kit.
- All personnel must be able to use the distributed medical equipment correctly.
Medical equipment belonging to the unit is to be taken care of in a manner
that will ensure its operability at all times, particularly in terms of
temperatures, humidity and use-by date on the materiel.
- During exercises for units of company size (or equivalent), each unit is to
have personnel with level 3 competence in first aid, and minimum 1 person
whose primary function is medical service.
360 Rev-04
6.20.3 Plan for first aid, treatment and evacuation

6.20.3.1 Before any exercise or training is started, each unit is to have a plan for first aid,
treatment and evacuation of injured/sick personnel. At a minimum, the plan is to
state routines for contact with emergency phone numbers 110 (fire), 112 (police) and
113 (medical assistance), which persons in the unit are able to treat injured
personnel, how evacuation of personnel is to be carried out, and where the nearest
medical installation/medical doctor/hospital is located.
Units serving abroad are to have a plan answering the same demands for treatment
and evacuation as in Norway.
6.20.4 Carbonmonoxide poisoning
6.20.4.1 Carbonmonoxide (CO) is a highly poisonous and dangerous gas. It is without colour
or odour, and one will never notice the gas until the poisonous effects set in.
Whenever carbon compounds (kerosene, petrol, propane, etc.) burn without
sufficient air supply, there is a danger of carbonmonoxide poisoning. The poisoning
occurs because CO more easily gets into the bloodstream than oxygen, even when
there is enough oxygen in the air. The oxygen gets blocked from the erythrocytes,
and a form of internal suffocation occurs.
The first signs of carbonmonoxide poisoning include light headache, then nausea.
When the poisoning gets stronger, the headache will increase, one goes limp and will
eventually collapse and lose consciousness. A patient suffering from
carbonmonoxide poisoning will have a striking red complexion. Carbonmonoxide
poisoning can be effectively prevented by use of good ventilation.
First aid:
- Bring the injured person out in clean air.
- Make sure that the respiratory passage is open, and remove pieces of food and
vomit. Chap-6
- Provide artificial respiration, using the mouth-to-mouth technique.
- If the patient is breathing on his/her own, let him/her rest in a lateral position.
- Make sure that he/she does not feel cold.
- Make sure the patient receives medical attention as soon as possible.
6.21 HEARING, NOISE INJURIES AND
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
6.21.1 Noise injuries
6.21.1.1 If exposed to noise levels above 85 dbA, permanent injury may be caused to a
persons hearing.
The extent of the hearing damage depends on for how long one was exposed to the
noise, yet only one single impact may cause permanent hearing damage if it is strong
or lasts for some time.
The hearing damage depends on the sound pressure, which is measured in db. The
measuring of db is logarithmic, which means that an increase of 3 db on the sound
Rev-04 361
pressure, from 85 db to 88 db, will make the sound twice as strong.

Normally the ears will endure being exposed to continuous noise, except
blasts/shots, of 85 db for 8 hours a day. If the sound intensity is doubled, the time
one may be exposed to the noise without receiving injury will be cut in half.
Noise above this level will produce high-leveled sound pressure in the inner ear,
which will destroy the sensory hearing cells. The hair cells that perceive consonants
will be destroyed first. The brain will no longer be able to perceive these letters, and
even with a hearing aid one might experience difficulty communicating with others.
This is why it is important to protect your hearing and shield it from excessive noise.
6.21.2 Hearing protection in the Armed Forces
6.21.2.1 Earplugs
E.A.R. - plug
Earplugs made of expanding foam plastic
Will muffle the sound about 30-35 dB in the low frequency area (for instance engine
sound) and 35-40 dB in the high frequency are (for instance blasts/shots). Can be
cleaned and used multiple times. Must be shaped into a thin cylinder and placed
firmly in the auditory canal.
If hearing is normal, the earplugs will not get in the way of communication when
exposed to noise or underneath the headset/earmuffs.
Bilsom glass cotton
Will muffle the sound about 15-20 dB in the low frequency area and about 20-25 dB
in the high frequency area. Provides inferior protection compared to the E.A.R. plug.
Can be used at sound levels up to 95 dB. One-time use.
Custom - fit
Form-cast earplugs type ER-15, which are specially adapted with an acoustic filter
that muffles the sound 9, 15 or 25 dB. Washable with long duration. Provides more
even muffling of sound and better speech interpretation. Causes less irritation in the
auditory canal.
6.21.2.2 Earmuffs
Regular earmuffs muffle sound well in the high frequency area, same capacity as the
E.A.R. plug, but far poorer in the low frequency are, inferior to the E.A.R. plug. In
order to muffle the sound sufficiently, the earmuffs must fit tight around the ears.
The circle around the earmuff, which is pressed towards the head can be made of
foam rubber or be fluid-filled. If damaged, it has to be exchanged.
Light earmuffs
Armed Forces standard earmuffs. Muffles the sound about 0-5 dB in the low
frequency area and about 30-35 dB in the high frequency area.
Heavy earmuffs
Muffles sound about 10-15 dB in the low frequency area and about 35-40 dB in the
high frequency area.
362 Rev-04
Earmuffs with electronic communication equipment.

Has microphone, amplifier and headset mounted in the earmuff. Amplifies low
external sound levels such as speech and muffles high sound levels. Enhances
communication over short distances of less than 50 metres if the voice power
exceeds the background noise.
Earmuffs with passive communication equipment
Has a vent, which muffles sound levels above 80 dB. Its ability will increase up
to 120 dB. Allows free communication in the area.
Headset
Earmuffs with possibility for communication thorough radio/intercom. Muffles
sound equally to the passive muffling for the relevant headset. Muffling is
reduced by 5-10 dB when receiving communication sound, because the sound of
speech must be stronger than the background sound in order to perceive normal
speech.
Active Noise Reduction systems (ANR)
Open systems. A small microphone on the outside will intercept the sound which
will be de-phased by 180 degrees, which will be sent back in the anti-phase, like
waves colliding on the water, and reduce the noise.
Muffles the sound about 20 dB and is most effective for even and low-frequent
sound where earmuffs provide poor muffling. ANR may replace the mandatory
earplug inside headsets for noise levels below 95 dB. Communication becomes
more distinct. Must have an external energy source, a battery or electrical point
of connection.
Earmuffs with internal radio communication
Heavy earmuffs with bone conduction microphone in one earmuff, contact to the Chap-6
jawbone. The sound travels through a radio unit, which is carried on the bodies
of other persons with the same earmuff system. Well suited for strong
background noise and at distances. Noise muffling equal to heavy earmuffs.
Runs on batteries.
6.21.2.3 Sources of noise and choice of hearing protection
Personnel participating in service involving firing or blasting, or who stays within
100 metres from such noise sources, are to be informed about the danger of hearing
reduction/ear injury and ordered to wear hearing protection.
Personnel inside buildings or personnel who are adequately shielded from noise may
disregard the above rule.
The rule may also be disregarded in situations where the hearing protection makes it
difficult to maintain safety in an adequate manner. Officer/NCO may order or allow
change in this regulation. Should this happen, the personnel involved must be
presented to the medical officer and take an auditory test as soon as possible after the
incident.
E.A.R. earplugs must normally be worn:
- When noise levels exceed 85 dB or when peak values of sound level exceed
130 dB
Rev-04 363
- During continuous noise of up to 110 dB

- When firing blank ammunition
- Inside headsets when such are being used
- In the markers pit/target pit
E.A.R. plugs and earmuffs are to be worn:
- at noise levels above 110 dB (continuous noise)
- at peak values of the noise level exceeding 130 dB (impulsive noise)
In the list of noise sources and recommended hearing protection, minimum time for
exposure to sound that will lead to hearing injury is presented for some of the
sources.
Source of noise Sound level dB Hearing protection

Weapon
Pistol/revolver 120 - 140 earplugs + earmuffs
HK 416 Ikke mlt earplugs + earmuffs
earplugs + armoured figh- 161 earplugs + earmuffs
ting vehicle helmet/ear-
muffs AG 3
Machine gun MG3 155 earplugs + earmuffs
30mm 155 earplugs + headset/ear-
muffs
Carl Gustav 84mm recoil- 185 earplugs + earmuffs
less gun
Javelin from room in buil- 167,9 earplugs + earmuffs
ding
Javelin from covered slit 172,3 earplugs + earmuffs
trench
Javelin from bare ground 162,7 earplugs + earmuffs
81mm mortar 182 earplugs + earmuffs
120mm outside of 50m 119 earplugs + headset/ear-
muffs
155mm gun, normal char- 195 earplugs + earmuffs
ge
155mm gun, charge 9 204 earplugs + earmuffs
Vehicle
Tracked vehicle 91 earplugs (15 min)
AFV Leopard in the ter- 108 earplugs
364 Rev-04
rain 40 km/hour
Leopard 2 at a halt 80 earplugs + armoured figh-
ting vehicle helmet/ear-
muffs
AFV Leopard on gravel 108 earplugs + earmuffs
road (dirt road), 40 km/
hour
Leopard 2 on the road, 50 108,5 earplugs + armoured figh-
km/hour ting vehicle helmet/ear-
muffs
AFV Leopard on a gravel 115 earplugs + earmuffs
road 66 km/hour
CV9030N/F1 on the road, 102 earplugs + armoured figh-
50 km/hour ting vehicle helmet/ear-
muffs
CV9030N/F1 terrain, 30 99 earplugs + armoured figh-
muffs
Caterpillar 106 earplugs
Tournadozer 108 earplugs
Grader VHK 116 BM with 89 earplugs + earmuffs
direct injection engine
M 109 G 110 earplugs
M 113 A 1 30 miles/hour 109 earplugs Chap-6
M 113 A 1 30 miles/hour 112 earplugs + earmuffs
Diehl
M113 on the road, 30 km/ 104 earplugs + armoured figh-
hour ting vehicle helmet/ear-
muffs
M113 in the terrain, 30 95 earplugs + armoured figh-
muffs
M 548 115 earplugs + earmuffs
UNIMOG 416 90 earplugs + earmuffs (2 ti-
mer)
UNIMOG 421 88 earplugs + earmuffs (2 ti-
mer)
Volvo 4141 97 earplugs + earmuffs (30
min)
Rev-04 365
Airplanes
Helicopter 106-112 earplugs + earmuffs (1-4
min)
C-130 taxing, 20 metre 105 earplugs (4 min)
distance
C-130, flying, cargo com- 93 earplugs + earmuffs (1 ti-
partment mer)
Engine rooms
Aggregate room 105 earplugs
Compressors 104-109 earplugs
Compressor with jack- 109 earplugs + earmuffs (2
hammer (pneumatic drill) min)
6.21.2.4 Guidelines if noise injury is suspected or when staying in noise without hearing
protection
When personnel who have been exposed to high sound without hearing protection
display the following symptoms:
- Reduced hearing
- Ringing in the ears
- Buzzing in the ears
- Pain in the ears
The person is to be examined by a medical doctor who will perform an audiometer
test as soon as possible.
366 Rev-04
6.22 SEARCH AND RESCUE OPERATIONS IN

CONNECTION WITH ACCIDENTS AND
INCIDENTS IN THE DEFENCE FORCES
Figure: 6.21
Chap-6
Seaking on rescue mission
6.22.1 Minor accidents

6.22.1.1 In general
Accident memo.
a. The officer in charge at the site:
- make sure that the injury/damage is not worsened and that no more
people are injured.
- make sure that all injured are given first aid immediately.
- provide transport to doctor, possibly hospital. Consider calling
ambulance and doctor.
- cordon off the accident area if possible. Secure materiel and equipment
involved in the accident.
- write down the name and possibly also addresses and phone numbers to
witnesses.
- inform the unit commander or next highest commander about:
Rev-04 367
1. when and where the accident took place

2. names of personnel injured
3. the extent of the accident
4. measures taken
b. If an accident has caused the loss of life, injury to personnel and considerable
loss of military or private property the unit commander is to report:
- o Loss of human life/lives
- Injury to personnel
- Significant damage to or loss of military or other property, immediately
report:
- the course of events
- measures taken
- names of missing personnel
- the situation/condition of personnel
- where possible injured have been transported
- unit POC
- names, addresses and possible phone numbers to next of kin to:
1. For national operations, military phone no. 0565 6330/ civilian
no. 75 53 63 30. For operations abroad, military phone no. 0535
3624/ civilian no. 51 34 36 24. Duty officer national operations
is manned at Reitan during normal working hours, and at Jtta
during the rest of the day and night. Phones will be redirected.
The unit involved will as soon as possible issue a written
INCSPOTREP over their own means of communication
(MMHS, N-II, FIS-B or fax) in cooperation with the duty officer
J-3 Land. If necessary the duty officer J-3 will get in touch with
the unit.
J-3 Land, the Norwegian National Joint Headquarters, will
proceed with the following measures:
- Duty officer J-3 Land will brief the NJHQ internally, and
pass the gathered information on to MoD III/Situation
Centre.
- MoD III/Situation Centre will brief the Chief of Defence
and the Ministry of Defence.
- The commander of the National Joint Headquarters will,
depending on the nature of the incident, assess the
situation and decide whether an investigating committee
should be appointed.
2. The chief constable in the district where the accident occurred.
368 Rev-04
3. Other civilian authorities that presumably will need to take

immediate action in connection with the accident at hand.
If ammunition/explosives are involved in an accident, this must immediately be

reported to the NDLO (FLO FELLESKAP AMM), phone number 61 19 12 30/ 62
51 57 20, mobile phone 992 15 740/41, fax 61 19 03 83.
6.23 RESCUE SERVICE
Figure: 6.22
On his way up
6.23.1 In general Chap-6

6.23.1.1 The Ministry of Justice is responsible for the administrative coordination of the
rescue service and the police for the operative activity.
1. Cooperation
Rescue service is carried out in cooperation between a number of government
departments, voluntary organizations and private companies with suitable
resources for rescue purposes.
2. Coordination
The police are the designated coordinator for leading the work in concrete
accident situations.
3. Integration
The service is integrated and includes all types of rescue missions. (Sea
rescue, land rescue and air rescue).
6.23.2 Responsibility/leadership
6.23.2.1 The police hold the responsibility for the staff work involved in connection with
rescue service, and are in charge on the accident site. This applies without exception,
also within military boundaries, but the arrangement is to take certain practical
Rev-04 369
considerations
- If a military unit has met with an accident, the Armed Forces will execute the
coordinating leadership until the police arrive and take over.
- Being in charge on site, the police will work through the Armed Forces
organization, that is, local commanders on all levels will never be superfluous.
Commanders are to lead their units, but be subject to the leader at the site of
the accident.
- If an accident has occurred within military boundaries, the police may take
over the leadership on site as normal. It goes without saying that they will
cooperate with Armed Forces special units such as shipwreck, mine and
bomb clearing units, etc. Access control to the military area is to be
maintained, but it must never get in the way of speedy life rescue.
6.23.3 Leadership
6.23.3.1 The rescue service is divided in two in terms of leadership. There are two Main
Rescue Centres, one in the city of Stavanger and one in the city of Bod (MRC
South Norway, Stavanger and MRC North Norway, Bod). Each holds the overall
responsibility for their part of the country, south and north of the 65th latitude, and
for 27 Local Rescue Centres (identical to police districts and the sysselmann office at
Svalbard). (LRC)
Each Main Rescue Centre is under leadership of the chief constable in the cities of
Stavanger and Bod respectively, representatives from the Armed Forces, the
Norwegian Post and Telecommunications Authority and AVINOR. In addition a
number of advisers have been appointed, who may be called in when needed. The
Local Rescue Centres are attached to the 27 police districts in Norway, and to the
sysselmann office at Svalbard. The local centres are under leadership of their chief
constable when rescue work is about to commence. In addition, a number of advisers
have been appointed. The rescue centres are manned by police officers and police
officials, and by other persons who will be needed during rescue operations.
Personnel from the local police authority will often function as operatives in charge
on the accident site, in areas where rescue operations are ongoing. Normally, the
rescue operation is led by the Local Rescue Centre, which will be placed in the
relevant police district.
6.23.4 Armed Forces support
6.23.4.1 The Armed Forces will support with personnel and materiel whenever this seems
adequate. If there has been an accident on land and Armed Forces units are
participating in the rescue work, the unit will automatically detach a liaison officer to
the operative leader on site. This also applies for allied units. Liaison officer(s) for
the Local Rescue Centre is dependent on the situation, and is to be detached if the
LRC wants one. If they do, he/she is to be appointed by the Home Guard district
commander, being the territorial head.
The liaison element is to have competence within communications and medical
service (specifically local conditions) as well as in military resources in the broadest
sense of the term.
370 Rev-04
6.23.5 Organization
6.23.5.1 See appendix 12A
6.23.6 Reporting and investigation of accidents and incidents in the Armed
Forces
6.23.6.1 See appendix12B
Chap-6
Rev-04 371
7 MILITARY WORKING DOGS/ RIOT

CONTROL
7.1 USE OF MILITARY WORKING DOGS
Figure: 7.1
Canine on duty
7.1.1 In general
7.1.1.1 The safety regulations for the use of military working dogs apply to all training and
use of dogs in the military. The commanding officer of the Norwegian Military Dog
Training Establishment is also the professional authority for all use of dogs in the
military. Questions related to health checks, first aid and hospitalisation of dogs are
covered in the directive from the chief veterinary.
7.1.1.2 The term military working dog applies to all dogs owned by the military, including
those owned by the Norwegian Home Guard (also dogs owned by Home
Guard-soldiers individually). The following safety regulations apply to all training,
exercises and live missions where military working dogs are being used.
7.1.1.3 The safety regulations must be seen in connection with the directions that have been
drawn up locally, at the different unit locations where military dogs are assigned.
The Authorization programme for military working dogs in force, also includes
regulations that must be known by military dog handlers and those who are
professionally responsible for the canine units.
7.1.2 Personnel
7.1.2.1 The recruiting of personnel for canine units is based on voluntary participation.
7.1.2.2 Military and civilian personnel who are to handle/ work with military working dogs
must have participated in and passed six weeks of basic training (KHG) for dog
handlers, as appointed by the FHSK (The Norwegian Military Dog Training
Establishment). For dog handlers in the Home Guard, a two-week basic training
372 Rev-04
programme for dog handlers will suffice.

Personnel who are to work as dog tenders for military working dogs must have
attended and passed a two-week course in dog tending, arranged by the Armed
Forces.
7.1.2.3 Personnel who take part in the training of military working dogs are obliged to study
the safety regulations for use of military working dogs, and the directions that have
been drawn up locally, at the different canine unit locations. It is to be ascertained
that the dog handler possesses the required level of control over the military working
dog before he or she starts working with the dog in situations where violence and use
of force may come into play.
7.1.3 Materiel and equipment
7.1.3.1 All materiel that is to be used in a mission, or in training, during transport and while
kennelling dogs, is to be approved by the appropriate authorities. The FHSK will
recommend suppliers of approved equipment.
7.1.3.2 The materiel has to be in a condition that rules out the possibility of it causing any
harm to personnel or dogs. Collar, leash and track line must be checked for ruptures,
or other types of damage, daily. This is vital to prevent the said equipment from
rupturing, should the dog suddenly make a vigorous pull.
7.1.3.3 Arm protectors and muzzles are to be intact and without any sharp edges.
7.1.3.4 Transport cages for dogs are to be checked before use. The dog handler is to
ascertain that the cages are intact (without cracks), that they have no sharp edges,
that the locking device on the door is in working order, and that the cage has been
put together according to the regulations.
7.1.3.5 When stacking cages, it has to be ascertained that no ventilation hatches are covered,
and that the required amount of lighting is not being obstructed.
7.1.4.1 In situations where personal protective equipment (splinter-proof vest, bullet-proof
vest, helmet, etc.) is being worn by the dog handler the dog should wear a protective
vest, if this seems appropriate. The officer in charge of the canine unit must assess
Chap-7
the situation and make the decision.
7.1.5 Transport
7.1.5.1 All transport of canines must be carried out in a way that causes little discomfort for
the dogs. During transport, the dogs are to be properly supervised and cared for.
7.1.5.2 When moving around, the dog should, as a rule, be led in a leash. The exception to
this rule is when the officer in charge gives the order that the dog is to move around
unrestrained, due to reasons of training and/or the nature of the mission.
7.1.5.3 As a general rule, canines are to be transported in vehicles with cages mounted. The
Armed Forces must during all transportation of canines in cages on vehicles take into
consideration 2 in the Animal Protection Act and the Ratification draft Armed
P-19 Animal care and welfare and veterinary support during all phases of military
deployments which Norway has endorsed.
During operations or missions abroad similar transport conditions must be sought,
depending on which vehicle is being used for dog transport.
Rev-04 373
In addition, all vehicles used for transporting canines should have air conditioning
systems and possibility for heating in cold weather.
In vehicles where cages have not been mounted, transport cages or muzzles should
be used. When transporting more than two dogs in a vehicle without mounted cages
or transport cages, the dog handlers are to stay with the dogs throughout the transport
and keep them apart. Muzzles are to be put on.
7.1.5.4 Should a lorry be used for transporting two or more dogs and their handlers the lorry
is to have a tarpaulin and seats are to be mounted. The dog handlers are to be seated
back to back and keep their dog between their legs with the collar on throttle control.
The dogs are to wear muzzles. The vehicle commander is to ascertain that the safety
regulations are observed by the personnel being transported as well as by the driver.
If necessary, communications are to be set up between the vehicle commander and
the dog handlers. When transporting dogs on vehicles where it is impossible for the
dog handlers to be seated back to back, everyone should be on special alert. In
certain exercises, personnel and dog handlers may be transported in vehicles without
roll-over protection or tarpaulins. The frames must then not be lower than 40
centimetres.
Dogs should never be transported in the manner described above over distances
longer than 50 kilometres.
7.1.5.5 If dogs are transported in trailers, these trailers are to be approved according to
civilian laws and regulations for animal transport.
7.1.5.6 Should helicopters be used for transporting dogs and dog handlers, the dog handlers
are to be seated next to each other and keep their dog between their legs with a firm
grip on the collar and the muzzle, and with the collar on throttle control. The dogs
are to wear muzzles. An officer/NCO without dog is to supervise and be in charge of
the transport. He or she is to ascertain that no dog handler falls asleep, and offer
his/her assistance, should this be required. The officer/NCO in charge of the
transport must be able to communicate with the pilot. Because the dogs and dog
handlers have little space, special caution must be shown, and the leash is to be
fastened to the deck/floor of the helicopter. If only one to two dogs are to be
transported, transport cages should be used.
7.1.5.7 Whenever being transported on naval vessels such as a rubber dinghy or inflatable
boats, military working dogs are to wear approved life jackets marked "Forsvaret".
7.1.5.8 Should an all terrain vehicle (summer/winter) be used for transporting dog and dog
handler, the dog is to be placed in a securely mounted cage/transport cage. Should no
such case be mounted in the vehicle, the dog handler is to keep the dog between his
legs with the collar on throttle control. The dog is to wear a muzzle. In severe cold,
the dog must wear a rug.
7.1.5.9 Should a tracked vehicle be used for transporting dog and dog handler, the dog
handler is to keep the dog between his legs with the collar on throttle control. The
dog is to wear a muzzle. If there is enough space in the tracked vehicle, the dog
should be placed in a transport cage.
7.1.5.10 In addition, the military must always observe the current civilian laws and
regulations for dog transport in transport cages and in trailers.
374 Rev-04
Figure: 7.2
Canine transport, helicopter
7.1.6 Kennelling Chap-7

7.1.6.1 When kennelling dogs in cages or in running lines on guard duty, the kennel in its
entirety is to be examined by the dog handler in each separate case.
7.1.6.2 To prevent the dog from escaping the kennel, it must be equipped with a locking
device approved by the appropriate authorities one that is secured in such a manner
that the dog will not be able to open the lock on its own.
7.1.6.3 When using stall chains/ wires, these are to be equipped with two snap hooks/
carabiners. The snap hooks must be of a kind that is impossible for the dog to open.
7.1.6.4 The kennel must be checked for conditions that might cause injury to the dog (see
7.1.6.5). Should there be defects or deficiencies, these are to be corrected before the
dog is placed in kennel.
7.1.6.5 When kennelling dogs in the field, only approved chains are to be used. It is the
responsibility of the individual dog handler to check the chain for possible weak
points.
Rev-04 375
The kennelling is to be conducted in a manner so that no individual may get in

contact with the dogs unawares. If necessary, guards are to be posted.
7.1.6.6 The kennelling is to be conducted in such a manner that the dog is left unable to get
closer to paths (should there be such) than 4 metres. The stall chain is to be fastened
with the snap hook/ carabiner around the trunk of a tree, rather loosely, so that the
dog can move freely around within a diameter of about 1.5 metres from the tree (the
length of the chain). The dogs collar is to be on throttle control.
7.1.6.7 It is the responsibility of the individual to keep the kennel, fences, yards, etc. in
proper condition, so that the dogs cannot escape. The military must also observe
civilian laws and regulations concerning the kennelling of dogs in cages/kennels. All
kennels are to be approved by the local veterinary authority before they receive dogs.
7.1.7 Training and exercises
7.1.7.1 When using military working dogs as well as token forces, all personnel who may
get in contact with a dog, or be apprehended by a dog equipage, must know how to
behave in front of the dog as well as the dog handlers orders. The token force must
under no circumstance try to attack the dog or dog handler, and/or other personnel
who accompany the equipage. If the dog is to be used in an active assault, approved
protective equipment must be worn, in other words, arm protector/ protective suits or
muzzles. The dog handler must at all times control his dog when working with token
forces, so that the dog does not bite and injure other personnel (or other individuals).
Working dogs unused to detain fleeing individuals must be trained not to attack
individuals who remain passive. The dog is to break off/end the attack on the dog
handlers command.
7.1.8 Injuries
7.1.8.1 Personnel who have been injured or bitten by military working dogs are to be treated
by a medical doctor. The incident (injury to personnel/dogs) is to be reported to the
Chief Veterinary (FHINSP). Minor incidents or routine inspections are to be
included in the monthly reports from the units.
7.1.8.2 Should a dog get sick, it is to be treated by a military vet if the unit can produce one.
If the unit has no vet, it must have a written contract with a licensed civilian
veterinary concerning the treatment of military working dogs.
7.1.8.3 Also observe the regulations in Tff grp 66, and the paragraph 6.22.1.1, concerning
procedures for minor accidents and other incidents. som omhandler prosedyre ved
mindre ulykker og nestenulykker.
7.1.8.4 The owner or handler of a military working dog is liable for damages, on a
subjective or objective basis in accordance with the regulations laid down in the
claim for damages law of 13 June, 1969, no. 26, 1-5; the law of 9 July, 1926, no.
4, 1 for keeping farm animals, and the law of 9 June, 1987, no. 49, 29, for
keeping reindeer.
7.1.9 In general: Using military working dogs in situations characterized by
constraint or where force is being used
7.1.9.1 When and how a soldier may use a working dog as an instrument of force, is not
specifically laid down in Norwegian law, or governed in any other way. Only
authorized KGH dog handlers may use military working dogs in such situations. The
376 Rev-04
use of dogs in a violent and threatening situation depends on so many factors that a
detailed set of regulations would only lead to confusion. The dog handler must be
able to assess the situation and determine how the dog may be used most effectively.
The principal rule for soldiers use of instruments of force is that only the necessary
amount of force should be applied. The degree of force used must be estimated in
relation with the damage that may or will be inflicted. Before a military working dog
is used as an instrument of force, other less drastic means must have been tried in
vain, unless these appear to be obviously insufficient or unsuitable.
7.1.10 Situations of acting in self-defence: the Criminal Codes 48
7.1.10.1 If military personnel (dog handlers or others) or military installations are exposed to
acts of violence, vandalism, break-in, theft, or other illegal activity, use of force may
lawfully be employed to prevent the attack. The degree of force used must be in
proportion to what appears as necessary in order to prevent the unlawful act. If the
unlawful act has been completed, the situation changes. Since we no longer are
talking of an ongoing illegal attack, the situation will no longer call for acts of
self-defence. A few examples of situations where one might consider using military
working dogs include:
- In order to stop an initiated or apparently imminent act of violence/injury to
personnel (dog handlers or others) or materiel
- In order to prevent intruders from entering military camps or military areas
- In order to remove intruders who unlawfully have entered a military camp/
area
- In order to stop persons who are fleeing to avoid being lawfully prosecuted
- To abide by the law of keeping military secrets
Det understrekes at mildere midler normalt skal anvendes fr tjenestehunder tas i
bruk. Det m til enhver tid vurderes om bruk av tjenestehund er strengt ndvendig.
7.1.11 The principle of necessity: the Criminal Codes 47
7.1.11.1 Here, we refer to situations in which personnel or military interests are endangered,
even though there is no ongoing unlawful attack. The law says the risk of damage or
Chap-7
injury must be considerably higher than the risks involved when ordering the dog to
attack, if the attack is to be carried out lawfully under the principle of necessity.
Examples of situations in which it might be appropriate to use a dog under the
principle of necessity include:
- Cases in which demonstrators (or riots) prevent e.g. a messenger from
bringing an important message through
- Whenever the dog can be used to split up a crowd of bystanders or onlookers
who make it difficult for fire-fighters to do their job.
In acts of self-defence and acts carried out under the principle of necessity, force
may lawfully be used towards civilian as well as military personnel. Force may be
used to protect military as well as civilian interests.
7.1.12 Military police
7.1.12.1 Military officers and NCOs, military police and military guards may use force,
Rev-04 377
including military working dogs on alert, should this be necessary while doing police
work. This is in accordance with the law of police authority in the military, 1, see
3 police by-law 8. This authority may be used in areas controlled by the military
and in their immediate surroundings.
When using or threatening to use a military working dog as a particular means of
force, the dog handler is to report this - as soon as possible - to his closest superior
officer, who in turn is to report to the appropriate officer in the unit. If a person has
been injured by dog bite, see this chapters 7.1.8.1 and onwards.
7.1.13 Responsibility when using military working dogs
7.1.13.1 Should military dog handlers be working missions independently, not on the orders
of their superiors, they must themselves estimate whether the dog should be used to
stop fleeing persons. If an officer in charge accompanies the dog handler, or the dog
handler is under his command, and/or if superior officers are present, the person(s) in
command are to make the decision. The responsibility is then on the hands of the
person who gave the order to use the dog.
7.1.14 Using military working dogs when means of force are applied
7.1.14.1 Means of force include:
- Apprehending the person(s)
- Searching them (including bodily search) and, if necessary, confiscating
objects found
Means of force can only be used to the extent that one has the authority in law to
apply them. Authorization to use means of force is given in accordance with the law
of military police authority. The militarys use of working dogs must also be in
accordance with police regulations concerning the use of dogs for protection and
attack. Without receiving orders from a higher authority, or under the rules of acts of
self-defence or the principle of necessity, working dogs are only to be used for
apprehending people when this takes place in accordance with the Criminal
Procedure Acts 176. The authority to give the order to use the dog for
apprehending an individual is in part originating from statuatory rules about military
command, and in part from the regulations in the Criminal Procedures Act.
7.1.15 Using working dogs for apprehending individuals
7.1.15.1 The working dog may be used for apprehending suspects when the individual is
caught in the act of
- Carrying out a legal offence
- Fleeing, or while getting ready to try and escape prosecution for having
committed a legal offence
When the working dog may be used to stop fleeing individuals, in accordance with
the regulations above, the dog handler is to call out to and warn the fleeing person(s)
before the dog is let loose. The dog handler is to call out twice in a loud voice Stop,
or I will set the dog(s) on you. If there is a chance that the fleeing person might
have time to escape, the dog handler is to call out only once.
378 Rev-04
7.1.16 Marking military working dogs while training and during exercises
7.1.16.1 S-dogs/ Military working dogs in the Home Guard
While training working dogs, and the dog is running around unrestrained outdoors,
e.g. carrying out mountain rescue, avalanche rescue, making searches in the field,
etc., the dog must always be marked with the authorized triangle sign that signifies
that the dog belongs to the Armed Forces. While training other disciplines and
during exercises or in live missions, the decision to put the triangle sign on the dog
must be made by the officer in charge in each separate case. The triangle sign may
be requisitioned from the Norwegian Military Dog Training Establishment.
7.1.17 Using dogs to search for explosives
7.1.17.1 There are two main categories of threats:
- Specific bomb threat
- Unspecific bomb threat
Specific bomb threat
There is detailed information about the bomb; its location, time of detonation, trigger
mechanism, what it looks like, etc. On the order of the person in charge on the scene,
the dog handler is to command the dog to start searching and clearing the area
around the object.
Unspecific bomb threat
There is no detailed information concerning the bomb, but one suspects that a bomb
may be located in a specific place. On the order of the person in charge on the scene,
the dog handler is to command the dog to search for the bomb.
When using working dogs to search for explosives, there are two search categories:
- Searching to locate the potential threat
- Searching to clear the area
Searching to locate the potential threat
- The dog handler (no. 1) is to locate bombs using the working dog
Chap-7
- 1 assistant (no. 2) is to walk behind the dog handler, and his task is to mark
the cleared path systematically, plus mark the extraction route from the
explosives location to the EOD-personnels checkpoint. The assistant (no. 2)
must be EOD trained.
- Helmet and other personal protective equipment must be worn by both dog
handler and assistant
- EOD-personnel are to be present.
Searching to clear the area
- There is no specific indication that a bomb exists, but certain objects or areas
need to be cleared, e.g. when a VIP is coming to visit
- The dog handler may work alone
- Helmet and splinter-proof vest must be worn
- Should the dog find any explosives, EOD-personnel will take over and disarm
Rev-04 379
these.
7.1.18 Searching for live land mines
7.1.18.1 The dog equipage is to be authorized by the Norwegian Military Dog Training
Establishment, and the assistant (no. 2) by the units own professional authority. The
searches are only to be carried out with no. 2 present.
During controlled training searches using the dog to find live land mines, the SOPs
in force must always be observed.
Condition: For a dog equipage to search fields with live land mines, training must
have been carried out regularly in live, controlled minefields.
The operational dog equipage must train using original mines, with original
explosives, from the area in question.
7.1.19 Searching for bomblets and bomblet packaging, plus EOD (duds)
7.1.19.1 Searching for bomblets and bomblet packaging, as well as EOD (duds) using a dog
equipage, is only to be carried out if the dog equipage has been trained for this and
the dog knows the explosive(s) and packaging used for the specific bomblet.
When searching for bomblets, the same safety regulations apply as when searching
for live land mines.
7.1.20.1 The dog handler and his assistant (no. 2) who participate in searching for land mines
and clearing explosives, are to have the following personal protective equipment
available:
- Field dressing
- Helmet with visor/face shield
- Protective suit
7.2 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR RIOT

CONTROL
7.2.1 In general
7.2.1.1 Instruction in and training of riot control is to be led by an instructor who has been
certified or who has gone through and passed the riot control instructor course level
1, level 2 or level3, under the direction of the professional authority, and after the
year 2006.
Earlier courses taken, as well as relevant riot control duty, may be also be approved,
by the Chief of the professional authority (Manoeuvre).
7.2.2 Officer conducting the exercise and safety controllers
7.2.2.1 Bilateral exercises in riot control might easily escalate out of control. The OCE must
plan the exercise carefully, in order to minimize the risk of personnel getting injured.
There are to be three safety controllers for the foremost platoon (OCE, safety
controllers 1 and 2).
All safety controllers MUST wear reflector vests and whistles. NO other person must
use a whistle apart from the safety controllers. If a safety controller blows his
380 Rev-04
whistle, the situation is to freeze immediately.

In minor exercises, the same person might function both as OCE and safety
controller 1.
The OCE must have passed the riot control instructor course, levels 1, 2 or 3,
authorized by the professional authority.
The OCE: may be the platoon commander in platoon training, hence have the main
responsibility while the training is going on. The OCE cannot be a part of the
training force when the exercise is bilateral.
Safety controller 1: safety controller for the token force.
Safety controller 2: safety controller for the unit that is training.
During large-scale exercises, the OCE must consider carefully how many safety
controllers will be needed in order to go through with the training in a safe and
responsible manner.
The OCE must study the regulations for leading such activities.
7.2.3 The token force
7.2.3.1 The token force must have an understanding of and insight into the purpose of the
training, in order to avoid unnecessary injuries, and for the training to proceed and
escalate in the intended manner. The token force must have trained for the mission
before the bilateral exercise begins.
The token force is to follow the guidelines for token forces. See Lesehefte
Massetjeneste, v. 1.0, page 42.
7.2.4 Medical readiness
7.2.4.1 Medical kit no. 1 (or bigger)
Stretcher with blanket and a means of transportation.
When training on platoon level or higher levels, medical personnel with vehicles for
evacuation are to be present. The medical personnel must in advance be informed
that dogs are to be used, there will be live fire, vehicles will be used, etc. in order for
them to be prepared to treat various types of injuries.
Chap-7
7.2.5 Required equipment
7.2.5.1 According to the OCEs orders.
In bilateral exercises, the training force is to wear full personal protective equipment
while the exercise is going on.
7.2.6 Using batons/sticks
7.2.6.1 In bilateral exercises, training batons are to be used.
The baton must not be aimed at an individuals head - it is to be used striking the
main muscle groups in the individuals arms and legs.
7.2.7 Vehicle use
7.2.7.1 The training force must know the safety regulations for the relevant vehicle type.
The vehicle is to signal with the horn before it starts moving.
The vehicle commander is to make eye contact with the safety controller before the
vehicle starts moving.
Rev-04 381
When vehicles are moving, the distance between the vehicle and the personnel to its
sides must be of a length that ascertains that no person will run the risk of getting
caught under the vehicle, should he or she for some reason fall.
No large objects must be thrown at the shield wall when the vehicle and the shield
wall are moving, this is to prevent that anyone should fall towards and possibly get
caught underneath the vehicle. Water bottles (canteens) and wooden blocks are
authorized, but large objects such as pallets etc. should be avoided.
No large objects must be thrown at the shield wall when the vehicle and the shield
wall are moving, this is to prevent that anyone should fall towards and possibly get
caught underneath the vehicle. Water bottles (canteens) and wooden blocks are
authorized, but large objects such as pallets etc. should be avoided..
7.2.8 Using dogs
7.2.8.1 See 7.1, Use of military working dog.
All participating personnel are to be briefed by the dog handler before an exercise or
training begins, so that they all understand how the dog will behave.
When using military working dogs, this is to be planned in advance.
All drills where dogs are being used must be trained without the dog before
participating in a live situation. Medical personnel are to be alerted and be prepared
to treat bite injuries, fractures and crush injuries.
Individuals in the token force that do not wear protective suits during training where
a dog without a muzzle is being used, are to be instructed by the dog handler before
the training begins. These persons are to be instructed to stay at least 2 metres in
front of the dog at all times.
When the dog is to pass through the shield wall, the gap is to be at least 2 metres
when personnel do not wear personal protective equipment, one metre when they do.
When the dog is to pass through the shield wall, the personnel that make up the
shield wall where the dog is to pass through are to take one step back and to the side,
so that they stand face-to-face, ready to close the gap as soon as the dog has passed
through.
The dog handler is to keep the dog by his foot, on a tight leash, in all situations
where friendly forces come closer than 5 metres, all the way until the equipage has
passed through the gap in the shield wall.
If the token force is allowed to throw objects, the shield wall, the cleaning group and
reserves are to be well aware of their duty to protect the dog and the dog handler.
Do not physically approach the dog except on orders.
Do not strike or kick the dog.
Do not throw objects at the dog.
Do not get between the dog and the dog handler, or behind the dog.
7.2.9 Using open flames
7.2.9.1 Great caution must be taken when using open flames, this be whether car tyres are
being burned, while training heat tolerance, or while burning liquid is being used in
other ways.
382 Rev-04
Molotov cocktails must not be thrown directly towards personnel in bilateral

exercises.
Molotovcocktail skal kastes mot et spesielt oppmerket ml, eller omrde hvor
omgivelsene ikke er brennbare.
Molotov cocktails must primarily be used to illustrate its effect and dangers, and
when training chosen fire fighters.
At least two persons (minimum) are each to bring a 6-kilo fire extinguisher ready for
use. During bilateral exercises at least 2 fire extinguishers must be kept in reserve.
7.2.10 Use of pepper spray
7.2.10.1 Pepper spray is only to be used by personnel who have gone through authorized
training.
Pepper spray must NOT be used in bilateral exercises. There are specific exercise
sprays that may be used in bilateral exercises, if practicing the use of such sprays is a
goal in itself.
7.2.11 Using deluge guns
7.2.11.1 Only personnel with authorized training can man the deluge gun or water hoses with
high pressure during bilateral exercises.
If deluge guns have been mounted on e.g. vehicles, the water must not be aimed at
personnel who are at a distance closer than 50 metres.
In bilateral exercises, the deluge gun must not be operated with a pressure that might
cause injury to personnel.
Should the deluge gun be aimed towards the ground in the purpose of causing rock
fall and dust rising in the air, token personnel are to be equipped with protective
goggles.
The training force must know the current safety regulations for the relevant vehicle
type(s). See 7.2.7
7.2.12 Using CS
7.2.12.1 Regulations for use of CS gas, see 6.5
Chap-7
7.3 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF LESS
LETHAL WEAPONS
7.3.1 General
7.3.1.1 The Commander for Manoeuvres is the professional authority for Less Lethal
Weapons (LLW) in the Norwegian Armed Forces. (Ref.: Directive of the Chief of
Defence on the procurement and use of Less Lethal Weapons in Norwegian Armed
Forces divisions, 2007.)
The commander of the Norwegian Armed Forces Military Police division is
responsible for the development, approval and introduction of methods in the use of
gas and impact weapons involving Military Police and military sentries carrying out
sentry and patrol duties.
Instruction and exercises in the use of Less Lethal Weapons should be under the
direction of a qualified instructor. Qualified means that the person in question has
Rev-04 383
undertaken and passed Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3 of the Instructors Crowd

Management and Less Lethal Weapons course under the direction of a professional
authority, or the Instructors Pepper Spray and Telescopic Baton course under the
direction of the FMPA (The Norwegian Armed Forces Military Police Division), or
the Norwegian Police University College.
7.3.2 Definitions
7.3.2.1 The term Less Lethal Weapons is not restricted to the weapon itself but also applies
to ammunition and tools. Examples of Less Lethal Weapons include, but are not
limited to, impact weapons, gas weapons, water cannons, laser dazzlers, sonic
weapons, as well as kinetic and area-impacting weapons systems.
The term impact weapons refers to short batons (rubber batons), telescopic batons
and long batons.
The term gas weapons refers to CS gas, Pepper Spray and similar, less lethal gases,
including hand-held, weapon mounted and vehicle mounted gas weapons.
The term water cannons refers to weapon systems that fire directly impacting
quantities of water with less lethal kinetic impact, including portable and vehicle
mounted water cannons.
The term laser dazzlers refers to weapons systems that fire directly impacting laser
beams containing a bright, white light towards personnel or vehicles, which may be
used to warn or halt personnel from a distance, or isolate personnel or vehicles
within an area.
The term sonic weapons refers to weapons systems that impact personnel with high
and/or unpleasant sounds, which may be used to warn or halt personnel from a
distance, as well as forcing personnel to remain at a desired distance, cf.
communication tools and sound waves.
The term kinetic and area-impacting weapons systems refers to weapon systems
that fire directly impacting bullets with less lethal kinetic impact, including
ammunition for 12 bore shotguns, 40 mm grenade launcher tubes and 76 mm vehicle
mounted smoke launcher tubes.
7.3.3 Pepper spray
7.3.3.1 Pepper Spray should only be used by personnel who have received approved training
under the direction of a professional authority, refer to item 7.3.1.1
During training, hand-held pepper spray should be used. This should be primarily
water-based. Training should be undertaken in accordance with the prevailing
curriculum and training programme stipulated by the professional authority.
Self-testing in the use of live pepper spray is not, at present, undertaken. Until
further notice, this has been replaced by practical training highlighting first aid, in
which those participating in the exercise are exposed to the secondary effects of Live
Pepper Spray, level 2, Contamination.
- During practical training, pupils should immediately wash their eyes and
face in running water, where necessary. Pupils should note that they must not
rub their eyes or scratch irritated skin. Pupils should note that blinking in rapid
succession will reduce the effect of the spray. In addition, pupils should note
that the pepper spray should not be swallowed. The mouth, throat and nose
384 Rev-04
should be rinsed with water which should then be spat out

- In respect of practical training, a stretcher, medical bag and evacuation
vehicle should be present
The effects of pepper spray:
Pepper spray causes an intense, burning sensation to the skin and eyes. The effect is
not immediate but occurs after around 10 seconds. The effect lasts for around 30
minutes but gradually decreases after as little as approx. 5 minutes.
7.3.4 Batons
7.3.4.1 Batons should only be used by personnel who have received approved training under
the direction of a professional authority, refer to item 7.3.1.1
Baton blows should not be directed towards the head, neck, solar plexus or spine but
towards the large muscle groups in the arms, legs and buttocks.
Chap-7
Rev-04 385
8 ACTIVITIES IN COASTAL
ENVIRONMENTS, RIVERS AND
LAKES
8.1 IN GENERAL
Figure: 8.1
Coastal-rangers in action
8.1.1 Introduction
8.1.1.1 This chapter presents regulations for all activities in a coastal environment, or on
lakes and rivers.
- in general in relation to activities in and on water, safety regulations and
leadership are described in part one of the chapter. In part two of the chapter
special precautions during the various activities are described.
- all personnel who are planning and/or doing duty in, on and near water must
study this chapter carefully.
8.1.2 Professional authority
8.1.2.1 - The professional authority Engineer is responsible for duty in and on water
- When it comes to swimming the Norwegian School of Sport Sciences is the
professional authority
- The professional authority Engineer is responsible for emergency breathing
equipment for armoured materiel
8.1.3 Leadership and responsibilities
8.1.3.1 Regulations in chapter 1 apply to these types of activities.
Special regulations applying to boats and ferries:
386 Rev-04
In all units where boats or ferries are being used, a naval safety officer is to be
appointed. The naval safety officer is to be picked from amongst experienced
officers. By experienced is meant a highly educated officer with experience within
the professional field, minimum military boatman certificate level 2. He or she is to
authorize all unit missions involving boats and/or ferries. His/her decision is to be
based on the following criteria:
- the condition and type of materiel
- the personnels level of competence, clothing, certification and level of
education or training
- weather conditions, wave conditions and wind conditions
- the complexity and distance of the mission
The naval safety officer will in each case set the directions for how naval safety is to
be organised. Depending on the extent of the mission, the officer may choose
whether he/she wishes to follow the mission from a rescue boat or appoint or be
assigned a safety chief and safety controller (see chapter 1 1.1.5) fulfilling this
function.
The safety chief/safety officer(s) is to be picked from amongst experienced officers.
By experienced is meant an officer with a military boatman certificate, minimum
level 2. Experienced sergeants and privates may also be used as safety controllers, as
long as they have a military boatman certificate level 1 at a minimum.
Safety personnel report to the naval safety officer and are responsible for
ascertaining that the safety regulations are observed and that the conditions for an
authorized boating mission are/have not changed. The safety officer and safety
controller(s) have the authority to call off the exercise should this be deemed
necessary for safety reasons. The naval safety officer must be informed as soon as
possible. Their place of location is to be wherever they can monitor the exercise best.
Normally this will be on board a rescue boat.
Conditions that are to be taken into consideration include:
- water depth, current, wind, waves, bottom, light conditions, water
temperature, other traffic, level of education/training and certification.
8.1.4 Certification
8.1.4.1 Definition: Chap-8
All personnel are to have received their certification before using motorboats
and/or ferries. All certificates can be obtained through authorized
courses/application to the professional authority.
- Category 1: Simple use of motorboats in connection with transport or
other work in known or safe rivers/waters in daylight. Advanced
Navigation skills not required.
- Category 2: Supplement to category 1. The boatman can steer the
vessel on the sea independently, in waves and in the dark/poor
visibility.
- Category 2 Ferry: Can work as boatman/engine man on a ferry under
the ferry captains leadership, and operate the propelling system on the
Rev-04 387
ferry captains orders.

- Category 3: Lead major boat operations, education/training and
command ships.
- Category 3 Ferry: Lead major ferry operations and education/training.
8.1.5 Duty on and near lakes and rivers

8.1.5.1 Definition:
- Duties that present an immediate danger of falling into the water.
Required protective equipment:
- Approved flotation devices, or a rope may be attached to the body in a way
that keeps it from falling off. The assistant at the opposite end of the rope is to
stay on safe ground.
8.1.6 Climate
8.1.6.1 All water in Norway is by definition cold. In other words, precautions must be taken
and adjusted to the temperature in the water rather than the temperature in the air.
See chapter 6 6.11 in UD 2-1.
This rule of thumb can be used as a starting point for calculating how long a person
can stay in the water at different temperatures. The rule presupposes that the person
is in adequate physical shape and presents how long it takes before a person will be
unable to take care of himself/herself. The rule does not take into consideration the
possibility of local frost injuries.
Light clothing: Ice water (0-5 degrees C) 15 min

Cold water (5-10 degrees C) 30 min
Field uniform:: Twice the amount of time
Rough sea/current:: Half the time
Note that the ability to survive in cold water is highly individual. During physical
exhaustion the ability will decrease significantly. The rule must therefore be used
only as a starting point.
8.1.7 Definitions
8.1.7.1 Rescue vessel:
Should be motor driven unless the conditions indicate that it will suffice without. If a
motorboat is used, the driver of the boat is to hold a users certificate. The vessel
must be of a capacity and stability that enables it to help personnel out of the water.
The vessel is to be manned by at least 1 boatman and 1-2 assistants who are good
swimmers. The rescue vessel is to be equipped with:
- heaving line, alternatively lifebuoy
- searchlights (or strong torch)
- scoop
- 2 paddle oars, unmotorized: 4 pieces.
388 Rev-04
- boathook
- rope
- medical kit adapted to the mission
- communication with the one/those who are in the water and those who are
ashore
8.1.7.2 Safety vessel
Safety vessel is to be motor driven and manned by 1 experienced boatman and 1-2
assistants, who are capable swimmers, at a minimum. The safety vessel must have at
least the same capabilities as the vessel(s) it is meant to secure, and its load must not
diminish its function as a safety vessel. The vessel must have the capacity to haul
people out of the water. The safety vessel is to be equipped with:
- heaving line with life buoy
- search lights
- scoop
- paddle oars in reserve
- boathook
- rope, at least 20 m long
- medical kit adjusted to the mission
- grapnel/anchor with chain and rope
- during operations on the coast/near big water surfaces there is to be a
maritime VHF (access to channel16+ work channels)
- fire extinguisher (applies to vessels where this is part of the standard
equipment)
- 5 emergency flares, red light or signal gun with 5 red lights
- lanterns
- during operations at sea in the dark when visibility is poor, the safety vessel
should be equipped with radar and navigation system
8.1.8 Personal flotation devices/ Rescue Equipment Chap-8
8.1.8.1 In general
Approved floatation equipment is imperative when working in, on and near water.
8.1.8.2 Definitions
Approved personal floatation devices:
- Category 1 Off duty: Normal clothes, calm and stable weather conditions,
smooth waters. Minimum life jacket according to individual weight.
- Category 2 Duty near/on water. Regular uniform, minimum buoyancy on
floatation device 150N.
- Category 3 Offshore operations.
Rev-04 389
- Category 4 Heavy clothing. (Body armour). NS-EN 399 Lifejackets 275N

The Aquasafe is approved up to and including category 2. The Aquasafe has a
durability of about 10 years
8.1.8.3 Rescue equipment
Inflatable personal floatation devices
- Must be checked by authorized personnel according to the requirements for
the relevant type. The Aquasafe is to be checked annually.
- Must be checked by the user prior to use, that is, a visual check depending on
the type of vest. Inflate the device using the mouthpiece and look for leakages.
Correct packing and storage is imperative!
- Is to be the outermost piece of garment, in other words, no straps, pieces of
clothing, etc. must cover it.
Survival suit
- Check that all zippers and buttoning devices are intact
- Check that no damage has been inflicted on the Neoprene material, which
makes the suit float.
- Must be checked regularly by the user.
Life jacket
- Check that the vest is without visible damage or tear and that the sources of
buoyancy are present and intact.
8.1.8.4 Testing personal floatation devices/rescue equipment
Should be carried out by everyone who administers such equipment in order to get
familiarized with the equipment.
By testing is meant using the equipment in the water/ under similar conditions to
those during which it will be used.
Implementation:
- pre-defined area
- no possibility for drifting caused by current/wind
- when testing inflatable floatation devices, lines are to be attached to the body
in a manner that makes it impossible for them to fall off
- rescue vessel is to be on site
- hot-room/tent is to be available
- medical kit
8.1.9 Suggested reading
8.1.9.1 - The Norwegian Maritime Directorates booklets, 1 4.
- The booklet Man and water.
390 Rev-04
8.2 SPECIAL RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR

ACTIVITIES
8.2.1 Wading across rivers
8.2.1.1 Wading vehicles
Vehicles are only to wade at established wading sites or in places that have been
reconnoitred by engineer divers.
Floatation devices category 2 are to be accessible.
Special regulations for the individual type of vehicle can be found under the UD 2-1
paragraphs on the relevant vehicle type or in technical manuals.
- Regulations for wading with vehicles equipped with emergency breathing
equipment are an integrated part of the driver training for the relevant vehicle
type. Regulations and requirements are to be established by the professional
authority (Manoeuvre).
8.2.1.2 Wading personnel
The points below only apply to personnel on foot.
Definition
It must be possible to maintain foothold and balance when crossing water with
maximum depth 1 metre on foot. Should there be no possibility for foothold or
balance, the regulations for swimming will apply.
- The speed of the current must be taken into consideration when evaluating
foothold.
In advance
The crossing site is to be reconnoitred with special attention to width, depth, water
level, current, bottom and water temperature.
The reconnaissance is to be carried out by the officer conducting the exercise/ the
person who is to be in charge of the training.
The crossing site is to be tested before training commences.
See also 8.1.5. Service on and near lakes and rivers.
Command and control Chap-8
- The officer conducting the exercise is to have control/ an overview over the
crossing site.
- The officer conducting the exercise must have direct communication with the
rescue vessel.
Execution/safety measures
Rescue vessel is to be on site.
Safety rope must be tightened so that it cannot be pulled down into the water when
the weight of the people being secured is added. The safety rope is to be tested and
checked after use.
Guiding line is not to function as safety rope.
Rev-04 391
Safety line is to be put up downstream and is to be secured with float balls.

The number of people in the water must not exceed the number of people the rescue
personnel and boat have the capacity to rescue.
When wading in darkness and when visibility is poor, those who wade are to be
marked with a watertight light source and equipped with floatation devices category
1. Safety line is to be marked with a watertight light source.
A lightstick is considered to be a watertight light source.
Protective mask must under no condition be worn during wading
8.2.2 Swimming across rivers
8.2.2.1 Amphibious vehicles
Amphibious vehicle swimming is only to take place in swimming areas that have
been reconnoitred in advance.
Military diver is to be present and ready to provide assistance before, during and
after using amphibious vehicles for swimming.
Military diver is to be guided by a military diving guide.
Category 2 floatation devices are to be accessible.
Special regulations for the individual type of vehicle can be found under the UD 2-1
paragraphs on the relevant vehicle type or in technical manuals.
Regulations for swimming with amphibious vehicles equipped with emergency
breathing equipment are an integrated part of the driver training for the relevant
vehicle type. Regulations and requirements are to be established by the professional
authority (Manoeuvre).
8.2.2.2 Swimming personnel
Definition
Crossing rivers where the water depth exceeds 1 metre or where personnel do not
have adequate foothold and balance.
In advance
The crossing site is to be reconnoitred with special intention to width, depth, water
level, current, bottom and water temperature.
- Currents increase the difficulty of taking safety precautions
- If the current has a speed that exceeds 0.5 metres per second, this has to be
considered in relation to available safety resources
The reconnaissance is to be carried out by the officer conducting the exercise/ the
person who is to be in charge of the training.
The crossing site is to be tested before training commences.
Command and control
The officer conducting the exercise is to have control/ an overview over the crossing
site.
The officer conducting the exercise must have direct communication with the rescue
vessel.
392 Rev-04
Execution/safety measures
Rescue vessel, see 8.1.7.1, is to be on site.
Safety line must be tightened so that it cannot be pulled down into the water when
the weight of the people being secured is added. The safety line is to be tested and
checked after use.
Floatation devices category 1 are to be used.
Guiding line is not to function as a safety rope.
Safety line is to be put up downstream and is to be secured with float balls or piling.
The number of people in the water must not exceed the number that the officer
conducting the exercise can keep control of, and not exceed the number that the
rescue personnel/vessel has the capacity to rescue.
When swimming in darkness and when visibility is poor, the personnel swimming
are to be marked with a watertight lighting device. A military diver is to be present
and ready to assist personnel before, during and after swimming. A military diving
leader is to be in charge of diving. Safety lines are to be marked with watertight
lighting devices.
A lightstick is considered to be a watertight lighting device.
When swimming, no items or equipment aside from personal floatation devices must
be attached to the body.
Protective mask must under no condition be worn while swimming.
8.2.3 Swimming
8.2.3.1 In general
Outdoor swimming at military units or institutions may take place as free swimming
or unit swimming. Free swimming means individual swimming on ones spare time
and at ones own initiative and responsibility. Unit swimming means swimming
monitored by an NCO/officer in charge. All swimming during service is to be
conducted as unit swimming according to the regulations in 8.2.4 Free swimming
must observe normal safety rules and the regulations for each site.
8.2.3.2 On all bathing sites within the camp area, the following rescue equipment is to be
present:
- Lifebuoy with 15 m rope
Chap-8
- Boathook.
In camp areas with large bathing sites (ponds, lakes, etc.) where the water is deep, a
boat or a solid raft must be on site. The boat/raft must be of a size that enables it to
carry two persons, and stable enough to withstand the struggle associated with
pulling a person in need of help or a person who has is deceased onboard, without
capsizing. The boat or raft must be big enough to provide space for resuscitation
attempts on board. At bathing sites outside the camp area (swimming arranged
during marches or field exercises) life belts and ropes must be accessible. The
garrisons commanding officer may prohibit bathing in special places within the
camp area and within close proximity of the camp.
Rev-04 393
8.2.4 Command and control

8.2.4.1 Unit swimming for military personnel must always be carefully monitored with an
officer/NCO leading the activity. The units oldest officer/NCO present is to be in
command and he/she is responsible for ascertaining that the safety measures listed
below are observed:
- Swimming is only allowed in a limited surveyable area (e.g. a small cove).
Ordinarily the bathing site should be approved prior to swimming by the
garrisons commanding officer or by the unit commander. When the
temperature in the water drops below 15 degrees Celsius unit swimming is
prohibited. Swimming where the water is deep should be avoided for 1 hour
after regular meals or after having been subjected to hard strains (marching,
endurance tests, etc.) or if the unit has been marching for a long time without
food.
- If swimming is to take place at a new bathing site, the person in command
must check the bottom conditions and current before swimming commences.
- Where there is a mud bottom or where the current is stronger than 1.5 m per
second, unit swimming is prohibited.
- Non-swimmers are to be guided to a defined area in shallow water and a good
swimmer must be set to watch them. Officers/NCOs are to be present.
- Before swimming commences, the participants are to be teamed up in pairs
that are to guard each other. The pairs are to be instructed to stay close to one
another. Should something happen to one of them, the other is to try and save
his mate, while calling for help.
- At least 2 good swimmers are to be picked out to watch the bathing place
from separate sides of the cove. They are to keep an eye on the swimmers and
assist them should problems arise. The swimmers are to be dressed in
swimwear.
- The number of swimmers per officer/NCO must not exceed 40.
- When a boat/raft is on site (see 8.2.3.1, In general) it is to be manned by at
least 1 good swimmer and 1 rower, and placed further out than the swimmers.
- The boat is to be equipped with a lifebuoy with a 15 m rope.
- Swimming further out than the boat is prohibited. When no boat is on site, the
outer perimeter is to be measured from the beach.
- The duration of unit swimming depends on weather conditions and
temperatures. As a general rule no one is to stay in the water for more than
half an hour.
394 Rev-04
Figure: 8.2
Figure 92 - Where to place lifeguards during unit swimming outdoors
8.2.4.2 Diving into swimming pools must not be done unless it has been ascertained in
advance that the depth of the pool poses no risk.
- Diving from heights exceeding one 1 metre is prohibited.
- Dispensation from these regulations might be given when special conditions
demand it, for instance when training for competitions, giving instructions,
etc.
For diving into swimming pools, see 8.2.5.4 Pool requirements
8.2.5 Special regulations for swimming in pools
8.2.5.1 Leadership Chap-8
The requirements for leadership during unit swimming also apply when swimming
in pools, except from the requirement that the activity is to be monitored by an
officer/NCO. His/her duties may be performed by a certified bath attendant. By
certified is meant an attendant who has passed the Norwegian Life Saving
Associations test for life savers/lifeguards, and is capable of running this sort of
activity.
Special regulations for swimming in pools are listed below.
8.2.5.2 The duties of the garrison's commanders
- Appoint the person responsible for the pool a PT officer, military
groundkeeper or similar.
Rev-04 395
- Provide regulations concerning who will have access to the pool.

- Decide opening hours for the pool.
- Provide regulations for which departments are to order bath attendants.
- Provide regulations for dressing, order and conduct in and around the pool.
- Provide regulations for how the safety regulations are to be made known.
8.2.5.3 Duties of the bath attendant
In addition to the regulations above, the following rules apply:
- If there is a diving board/tower in the pool, one of the bath attendants is to be
placed on one of the diving boards. He/she is to ascertain that none of the
swimmers lie at the bottom of the pool, and at the same time check that no one
is diving when there is danger of a collision between diver and swimmer(s).
- Check that nobody wears a diving mask.
8.2.5.4 Pool requirements
The swimming pool should meet the following requirements:
- The capacity of the pool is to be determined based on about 40 cubic metres
of water per swimmer (while in the water).
- The pool is to be fenced in.
- The bottom of the pool should be as flat as possible, sloping towards the deep
end of the pool.
- The bottom of the pool should be of a light colour.
- At the pool, the following life saving equipment must be present:
- Lifebuoys
- Reaching pole with a loop
- First Aid kit
- If the pool is to be used for swimming lessons or bathing for non-swimmers,
the depth of the side of the pool that is being used for these purposes should
not exceed 1.5 metres.
- If diving into the pool is allowed, the following measurements are required:
Height of diving Minimum depth Length of mini- Width of mini-

board mum depth mum depth
3m 3,5 m 6m 3,5 m
5m 3,8 m 6m 3,8 m
7,5 m 4,1 m 8m 4m
10 m 4,5 m 12 m 4,5 m
8.2.5.5 Hygiene and cleanliness
The medical officer should test water samples weekly when the pool is being used
396 Rev-04
extensively, and every fortnight when the pool is being less used. If necessary
chlorine is to be put in the pool. Chlorine concentration level 0.1 mg chlorine per
litre of water. For pools that have their own water purification facility, the
regulations for the facility are to be observed. In addition the following rules are to
be observed:
- All swimmers must observe the unwritten rules of normal cleanliness.
- If possible, swimmers are to take a shower before entering the pool.
- Changing into swimwear is to take place in the locker room or outside the
fence. Footwear is prohibited inside the fence.
- Breakable objects are prohibited within the fence.
- Dogs and other animals are not allowed in the pool.
8.2.6 Ferry, including possible use of pontoons
8.2.6.1 Definitions
Floating construction which may be used to transport materiel and vehicles across
rivers, lakes and oceans.
- UNIFLOTE
- Ferry 2000
Tow boat is defined as a boat as long as it is not attached to the ferry and under the
ferry captains command.
8.2.6.2 Elements of danger
When constructing and driftingoperating ferries, various elements of danger must be
taken into account.
- Crush injuries
- Climate injuries (cold).
- Spilling of lubricants/fuel.
- Danger in connection with the use of cranes.
- Drowning
8.2.6.3 Command and control
The ferry captain/commander is in charge of the construction and is responsible for Chap-8
safety. The ferry captain/commander is the officer in command on board and is
responsible for navigation, manoeuvre and safety.
Before embarking on the ferry, the unit being supported is to be informed about:
- The ferrys qualities and capacities.
- Responsibilities and the chain of command on board.
- Safety equipment and its use (including personal flotation devices).
- Placing and conduct.
- Drill in case of a fire or if somebody falls over board (off the vessel).
Rev-04 397
8.2.6.4 Certification and requirements of personnel

In order to work as part of a ferry crew, everyone must have a Category 1 Certificate.
The person driving the ferry/the engine man is to have a Category 2 F Certificate.
The ferry commander must have Category 2F, should have Category 3F.
8.2.6.5 Execution/safety measures
Cranes are often used in ferry construction. The crane driver is to be professionally
authorized for the crane he is operating. The crane drivers ground guides must have
good knowledge about the materiel that is to be used when lifting. The crane driver
is responsible for security on and around the crane and he/she is to instruct personnel
on conduct on the construction site.
When constructing ferries the following safety materiel is to be used:
- Helmet
- Protective gloves
- Approved flotation devices
During driving on to and off the ferry, only the driver is to man the vehicle, which
will be directed by personnel under the command of the ferry commander. 4-6 wheel
drive is to be used. The doors are to be unlocked and the windows down. For tracked
vehicles with hatches, the drivers hatch is to be locked in open position.
Vehicles are to be parked in a manner that enables the ferry to stay as horizontally as
possible in the water, with good stability. Vehicles are to be strapped according to
the ferrys own regulations, the hand brake is to be on/brakes are to be locked and
the vehicle is to be put in first gear (low). All materiel is to be fastened to the ferry,
unit weapons and combat materiel must in addition be secured with sufficient
emergency buoyancy.
When on the ferry all personnel on board must wear approved flotation devices.
Personnel on board must primarily stay on top of or outside vehicles, if personnel for
practical reasons need to stay inside the vehicle, safety pins are to be loosened,
tarpaulin rolled up and windows rolled down.
Safety vessel is to be present as long as the ferry is on the water. The safety vessel
may also perform practical tasks, as long as this does not interfere with its primary
function.
The ferry lanterns are to be lit in the dark and when visibility is poor, exceptions can
be made during tactical movement and if the naval safety officer considers it
feasible, in terms of safety.
The ferry is to be stocked with the following safety equipment:
- Heaving line with lifebuoy
- Heaving line with lifebuoy
- Extra rope
- 4 anchors with chains and rope
- Boathook
- 12 kg fire extinguisher
398 Rev-04
- Medical kit adapted to the mission

- 5 emergency flares, red light, or signal gun with 5 red lights
- During coastline operations/large water surfaces, the ferry is to be equipped
with maritime VHF, with access to channel 16 and work channels.
- Lanterns.
- Spare parts and tools according to type.
Crews are to wear the following items:
- 2 Lightsticks
- 1 whistle
- Approved floatation devices
8.2.6.6 Uniflote
The Uniflote ferry is a building kit of pontoons and uses towboats for propulsion.
The ferry can take fairly strong sea, but its load and the towboats may reduce its
capability in strong wind and high waves. Wind/current may cause the ferry to drift.
This is particularly noticeable when the ferry lies alongside land. For that reason, the
ferry berth is to be placed in a quiet location when this is at all possible.
Uniflote materiel may also be used for other constructions. The safety regulations for
ferry are then to be observed to the extent this is possible.
8.2.6.7 Ferry 2000
Ferry 2000 is a building kit of pontoons and the leguan brigde. Its propulsion system
is motor pontoons. The ferry is transported on shore by the use us special vehicles,
and is built on the water by use of special vehicles and soldiers. Primarily, the ferry
is to be used under stable and calm weather conditions. Maximum height of waves is
1 metre, but the proportionality between the height and length of the wave is more
important than the height of the wave seen in isolation. The ferrys capacity must
therefore be estimated depending on the conditions. Keep in mind the possibility of
back wash from other vessels.
Special vehicles for Ferry 2000 include crane, vehicle with hooklift. See HUP 11-1.
Driving licence category C and civilian G-8 certificate for crane required.
See Use of construction equipment, 5.5.5 for vehicle with hooklift. Chap-8
When launching pontoons, no personnel must stay in the falling direction of the
pontoon.
Particular danger of crush injuries during
construction/deconstruction
By 1 August 2005 the Ferry 2000 has been put to use for troop and conceptual
testing, changes and amendments to this point will be made.
Rev-04 399
8.2.7 Vessels
8.2.7.1 Definitions
Safe waters: Lakes and small rivers

Coastal waters/large Great lakes, fiords, coastal environments, big rivers.
water surfaces:
Boating operations: All forms of military use of vessels in the Army.
Civilian vessels: All forms of non-military vessels, canoes and kayaks.
When using a vessel various elements of danger must be taken into account:
- Crush injuries.
- Climate injuries (cold).
- Spilling of lubricants/fuel.
- High voltage injuries.
- Drowning.
Note that effective cold combined with a damp environment significantly increases
the risk of cold-related injuries.
The boatman is in command and holds the professional responsibility onboard.
Before embarking on the vessel, the personnel being supported are to be informed
about:
- responsibility and chain of command on board
- the qualities of the vessel
- protective equipment and its use
- placing of packs and personnel
- conduct on board in the case of
fire
man over board
capsizing
taking in water
enginge breakdown
8.2.7.4 Certification and requirements of personnel

The boatman must be certified for the conditions he is to master the boat under. He
must also be cleared for the type of vessel he is to sail. In units that have boat crews,
the boatman must have category 2 at a minimum. Only motor boats require
certification.
400 Rev-04
8.2.7.5 Requirements of vessels

Vessels that are used must be CE approved at a minimum, and suited for the type of
use they are to be exposed to.
All personnel on board are to wear personal flotation devices. Personnel who stay on
boats should wear clothes that will protect them from cooling should an accident
occur. All equipment is to be fastened to the boat, unit weapons and combat materiel
must be additionally secured with sufficient flotation devices.
Safety vessel must always be on site, however, it may operate independently in well
known waters, when it is light and the height of waves is below 1 metre. If the
distance to the shore may exceed 100 metres an additional vessel is to be accessible
on the same water surface.
Lanterns are to be lit in darkness and when visibility is poor, exceptions can be made
during tactical movement and whenever the naval safety officer deems it
professionally safe. If several vessels are operating together, they must all have
communication with each other.
Vessels are to be equipped with the following safety equipment:
- heaving line with lifebuoy
- searchlights (may be hand held)
- extra rope
- grapnel/anchor with chain and rope
- boathook
- paddles
- fire extinguisher (applicable to vessels where this is part of the composition)
- medical kit adapted to mission
- 5 emergency flares, red light, or signal gun with 5 red lights
- lanterner
- spare parts and tools according to type
The boatman is to wear:
Chap-8
- 2 Lightsticks
- 1 whistle
- approved personal flotation devices
8.2.7.7 Dog (animals) in vessel
See chapter 7 7.1 USE OF MILITARY DOG
8.2.7.8 Use of civilian vessels
Welfare/ off duty use::
- Civilian regulations are to be observed
- Whoever is lending materiel must ascertain that the required safety equipment
is present, and that the borrower is familiar with its use.
Rev-04 401
Organised military use: Units or teams using civilian vessels in connection with
courses, trips, etc.
Civilian regulations are to be observed, with the following exceptions:
- An officer conducting the exercise is to be appointed. The officer conducting
the exercise is to assess weather conditions, wave conditions and wind
conditions, and is to call off the trip should he/she find it irresponsible to
continue.
- The officer conducting the exercise is to inform the others of general conduct
in vessels and conduct in case of an accident. He/she is to have a plan for how
to alert others of potential accidents.
8.2.8 The Navys directive for diving, surface swimming and use of pressure
chamber
8.2.8.1 See SUP 12 (B), the Navys directive for diving, surface swimming and use of
pressure chamber.
8.2.9 Bridging
8.2.9.1 Definitions
Bridging: Building and using bridges as part of a crossing ope-

ration or as independent construction or passing.
Simple missions: Standard bridge over a known gap, where the bridge
will not be used for long. For standard bridges, stan-
dard gaps and adequate ground conditions, the bridge
may be used in the field, after an officer with profes-
sional knowledge has authorized it.
Complex missions: The bridge is to be used extensively for a long period
of time. Many vehicles will pass and different loads
will have to be supported.
Improvised bridges: Constructions based on improvisation.
8.2.9.2 In general
Bridging differs between:
- education
- projecting
By projecting is meant bridging for commercial or military traffic over time.
- crush injuries
- falling from great heights
- danger in connection with using cranes and construction machines
8.2.9.4 In advance
Thorough reconnaissance which is to provide answers about:
- ground conditions
402 Rev-04
- width of gap
- height above gap
- materiel requirements
- machine support
- required personnel
During simple missions the construction manager is responsible for reconnaissance.
During complex missions a project manager is to be appointed, and he/she is
responsible for reconnaissance.
The project manager is to have extensive knowledge of statistics and projecting.
When carrying through complex bridging, the bridge is to be categorized and marked
in accordance with STANAG before it is put to use.
The construction manager/project manager or whomever he/she appoints is
responsible for safety at the construction site.
The person in charge of safety is to ascertain that everyone who stays near the
construction site is wearing the required personal protective equipment.
Personnel on construction sites are to wear the following protective equipment:
- Helmet
- Safety boots (boots with a steel tip)
- Gloves
- Equipment protecting them from falling when working high up (safety
harness)
8.2.9.7 References
FOR 1998-06-26 no. 608: Regulations for use of construction machines. The
Ministry of Labour and Social Inclusion.
8.2.10.1 In general
(Valid for freshwater only, not sea ice or mixed fresh-/salt water (brackish water)) Chap-8
Crossing ice-covered lakes is to be ordered by the C.O. or the person he authorizes.
The route across ice covered rivers and lakes is to be set with high accuracy. Prior to
setting the exact route, a thorough reconnaissance must be performed. The purpose
of this reconnaissance is to determine how much weight the ice can hold. The
reconnaissance is to be executed by personnel who are qualified to determine the
character of the ice and its load carrying capacity. When performing ice
measurements at least 2 men must be present, one on the ice taking measures and on
land or safe ice.
8.2.10.2 Personnel doing ice measurements, must have the following equipment:
- ice drill, ice pegs, snow shovel, metric measure and a 25m rope.
Rev-04 403
One end of the rope is to be attached under the arms of the person who is
drilling and the other to a tracked vehicle or secured by personnel on firm
ground. The person doing the measurement must not carry backpack,
equipment, helmet or weapon, only the necessary winter clothing and materiel
needed for the recon. If skis are being used the bindings and ski poles must be
released.
8.2.11 The quality of the ice
8.2.11.1 In general
Definitions
- Ice roads, places of crossing built across frozen waterways where only the
natural layer of frozen water provides the driving surface.
- Ice bridges, places of crossing built across frozen waterways where
improvements have been made over time in order to better the natural frozen
water driving surface.
Driving on ice is to be limited to job assignments only, until a thorough revision has
been completed. Which job assignments, are to be determined by the CO.
The quality and thickness of the ice must be reconnoitered for the entire route,
including the places for driving off/on land. Should there be elements of risk along
the route, the route is to be altered or the ice must be strengthened.
The thickness of the ice is measured by taking random samples the entire length of
the route. Random samples are taken by drilling holes in the ice and measuring
thickness. Only blue ice, not frozen snow or slush on top of it, must be measured.
The thickness of the ice must be checked on both sides for the entire length of the
route. The distance to the side between the places of drilling is to be 13 metres and
with a distance of 10 metres between the drilling holes in the moving direction.
Driving near river mouths and where there is a narrowing must be avoided, even
when the ice has been measured to well above minimum thickness.
Driving across water that is regulated should be avoided. Should crossing such
waters be required, consult someone who has local knowledge, if possible, and check
the ice immediately before crossing. Information about military vehicles can be
found in the vehicles technical manual and in TH 100-3, Technical Manual, Data
for Military Vehicles and Ordnance.
Special conditions
When classifying points of crossing where the total weight of the vehicle exceeds 20
tons, engineer reconnaissance and engineer assessments are to form the basis for the
COs evaluations.
For units who have a permanent area of operations, with continuous solving of
missions that include passing of frozen lakes or rivers, the following adaptation
applies. Under the criterion that experienced personnel who have local knowledge as
well as information about the lake/rivers shallows, dangerous areas and local ice
conditions, the distance between the drilling holes may be increased. Another
condition is that the thickness of the ice is at least twice the minimum thickness.
For personnel on foot, on snowshoes, on skis or on snowmobile the following
404 Rev-04
adaptations apply: One hole for measuring is drilled every 25 metres along the entire
route, the holes are to be drilled 1-2 metres to the side of the route, always
downstream from the route. Minimum distance from firm ground to the first and the
last hole is 10 metres.
8.2.11.2 Requirements for ice thickness
In the table below, the values presented are for blue ice in fresh water, passing speed
is set at 15-20 km/ht, one way traffic:
In the table below, the Required thickness of Distance between person-

values presented are for ice measured in centi- nel and vehicle, measu-
blue ice in fresh water, metres (cm) red in metres (m)
passing speed is set at
15-20 km/ht, one way
traffic:
Soldier on foot, snows- 10 10
hoes or skis. Maximum
140 kilos.
Soldier on foot, snows- 15 10
hoes or skis with pulk.
Maximum 240 kilos.
Snowmobile with 2 soldi- 25 30
ers without sled. Maxi-
mum 650 kilos.
Snowmobile with 2 soldi- 30 30
ers, with sled. Maximum
1,200 kilos
1 Ton 14 14
2 Tons 20 20
3 Tons 24 24
4 Tons 28 28
5 Tons 31 31 Chap-8
10 Tons 44 44
15 Tons 54 54
20 Tons 63 63
25 Tons 70 70
30 Tons 77 77
35 Tons 83 83
40 Tons 89 89
50 Tons 99 99
Rev-04 405
60 Tons 108 108

70 Tons 117 117
80 Tons 125 125
Using the table:
1. If the air temperature has been above 0o Celsius for more than 6 hours during
the last 24, the total weight must be multiplied by 1.3 in order to determine the
required load carrying capacity. As early as after 2 hours of temperatures
above zero the ice begins to lose its strength. On the other hand, a significant
fall in temperature over a short period of time will make the ice crisp and
decrease its load carrying capacity during the first 24 hours of steady, cold
temperatures.
2. To decide the distance between vehicles of different total weight, use the
distance that is set for the vehicle with the heaviest weight. Should a frozen
lake or river be crossed in both directions simultaneously, two different routes
are to be established, at least 50 metres from each other.
3. If you have to park the vehicle on the ice, the vehicles total weight must be
doubled, and the distance must be at least what it is for passing. Check by
drilling a hole near the vehicle. If water starts flowing up, the vehicle must be
moved.
4. The ice must float on the water, and there should be water close to the top of
the hole. Be especially aware close to shore that the water level may have
subsided and left areas with air underneath, where the load capacity is very
limited
5. AVOID all driving on wet cracks. Dry cracks are of little significance.
6. If there are several layers of ice consisting of water or loose slush, only the top
layer of blue ice is to be used to find the load capacity. If there are several
layers and the middle layer consistis of frozen slush ice, the two top layers of
blue ice and half (50 %) of the frozen slush are to be used for load capacity
8.2.11.3 The ice is to be checked as often as possible and especially:
- Before and after the ice has been exposed to heavy loads
- After mild weather or variations in temperature between +/-
- When there are variations in the water level
8.2.12 Marching order and documentation of military traffic on ice-covered
waters
8.2.12.1 Marking of the crossing routes
The purpose of marking the crossing routes is to ensure that everyone who moves
across the ice will choose the same path. Use a marking stick to mark the route, the
definition of a marking stick is a stick where at least 1 metre rises vertically and
visibly from the base. The marking is to be visible in darkness.
- On routes for foot soldiers, soldiers wearing snowshoes, or soldiers on
snowmobiles, 1 marking stick per measuring hole every 25 metres is
406 Rev-04
sufficient. Both sides of the route must be marked clearly where vehicles are
to drive on or off firm ground; there must never be any doubt concerning
which side of the marking sticks the route goes.
On ice roads and ice bridges built for traffic, marking sticks are to be placed on each
side of the carriage way.
8.2.12.2 When moving across ice-covered waters, a checkpoint is to be established, manned
by experienced personnel who will provide guidance and check the crossing. Each
soldier and each vehicle is to be guided when moving across the ice.
Sufficient rescue capacity must always be at hand when moving across ice-covered
waters. The checkpoint is to register every soldier and vehicle moving across the ice.
The registration form is to provide information about who is doing the registration
and where the point of crossing is.
1. Date
2. Nationality/Unit
3. Rank/Name
4. Location in MGRS
The registration form is to provide information about weather-conditions:
- Average temperature the last 24 hours
- Minimum thickness of the ice
- Maximum depth underneath the ice
All military personnel passing the point of crossing must be registered by:
- Nationality/Unit
- Rank/Name
- ime of crossing
All military vehicles passing must be registered by:
- Nationality/Unit
- Vehicle category/type
- Wheels/Tracked
Chap-8
- Registration number
- Total weight in tons
- Time of crossing
Should an accident or near-accident occur, the report is to be enclosed with the
damage report. See paragraph 1. If military vehicles with a total weight that exceeds
1,500 kilos use the crossing route, the registration is to be reported through the chain
of command.
8.2.12.3 Before crossing, all vehicles are to be prepared for evacuation, safety belts and
equipment are to be loosened, and possible emergency exits made ready. The speed
is to be even and according to paragraph 8.2.11.2, stopping the vehicle is to be
Rev-04 407
avoided. Making the wheels spin, hitting the brakes hard, making turns and passing
other vehicles must be avoided.
8.2.12.4 During transportation in the terrain with tracked and armoured vehicles, where it is
difficult to determine if you are crossing ice covered lakes and rivers, the following
must be carried out:
Battle tanks and self-propelled artillery:
- Vehicles are to be driven with open hatches. Drivers hatch is to be closed and
the driver observes through the periscopes.
- Turret is to be locked in a position that ensures that the driver can escape
immediately through the escape hatch and the commanders hatch.
Furthermore the drivers escape hatch is to be free of all equipment (loose
equipment, section equipment, etc.) to ease the escape for the driver.
- Tanks, armoured combat vehicles and armoured rescue vehicles are prepared
for wading (se user/technical manual).
- The crew on self-propelled artillery are to abandon the vehicle and cross on
foot.
Other armoured vehicles:
- Vehicles are to have open hatches while crossing
- Type M113 vehicles are to be prepared for swimming
- Vehicle evacuation must be practiced prior to crossing
- For details see user/technical manual.
Tracked vehicles
- All bottom/drain plugs are to be inserted and tightened
- If there are personnel in the rear cabin, the side hatches must be opened and
fastened at the top edge.
- The personnel are to be drilled in the emergency procedures
- An app. 30 metre rope is to be attached to the towing hook, and an empty fuel
can is to be fastened to the end of the rope.
- Safety belt must, if in use, be loosened
8.2.13 Tolerance exercise for breaking through ice
8.2.13.1 Definition
An exercise where the purpose is to feel how the body reacts to cold water, and to
train techniques to be able to get on top of the ice and to safety.
The exercise can be carried out with or without skis/equipment.
8.2.13.2 Elements of risk
Inhaling cold water, which may lead to serious coughing and uncontrollable
spasms/reflexes.
Frostbite and other injuries caused by low temperatures.
408 Rev-04
8.2.13.3 Preparations
The ice and the road to where the exercise is planned must be reconnoitered
according to paragraph 8.2.10.
The officer conducting the exercise is responsible for the safe execution of the
exercise.
Personnel with a first aid education of minimum level 3 must be present
The person training is to be secured with a rope under his arms, around his chest.
The rope must be tied in a manner so that it cannot come undone. If backpack is used
the rope is to be fastened underneath the backpack so that the backpack can be
removed without loosening the rope. The person responsible for these safety
measures must at all times place himself in such a manner that he quickly can help
the person in the water out of the water
A heated room/tent/vehicle is to be available.
A vehicle for medical service with a stretcher, patient blanket, patient heater and
medical bag is to be available.
Equipment must not be attached to the body. Backpacks are to be carried on one
shoulder only. If skis are being used, the ski bindings must be loosened. The hands
must not be strapped to the ski poles.
All materiel (skis, backpack, etc.) is to be secured by separate ropes. This requires a
separate person responsible for these particular safety measures (not the same person
who is responsible for the soldier who is training).
8.3 SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR USE OF
CIVILIAN VESSELS
8.3.1 Definition
8.3.1.1 During operations in coastal landscapes civilian vessels in this context means use
of smacks, cutters, civilian ferries and vessels.
8.3.2 Transport on cutters/smacks
8.3.2.1 The size of the vessel has to be ONE foot per man over short distances and TWO
foot over longer distances. Chap-8
8.3.2.2 The following safety equipment is to be on board:
- 1 life boat
- 1 raft
- 2 rafts for unit being transported (extra)
- 1-2 lifebuoys
- 1-2 boathooks
- Life jacket for each individual.
Rev-04 409
8.3.3 Supplementary regulations for LCP, cutters and smacks
Figure: 8.3
landing with a LCP
8.3.3.1 During transport personnel are to stay in the holds, cabins and compartments. While
crossing a transportation officer, damage control team and lifebuoy watches are to be
appointed. The lifebuoy watches must be directed to where they are to be placed, and
told what their duties are. Using open flames is strictly prohibited.
8.3.3.2 During all forms of unit transport the following personnel must be appointed prior to
crossing, to check on safety while loading, during the crossing and while unloading:
embarkation officer: On land in the embarkation area

embarkation officer(s) ONE for each vessel
transportation officer(s) ONE for each vessel
When a relatively small number of personnel are to be transported, the responsibility
of the transportation officer can include the two other functions.
8.3.3.3 The following safety precautions are to be taken whenever a unit is to be transported.
- Before transport.
- there must be life jackets for all personnel
- all personnel must know how to put on the life jacket (life jacket drill)
- all personnel must have been instructed in the routines for outbreak or
fire, shipwrecking, and man over board.
- fire guard and lifebuoy watch are to be appointed and shown to their
places.
- a six-man damage control team is to be appointed.
- all personnel must know which raft they are to go to, and where the raft
410 Rev-04
is located.
- Movement control team is to be appointed and informed of their duties.
- While loading, crossing and unloading:

- Loading:
- The officer in charge on land (embarkation officer) directs
personnel and vehicles from the beach on to the vessel. All
personnel on land are to follow his orders.
- Movement control team (stowers) are to help direct vehicles on
board
- Personnel without special duties are NOT to stay on deck during
embarkation.
- The distance between the vehicles while driving onboard must
be at least 10 metres.
- A driver is to sit in the vehicle while it is driven on board.
He/she is to stay in the vehicle until the loading has been
completed and will then be allowed to leave the vehicle.
- All personnel are to receive a life jacket before or immediately
when embarking on the vessel.
- Fuel/ammo vehicles are to be placed fore or aft. The same goes
for excavator/wheel loader when applicable.
- No vehicle must be parked closer than 60 centimetres from a
bulkhead.
- The distance between vehicles lengthways is to be at least 20
metres.
- Personnel must NOT embark on the vessel before all vehicles are
in place. This is due to personal safety.
- The embarkation officer is to report to the commander of the
vessel when stowage has been completed.
- Ear protection must be worn by personnel who stay close to Chap-8
running vehicles that make a lot of noise (see 5.1.2.7).
To prevent injury caused to personnel or materiel, which may occur due
to unskilled directing, it is emphasized that the embarkation officer is
responsible for having personnel present who can help direct the
vehicles when they drive on board the vessel according to the loading
plan approved by the commander of the vessel.
Drivers are to help strapping the cargo in order to ascertain that the
correct strapping bolts on their vehicles are being used.
- During crossing:
While crossing, the following safety measures are to be noted and
observed:
Rev-04 411
- The transportation officer is responsible to the captain of the

vessel
- Lifebuoy watches are to be appointed, placed and instructed in
what their tasks are
- Fireguard and damage control team are to be appointed. The
fireguard will be positioned on deck.
- In case of an emergency the damage control team are to report in
front of the bridge (starboard side).
- All personnel must know which raft they are to go to.
- Life jacket is to be worn by all personnel during crossing if they
stay off the orlop deck/ outside their cabin.
- Use of open flame, including heating the primus (stove) is
prohibited on board.
- Smoking is generally prohibited, but the commander of the
vessel may decide to depart from this rule and assign an area for
smokers.
- Staying in or underneath vehicles is strictly prohibited.
8.3.3.4 On board the commander of the vessel is in total command. In the event of
shipwrecking/ fire, personnel without particular duties are to stay calm where they
have been placed to give the crew and rescuers sufficient space to work.
8.3.3.5 Relevant tasks, depending on the situation, will include:
- Putting on and checking your life jacket
- Getting the fire extinguishers out
- Moving safety equipment to a safe location, ready to be used on orders
- Setting each dinghy afloat
- Making all flammable substances and explosives ready for dumping
- Distributing signal lights, emergency flares, torches, etc.
- Gathering at the assigned spot to be able to leave the
412 Rev-04
Appendix 1.
CONSTRUCTION OF SAFETY
TEMPLATES FOR DIRECT FIRING
WEAPONS
Definitions
V01. Flareback area
A triangular area behind the weapon, with depth u and largest width y.
V02. Maximum ricochet range (MRR)
The maximum range, measured from the firing stand that a ricochet can reach after
one or several impacts on the ground.
V03. Maximum range
The longest allowed or longest possible distance to the target when firing. Farthest
hit expected when taken into consideration that the weapon is aimed with optimum
or highest possible elevation (nominal elevation plus maximum deviation in height).
V04. Minimum range
The shortest allowed or shortest possible distance to the target when firing. Nearest
hit expected when taken into consideration that the weapon is aimed with the lowest
allowed or expected elevation (nominal elevation minus maximum deviation in
height). The range can also be determined by the arming distance or possible splinter
distance.
V05. Impact area
The area where the ammunition may hit the ground first.
V06. Ricochet area
The area where a ricochet may land after making one or several impacts to the
ground.
V07. Ricochet dispersion(WR)
The maximum deviation (in metres) to the each side of the original trajectory that a
ricochet may reach after one or several impacts to the ground.
V08. Ricochet angle ()
The maximum angle that a ricochet may reach when deviating from its original
trajectory after one or several impacts to the ground, measured from the first impact Appendix
it makes.
V09. Dispersion to the side (a )
Maximum possible expected mistake in hitting the target, due to aiming failure,
weapon failure or meteorological causes.
V10. Safety distance(lsa)
Danger area for sabots, particles, noise, etc. in front of the muzzle.
Rev-04 413
V11. Safety angle (sa)

Angle to the side of the line of fire, in front of the muzzle, where sabots, particles,
noise, etc. (released when firing) may end up.
V12. Firing line
The straight line between the firing stand and where the shot makes its first impact.
V13. Line of fire
The straight line between firing stand and target.
V14. Splinter distance (s)
Dangerous distance for splinter impacts metered from the detonation point to the
ammunition.
V15. Critical initial angle
Largest angle for a ricochet. This angle is estimated to 30 degrees.
Constructing safety templates for direct-firing
weapons
For non-fragmentation forming ammunition, observe points 1 through 11.
For fragmentation forming ammunition, observe points 1 through 14.
1. Draw up the firing line.
2. Mark maximum side dispersion in angle a to each side of the firing direction.
3. Decide and mark shortest allowed or shortest possible firing distance. Left and
right limitation of this distance are points A and B
4. Decide and mark maximum firing distance. Left and right limitation of this
distance are points L and M
5. The area formed by points ABML is the impact area
6. Draw the MMR as a line across the firing line or as a curve with the centre in
the firing stand. Left and right limitations of this distance are the points C and
D. If the MRR is shorter than the minimum acceptable, or minimum possible
range, the points 7-11 can be ignored.
7. Draw up the ricochet angles, starting at points A and B. These lines form an
angle equal to the ricochet angle , left and right side dispersion respectively.
These lines are to be marked a and b.
8. Draw lines backward from C and D forming 45o with left and right side
dispersion respectively. These lines are to be marked c and d. The intersection
between points a and c is to be marked E. The intersection between points b
and d is to be marked F.
9. Draw lines marking maximum ricochet dispersion parallel to left and right
side dispersion in a distance of WR on the outside of these. These lines are to
be marked e and f.
10. If the lines e and f lie within points E and F respectively, the following
intersections are to be marked:
414 Rev-04
- G the intersection between a and e

- H the intersection between b and f
- J the intersection between c and e
- K the intersection between d and f
11. The ricochet area can now be defined as the area limited by points
ABHKDCJGA, or, should the criterion in point 10 not have been met, by
points ABFDCEA.
12. If fragmentation-forming ammunition is being used, a belt has to be drawn
around the entire impact area, its width equal to danger area for fragmentation
s.
13. If fragmentation-forming ammunition is being used and there is a danger of
explosion of the warhead after a ricochet, the danger area for fragmentation
must also be drawn as a belt, its width equal to s, around the entire ricochet
area.
14. If fragmentation-forming ammunition is being used and there is a danger of
premature explosion of the fuze, the fragmentation area must be extended to a
width of s to the left and right hand side of the area between the firing stand
and the impact area.
15. Possible danger area in front of the muzzle is to be presented as a sector with
an angle equal to the safety angle M to each side of the side dispersion angle
and with a radius of R.
16. Possible danger area behind the weapon is to be presented as an isocleles
triangle with height u and baseline y, and with its tip being the weapon.
Examples
The following examples have been made to assist the construction of safety
templates:
Template for non-fragmentation-forming ammunition
Template for ammunition that does not cause fragmentation. No danger area(s)
around the ammunition.
Appendix
Rev-04 415
C D
d
c
J K
WR WR
F
L M
MRR
G H
a
b
b
b
aa
A B
e f
Figure: V1.1
416 Rev-04
Template for fragmentation-forming ammunition with wide ricochet dispersion

Template for fragmentation-forming ammunition with wide ricochet dispersion.
Danger area in front of the muzzle and behind the weapon.
C D
d
c
E F
WR WR
L M
MRR
bb
a b
aa
A B
e f
bsa
lsa
Appendix
u
y
Figure: V1.2
Rev-04 417
Template for fragmentation-forming ammunition where allowed firing distance

(range) exceeds MRR.
Template for fragmentation-forming ammunition where allowed firing distance
(range) exceeds MRR. Danger area in front of the muzzle.
L M
C D
d
c
J K
WR
WR
E F
G H MRR
a b
b
b
aa
A B
e f
b sa
lsa
Figure: V1.3
418 Rev-04
Appendix 2.
CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPLATES FOR
SECTOR CHARGES
IN GENERAL
Such charges will produce splinters in the form of steel bullets in a given sector.
Additionally, splinters from canister, pod, and igniter may get thrown in random
directions. The width of the danger sector is the nominal spray angle plus the setting
accuracy of 200 mils to each side.
A schematic template is shown below.
bb +2aa
MRR
Appendix
Figure: V2.1
Rev-04 419
Report on use of ammunition/explosives
Instruction for filling in this form:
- This report must be filled in after use of any ammunition (regardless of calibre), explosives, hand grenades, bombs and rockets/missiles.
- When firing fixed ammunition only one catalogue number and one lot number is to be reported. When firing separate-loading ammunition, the fuze- grenade- propellant and ignition cartridge are to be reported on the same form.
- Some weaponsystems has special forms that shall be filled in addition to this report.
420 Rev-04
- This report is to be delivered to the range officer.
Always fill in this section:

Unit Area Date Range officer
US MARINES R 10.06.07 Capt Nilsen

Firing line Target area (Map reference)
Appendix 6B.
A1 1234
Ammunition data
Number of Number of Other irregularities

NATO Catalogue number Designation Lot number Condition Rounds fired
UXOs misfires (Y/N)
1340-25-149-9873 ROCKET NM72 01-RA03 10 1 NO

Fill in this section when UXO, misfires or other irregularities:

Weapon system and weapon number Delivered from depot Probable cause of UXO, misfire or other irregularities:
Lten Impact area condition
Seals broken? Visual condition

Yes No Good
Impact area condition
ENGLISH EDITION OF FORM 750
Rock/gravel
Weather condition Wind Temprature
Rain Weak wind 8 Appendix Range officer
If uxos, are they demolished? If No, give map referanses

Yes No
Forsvaret Bl 0750 B (Utg 3-04)
Appendix 7.
REGULATIONS FOR SECURING AIR
TRAFFIC DURING FIRING AND
MORTAR EXERCISES, TEST FIRING,
ETC.
1 Area of application. These regulations apply within Norwegian territory and those
parts of international waters that come under the Norwegian Flight Information
Regions (FIR). The regulations in the following listed points concerning firing are to
apply for all firing when the trajectories of projectiles, mortar shells or
missiles/rockets at any point will exceed 100 metres (300 feet) above the
ground/water. Firing with direct laying when the trajectory will reach no higher than
100 metres (300 feet) above ground/water, and the OCE/officer conducting firing has
visual control of the firing stand and the impact area, as well as hand grenade
throwing and demolition exercises will not come under the following regulations on
firing, except those conditions presented in 5.
2 Danger area and controlled airspace
a. A danger area is an airspace of certain dimensions where, during certain
times, activity (firing/training) may occur which may present danger to
aircraft/helicopters/etc. in the air:
- A constantly active danger area is a certain area connected to a firing
area where fire may occur without previous notice at all times (except
EN D 109 Rakke, EN D205 Marstein Nord, EN D208 Slttery).
Constantly active danger areas should possibly be limited to a
minimum.
The MOD will make sure that such danger areas are approved and
made known. Costantly active danger areas are listed on the AIP maps
ENR 6.2-1, 6.2-3, 6.2-5, 6.2-7, 6.2-11, 6.2-13, 6.2-15, and 6.2-19.
- a danger area only active after publicised in NOTAM is a certain
designated area linked to a firing area where firing may take place after
having been notified as described in section 4. If such notice has not
been announced by the responsible authorities and made known to the
air traffic through NOTAM, the area is to be regarded as not dangerous
for aircraft. To simplify the announcement on activity in the most used
preliminary danger areas these will be published in AIP Norway, page
ENR 5-1, paragraph 3.6. Appendix
b. Controlled airspace is an airspace of certain dimensions where air traffic
control service is provided for controlled flights. There are two main
categories of controlled airspace:
- control areas (including terminal areas and airways)
- control zones, which normally only encompass the closest airspace
around the individual airport (see definition).
For all firing in controlled airspace, special regulations apply, see 5.
Rev-04 421
3 Firing in danger area active only after having been announced through NOTAM.
a. Firing in the said danger areas must in advance have been coordinated with
flight activity in the relevant area, preferably by a timetable for a short or long
period.
b. The coordination is to take place at the Defence Staff in cooperation with the
relevant control central. Questions of doubt concerning whether a firing
programme may be carried out, are to be decided by the commanding officer,
possibly in cooperation with the Chief of Air Traffic Control at the relevant
area control centre.
c. The air traffic control centre may, when conditions make it necessary, order a
temporary fire break while firing is going on in these danger areas.
4 Report on firing in danger areas active only after having been announced through
NOTAM. When firing is to take place within the temporary danger areas, a report is
to be sent to AVINOR, Atn. The NOTAM office, with a copy to the area control
centre responsible for the sector the danger area lies within, and to the relevant
defence command. (FIR and sector boundaries can be found in AIP-Norge, ENR
6.2-23 and ENR 6.2-25.) The NOTAM office at AVINOR must have received the
report at least 2 weeks before firing is to be conducted. AVINOR will distribute the
required information concerning the firing to air traffic through NOTAM.
AVINORs address is:
The NOTAM office Phone: 64 81 90 60

PO Box 100
2061 Gardermoen Fax: 64 81 90 61
The addresses of the area control centres are:
Oslo area control centre Stavanger area control centre

Luftveien 16 Pb 506
3440 Ryken 4055 Stavanger Lufthavn
Telf: 66 79 25 31 Telf: 51 65 81 48
Bod area control centre

Bod Lufthavn
8041 BOD
Telf: 75 58 29 57
The report on firing is to include:
a. Date and time of firing, preferably in UTC or specify if local time is being
used.
b. Type of activity (firing).
422 Rev-04
c. The horizontal limits of the danger area are to be presented either in the form
of straight lines between points presented in geographical longitude and
latitude (Greenwich), or in the form of a geographical position (Greenwich)
plus danger sectors presented in degrees (true bearing) and sector length. If
the danger area is an area which is not defined in AIP Norway, the centre
point and radius of the area should be included in the manuscript sent to the
Notam office.
d. The danger areas upper limit is presented in feet above ocean level. For
danger areas that only are active after the announcement in NOTAM which is
listed in AIP Norway, ENR 5-1, para 3.6, the announcement about firing is to
contain information on dates and time for the firing and also possible
deviations from previous registered information. If the safe height exceeds the
height given in ENR 5-1 this is to be stated clearly and to be cleared with the
control centre in question which will then be confirmed in the same paper.
5 Firing in danger areas within controlled airspace
a. Training which will lead to restrictions within controlled airspace should be
avoided.
b. If firing has to take place within controlled airspace, direct communication is
to have been set up through telephone, radiotelephone or radio between the
OCE/officer conducting firing and the relevant area control centre tower,
normally at the responsibility of the unit in training. In questions of doubt, e.g.
when establishing new controlled air space above already existing firing
stands, the question of responsibility for setting up communications is, if
necessary, to be presented to the Ministry of Defence through the chain of
command. The air traffic control centre decides, based on the reported upper
limit of the danger area and the controlled airspaces lower limit whether
direct communication might not be required.
c. In control zones all firing, hand grenade throwing and demolition is to be
reported to the closest control tower and direct communication is to be set up
as described in 5b when the control tower requests it.
d. Air traffic control service may, when air traffic control conditions make it
necessary, order a temporary fire break when firing is going on in controlled
airspace.
6 Responsibilities of the OCE/the officer conducting firing
a. Before firing in danger areas that only are active after NOTAM has distributed Appendix
this information, the OCE/officer conducting firing is to ascertain that report
of firing has been received by the air traffic control centre.
b. During all exercises/training, the OCE/officer conducting firing is responsible
for calling off the exercise immediately should aircraft get dangerously close
to the training area.
c. The OCE/officer conducting firing must immediately report to the air traffic
control centre over the phone if an aircraft has entered the announced danger
area. His/her report is to be confirmed by a written report to the Chief of Air
Rev-04 423
Traffic Control at the relevant area control centre, with a copy to the relevant
FST and LST.
d. If announced firing is called off, or finishes early, before the announced time,
the message is to be given over the phone or telegraph immediately, even if
the cancellation happens at the time firing was supposed to have commenced.
7 Staff responsibility
HST/SST/LST are responsible for distributing up-to-date versions of AIP, Norway,
ENR 5-1 to defence branches units and stations. HST is to distribute ENR 5-1 to
those Armed Forces institutions outside the branches that may find it necessary to
keep at hand.
8 Definitions used in air traffic
AIP Norge (Aeronautical Information Publication, Norway).A handbook published
by the former institution Luftfartsverket, now Avinor AS, with information of a
lasting kind which is important for flying.
Flygeinformasjonsregion (flight information region) FIR. An airspace of set
dimensions where flight information service and alarm service are being offered.
Note: information concerning flight information regions location and extent is
provided in AIP Norway, part ENR.
Innflygingskontroll (approach control office) APP. A unit offering flight control
service to controlled flights arriving or departing from one or several airports.
Terminalomrde (terminal control area) TMA. A control area, usually established
where several ATS-routes join near one or several major airports.
Note: Information about the location of terminal areas and their extent is provided by
AIP Norway, part ENR. ATS-route is a common term for airway, controlled and
uncontrolled route, approach route and departure route, etc.
Kontrollert luftrom (controlled airspace). An airspace of certain dimensions where
air traffic control service is being offered for controlled flights.
Kontrollomrde (control area) CTA. A controlled airspace which stretches vertically
upwards from a given height above ground level.
Kontrollsentral (area control centre) ACC. A unit carrying out air traffic control
service for controlled flights in controlled areas under their authority.
Kontrollsone (control zone) CTR. A controlled airspace which stretches vertically
upwards from a given height above ground level.
Kontrolltrn (aerodrome control tower) TWR. A unit which provides air traffic
control service for local traffic.
Lavflygingsomrde (low flying area). An area where low flying may be conducted
after having received special authorization, using a military aircraft flying in a height
of 200-500 feet above ground/water.
Note: The extent of the low flying areas can be found in AIP ENR 4-9-1, and in the
Low Flying Charts (LFC) Norway (2 maps, 1: 500,000). Over authorized firing
ranges or fields, low flying might be authorized as low as 50 feet above ground or
water.
Luftled (airway). A control area or part of a control area in the shape of a corridor
424 Rev-04
and equipped with radio navigation devices.

Note: Information on airways can be found in AIP Norway, part ENR.
NOTAM (notice to airmen). A notice which contains information about the
establishment, condition or changing of navigation devices, duties, rules or elements
of danger which are important to receive in time for personnel whose work it is to
plan flights or fly aircraft.
AIP SUP: Contains information about temporary changes that will last for some
time, or changes that will last for a brief period of time with a lot of text and graphics
in the descriptions.
Appendix
Rev-04 425
Appendix 8A.
8A RADARSET GIRAFFE MK IV
Prohibited area
1 Since it is impossible to determine simply by looking at it whether a radar is emitting
radio waves or not, personnel must always act as if being exposed to radiation when
the antenna is up.
Static antenna
2 Prohibited area where personnel under no circumstances must stay is restricted to an
area 125 metres in front of the reflector, width 4 metres. The height of the area is 14
metres next to the radar (measured from ground level) and 26 metres at 125 metres
(if the ground level at 125 metres is 6 metres below the ground level next to the
radar). The prohibited area is shown in the illustration:
125 m
4m Prohibited area 4m
26 m
Prohibited area 14 m
6m
125 m
Non rotating antenna

Figure: 8A.1
Prohibited area and danger area, radar set Giraffe MK IV static antenna
Rotating antenna
3 Prohibited area where personnel under no circumstances must stay is restricted to a
circle with a radius of 16 metres, measured from the reflector. The height of the area
is between 4 and 13 metres at the radar (measured from ground level) and at 16
metres between 3 and 14 metres (calculated from the radars ground level). The
prohibited area is shown in the illustration:
426 Rev-04
16 m
Forbudt
omrde
Forbudt
13 m omrde 14 m
4m 3m
16 m
Normal drift (antenne rotasjon)

Figure: 8A.2
Prohibited area and danger area, radar set Giraffe MK IV rotating antenna
4 Safety regulations in the technical manuals for the materiel come in addition to the
restrictions that have been presented here.
Appendix
Rev-04 427
Appendix 8B.
8B ARTILLERY HUNTING RADAR
(ARTHUR)
PROHIBITED AREA AND DANGER AREA
Figure: 8B.1
1 Radars emit strong high-frequent energy which may cause injuries to humans. The
following regulations and limitations concerning use and maintenance of ALR must
therefore be observed. Individuals who have had metal parts operated into their
bodies (e.g. pacemakers) should avoid electromagnetic fields.
The following figures apply to the average value of the electromagnetic field at
frequencies between 300 MHz and 300 GHz:
- During 1 second: 300V/m (250W/m2)
- During any given time of 6 minutes: 60 V/m (10 W/m2). Radiation of this
density may take place during 8 hours per day, maximum.
Based on these figures, two areas which must be taken into consideration during
radar emission may be defined:
- Prohibited area and
- Allowed area
The radiation is in the C-band area, and is described as a static antenna lobe as
described below:
WARNING
It is mortally dangerous and hence prohibited to stay in the
prohibited area while the radar is emitting radio waves.
In ALR one can never be certain whether or not the antenna lobe is standing still.
428 Rev-04
Safe distance is then calculated for a still-standing lobe.

Horizontal distances refer to the antennas rotation axis or centre line C L. Vertical
distances refer to the antennas basis line (fixed point) B L. The arrow indicates the
lobes direction. R is the radius for the prohibited area. The total lobe height H is the
sum of H 1, H 2 and H 3 indicating height above, respectively under, B L. Direction
and range of the prohibited area is referred to to C L, B L and ground level G L.
H 1 indicates the height above B L if the antenna elevation is 84 degrees.
H 2 indicates the height for B L over G L.
H 3 indicates the height below G L if the elevation of the antenna is 97 degrees and
the radar is placed on a hill.
It is important to note that sideways the radiation diagram is centred in the antennas
central line C L and then follows the antennas turning angle in relation to the rear
wagon. Hot Spots, spots where radiation intensity is stronger, may occur if the
radiation is reflected from flat surfaces and then interferes with the direct radiation.
In nature, for instance, still or ice-covered lakes and vehicles or other flat metal parts
in the prohibited area may cause reflection. When there is a danger of so-called Hot
Spots, the prohibited area may be extended to R=320 m for parts of the angle of the
semi-circle.
Prohibited area (shaded) directly behind the tracked vehicle, as in the picture below,
is to be considered as the normal scenario. Rotating the antenna within - 45 to + 90
is allowed, so that the shaded prohibited half-cylindric area fills the marked area,
without the radiation level outside the door of the rear compartment getting above
the allowed level,
When rotating the antenna to + 90 it is prohibited to stay in the front compartment
for the following reasons: In a worst case scenario the lobe will end up 3,8 below
the base line BL at antenna elevation = 97. The lobe will then be 0.5 m above the
front left corner of the front compartment where the radiation level will be about 10
times higher than what is normally allowed. The front compartments plastic chassis
is not shielded. Conditions inside the rear compartment will not be affected, since the
rear compartment is shielded. The possibility of rotating the antenna 150 must be
considered abnormal in peacetime since the prohibited half-cylindrical area then may
rule out the possibility of staying in the front compartment and/ or moving to or from
the operators seats in the rear compartment.
Appendix
Rev-04 429
CL
+45o
Allowed R=160m
Prohibited o
o
+90
0 R=160m
o
-45
o
-45
H1 =52 m Prohibited H=66 m
BL R=160m BL
H2 =3,5 m
GL
H3 =10,5 m
CL
Figure: 8B.2
Prohibited area and danger area ARTHUR
430 Rev-04
Appendix 8C.
8C RADAR SET AN/PPS-15
1 Personnel are to act as if the radar is emitting radio waves as long as it has been
mounted completely on the tripod.
Figure: 8C.1
Danger area and prohibited area RADAR SET AN/PPS-15
2 Danger area and prohibited area are one and the same, with limitations to the side Appendix
and in height equal to the width and height of the antenna. Forward limitation is 1
metre from the front of the antenna.
3 In addition to the restrictions mentioned here, the safety regulations presented in the
technical manuals for the materiel apply.
Rev-04 431
Appendix 8D.
8D METEOROLOGICAL SET NO/MMQ-10
1 If balloon ascent or preparation for balloon ascent is going on, personnel must act as
if the radio was emitting radio waves.
Figure: 8D.1
Prohibited area and danger area METEOROLOGICAL SET NO/MMQ-10
2 In addition to the restrictions mentioned here, the safety regulations presented in the
technical manuals for the materiel apply.
3 Danger area and prohibited area have a limitation of 1 metre to the side and 1 metre
in height. Prohibited area (A) on illustration 86 has a forward limitation 1 metre in
front of the antenna. Danger area (B) on illustration 86 has a forward limitation of 5
metres in front of the antenna.
432 Rev-04
Appendix 8E.
8E LOW ALTITUDE SURVEILLANCE
RADAR (LASR) AN/TPQ 36A
IN GENERAL
1 Since it is impossible to determine whether the radar is emitting radio waves simply
by looking at it, personnel must always act as if radiation is going on while the
antenna is up.
Appendix
Figure: 8E.1
Low Altitude Surveillance Radar AN/TPQ 36A
Rev-04 433
Static antenna
2 Personnel must not stay within a distance of 10 metres in front of an antenna
emitting radio waves when the antenna is not rotating. Staying on ground level,
underneath the level of the antenna pedestal, poses no danger for personnel.
Rotating antenna
3 Staying near the antenna while it is rotating, poses no danger for personnel.
434 Rev-04
Appendix 8F.
8F TOR ELECTRONIC
COUNTER-MEASURE SYSTEM,
PROHIBITED AREA AND DANGER
AREA
IN GENERAL
1 1. Since it is impossible to determine whether the system is emitting radio waves
or not simply by looking at the vehicle, personnel must always act as if
radiation is being emitted when the antenna is in an upright position. The
exception is personnel who man the vehicle, and hence know whether or not
radiation is being emitted.
2. Danger area is 10 metres around the outer edges of the vehicle in all
directions. Personnel can only stay for a limited period of time within this
area.
3. Prohibited area is on the vehicle roof, no personnel must stay here when radio
waves are being emitted.
4. The only way one is allowed to enter the vehicle roof is by use of the ladder
on the rear wagon, this ladder has a safety switch which will be released as
soon as anyone sets foot on the bottom step of the ladder.
Dangerous Tor Jammer on P6-300

Area
10m 10m
10m
Figure: 8F.1
Danger area TOR electronic counter-measure system Appendix
Rev-04 435
Appendix 8G.
8G SATELLITE EQUIPMENT
IN GENERAL
1 General for satellite communication equipment is that there is a disc which is
directed towards a satellite. This disc (the parabole) may have a sub-reflector
mounted in front with sender and receiver head, also called the horn. Personnel
MUST NOT stay in front of the disk for any long period of time
Horn
The
parabol
Sub-reflektor
Figure: 8G.1
Usual components DVB-RCS and VSAT
Normal effect gives a safety radius of 2 metres, minimum, from the horn on the
VSAT (regardless of band).
On DVB-RCS and INMARSAT, the safety radius is of 1 metre, minimum.
These radii apply regardless of how the parabole is angled. The angle is
geographically conditioned, and when being far north the angle will be sharper and
the radiation will move more along the ground.
436 Rev-04
a b
Figure: 8G.1
a. Wide angle (e.g. in southern Norway)
b. Sharp angle (e.g. North Norway)
Appendix
Rev-04 437
Appendix 8H.
8H RC-IED JAMMER
PROHIBITED AND HAZARDOUS ZONES
General
1 The RC-IED jammer is installed on various types of vehicle.
The system is identifiable from its comparatively high number of transmission
aerials (4 or more), typically mounted on the roof, bonnet, bumper, or similar.
The following warning sign is located by the drivers seat:
Figure: 8H.1
2 As it is not possible to determine whether a vehicle is transmitting radio waves or not
by simply looking at it, personnel should always behave as if radiation is present.
The exception to this are authorised personnel operating the vehicle, who will be
aware of whether radiation is present or not.
Each aerial is marked as follows:
Figure: 8H.2
438 Rev-04
3 A hazardous zone is deemed as being a distance of up to 1.5 metres from all of the
systems aerials, in every direction. Personnel may only remain within this zone for a
limited period of time. The exception to this are personnel being trained in individual
configurations, who will possess the required knowledge of the location of individual
aerials, as well as the safety distance.
4 Prohibited zones are the roof, bonnet, etc, on individual vehicles, upon which it is
forbidden to be situated when radio waves are being transmitted. The exception to
this are personnel being trained in individual vehicle configurations, who will
possess the required knowledge of the location of individual aerials, as well as the
safety distance in respect of weapon racks, drivers hatches, etc.
5 Installation of, or modification to, an RC-IED jammer should be undertaken solely
by authorised personnel in accordance with approved assembly instructions.
Only a technically competent authority (FLO) is permitted to certify new platforms.
Unauthorised modification of the system is NOT permitted and may result in danger
to life and limb.
6 In addition to these restrictions, safety regulations specified in technical handbooks
for the materiel also apply.
Appendix
Rev-04 439
Appendix 9.
THICKNESS OF COVER
1 Single shots direct hits by cold projectiles
Thickness of cover measured in cm:
Type of 7,62 m 9 mm 12,7 40 mm1 75 mm Note

cover mm
Steel plate 4 1 6 10 27
(230 HB)
Solid walls:
brick 60 30 90 150
concrete 45 20 60 110 150
reinforced 30 45 90 120
concrete
timber 150
Walls made of loose materials supported by floorboards or timber:
mud 120 + 100% if mud is
wet
dirt 100 130 +50% if dirt is wet
sand 60 30 75 150 + 100% if sand is
wet
shingel 60 30 75 150
Sandbags filled with:
wet
dirt 130 150 +50% if dirt is wet
and and 75 100 150
gravel
Loose bank made of:
wet
dirt 120 +50% if dirt is wet
sand 90 30 +100% if sand is
wet
2 Splinter detonation distance 20 metres from cover.
1 Same thickness of cover apply for 20 mm MP (NM75) as for 40mm.
440 Rev-04
Thickness of cover in centimetres:
Splinters from shells and missiles

Type of cover Kal 75 mm Kal 105 mm Kal 155 mm Merknad
og mindre
Steel plate 1,5 2 2,5
Solid walls:
brick 10 15 20
concrete 10 13 15
reinforced con- 7,5 10 13
crete
timber 20 25 35
Walls made of loose materials supported by floorboards:
mud 20 25 30
dirt 40 45 60
Sandbags filled with:
dirt 50 60 75
sand and gravel 25 30 50
Loose bank made
of:
dirt 60 90 120
sand 30 45 60
Appendix
Rev-04 441
7,62 mm 12,7 mm 40 mm2 F75 mm Note

Type of pbr pbr
cover
sand and gra- 75 100 150
vel
Loose bank made of:
wet
dirt 120 +50% if dirt is wet
sand 90 +100% if sand is
wet
3 Impact plus detonation of one hit.
HE shell
Type of cover Kal 75 mm Kal 105 mm Kal 155 mm
reinforced concrete 30 75 110
(280 kg/cm 2 )
brick or concrete 50 110 160
Timber logs: (20 60 160 220
cm in diametre an-
chored)
Shingel or crushed 110 270 350
rocks
Hard trodden dirt 220 550 750
4 Shaped charges
Recoilless gun
Kal Kal
Type of cover 66 mm 84 mm
Steel plate 25 55
reinforced concrete 100 200
2 Same thickness of cover apply for 20 mm MP (NM75) as for 40mm.
442 Rev-04
Appendix 11A.
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS AND
DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES
In general
1 The Law on flammable substances/goods including liquids and gasser under trykk
of 21 May, 1971, with later amendments, provide strict regulations for, among other
things, transportation, handling and storage of flammable liquids.
2 Exceptions during field exercises
In the cabinet meeting of 17 February 1977, the King decided that the following
paragraphs in the Law on flammable substances/goods do not apply during field
exercises.
Law paragraphs 10, 11, 21, 22 and 28.
Chapter 4 in the regulations.
Chapter 8, 9, in the regulations.
For more information, see BIH 2-028 Exceptions made for the Armed Forces from
the Law and regulations on flammable substances/goods.
Storing and using oil products within garrisons
3 See:
- TF 1-3-5 Manual for Armed Forces motorized vehicle drivers. Storage and
transport of petrol and other flammable liquids.
- LAW of 2005-06-17 no: 62: Law about workplace environment, working
hours and employment protection etc. chapter 4.
- FS 7610-0500, Chemical substances and products.
Transportation, storage, handling and draining of liquids during field

exercises
4 See:
- TF 1-3-5 Storage and transport of petrol and other flammable liquids.
- FS 7610-0500, Chemical substances and products.
Appendix
- Law about protection against pollution and about waste disposal
- BIH 2-028 Peacetime conditions for draining of petrol during field exercises.
Rescuing vehicles transporting flammable liquids

5 See: TF 1-3-5 Manual for Armed Forces motorized vehicle drivers.
6 See ADR land transport of dangerous goods, published by the Directorate for Civil
Protection and Emergency Planning (DSB).
Rev-04 443
Personal protective equipment - petrol fumes

7 Protection mask against petrol fumes is to be used by all personnel transferring
petrol from petrol lorries to cans etc. thus being exposed to petrol fumes. A
protection mask is also to be used by drivers and their assistants on petrol lorries and
lorries transporting cans when they are exposed to petrol fumes during refuelling,
loading and unloading of jerry cans. The masks are also to be issued and used in
cases in which the commanding officer in cooperation with the safety
deputy/environmental committee decides that a protection mask is necessary.
444 Rev-04
Appendix 11B.
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND
STORAGE OF RADIOACTIVE
SOURCES
1 In general
The purpose of this appendix is to ensure safe use of radiation, to prevent dangerous
effects of radiation on humans health, and to contribute to the protection of the
environment.
The appendix applies to any making, import, export, handing over, possession,
installation, use, handling and disposal of radioactive sources. It also applies to all
human activity which leads to increased natural ionizing radiation from the
surroundings.
2 Notification
Enterprises who plan to acquire, use or handle ionizing sources of radiation for other
purposes and in other connections than those listed in Regulations for radiation
protection and use of radiation, 5, must notify the Norwegian Radiation Protection
Authority.
Sources of radiation must not be acquired, used or handled until the enterprise has
received confirmation that their notification has been received.
3 Transportation
For regulations concerning transportation of radioactive materiel, see the latest
version of ADR/RID.
4 Handling
Enterprises planning to use or handle sources of radiation must make an assessment
of the risk elements connected with the use of radiation. Should the assessment
indicate that there is risk involved for employees, other persons or the environment,
or that the sources of radiation may go astray, the enterprise is to:
a. Implement all reasonable practical measures to avoid or reduce the probability
of such incidents.
b. Secure radioactive sources from theft, sabotage, fire, and water damage.
c. Provide employees with the necessary information and training as well as the
required personal protective equipment in order to limit the exposure to
radiation should such incidents occur.
Appendix
d. Develop an emergency plan describing measures to stop, reduce and remove
emissions, measures to reduce doses of radiation, and other measures designed
to reduce the consequences of such incidents.
e. Conduct emergency training and drills.
5 Requirement to keep control of sources of radiation
The enterprise is responsible for keeping control of ionizing sources of radiation.
This responsibility includes registration of localization, type of source, and
temporary movements. For radioactive sources, specification of the radioactive
Rev-04 445
substances and activity must also be registered, as well as the serial number or other
information which makes it possible beyond doubt to identify the source.
6 Storage
Radioactive sources which temporarily are out of use, sources that are stored
temporarily, and radioactive waste in the form of sources which have been in use,
must be stored safely:
- The storage room/closet is to be locked and access is to be limited.
- A standard warning sign on ionizing radiation, as well as further information,
must be placed on the door.
- The level of radiation outside the storage room must not exceed 7.5 Sv/t.
- Radioactive sources must not be stored with explosives or highly flammable
substances.
- Inside the storage room, a list of the stored goods/sources must be accessible.
See also Directive on radiation protection and use of radiation (Forskrift om
strlevern og bruk av strling (Strlevernforskriften)).
446 Rev-04
Appendix 11C.
11c TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND
STORAGE OF CS AND SIMULANTS,
CHEMICAL AGENTS
1 In general
These regulations apply to storage and transportation of simulants, chemical agents,
more specifically to:
- The simulants SIFON, SIFOS and SIFOX. Only some of the following
regulations apply, which ones will become evident when reading the text.
- The simulants C-Yellow, C-Green and C-Red. Only some of the following
regulations apply, which ones will become evident when reading the text.
2 Transportation of simulants. UN danger category 6/8/9
Simulants must be transported in their original packaging, to the extent that this is
possible. Other packaging may be used, if special permission has been granted by the
manager in charge.
3 Transporting simulants in Armed Forces vehicles
When transporting simulants in military vehicles:
- These must not be transported along with explosives, flammable goods or
foodstuffs.
- Tightness checked and approved personal protective mask must be brought
along and kept immediately accessible.
- The vehicle must be guarded during stops and when parked.
- The simulant C-Red is classified as dangerous goods RID/RID-S,
ADR/ADR-S, category 9, danger number 90 and UN no. 3082.
- Transport papers signed by the unit commander must be kept in the vehicle.
These papers must provide information on:
1. Type of simulant and number of boxes
2. Address and phone number of the unit which is to be notified, should
an accident occur.
5 Transporting simulants using Armed Forces vessels and aircraft

The unit conducting the transport is responsible for ascertaining that:
Appendix
- The transport is conducted as quickly as possible.
- Simulants are not being transported along with explosives, flammable
substances or articles of food.
- The simulant C-Red is classified as dangerous goods IMDG category 9,
danger number 90 and UN no. 3082.
- No unauthorized person gets close to the simulants.
The dispatching unit must contact the relevant air terminal/vessel in reasonable time
Rev-04 447
before the transportation is to be conducted.

6 Transporting simulants using civilian means of transportation
Simulants can be transported on railways, by civilian aircraft and vessels only to the
extent that Norwegian or international regulations allow it, and only in accordance
with the regulations for transporting dangerous goods. When using private or public
means of transportation, the regulations presented for the corresponding military
means of transportation apply, in addition to directives provided by the company
conducting the transport.
Before handing the simulants over, it must well in advance have been checked with
the relevant expedition office whether the simulants can be received for transport,
and if necessary, the time for handing the simulants over should be set.
When handing over simulants, certain transport companies require that the
dispatching unit notifies the receiver that the goods must be picked up as soon as
possible, preferably within 2 hours, and never later than 12 hours after the goods
arrived at its set destination. Should the goods remain in the terminal, the transport
company is entitled to implement the safety measures deemed necessary, at the
expense of the dispatching unit.
See also the following documents concerning simulant transportation:
- Rail transport: The updated ADR/RID (road or railway transport of dangerous
goods)
- Air transport: IATA convention AFR 71-4 and KLFK no. 10/82
- Sea transport: IMDG. INCO rules.
Sending simulants by post is PROHIBITED.
7 Handling of simulants
The simulants SIFOS, SIFON and SIFOX have, in varying degrees, itching and
corrosive qualities.
The simulants C-Yellow and C-Green have in varying degrees itching and corrosive
qualities.
The simulant C-Red may in addition cause poisoning. Contact may cause itching.
Relatively small amounts can be very dangerous. Potentially lethal amount for adults
is 30 ml and for children 10 ml.
Symptoms: nausea, vomiting, breathing difficulty, pulmonary edema, convulsions,
and death.
- Oral poisoning
- LD50 oral rat: 887 mg/kg body weight
- Poisoning by skin contact

- LD50 dermal rat: > 2,500 mg/kg body weight
- LD50 dermal rabbit: > 5,000 mg/kg body weight
The numbers above apply to methyl salicylate.

For that reason:
- They must not be used towards personnel.
448 Rev-04
- Breathing in damp or aerosol must be avoided.

- Contact with eyes and bare skin must be avoided.
- Protective mask and rubber gloves must be worn during dispersion.
See also MTO/HFK 473 Simulant set, gas, NATO no. 1365-25-128-8854 with
corrections and amendments no. 1 and 2.
8 Handling of CS
CS tablets must be handled wearing the proper personal protective equipment. CS
tablets must not be carried in bare hands, protective gloves must be worn.
See also 6.5.1.3 Use of CS during training and exercises
9 Storage of simulants
Simulants must not be stored with explosived, flammable substances, electronic
equipment, optical instruments or articles of food.
Requirements of storage rooms for simulants are that:
- They can be properly locked.
- They are not placed in buildings where personnel work or stay on a permanent
basis.
- The rooms can be properly ventilated.
- The rooms keep a minimum temperature of +5 C, and are always free of
frost.
CS is to be stored in its original packaging.
All simulants must be stored in approved packaging and be stored on paper that
makes leakages apparent so that leakages can be discovered rapidly.
Appendix
Rev-04 449
Appendix 12A.
RESCUE SERVICE DURING
ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS IN THE
NORWEGIAN ARMED FORCES
Regulations for measures and investigations etc. when accidents and
incidents occur in the Norwegian Armed Forces.
1 See Royal Resolution of 6 January 1995 cf. appendix 12B
Responsibilities JOHQ
2 JOHQ will develop CLEAR regulations, which will imply:
- That Armed Forces capacity might be implemented fully in an efficient
rescue operation while maintaining military leadership and the military
organisation.
- That cooperation between the Armed Forces and the Local Rescue Centre
(LRS) will be facilitated so that misunderstandings and loss of momentum can
be avoided during an ongoing operation.
- That the police know what kind of support the Armed Forces can provide,
especially during exercises in the field, how cooperation is to be carried out
and how leadership is to be carried out for the military part.
Organisation/ responsibilities
3 The Armys state of readiness for rescue operations is to be based on:
- The extent of the exercise (number of participants)
- Exercise terrain and realistic risk factors
- LRS/HRS possibilities and limitations in the exercise situation in question
- Prepared and planned support from other branches, possibly also civilian
institutions and/or civilian organisations.
4 Unit commanders, at all levels, are responsible for their own units state of readiness
when it comes to rescue operations. During exercises down to division/brigade level,
the officer conducting the exercise is to provide directives for rescue service in the
purpose of coordinating use of resources and possibly leading a large-scale rescue
operation. Should an accident occur, the unit commander is to:
- immediately implement rescue service with own unit
- report the accident to closest superior officer or directly to the civilian police
authority
- Lead the rescue operation until superior officer or civilian police authority
will take on leadership and responsibility.
5 The professional responsibility for rescue and medical service follows unit level. The
responsible professional staff officer holds the professional responsibility for
450 Rev-04
planning, education/training and other preparations within his/her part of the rescue
service.
6 Organisation of rescue service for exercises that are carried through by sub-units
from the garrison or military refresher centres is to be included in the units standing
orders, and based on the principles that have been laid down in this section.
7 During unit exercises outside the garrison, adequate materiel for rescue service in
peace is to be brought along, in addition to table of organisation and equipment
materiel. Should the unit commander consider his/her own resources to be
insufficient, support is to be requested from superior officer. The LRS is to be
briefed on all exercises of significant size, or exercises that are of a character that
might call for assistance from the LRS.
During large exercise on the ground, the LRS is to be provided with a map of the
training area and the participating units. Should the exercise span several police
districts (LRSs) a meeting should be arranged with the LRSs, briefing them on the
exercise.
8 All exercise orders are to include a point on rescue service. This point may be made
brief by referring to standing orders.
Norwegian and allied units participating in exercises in Norway must know how the
rescue service is organised and how help can be called in should the need arise.
9 The relevant unit/command medical officer is to brief civilian health authorities,
make the necessary arrangements with civilian hospitals, and provide required
directives to the units/commands medical staffs and units.
10 During exercises in division/brigade formation level, rescue service is in principle to
be organised in the following manner:
a. Battalion, coy/sq/btt is to have developed standing orders for rescue service
based on:
- Own units medical organisation
- Directives from higher unit
- Preplanned/prepared support from higher unit
b. Division/brigade rescue service is to be based on ONE rescue team prepared
to be inserted during most types of accidents. The organisation must be
flexible enough to insert only the required elements depending on scope and
type of the accident.
The following elements may be part of a rescue team:
- Command team/leadership element is to be prepared for insertion during large Appendix
accidents or catastrophes. The teams main task is to lead all forms of military
rescue service until the LRS/HRS takes over the responsibility and leadership
of the rescue operation. The team will then continue as a cooperating element,
helping the civilian leader on site, and as leadership for the military forces that
participate in the rescue operation.
- Administrative team is to support an operation with e.g. food, petrol, various
items, transport, etc.
Rev-04 451
- Medical team is to treat and evacuate the injured.

The force will normally be selected from Medical coy or brigade or the
Medical Battalion/6th Division. The force is to be used according to the
tactical situation, and then detached, should the rescue force need to be
inserted.
The force must when necessary be able to present a professional medical
leader, until higher unit can provide one. The force is to hold the
responsibility as leader on site until the unit itself/higher unit/the LRS can take
over.
Planning
The unit presenting the medical team must have a plan for:
- o Which personnel and materiel make up the force.
- Where patients will be evacuated.
- Communication for the force, including the possibility of contacting
civilian installations.
- Possibly also other sub-units who are to prepare measures for rescue
state of readiness.
- Contact with the divisions/brigades readiness force.
- The team should consist of minimum a leader of the force (leader on
site/operative medical leader), a medical officer and three vehicles for
evacuation.
- ONE helicopter which can be deployed on short notice in order to provide the
medical team with the required ability to be inserted rapidly. Even if this
helicopters primary task is insertion during accidents/catastrophes, it may be
used for evacuation of badly injured patients and for training that does not
significantly weaken the state of readiness, rescue.
- Communications team to set up communication with the police, possibly also
others. It is difficult to draw up a set organisation of this team, the team has to
be organised depending on what each operation requires. Planning is to
concern itself with where resources can be spared.
- Military police to direct traffic and possibly keep guard
- Rescue/recovery team for insertion during accidents involving vehicles,
aircraft and vessels
- Search team for searching for missing personnel and for searching avalanches.
The unit is to be picked in advance.
- Avalanche team with dogs
- Possibly also others.
The following personnel should be part of the team:
- Commander: G-3 or G-4
452 Rev-04
- Medical officer: Med Ops Off or the staffs medical officer

- MP officer: the most experienced MP officer
- Com off: com off with detailed information about the communication system
used during the exercise. Will bring operator and communication installation.
- Avalanche officer: during operations in winter. The command team must be
transported to the area of the accident with the quickest available means of
transport. In the case of minor accidents, it might be unnecessary to separate
the team and rather lead the operation directly from the relevant command
post.
- Liaison officer(s) for the HRS/LRS are to be picked in advance. These
function as advisors to the police and are to work at the rescue centre(s),
which may be located far away from the accident site. LOs must have good
knowledge about the unit(s), about their mission, resources and capacities, as
well as the resources of other military branches in the area.
20 SOI must have been determined for use during rescue operations, where particularly
communication to helicopters, civilian hospital(s), command teams and the LRS is
listed.
21 If any of these teams must be ordered a state of readiness which is making it difficult
for them to benefit properly from the exercise, this simply has to be accepted. The
majority should be able to participate in their normal duties.
For an example of medical team which is part of the division/brigades force for
rescue service, see pt 10 b.
Appendix
Rev-04 453
Appendix 12 B.
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATING OF
ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS IN THE
This appendix may only be subject to change in the event of an amendment to a
Royal decree. FOH (The Norwegian Armed Forces Operational Headquarters) and
Land Waarfare Center (LWC) have submitted amendment proposals to the Ministry
of Defence. These proposals relate to organisational changes, as well as proposals for
amendments to the contents of the decree. When the new decree is passed into law it
will, in the first instance, be incorporated into a digital edition of UD 2-1. Thereafter,
the decree will be incorporated into a subsequent printed edition.
CHAPTER ON APPLICATION AND
DEFINITIONS
1 Application
1 Laid down in Royal Resolution of 6 January 1995 (amended by the Ministry of
Defence on 18 November 2002, and on 1 August 2006).
The regulations apply during any accident in the Norwegian Armed Forces, and
when the Armed Forces have been involved in an accident and this has resulted in:
a. Loss of human life/lives or serious injury to persons
b. Extensive damage to or loss of military or civilian property.
2 When a close investigation of what has caused something is required, an
investigating committee may be put together also in other cases than those
mentioned in 1.
3 The regulations apply as long as this does not interfere with relations with another
state or with international organisations.
4 8, 12, 13, 14 and 15also apply during other accidents or incidents which
are desired investigated. The commander ordering the investigation is to decide how
it is to be conducted.
2 Investigating authority
For land, sea and air forces the investigating authority is the commander of the
relevant forces of war which have met with an accident or incident. Changes of 1
August 2006 transferred the investigating authority to Chief JOHQ.
CHAPTER II IMMEDIATE MEASURES
3 Responsibilities of the unit commander
1 Commander of the unit (institution, station, vessel, school, etc.) which is involved
must immediately make sure that necessary rescue measures are implemented and
that preliminary notification is given to:
a. The investigating authority,
b. The chief of police in the area where the accident happened,
454 Rev-04
c. Other civilian or military authorities whom it might be presumed are

interested in taking immediate measures in relation to the accident, and
d. Next of kin to those who have been killed, are missing or have been seriously
injured. Giving this notification might be left to the higher authority, when
this seems appropriate.
2 The unit commander must taket the necessary steps which cannot be delayed in order
to secure evidence (sealing off the area, secure witnesses and leads, etc.).
3 The unit commander is to make sure the people who are next of kin to those killed or
injured receive the support and help they need. This also applies to others who have
been affected by the accident or incident, unless this might more appropriately be left
to higher authority.
4 If for practical reasons and the required immediate measures suggest it, the
commander of the military unit closest to the accident site has the same
responsibilities as the commander of the unit which has been affected, according to
this paragraph.
4 Responsibilities of the investigating authority
The investigating authority is to, as soon as it has been notified of an accident:
1. GIve further notification to:
a. The Defence Staff (of 1 August 03)
b. The Ministry of Defence
c. Other affected civilian and military authorities who have not already
received notification, and
d. The media, to the extent that this is advisable.
2. Keep informed of the measures the local commander has implemented, and if
necessary effect further measures.
CHAPTER III, APPOINTING AN

INVESTIGATING COMMITTEE
5 When and by whom will an investigating committee be appointed?
1 a. When an accident as described in 1 has occurred involving a unit in the
Norwegian Armed Forces, the investigating authority (Chief JOHQ)is to
appoint an investigating committee.
b. The Chief of Staff or higher authority can also appoint an investigating Appendix
committee.
c. When an accident as described in 1 no 1 has occurred at the Defence
Staff/the MoD, the Chief of Defence decides whether an investigating
committee is to be appointed.
2 An investigating committee might not be required in the following cases:
a. Traffic accident involving civilian vehicle,
b. Fire being investigated by the police,
Rev-04 455
c. Accident at sea where a maritime declaration is planned, and

d. When higher authority already has appointed an investigating committee.
6 How to put together an investigating committee
1 The investigating committee is to be appointed without delay. The committee must
consist of at least three members, including:
a. A leader who is to be an officer of minimum the same rank and experience as
the one who due to his direct involvement with the accident or incident is
under investigation. The committee is not to be changed, however, should
they at a later stage find it necessary to investigate other higher-ranking
officers. If an accident has resulted in loss of life/lives, the leader of the
committee must hold the rank of major (or equivalent), minimum.
b. An officer with experience from the same type of service,
c. If the accident has resulted in injury to person(s), the local working
environment committee (AMU) must be given the opportunity to name a
member of the investigating committee. If the local working environment
committee refrains from doing so, a representative for the category of
personnel the injured person(s) belongs to is to be appointed, and
d. If privates/corporals/etc. have had direct involvement with the accident or
incident, a representative for this category of personnel must in all cases be
given the opportunity to participate in the investigating committee.
2 The Chief of Police in the area where the accident or incident occurred is to be
invited and encouraged to appoint a representative from the police as member of the
investigating committee.
3 In those cases where the Chief of Defence or the MoD appoints the investigating
committee, the composure of this committee may be decided by the MoD.
7 Legally incompetent
1 The person who is being investigated cannot be a member of the investigating
committee.
Similarly, a person cannot be a member of the investigating committee when:
a. this person, or someone he/she is closely related to, may take advantage, loss,
or inconvenience as a result of the investigation, or
b. when there are other circumstances that might jeopardise the impartiality of
the person in question.
If a superior is considered incapable of participating in the investigating committee,
this will also apply to those who are under his/her direct command.
8 Responsibilities of the investigating committee
1 The Defence Staff and the MoD must immediately be notified that an investigating
committee has been appointed.
2 The investigating authority is responsible for making sure that the investigation is
carried out without unnecessary delay.
456 Rev-04
3 The investigating authority will continuously assess whether the discoveries reported
by the investigating committee should lead to the implementation of immediate
measures.
CHAPTER IV THE WORK OF THE
INVESTIGATING COMMITTEE
9 The purpose of the investigation
1 The purpose of the investigation is to:
a. Establish the nature and extent of the damage/injury, the course of events, and
what caused the accident/indicent,
b. Establish which laws, regulations, instructions or orders applied to the service
or mission during which the accident/incident occurred, and
c. Make a statement on what may be done in order to prevent similar accidents
in the future.
2 The investigating committee must not give an opinion on whether there is cause for
disciplinary action, whether a crime has been committed, or whether liability should
be placed with anyone.
10 Reporting
The investigating committee must continuously assess whether information that is
uncovered during their work should be reported to the investigating authority before
the final report has been completed.
11 Notification
Should the investigating committee during the course of their work suspect that a
crime, reprimandable or blameworthy actions from certain persons have been
committed, these are to be considered as under investigation by the committee.
In such a case, the investigating committee must immediately notify the person being
investigated about their investigation and suspicion, unless these are not already
known by the person being investigated.
12 Statements
1 With the exceptions that are listed in 12, 5, all personnel serving in the Armed
Forces are bound by duty to give a statement to the investigating committee when
asked to do so.
2 Statements are to be made orally or in writing. If a statement is taken orally, it is to
be written down and presented to the individual making the statement for his/her Appendix
signature.
3 The person who is being investigated has the right to give his/her statement to the
investigating committee.
4 Should the investigating committee decide that it will not harm the investigation or a
third party, the person being investigated is entitled to information about statements
and evidence which are directly related to him/her, and give his/her own comments
on these to the investigating committee.
Rev-04 457
5 No one is bound by duty to give statements concerning aspects that may give cause
for disciplinary or legal action towards the individual. Personnel are to be informed
about their right to refuse giving a statement.
13 The right to legal assistance
The person who is being investigated has the right to an attorney, or other legal
assistance, throughout the investigation, but at his/her own expense. Choosing form
of assistance must not significantly delay the investigation.
14 Professional secrecy
1 The committee and its individual members must not talk about their work to others.
2 The investigating authority decides whether information that is uncovered during the
work of the investigating committee should be reported to the public.
CHAPTER V THE INVESTIGATING
COMMITTEES REPORT
15 Sending the report and notes
1 The committee presents its report to the investigating authority.
2 The person who has been under investigation must be given the opportunity to learn
the contents of the report, to the extent that security clearance or information
protected by professional secrecy does not prevent this. The person is entitled to,
within a reasonable date set by the investigating authority, to present his/her
comments on the report, before the investigating authority makes his/her assessment
of the report. All notes are to be included when the report is handed in.
3 The investigating authority will send the report, along with his/her own notes, to the
Defence Staff, the Chief of Police in the area where the accident/incident occurred,
and other civilian and military authorities that presumably would like to consider
taking measures based on the findings in the report.
The notes should include:
a. A presentation of measures that have been taken or that have been planned in
order to prevent similar accidents from happening in the future, measures that
have been taken to put the damage/injury right, and suggestions for measures
that the investigating authority cannot personally implement.
b. A list of the legal, disciplinary, or liability actions that have been implemented
c. Possibly also a statement explaining why the report in its entirety or partially
is classified in accordance with the security regulations.
4 The Defence Staff will forward the report to the Ministry of Defence, with its own
notes included, with a copy to the Chief of Police, see no. 3.
16 The public
1 The investigating committee is to phrase its report so that it may become public,
unless this undermines the purpose of the investigation. Possible classification of the
report, in accordance with the security regulations, is to be explained when
forwarding the report. If the report is to be withheld from the public eye, a new
version suitable for publication is to be put together.
458 Rev-04
2 The report is not to be made public until it has been examined by the Ministry of
Defence, unless the MoD decides otherwise.
3 Those to whom in some way damage has been caused, and next of kin to those
killed, must be given the possibility to learn the contents of the report to the extent
that security clearance or information protected by professional secrecy allows it.
17 Changes and complementary regulations
1 The MoD, or the one who receives the authority from the MoD, may make minor
changes in as well as produce complementary regulations in addition to these
regulations.
18 Coming into effect
1 These regulations came into effect on 1 April 1995.
2 On the same date, the Crown Prince Regents resolution of 29 June 1956, no. 9095,
concerning investigating committees during accidents in the Armed Forces, was
abolished.
Appendix
Rev-04 459
Appendix 13.
13 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF
LASERS
In general
1 These regulations have been derived from and come in addition to pt. 6.2.5.
2 Safe distance (NOHD)
Magnifying optics gather laser beams passing through the optic system into the
observers eye. Safe distances in relation to magnifying optics are significantly
increased and are referred to as EOHD (Extended Occular Hazard Distance).
3 Safe distance from NOHD (Nominal Occular Hazard Distance) is defined as shortest
distance where the energy being radiated from the laser will not cause injury to an
eye being exposed to the laser beam. STANAG 3606 refers to this as Rs.
Safety table with safety data for lasers and their different configurations
Configuration NOHD EHD Required eye

protection
Laser (Name Filter Dan- Wa- Mul- Short 7x50 10X5 12x1 Non- Mag- Sing-
of product) ger ve ti- ex- + 0+ 20+ magn n OD le
class lengt pul- posur OD pulse
h se/ e OD
con- (<3m
tin. s)
dB nm meter meter unmentioned
Laser range
finders
NM81 LP-10 3B 1064
TL
NM129 3B 1064 6900 5100 4800 4395
0 0
Vector IV 1 0 0 0 0 0
Vector 1500 1 0 0 0 0 0
Vector 21?
LP-10 TL 1M 1570 0 0 39
- single puls/ 1M 1570 0 0 1
10 sek
- 5 pulses/ 10 1M 1570 0 0 22
sek
- 10 pulses/ 10 1M 1570 0 0 39
460 Rev-04
sek
- filter 16 1570
1M 879- 0 0 180 180
925
IS 2000 G
Vingrange 30?
Eller 42?
PLRF Vectro-
nix
PLRF Vectro-
nix (sivil)
LP-16
Laser pulse
Hvpn
LAM/ AN
PEQ 6
M6X-000 3R 640- 175 1250 1,1
(rd) 670
M6X-100 (IR) 3R 820- 15 200 0,2
850
AN/PEQ 2 tid- 3B
lig versjon
AN/PEQ 2A 3R 820- 40 260 0,2
Treningsmo- 850
dus
AN/PEQ-2A 3B 820- 325 2325 2,0
Taktisk/skarp 850
modus
AN PEQ 6 3B 830
norsk versjon
Skarp peker 3B 830 210
Appendix
Skarp illumi- 3B 830 60
nator
Skarp kombi- 1 830 0 0
nasjon
Trening peker 1 830 0 0
Trening kom- 830
binasjon
Rev-04 461
LAM/ AN
PEQ 6
Laser pulse
Unit weapon-
s+ air support
GBD III 3B 532 1160 600
IZLID 1000P 4 860 650 200
high
- Low 4 860 420
- Puls 4 860 520
IZLID 200P 3B 820 410 60
high
- low 3B 820 300
- pulse 3B 820 390
GCP-1/1A 3B 820 100
GCP-1B 3B 820 250
RB 70
Pantera
Aeropoint 4 860 270 70
HPLT V.4 4 940 1000 6980 7120
- pulse 4 940 900 6360 6490
Laser desig-
nators
CILAS DHY 4 1064 1630 114k 116k
307 0 m m
- training filter 21,6 1064 1360 9500 9700
GLTD II 4 1064 2000
0
LTDI 4 1064 3000
0
Lasers mis-
cellaneous
DI 1600
(Landmling)
Zeiss Cilas
Miles
462 Rev-04
BT 46/52/53
Configura-
tions of lasers
and laser sy-
stems
Vingtaqs 3B 830, 270
(LP-16 + 1540
Aeropoint)
Vingtaqs 4 1064,
(LP-16 + 830,
DHY307 + 1540
Aeropoint)
- training filter 4 1064,
DHY + Aero- 830,
point 1540
M6X + AN/
PEQ 2A
(norsk) trai-
ning modus
4 Effect of magnifying optics
5 Use of magnifying optics will increase the safe distance from the laser source.
When using magnifying optics, the given NOHD is to be multiplied with the
magnifying factor of the optics!
Transmission on optics is 100 %.
EOHD = NOHD * Magnification
6 Effect of optics with safety filter
Safety filter laser on optics will reduce safe distance from the laser source.
Laser safety 1 1,5 2 2.5 3 3,6 4 4,5 5 5,5 6

filter (OD)
Correction 3,2 6 10 18 32 56 100 180 320 560 1000
factor
Note that OD equals dB-level/10. In manuals and handbooks the dampening will be Appendix
stated either as OD or in dB.
In order to determine corrected safe distance laser (NOHD corr.) for optics
containing safety filter laser, the applying safe distance NOHD is to be devided by
the applying correction factor for non-magnifying optics.
NOHD_corr. = NOHD/ correction factor
(Applies to non-magnifying optics)
NOHD_korr = NOHD_M / Correction factor
Rev-04 463
(Applies to magnifying optics)

7 Basis for calculation
The calculations have been carried out in accordance with European laser standard
IEC 60825-1 and STANAG 3606 ED NR 4. Transmission is 100 %, reflectors have
100 % reflectance and a divergence of 1 mrad. When using laser safety filters, the
table above applies.
464 Rev-04
Appendix 14.
DIRECTIVE FOR EXERCISES ETC. AT
POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATIONS
The Norwegian Water Resources and Energy Directorate (NVE) and The Directorate
for Civil Protection and Emergency Planning (DSB) have made footnotes to these re-
gulations since the previous edition of UD 2-1. A comprehensive work of revision
will be carried out and a new appendix 14 will be added to the net version of UD
2-1. Until the revised regulations have been received from NVE/DSB the regulations
below apply.
DIRECTIVE FOR EXERCISES ETC. AT
POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATIONS
Determined by the Electricity supervisory board and the NVE valid from 1. of
september 1993
Note:
After this directive came into force in 1993, changes have been made in other
regulations, etc. References with notes explaining the regulations in force today can
be found at the end of the document. The notes were updated in June 2007.
PREFACE
In accordance with Operational rules for high voltage power installations 905
Access 1. (The Electricity supervisory board2.),only the operational manager or a
person acting under his authority can allow access to high voltage power
installations.
In accordance with the Energy law 6-6 The user and owner of power plants
obligated to allow the NVE and those NVE authorises to access to the power plant if
proper ID is shown
In accordance with "Guidelines for securing power installations" (NVE, january
1993)3., the owner of a power supply installation is bound to cooperate with the local
guards. This includes the possibility for regular exercises at the relevant power
supply installation, to the extent that the Operational rules for high voltage power
installations allow it.
1. Replaced by 15 Access in "Regulations for safety for work and maintenance on
high-voltage electric installations". As prescribed by the Product and electricity
inspection of 30. oktober 1998 under the provisions of the law of 24. may 1929 nr. 4 Appendix
regarding inspections of electrical installations and electrical equipment, 2.
2. Now DSB
3. Repl. by chap. 5 Safety measure in "Regulations for emerency prepairdness for
power supply"(BfK). Determined by NVE on the 16. december 2002 with provisions
in regulations of 7. december 1990 nr. 959 (The Energy Act) 7-1, and in law by 29.
june 1990 nr. 50 regarding production, transforming, transporting, selling,
distribution and use of energy etc. (The Energy Act) 7-6 cf. also the Directive
"Object security - Guarding and securing power installations" - determined by NVE,
january 1995.
Rev-04 465
This directive has been developed in order to clarify the relationship between the
regulations mentioned above, and to make sure that exercises are being carried out in
a safe and convenient manner at or near power supply installations. The directive
provides further regulations for how exercises at power supply installations are to be
planned and carried out, and a list of individual responsibilities.
The directive was developed by a committee appointed by the NVE. The committee
was composed by representatives from the Armed Forces, the Ministry of Justice, the
police, Statkraft SF, Statnett SF, Elektrisitetstilsynet and the NVE.
The directive has been approved by the said institutions.
The directive came into force on 1 September 1993. Users are appealed to send
comments and suggestion for improving the directive within one year.
The public have access to the directive in accordance with Norwegian Law. 4..
Electricity supervisory Norwegian Water Resources and Energy Directorate

board
1. September 1993
4. Originally exempts from public access. This exemption has later been revoked by
a later decision which means that the Directive is publicly accesable even though
they have "not for public access" written on it.
466 Rev-04
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Area of application
The directive applies to exercises at all power supply installations, where access
permission is required due to personnel safety and in accordance with Operational
rules for high voltage power installations 905 Access, or where safety measures
may be required implemented in accordance with the Guidelines for securing of
power supply installations (NVE; January 1993).
1.2 Purpose
Certain power supply installations have been prioritized for keeping armed guards,
should the situation demand it. Guards may come from the police, the company
home guard, the Home Guard or other Norwegian Defence forces.
In order to make the guards familiar with the installations, carrying out realistic
exercises is imperative. This directive provides rules for how to carry out exercises
in a safe and practical manner, emphasizing how to reduce the risk which is involved
during all exercises at high voltage power installations. The directive is in
accordance with the criteria presented in the Operational rules for high voltage
power installations 905 Access, for this type of activity.
2 NOTIFICATION AND PLANNING
2.1 Notification
A Unit Home Guard district, Police authority, etc. planning exercises at power
supply installations will send a notification in writing to the owner of the installation
(att. the operational manager) with a copy to the relevant station chief.
The notification is to be sent as soon as the exercise plan is complete no later than
2 months before the exercise is to be executed.
Information must be provided about time, duration, extent and other important
factors.
It is to be stated in particular whether the exercise is planned to be carried out solely
or partially within the power supply installations closed/fenced in area.
2.2 Points of contact
The unit is to appoint an OCE who is in charge of the concrete planning and
implementation of the exercise at the relevant power supply installation.
The OCE and the owner of the installation (his/her operational manager) or the
person authorized by him/her will function as points of contact.
2.3 Planning
A meeting is to be arranged in good time before the exercise commences, where the Appendix
said points of contact meet, discuss and determine the exercise plan and its details
particularly focusing on safety for personnel.
The power supply installation is to be reconnoitred and the specific content
of/elements in the exercise are to be decided. The following must be determined (and
marked clearly on a map):
- The areas/parts of the installation where according to Operational regulations
for high voltage power installations, 905 Access, an access card is required
i.e. rooms and areas cordoned off for high voltage installations.
Rev-04 467
- Parts of the installations where training must be conducted and where access
may be granted (i.e. safe area and cordoned off area).
- Restrictions that have to be made on the exercise or the elements which are to
be trained during the exercise.
When it comes to safety measures, see the points below.
3 IMPLEMENTATION RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
3.1 Extent
The exercise will normally be limited in time to one working day plus one night
(until 2400 hours). In addition, time during the previous or next working day must be
set aside for preparations, instruction, tidying up, etc.
The training force must not be so large that carrying out efficient instructions and
checks before the exercise becomes difficult and at the same time keeping full
control during the exercise. The allowed number of participants should be considered
in each separate case.
3.2 Preparations
The owner of the power supply installation must ascertain that the station is manned
sufficiently during the exercise, so that a general overview can be kept at all times.
The operational manager, or a person authorized by him/her, will in cooperation with
the OCE and the training unit see to marking/putting up signs, locking off high
voltage rooms, battery rooms, communication rooms, etc. or, if possible, disconnect
parts of the installation.
The training force will normally be allowed to use the installations facilities, such as
toilets/rest rooms, rooms suitable for setting up command posts, use of telephones
(not for private calls), common rooms, etc. Concerning preparations of facilities for
the guard unit see Directions for securing power supply installations NVE.
The OCE is responsible for briefing the commander of the training unit on all plans
and agreements concerning safety at the power supply installation.
Before the exercise commences, the commander of the training unit must study all
plans, agreements and decisions concerning safety etc. at the power supply
installation.
3.3 Access (see also pt. 1.2)
Prior to the exercise the commander of the training unit is to pick the crews that are
to be given access to the power supply installation. All must be individuals he/she
considers worthy of being given access. The operational manager, or the person
he/she authorizes, may demand a list of names of the persons that have been cleared
for access.
Prior to the exercise the operational manager, or a person authorized by him/her,
ascertains that the appointed crews receive the required safety instructions
including:
- going through the installations construction plans and how it is built
- danger elements
- hazard distance and safe distance
468 Rev-04
- accidents and first aid
- a walk-through at the installation

- Safe area and areas cordoned off
- Special circumstances (use of vehicles, communications equipment,
etc.)
The picked crews may receive time-limited access cards from the operational
manager, or the person authorized by him/her. The access cards are to be numbered,
in order to register who has received each card.
The commander of the training unit is responsible for his/her own crews safety
during the exercise. He/she is to ascertain that all personnel who are given access to
the power supply installation in connection with the exercise have been cleared for
access and have received the required safety instructions (see pt 3.3.1).
The OCE is responsible for making sure that the exercise is carried out within the
agreed area(s), and that it is conducted according to plan.
Participating personnel who do not observe the directions they are given such as
signs and cordons may be escorted out of the fenced in area for high voltage power
installations by the OCE or the commander of the training unit. The operational
manager, or the person acting on his/her behalf, may demand that such action is
taken immediately.
If the exercise, or elements of the exercise, is considered to be developing in an
undesirable way in terms of safety by the operational manager or the person acting
under his/her authority, the exercise/element is to be stopped immediately.
The commander of the training unit is responsible for tidying up etc. after end-ex.
Any possible damage that the personnel participating in the exercise may have
caused to objects or others must immediately be reported through the chain of
command.
3.4 Special conditions
Using vehicles within the power supply installation is prohibited.
If, during planning, there should emerge special needs, the operational manager or
the person acting on his/her behalf may authorize:
- Stationary vehicles (used for command or communication, ambulances, etc.)
which are placed in position before the exercise commences and are
withdrawn after end-ex.
- Non-stationary vehicles in connection with special missions or tasks, under Appendix
the condition that these only are used on roads and in passages that are
designed for vehicles in accordance with 30402 in Regulations for electric
power supply installations marked with cordons.
All vehicles must be without antennae or other high objects.
Bringing and using long objects of about 2 metres or more such as antennae,
ladders, etc. is prohibited at the power supply installation.
Should there be a special need for ladders for entering buildings etc. this has to be
Rev-04 469
emphasized during the planning stages of the exercise, so that it takes place in a safe
area, and the necessary cordons are put up.
Use of communications equipment such as radio transmitters, cables, etc. and use
of training ammunition, thunder-flash, illumination shells, smoke grenades etc. must
be discussed during the planning stages of the exercise and be authorized by the
operational manager, or the person acting on his/her authority.
Special considerations must be made when training in darkness and when visibility is
poor. If visibility is particularly reduced by e.g. dense fog, snow drift, etc. the
training should be called off or postponed.
3.5 Responsibility in case of an accident
The operational manager or the person acting on his/her authority has the
responsibility for the required safety instructions, to cordon off areas, etc. (see pts
3.2.2 and 3.3.1). The OCE and all participants are responsible for observing the
received instructions, guidelines, cordoned off areas, etc.
Should an accident occur as a result of instructions and guidelines not being
followed, by e.g. not respecting the cordons, the responsibility lies with the OCE and
each participant.
4 EVALUATION AND FOLLOW-UP
4.1 Immediately after endex, an evaluation or debriefing of the exercise, including safety
measures and safety conditions, is to be carried out on site.
The commander of the training unit is to report back to the owner of the object with
a copy to DIF/ local official authorities/ similar. If required, an evaluation meeting is
to be held with the owner of the object.
The OCE and the operational manager, or the person authorized by him/her, are
responsible for follow-up in the shape of concrete measures and
amendments/changes in the set plans.
5 FINANCIAL CONDITIONS
5.1 Each party is to cover their own costs when planning and carrying out exercises in
accordance with this directive.
6 IMPLEMENTATION
6.1 This Directive is determined by "The Electricity supervisory board" in accordance
with Law of 24. may 1929 nr. 4 regarding supervision and inspection of electrical
installations and by The Norwegian Water Resources and Energy Directorate(NVE)
in accordance with Law of 29. juni 1990 nr. 50 regarding production, transforming,
transporting, selling, distribution and use of energy etc. (The Energy Act).
The Directive is determined for use from 1. September 1993
470 Rev-04
Appendix 15.
INPUT DATA FOR HOW TO DRAW UP
SAFETY TEMPLATES
Small arms
Weapo HK 416 HK 416 LMG AG-3 HK Other MG-3 Other MP5/ GUR
ns Primary Seconda 417 weapo weapo Glock
sight ry sight ns ns
Ammu- 5.56 5.56 5.56 7.62 7.62 7.62 7.62 7.62 9 mm 40
nition mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
lead lead lead lead lead
free free free free
lr(Dmax) 2300 m 2300 m 2300 3900 3900 4400 3900 4300 1750 400m
m m m m m m m
l 150m
m
(Amin)
a side 8- 8- 19- 14 - 5- 100 - 24- 100 - 100 - 400 -
a up 7- 7- 13- 12 - 5- 70 - 22- 70 - 70- 400 -
a down 8- 11 -
10 -
15 -
5-
7 -
19 -
7 -
50 *-
400 -
IAcrit 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 -
b 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 -
MRR 1900m 1900m 1900 2800 2800 3900 2800 3800 1600 350m
m m m m m m m
wR 350m 350m 350m 500m 500m 900m 500m 900m 400m 50m
s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100m
Note * as-
sumed
value
Appendix
Rev-04 471
Appendix 16.
INPUT DATA FOR DRAWING UP
SAFETY TEMPLATES
Medium calibre
Ammunition 12.7 mm 12.7 mm 12.7 mm 30 mm 30 mm APFSDS
target API/Ball MP MP
practice
lr(Dmax) 6300m 6300m 6300m 8500m 38100m

l m(Amin 350m 500m
a side 5 -
100 -
100 -
50 -
50 -
a up 5-
a down 5-
IAcrit 530 - 530 - 530 - 530 - 400 -
b 800 -
800 -
800 -
800 -
800 -
MRR 4300m 4300m 4300m 5700m 13000m
-
wR 800 800m 800m 800m 1600m
s 100m 200m
b sa 500- 500-
l sa 250m 500m
Note Firing ran-
ge
472 Rev-04
Appendix 17.
INPUT VALUES FOR CONSTRUCTING
SAFETY TEMPLATES
Anti-tank weapons
Ammunition M72 live ERYX ERYX TOW TOW training
round training
lr(Dmax) 1350m 3200m 3200m 5200m 5200m

l m(Amin 75m 150m 150m 950m 950m
a 200 - 500 - 500 - 500 - 500 -
IAcrit 400 -
b 800 -
MRR 900m
wR 150m
s 200m 300m 50m 400m
u 40m 15m 15m 40m 40m
y 25m 15m 15m 50m 50m
b sa 500 - 1000 - 1000 - 1300 - 1300 -
l sa 200m
Merknad
Appendix
Rev-04 473
Appendix 18.
SAFETY TEMPLATES
84mm recoilless gun CG
Ammo HE FF- HEAT SMK ILL FF- Training 63 mm Exercise
V441B FFV551 FFV469 V545 NM227 training 7.62 mm
NM191
lr(Dmax) 2500m 3200m 2600m 2700m 3200m 2000m 2300m
l m(Amin) 400m 150m 150m 300m 50m 50 m 50m
a 100 -
100 -
100 -
200 -
100 -
100 -
100 -
- - - - - -
IAcrit 530 530 530 530 530 530 530-
b 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 -
MRR 2000m 2700m 2000m 2200m 2700m 1600m 2100m
wR 350m 500m 350m 400m 500m 300m 400m
s 400m 150m 150m 100m 0 0 0
u 40m 40m 40m 40m 40m 40 m 15m
y 60m 60m 60m 60m 60m 60 m 15m
- - - - - -
b sa 500 500 500 500 500 500
l sa 150m 150m 150m 150m 150m 150m
Note
474 Rev-04
Appendix 19.
INPUT DATAFOR DRAWING UP
SAFETY TEMPLATES
Leo I armoured fighting vehicle 105mm
Ammo HEAT APFSDS HEAT TPDS HEP M323A2
M456A1 F1 ving NM220
lr(Dmax) 8200m 83500m 8200m 8000m 9800m
l m(Amin) 600m 500m 500m 500m 600m
a 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 -
IAcrit 530 - 400 - 530 - 530 - 530 -
b 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 -
MRR 6300m 22600m 6300m 5600m 7400m
wR 1100m 3600m 1100m 1100m 1300m
s 400m 400m
- - - -
b sa 500 500 500 500 500 -
l sa 250m 700m 250m 700m 250m
Note
Appendix
Rev-04 475
Appendix 20.
SAFETY TEMPLATES
Leo II Tank gun 120 mm
Ammunition HEAT DM APFSDS DM TPCSDS HE
12A1 33 A1 DM38A4
lr(Dmax) 8700m 93800m 8900m 13500m
l m(Amin) 700m 800m 800m 400m
a 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 -
IAcrit 400 - 400 - 400 - 400 -
b 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 -
MRR 5000m 26000m 6300m 10000m
wR 700m 6000m 1600m 2000m
s 500m 500m
- - -
b sa 1000 1000 1000 1000 -
l sa 250m 700m 250m 700m
Note unsecure basis
476 Rev-04
Appendix 21.
SAFETY TEMPLATES
Other systems
Ammo M19 M100 / FFV013
lr(Dmax) 950m 1650m
a 200 - 200 -
IAcrit 530 - 530 -
b 800 -
800 -
MRR 850m 1450m
wR 200m 300m
s 300m 500m
-
b (1) 1000 900 -
Note
(1) Total dispersion angle for splinters
Appendix
Rev-04 477
Appendix 22.
TESTING OF NON-QUALIFIED
WEAPON SYSTEMS AND
AMMUNITION
In general
This appendix applies to all forms of testing that are not covered by, or in addition
to, chapters 2 and 3 in UD 2-1. This includes designing and
developing/modifications or additional equipment etc. for weapon systems and
ammunition that so far have not been approved and hence will not be covered by
other chapters.
The systems that are being tested may require special measures in order to reduce the
risk of injury to own personnel and others. These measures may be personal
protective equipment (PPE), physical measures or cover used when the weapon is
being fired.
Personnel to command and control
During this type of test firing, the following personnel whose responsibility is safety
are to be ordered:
- Test leader (may also function as officer conducting firing)
- Officer conducting firing
- Safety officer (may also function as safety controller and EOD officer)
- Safety controller
- Safety posts (according to regulations and type of testing)
- EOD officer
Testing will normally be initiated by the professional authority, in connection with
modifications or materiel procurement, or by scientists/industry.
Test personnel will be picked among highly qualified personnel. Test leader will
normally be chosen from among one of the Armed Forces test institutions, e.g. the
NDLO (FLO/Systemstyring/Landkapsiteter/Test- og verifikasjon).
- Before the testing begins, a test plan has to be drawn up, describing all the
tests and giving an evaluation of safety which may include safety templates,
safety evaluations and EOD procedures. These documents must have been
presented to the professional authority and the authority responsible for firing
range/test area, and must have received approval before the testing begins.
- A meeting is to be held before testing begins in order to ensure that all
participating personnel know the plan for the test and the safety regulations in
force.
- Changes in the plan must not result in safety being compromised. When in
doubt, the test is to be called off until a new safety evaluation has been made.
478 Rev-04
- The test plan is to include a plan for potential visitors, and one person is to be
ordered to accompany these.
Safety evaluations
If safety templates are lacking, a safety evaluation is to be conducted by well
qualified and experienced personnel, e.g. at the Norwegian Defence Research
Establishment. This is to include an evaluation of safety for own personnel and third
parties. The probability of injury to own personnel and third party should be in
accordance with what is acceptable to society in general.
It may be accepted that existing safety templates are reduced in cases where the
weapons movements are physically restrained and that special documented
procedures secure that the weapon system is being set up correctly. This will also
apply when the explosion of ammunition is guaranteed, for instance firing from
culvert.
Appendix
Rev-04 479
Appendix 24.
FORM FOR EVALUATING/ASSESSING
RISK
480 Rev-04
CERTIFICATION LIST, EDUCATION ARMY. Appendix 25
Subject/topic Content/description Target group Duration Requirements, description Responsible authority How to pass the course Certificate validity Professional authority Note
code
Leopard 2 driver course Soldiers/officers 3 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Duration of course depending on basic level of competence
Leoopard 1, driver course Soldiers/officers 3 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Duration of course depending on basic level of competence
CV9030, driver course Soldiers/officers 3 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Duration of course depending on basic level of competence
SISU, driver course Soldiers/officers 3 weeks Driving license class C The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Gives status as vehicle commander for administrative purposes.
M-109, driver course Soldiers/NCOs 2 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/educational unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Artillery
Fuchs, driver course Soldiers/officers 5 days SISU driver course The Armys Tactical Training Centre/educational unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
Iveco, driver course Soldiers/officers 2 weeks Driving license class C1 The Armys Tactical Training Centre Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
M-113 driver course Soldiers/officers 2 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
Leopard 2, gunner course Soldiers/officers 3 weeks Unit selection The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
Leopard 1, gunner course Soldiers/officers 3 weeks Unit selection The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
CV-9030, course for gunners Soldiers/officers 3 weeks Unit selection The Armys Tactical Training Centre/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
Vehicle commander Leopard 2 Officers 10 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/Manoeuvre Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Incl. Vehicle driver and gunner course
Vehicle commander Leopard 1 Officers 10 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/Manoeuvre Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Incl. Vehicle driver and gunner course
Vehicle commander CV 9030 Officers 10 weeks Driving license class B The Armys Tactical Training Centre/Manoeuvre Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Incl. Vehicle driver and gunner course
Appendix 25.
Vehicle commander M 113 Officers 1 week Vehicle driver M 113 ATTC/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
Vehicle commander Fuchs Officers 1 week Passed SISU course ATTC/unit Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre
Vehicle commander SISU Officers 2 weeks Vehicle driver SISU ATTC Exam, theoretical and practical 3-5 years Manoeuvre Applies to new vehicle commanders after 1 August 2010.
Medical core level 3 Soldiers/officers 102 hours Passed Medical Corps Exam, theoretical and practical 2 years The Armys Medical Corps Recertification required during international operations. Content according to the
AMCs education plans.
Medical core level 2 Soldiers/officers 39 hours Passed Medical Corps Exam, theoretical and practical No limitation The Armys Medical Corps Recertification required during international operations. Content according to the
AMCs education plans.
3450027 Crypto level II Personnel who are to have access to encryption classified as HEMMELIG (SECRET), 2 days Unit Passed No limitation AMC The S Law with regulations
marked KRYPTO, or to repair/ do maintenance on the equipment (FIS 7-14)
284004 Crypto level I Personnel who are to have access to encryption classified as STRENGT HEMMELIG (TOP 5 days AMC Passed No limitation AMC The S Law with regulations
SECRET), marked KRYPTO, produce encryption keys or operate encryption systems
approved for ATOMAL, STRENGT HEMMELIG, KRYPTO, EKSKLUSIV or similar (FIS 7-
15)
Ferry Personnel steering motor pontoons and tow boats 2 weeks Professional experience, Bridging and Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
Landing
Vessel Personnel steering vessels in daylight, advanced navigation not required 2 weeks Professional experience, Bridging and Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
Landing
Ferry Officers commanding and navigating ferries 1 week Ferry, cat, 1 Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
Vessel Personnel steering vessels in the dark when visibility is poor and navigation is required 1 week Vessel, cat. 1 Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
Ferry Officers Undecided Ferry cat. 2 for at least 1 year and Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
application form to the professional
authority
Vessel Officers Undecided Vessel cat. 2 for at least 1 year and Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
TRAINING IN THE ARMY
application form to the professional

authority
Leguan Bridge Layer 2 weeks Civilian lorry cat. C Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
MAN SX 2000 1 week Civilian lorry cat. C Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical EN
21060D, 21405 Construction machine Crews and officers who are to operate machines that require a 32-hour safety course 32 hours (1 Relevant professional experience Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical No limitation EN
week) acquired or planned
21060D, 21405 Construction machine Crews and officers who require a certificate of competence for operating construction 40 hours (1 32-hour safety course Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical No limitation EN Gives a civilian certificate of competence in operating construction machines
machines as part of their normal duties week)
21060D, 21405 Construction machine Crews and officers who need to operate a particular machine within the armed forces 24 hours (3 Certificate in operating machines, driving Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical No limitation EN
days) license class B (C for dumpers)
21555E Hydrema 910 MCV-2 Mine Clearing Vehicle 3 weeks Driving license class B Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical 5 years 5 years 1 week mines at MER, 2 weeks vehicle at PAMA
21455E Armoured engineering vehicle Special armour 4 weeks Military driving license for Leopard 1 Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical 5 years EN
body, 32-hour safety course
21257D Bridge Laying Armoured Vehicle Special armour 4 weeks Military driving license Leopard 1, body Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical 5 years EN
Demolition cat. 1 Basic demolition 10 days Officers/specialists Engineers/NALWC Passed 80% theory/practice None EN
Demolition cat. II A Mountain demoliton 113 hours Officers with experience from building Engineers/NALWC Passed 80% theory/practice 5 years EN
and construction wanted
LIST OF CERTIFIED EDUCATION AND
Demolition certificate cat. 1A General competence demolition Engineers & FAES/FKL Passed 70 % of theoretical and practical exam EN
Rev-04 481
Appendix
Demolition certificate cat. 1B General competence, demolition, demolition of duds included 4 weeks Required basic knowledge: demolition Engineers & FAES/FKL Passed 70 % of theoretical and practical exam
certificate cat. 1 A
Demolition certificate cat. 3 B EOD 12 weeks Required basic knowledge: demolition FAES/FKL Passed 70 % of theoretical and practical exam 5 years
certificate cat. 1 B
FKL
Demolition certificate cat. 3C 5 weeks Required basic knowledge: blasting FAES/FKL Passed 70 % of theoretical and practical exam 1 year
certificate cat. 3 B
FKL
Demolition certificate cat. 3 F Required basic knowledge: demolition FAES/FKL 5 years The Armys former cat. 3. In addition to cat. 1 B, to plan, lead and instruct
certificate cat. 1 B clearing of explosive devices of all kinds, as well as of duds
482 Rev-04
FKL
Advanced mine clearing Clearing of mines/explosives 292 hours Officers Engineer, to conduct strict mine Engineers/NALWC 70 % of theory/practice 5 years EN
clearing missions
WICS work in confined spaces Engineer soldiers and officers with EOR 40 hours (1 Officers and sections , must have Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical 2 years EN Bought from the British - NSC
week) intermediate search as background,
EOR desirable
Chemical diving CBRN soldiers and officers 40 hours (1 Officers and sections, must have passed Engineers/NALWC Exam, theoretical and practical The Armed Forces ABC Civilian procurement
week) smoke diver School
Smoke diving CBRN soldiers and officers 40 hours (1 Officers and sections Engineers/NALWC Claustrophobia test + exam, theoretical and Civilian procurement,, or from the SSS
week) practical
Instructor course, escorts Officers 14 days According to further announcements Test, theoretical and practical 5 years
FMPA FMPA
Instructor course, pepper spray Officers 50 hours According to professional plan Test, theoretical and practical Undecided
and batons FMPA FMPA
Patrol dog handler, level 6.0 All categories Internationally, secondary nationally * Passed practical test with dog in FKL(/the Norwegian Military Dog Training Establishment * Passed: certified operator patrol dog handler 1 year FIHF (Professional authority
accordance with the authorization level 6 military working dogs)
programme
Handler search dogs level S 6.0 All categories Internationally, secondary nationally * Passed practical test with dog in FKL(/the Norwegian Military Dog Training Establishment * Passed: certified operator search dog handler 1 year FIHF
accordance with the authorization level 6
programme
Appendix 26.
APPLICATION FOR WAIVER FROM
UD2-1
Application for waiver from safety rules and
regulations in UD 2-1 The Norwegian Armed
Forces Safety Rules and Regulation for Land
based military activities.
Unit applying:(1)
Waiver applies to:
Which sub unit(s) the

Waiver should apply to:
Time frame for waiver
validity:
Which regulations does the
waiver apply to:
Reason for waiver:
Plan(2) for implementation(3):
Higher units endorsement (4):
Professional approval (If

possible by professional Appendix
responsible unit):
Approval of Waiver (5)

(cf UD 2-1 item 0.1.3.3):
Rev-04 483
Rules and regulations is described in UD 2-1 Item 0.1.3.
Application is forwarded through the chain of command in doculive.
Explanation:
(1)
Unit Name
(2)
Use if possible appendices, presentations, training plan etc
(3)
Activity must be evaluated for risk
(4)
If possible endorsement from higher unit
(5)
Approval and signature
484 Rev-04
Appendix
Rev-04 485
PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The Army General Inspector has delegated the responisibility of the professional ajournment of the safety rules and regulations for land based
military activities to the safety inspector of the Army and the repective professional responsible within or oustide of the Army. The other branches of
the armed forces and common units are responible to ajoun their respective areas within the rules and regulations. Other institutions who has their
professional responsibility in the rules and regulations, is requested to maintain their respective area. Within Land Warfare Centre(LWC), the
commander in chief of LWC is the main responisible officer. This is why Chief LWC is listed first for all areas where LWC is the professional
responsible, prior to the section leader who is delegated the professional rsponsibility within LWC. Where there are more than one listed as
professional responsible, the first listed has the coordinating resposibility. Questions of a professional character can be raised directly to the
responsible unit.
PROCEDURE FOR CHANGE
Proposals/need for changes/corrections is sent through the chain of command to the respective professional reponsible, with a copy to the
commander in chief of LWC. The respective professional responsible evaluates the proposal and confers with the organization using the
equipment/procedure and then develops a document to reflect the wanted change.
Changes is published by The Army General Inspector. The change/correction is then incorporated in the electronic edition as a Corrctions and
Additions.The professional responsible has the responsibility to implement the correction/addition into the respective rules and regulations.
Chapter 0. INTRODUCTION AND DEFINITIONS
PURPOSE pt 0.1 and following Sikkerhetsinspektren/Sjef HVS
DEFINITIONS pt 0.2 and following Sikkerhetsinspektren/Sjef HVS
Chapter 1. COMMON SAFETY RULES AND REGULATIONS
INTRODUCTION pt 1.1 and following Sikkerhetsinspektren/Sjef HVS
Chapter 2. AMMUNITION AND DUDS, MINES AND DEMOLITIONS
USING, HANDLING AND CHECKING AMMUNITION pt 2.1 and following FLO FELLESKAP AMM
DUDS, MOVEMENT WITHIN FIRING RANGES AND EXPLOSIVE pt 2.2 and following FKL-FAES
ORDONANCE DISPOSAL(EOD)
MINES AND MINE TRAPS pt 2.3 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
DEMOLITION, EXPLOSIVES AND DETONATION DEVICES, ETC. pt 2.4 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
Prof Resp
Rev-04 486
TOLERANCE EXERCISES WITH EXPLOSIVE CHARGES pt 2.5 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
FIRE SIMULATION AND DEVICES FOR FIRE SIMULATION pt 2.6 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR/FLO FELLESKAP AMM
Chapter 3. FIRING ALL WEAPONS
FIRING pt 3.1 and following Sikkerhetsinspektren/Sjef HVS/FFI/FB
HANDLING OF WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION INDIVIDUAL pt 3.2 and following Sikkerhetsinspektren/Sjef HVS
RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
INDIVIDUAL FIRING AND UNIT FIRING pt 3.3 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FAGSJEF ISTAR/FLO FEL-
LESKAP AMM
FIRING INFANTRY WEAPONS OF CALIBER 12.7.MM OR SMALLER pt 3.4 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FAGSJEF ISTAR/FLO FEL-
LESKAP AMM
ILLUMINATION ROCKETS, AMMUNITION FOR VERY PISTOLS, pt 3.5 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FAGSJEF ISTAR/FLO FEL-
WARNING FLARES AND SMOKE
LESKAP AMM
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF SIMUNITION TRAINING pt 3.6 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FLO FELLESKAP AMM
AMMUNITION
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR 40MM RIFLE-MOUNTED GRENADE pt 3.7 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
LAUNCHER
HAND GRENADES pt 3.8 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
CLAYMORE MINES pt 3.9 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
MORTARS pt 3.10 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF ARTILLERI OG MJVT
ANTI-TANK WEAPONS pt 3.11 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
ARMOUR ANTI-TANK GUIDED WEAPON SYSTEM NM 142 pt 3.12 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
GENERAL JOINT PROVISIONS FOR FIRING WITH/FROM VEHICLES pt 3.13 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
FIRING ARMOURED FIGHTING VEHICLE WEAPONS (WITH TANKS) pt 3.14 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
FIRING WITH WEAPONS MOUNTED ON ARMOURED INFANTRY pt 3.15 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
FIGHTING VEHICLE CV9030N/F1
FIRING WEAPONS FROM/MOUNTED ON WHEELED VEHICLES pt 3.16 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
(DIFFERENT VERSIONS)
ARTILLERY, FIRING TOWARDS GROUND TARGETS pt 3.17 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF ARTILLERI
Prof Resp
Rev-04 487
FIRING HELLFIRE MISSILES pt 3.18 and following MJVT
ARTILLERY FIRE TOWARDS AIR TARGETS pt 3.19 and following LOI/ Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF ARTILLERI
GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM ROBOT 70 pt 3.20 and following LOI
ARTILLERY, TESTING AND TRIAL FIRING pt 3.21 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF ARTILLERI/FLO DIV LANDKAP TEST
OG VERIFIKASJONSAVDELING
PRECAUTIONS, MALFUNCTION pt 3.22 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FLO DIV LANDKAP TEST
OG VERIFIKASJONSAVDELING
FIRING AT LAND BASED TARGETS WITH SHIP ARTILLERY pt 3.23 and following MJVT
Chapter 4. PARACHUTE JUMPING
PARACHUTING pt 4.1 and following FSK-HJK
Chapter 5. DRIVING AND TRANSPORT DUTY
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS pt 5.1 and following FKL-FTS
TRACKED VEHICLE P6 - 300M pt 5.2 and following FKL-FTS/ Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF ISTAR
COMMAND POST CONTAINER 2X1 AND 3X1 pt 5.3 and following FKL-FTS/FF KKIS
FUEL TANKFLAK 10,500 LITRES pt 5.4 and following FKL-FLS
TRACTOR pt 5.5 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
TRACKED VEHICLE 206 pt 5.6 and following FKL-FTS
LIGHT ALL-TERRAIN VEHICLES, SUMMER pt 5.7 and following FKL-FTS/FAGSJEF ISTAR
SNOWMOBILE pt 5.8 and following FKL-FTS/FAGSJEF ISTAR
MOTORCYCLES pt 5.9 and following FKL-FTS
CROSS COUNTRY VEHICLE MB 240/290 (VARIOUS VERSIONS WITH pt 5.10 and following FKL-FTS/Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
MOUNTED GUN, ETC.)
JOINT PROVISIONS FOR TRACKED ARMOURED VEHICLES, AS pt 5.11 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FKL-FTS
WELL AS SISU/PASI AND FUCHS
LEOPARD TANK 1A5NO, LEOPARD TANK 2A4NO, ARMOURED pt 5.12 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FKL-FTS/Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF
RECOVERY VEHICLE (BERGEPANZER) NM217, ARMOURED
COMBAT ENGINEER VEHICLE NM189 AND ARMOURED INGENIR
Prof Resp
Rev-04 488
BRIDGE-LAYING VEHICLE NM190
TRACKED ARMOURED VEHICLE CV9030N/F1 pt 5.13 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FKL-FTS
M113 SERIES VEHICLES pt 5.14 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FKL-FTS
SISU/PASI AND FUCHS pt 5.15 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FKL-FTS
LOADING AND TRANSPORTATION OF WHEELED AND TRACKED pt 5.16 and following FKL-FTS
VEHICLES ONTO RAILWAY TRUCKS/DRIVING WITHIN RAILWAY
ZONES
LOADING AND UNLOADING OF WHEELED AND TRACKED pt 5.17 and following FKL-FTS
VEHICLES ONTO SHIPS/DRIVING WITHIN PORT AREAS
LOADING/UNLOADING OF TRACKED AND WHEELED VEHICLES pt 5.18 and following FKL-FTS
FROM AN ARTICULATED TRAILER (HEAVY GOODS VEHICLE)
STATIONARY USE OF VEHICLES/PRECAUTIONS AGAINST CARBON pt 5.19 and following FKL-FLS
MONOXIDE POISONING
INSPECTION AND WORK UNDER, IN FRONT OF OR TO THE REAR OF pt 5.20 and following FKL-FLS
MOTOR VEHICLES
ROADBLOCKS SENTRY DUTY AND MARKINGS pt 5.21 and following FKL-FMPA/HVSKS
AIR TRANSPORT pt 5.22 and following FKL-FTS
HELICOPTER TRANSPORT pt 5.23 and following FKL-FTS
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR OPERATIONAL DRIVING IN pt 5.24 and following FKL-FMPA
CONNECTION WITH ESCORT SERVICES AND MILITARY
BODYGUARD SERVICES
Chapter 6. EXERCISES AND OTHER DUTY
CONDUCT OF PERSONNEL ON THE GROUND WHEN TRACKED pt 6.1 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSEF MANVER
ARMOURED VEHICLES PARTICIPATE IN EXERCISES
PERSONAL SAFETY IN THE USE OF MATERIEL THAT CONTAINS OR pt 6.2 and following FLO STAB VIRKSOMHETSSTYRINGSAVDELINGEN
MAY CONTAIN RADIOACTIVE MATTER, OR WHICH EMITS
RADIATION DURING USE
RB 70 GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM pt 6.3 and following FLO DIV LANDKAP VPENAVDELING
USE OF SIMULATORS FROM SAAB TRAINING SYSTEMS pt 6.4 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
CBRN TRAINING, EXERCISES AND OPERATIONS pt 6.5 and following FKL-FABCS
DISINFECTION OF DRINKING WATER IN THE FIELD pt 6.6 and following FSAN
Prof Resp
Rev-04 489
CLOSE COMBAT pt 6.7 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
URBAN WARFARE TRAINING (SIBO) pt 6.8 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FAGSJEF ISTAR
MOUNTAIN CLIMBING AND PASSAGE ACROSS DIFFICULT TERRAIN pt 6.9 and following NIH-F/Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER
SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN SETTING DOWN FROM A pt 6.10 and following FSK-HJK
HELICOPTER VIA RAPPEL, FAST ROPE, SPIE PICKUP AND
HELOCAST
CLIMATE-RELATED INJURIES pt 6.11 and following FSAN
SPORTS FACILITIES AND SPORTS EVENTS pt 6.12 and following NIH-F
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR INFUSION COURSES IN THE pt 6.13 and following FSAN
WINTER SERVICE pt 6.14 and following Sjef HVS/SJEF FVS
PROVISIONS FOR HANDLING FIRE, HEATING IN A TENT, LIGHTING pt 6.15 and following FKL-FLS
COOKING APPARATUS AND LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
USE OF MACHINERY AND TOOLS pt 6.16 and following FKL-FLS/Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN BUILDING A FIELD pt 6.17 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF SAMBAND
COMMUNICATION LINE
RADIO AND RADIO LINE DUTY pt 6.18 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF SB og FF KKIS
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR TRAINING CONDUCT AFTER CAPTURE pt 6.19 and following FSS/FSES
(CAC)
MEDICAL SERVICE pt 6.20 and following FSAN
HEARING, NOISE INJURIES AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE pt 6.21 and following FSAN
EQUIPMENT
SEARCH AND RESCUE OPERATIONS IN CONNECTION WITH pt 6.22 and following FOH/J3 LAND
ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS IN THE DEFENCE FORCES
RESCUE SERVICE pt 6.23 and following FOH/J3 LAND
Chapter 7. MILITARY WORKING DOGS/ RIOT CONTROL
USE OF MILITARY WORKING DOGS pt 7.1 and following FKL-FHSK
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR RIOT CONTROL pt 7.2 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FKL-FMPA
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF LESS LETHAL WEAPONS pt 7.3 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF MANVER/FKL-FMPA
Prof Resp
Rev-04 490
Chapter 8. ACTIVITIES IN COASTAL ENVIRONMENTS, RIVERS AND LAKES
IN GENERAL pt 8.1 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
SPECIAL RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR ACTIVITIES pt 8.2 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR/NIH-F
SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR USE OF CIVILIAN VESSELS pt 8.3 and following Sjef HVS/FAGSJEF INGENIR
Prof Resp
Rev-04 491
APPENDICES
CONSTRUCTION OF SAFETY TEMPLATES FOR DIRECT FIRING Appendix 1................. HVS/KSM/FFI/FAGSJEFER
WEAPONS
CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPLATES FOR SECTOR CHARGES Appendix 2................. HVS/KSM/FFI/FAGSJEF INGENIR
ENGELSK UTGAVE AV BL 750 Appendix 6B.............. FLO FELLESKAP AMM/FKL-FAES
REGULATIONS FOR SECURING AIR TRAFFIC DURING FIRING AND Appendix 7................. LST(AVINOR)
MORTAR EXERCISES, TEST FIRING, ETC.
RADARSET GIRAFFE MK IV Appendix 8A.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
ARTILLERY HUNTING RADAR (ARTHUR) Appendix 8B.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
RADAR SET AN/PPS-15 Appendix 8C.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
METEOROLOGICAL SET NO/MMQ-10 Appendix 8D.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
LOW ALTITUDE SURVEILLANCE RADAR (LASR) AN/TPQ 36A Appendix 8E.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
TOR ELECTRONIC COUNTER-MEASURE SYSTEM, PROHIBITED Appendix 8F.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
AREA AND DANGER AREA
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT Appendix 8G.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
RC-IED JAMMER Appendix 8H.............. FLO DIV LANDKAP
THICKNESS OF COVER Appendix 9................. FAGSJEF INGENIR/FB
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS AND Appendix 11A............ FKL-FKV/FLS
DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF RADIOACTIVE Appendix 11B............ FKL-FKV/FABCS
SOURCES
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF CS AND Appendix 11C............ FKL-FTS/FABCS
SIMULANTS, CHEMICAL AGENTS
RESCUE SERVICE DURING ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS IN THE Appendix 12A............ FOH
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATING OF ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS Appendix 12 B........... FOH
IN THE NORWEGIAN ARMED FORCES
SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF LASERS Appendix 13............... FLO S
DIRECTIVE FOR EXERCISES ETC. AT POWER SUPPLY Appendix 14............... NVE/DSB
INSTALLATIONS
INPUT DATA FOR HOW TO DRAW UP SAFETY TEMPLATES Appendix 15............... FAGSJEF MANVER
Prof Resp
Rev-04 492
INPUT DATA FOR DRAWING UP SAFETY TEMPLATES Appendix 16............... FLO-AMM/FAGSJEF ISTAR/FAGSJEF MANVER
INPUT VALUES FOR CONSTRUCTING SAFETY TEMPLATES Appendix 17............... FLO-AMM/FAGSJEF MANVER
INPUT VALUES FOR CONSTRUCTING SAFETY TEMPLATES Appendix 18............... FLO-AMM/FAGSJEF MANVER
INPUT DATAFOR DRAWING UP SAFETY TEMPLATES Appendix 19............... FLO-AMM/FAGSJEF MANVER
INPUT VALUES FOR CONSTRUCTING SAFETY TEMPLATES Appendix 20............... FAGSJEF MANVER
INPUT VALUES FOR CONSTRUCTING SAFETY TEMPLATES Appendix 21............... FLO-AMM/FAGSJEF INGENIR/KNMT-SSKA
TESTING OF NON-QUALIFIED WEAPON SYSTEMS AND Appendix 22............... FLO FELLESKAP AMM/FLO DIV LANDKAP TEST OG VE-
AMMUNITION
RIFIKASJONSAVDELING
FORM FOR EVALUATING/ASSESSING RISK Appendix 24............... Sikkerhetsinspektren
LIST OF CERTIFIED EDUCATION AND TRAINING IN THE ARMY Appendix 25............... Sikkerhetsinspektren
APPLICATION FOR WAIVER FROM UD2-1 Appendix 26............... Sikkerhetsinspektren
Prof Resp
Rev-04 493

Safety Rules and Regulations Military Activities PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Rules and Regulations Military Activities PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UD 2-1E

The Norwegian Armed Forces

Valid thru 2010/11

SHORT TITLE: UD 2-1 Chap-0

Tidligere dato Tidligere referanse

Til Kopi til

Delegasjon av myndighet - Ny UD 2-1, Forsvarets sikkerhetsreglement

Postmottak Glacisgata 1 forsvaret@mil.no

Chapter 2: AMMUNITION AND DUDS, MINES AND Chap-2

Chapter 8: ACTIVITIES IN COASTAL ENVIRONMENTS, Chap-8

Short range shell........................................................................................

KAP 1. COMMON SAFETY RULES AND REGULATIONS

KAP 2. AMMUNITION AND DUDS, MINES AND DEMOLITIONS

TOLERANCE EXERCISES WITH EXPLOSIVE CHARGES

KAP 3. FIRING ALL WEAPONS

SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR USE OF SIMUNITION TRAINING

ARMOUR ANTI-TANK GUIDED WEAPON SYSTEM NM 142

Firing against air targets with automatic gun........................................ 3.15.9

Danger area in front of the weapon......................................................... 3.20.6

KAP 4. PARACHUTE JUMPING

KAP 5. DRIVING AND TRANSPORT DUTY

SISU/PASI AND FUCHS

Technical driving exercises....................................................................... 5.24.2

KAP 6. EXERCISES AND OTHER DUTY

SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN SETTING DOWN FROM A HELICOP-

Earthing of radio/radio line equipment.................................................. 6.18.4

KAP 7. MILITARY WORKING DOGS/ RIOT CONTROL

Using dogs to search for explosives.......................................................... 7.1.17

KAP 8. ACTIVITIES IN COASTAL ENVIRONMENTS, RIVERS

SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR USE OF CIVILIAN VESSELS

INPUT DATAFOR DRAWING UP SAFETY TEMPLA- Appendix 19

0 INTRODUCTION AND DEFINITIONS

1 With land based military activities is meant, education, training, exercises or

web with UD 2-1.

0.1.7 Modification/configuration change of materiel

Commanding Officer (C.O.)

Explosive ordnance disposal

1 COMMON SAFETY RULES AND

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5

1.1.2.3 5-step process contents

2. Assess the hazards:

b. Determine the probability of the various hazards occurring:

5. Very high probability will occur immidiately or in the course of

c. Preliminary resolutions regarding different hazards based on

4. Implement corrective actions.

5. Monitor and evaluate the measures;

Appendix 24 is used in the practical implementation of the risk assessment.

1.1.4 The responsibilities and duties of personnel

safe handling of materiel, as well as an awareness of the safety regulations

- among officers who have been assigned to participate in activities, there is a

- Target officer with the necessary target personnel

responsible for the following:

following special duties:

2 AMMUNITION AND DUDS, MINES

distributed further, the exercising unit is to be made aware of possible restrictions

2.1.5.1 Ammunition left after finished exercises, is to be returned to the delivering

exercises etc. if short round or other irregularities occur. The incident is to be

NDLO, General Material Munition/"FLO FELLESKAP AMM AMMSIKKERHET"

this link: http://guru.ffi.mil.no/dbl750/

2.2 DUDS, MOVEMENT WITHIN FIRING

element has to be touched or moved, precise knowledge of the ammunitions

that should be adopted.

provisions are henceforth divided into three main groups: